SpecBook 944129-01 PDF

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION
University of California, Los Angeles Project No. 944129.01

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
FOR
CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH

RENOVATION
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES CAMPUS
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
AUGUST 2020

LF COVER-PG REV 3.1:01/02/96

CERTIFICATION
ARCHITECTURAL BIDDING DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY:
MOORE, RUBLE, YUDELL ARCHITECTS

933 Pico Blvd.
Santa Monica, CA 90405
310-450-1400
June 5, 2020
(Signature of an officer of the firm named above) (Date)
John Ruble
(Typed Name)
Vice President
(Title)
CERTIFICATION:
(Affix professional registration stamp of the person named above with signature and expiration date.)
June 05, 2020
LF CERT REV 3.1:01/02/96 Certification Page - 1

CERTIFICATION
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING BIDDING DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY:
MEP CALIFORNIA ENGINEERING CORP.

12920 Mackenzie Drive
Tustin Ranch CA, 92782
Ph# 949-253-4679
June 5, 2020
(Signature of an officer of the firm named above) (Date)
Seyed Yasreb
(Typed Name)
President
(Title)
CERTIFICATION:
(Affix professional registration stamp of the person named above with signature and expiration date.)
FESS I ON
PRO A
ED YAS R L
ED
E Y E
S
REG I STER
ENG
B
I NEER
No. E13185
EXP. 6-30-21
LE
E
CTR I CA
A
ST
NI
TE R
A
OF CA L I FO
LF CERT REV 3.1:01/02/96 Certification Page - 1


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Cover Page
Certification
Table of Contents
Advertisement for Bids
Campus Map
Project Directory
Instructions to Bidders
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
Information Available to Bidders
Bid Form
Bid Bond
Prequalification Questionnaire
Agreement
General Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
Exhibits
Exhibit 1 Certificate of Insurance
Exhibit 2 Payment Bond
Exhibit 3 Performance Bond
Exhibit 4 Application for Payment
Exhibit 5A Selection of Retention Options
Exhibit 5B Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities In Lieu of Retention and Deposit of
Retention
Exhibit 6 Submittal Schedule
Exhibit 7 Cost Proposal
Exhibit 8 Field Order
Exhibit 9 Change Order
Exhibit 10A Conditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment
Exhibit 10B Conditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment
Exhibit 11A Unconditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment
Exhibit 11B Unconditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment
Exhibit 12 Summary of Builder's Risk Insurance Policy
Exhibit 13 Self-Certification
Exhibit 14 Report of Subcontractor Information
Exhibit 15 Contractor's Daily Report
Exhibit 16 Final Distribution of Contract Dollars
Exhibit 17 Certificate of Substantial Completion
Exhibit 18 General Contractor Claim Certification
Exhibit 19 Subcontractor Claim Certification
Exhibit 20 Notice of Completion
Specifications
List of Drawings
Drawings (under separate cover)
LF TOC 06/04/13 Table of Contents - 1


ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Subject to conditions prescribed by the University of California, Los Angeles, sealed bids for a lump sum
contract are invited for the following work:

Project Number 944129.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This Project consists of tenant improvement work for the Employee Health
Clinic’s relocation to the 1st floor of the Center for Health Sciences (CHS) South Tower. The Project
will provide examination, blood draw, consultation rooms and administration spaces, and is
approximately 2,500 square feet with a 450 square foot office suite. Work scope shall include
providing demolition, alterations and additions to the building’s mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire
alarm and fire sprinkler systems; new lighting; casework; flooring, ceilings; glazing; doors and
hardware. All work shall occur in an occupied building with restricted hours for the performance of all
noise producing work and to access areas below the Project Site. The project shall require night and
or weekend work to accommodate these work restrictions.
The estimated construction cost is $1,383,000.00.
BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
1. Bidding Documents will be available beginning on August 24, 2020 and will be issued at:
UCLA Online Planroom
Website: https://www.uclaplanroom.com/
2. Bidders may view the Bidding Documents online at the UCLA Online Planroom website and
download the documents at no cost to user.
BID DEADLINE: Bids will be received only at the following location:
Contracts Administration
University of California, Los Angeles
1060 Veteran Avenue, Suite 125
Box 951365
Los Angeles, California 90095-1365
310-825-7015
and must be received at or before:
2:00 p.m. September 29, 2020
NOTE: PLEASE BE ADVISED THAT THE UCLA CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATION OFFICE IS

CURRENTLY CLOSED BUT WILL BE OPEN FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS FOR THIS PROJECT
APPROXIMATELY 30 MINUTES PRIOR TO THE ABOVE-SPECIFIED BID DEADLINE. BIDDERS SHALL
PLAN THEIR BID SUBMISSION ACCORDINGLY.
MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE & JOB WALK: A mandatory Pre-Bid Conference and mandatory
Pre-Bid Job Walk will be conducted as follows. The mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be
conducted via ZOOM on September 1, 2020 beginning promptly at 10:00 a.m. Only bidders who
participate in both the Conference and the Job Walk, in their entirety, will be allowed to bid on the
Project as prime contractors.
Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference via ZOOM: Participants must log onto the ZOOM meeting at or
before 10:00 a.m. (See ZOOM meeting instruction below.) Persons logging in later than said time will
not be allowed to bid on the Project as prime contractors.
LF: AFB 160404 Advertisement for Bids - 1


Joint by Computer by accessing the link below:
https://ucla.zoom.us/j/93514936413?pwd=WUw3K0hwQiszelU1KzdwTVpBcVBQUT09
Meeting ID: 935 1493 6413
Passcode: 606083
Joint by telephone by dialing on of the numbers below:

+1 669 900 6833 US (San Jose)
+1 253 215 8782 US (Tacoma)
+1 346 248 7799 US (Houston)
+1 301 715 8592 US (Germantown)
+1 312 626 6799 US (Chicago)
+1 646 558 8656 US (New York)
Meeting ID: 935 1493 6413
Passcode: 606083
Find your local number: https://ucla.zoom.us/u/aeJocxWDB
Mandatory Job Walk: Participants shall meet on September 1, 2020 at 1:00 p.m. at 10833 Le Conte Ave.,
Los Angeles, CA 9009. Refer to the online UCLA Campus Map at www.ucla.edu/map . For further
information, contact Michael McGinnis at 310-825-7401.
NOTE: Job Walk Participants must wear face masks and will be required to maintain social
distancing during walk.
Bidders are advised that parking may be difficult. Bidders should allow ample time to
drive to the above location in heavy traffic, find a parking space, walk to the building,
and arrive in the designated Location prior to the required time. It is currently
anticipated that the Site Visit will last at least 1 hour.)
LICENSE REQUIREMENTS: The successful Bidder will be required to have the following California current
and active contractor's license at the time of submission of the Bid:
B License (General Building)
PREQUALIFICATION: To be allowed to submit a bid, Bidders must have the minimum experience set forth
in the Prequalification Questionnaire contained in the Bidding Documents and posted on the UCLA
Online Planroom website. Bidder's completed Prequalification Questionnaire must be received at the
above-listed University Contracts Administration office in a sealed envelope, or uploaded to the
UCLA Online Planroom website, no later than:
3:00 p.m. September 8, 2020
Every effort will be made to ensure that all persons have equal access to contracts and other business
opportunities with the University within the limits imposed by law or University policy. Each Bidder may be
required to show evidence of its equal employment opportunity policy. The successful Bidder and its
subcontractors will be required to follow the nondiscrimination requirements set forth in the Bidding
Documents and to pay prevailing wage at the location of the work.
The work described in the contract is a public work subject to section 1771 of the California Labor Code.
No contractor or subcontractor, regardless of tier, may be listed on a Bid for, or engage in the performance of,
any portion of this project, unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor
Code section 1725.5 and 1771.1.


This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations.
The successful Bidder shall pay all persons providing construction services and/or any labor on site, including
any University location, no less than the UC Fair Wage (defined as $13 per hour as of 10/1/15, $14 per hour
as of 10/1/16, and $15 per hour as of 10/1/17) and shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local
working condition requirements.
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

(Visit our website at: https://www.uclaplanroom.ucla.edu)


CAMPUS MAP
LF CM 09/02/11 Campus Map - 1


PROJECT DIRECTORY
Project Name CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION
Project Number 944129.01
Location University of California, Los Angeles
University The Regents of the University of California
University Representative Michael McGinnis

731 Young Dr. South 3rd Floor
Los Angeles, CA 90095-1526
310-825-7401
All bidding inquiries shall be directed Michael McGinnis

only to: EMAIL: mmcginnis@facnet.ucla.edu
Design Professional (Architectural): Moore, Ruble, Yudell Architects

933 Pico Blvd.
Santa Monica, CA 90405
310-450-1400
Design Professional MEP California Engineering Corp

(Mechanical/Electrical/ Plumbing): 12920 Mackenzie Drive
Tustin Ranch CA, 92782
Ph# 949-253-4679
Address for Stop Notices: Deliver to: UCLA Capital Programs Project Accounting
1060 Veteran Ave., Suite 330
Mail to: UCLA Capital Programs Project Accounting

Box 951365
Address for Demand for Arbitration: Western Case Management Center

6795 N. Palm Ave., 2nd Floor
Fresno, CA 93704
A copy of the Demand for Arbitration University of California

must be sent to: Office of the General Counsel
1111 Franklin St., 8th Floor
Oakland, CA 94607-5200
LF PD 160401 Project Directory - 1


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.1 COPIES
3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
3.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
3.5 ADDENDA
3.6 BUILDER'S RISK PROPERTY INSURANCE
ARTICLE 4 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE
ARTICLE 5 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

5.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS
5.2 BID SECURITY
5.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
5.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
ARTICLE 6 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

6.1 OPENING OF BIDS
6.2 REJECTION OF BIDS
6.3 AWARD
ARTICLE 7 - BID PROTEST

7.1 FILING A BID PROTEST
7.2 RESOLUTION OF BID CONTROVERSY
LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 1


ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS
1.1 Except as otherwise specifically provided, definitions set forth in the General Conditions or in other Contract Documents are
applicable to all Bidding Documents.
1.2 The term “Addenda” means written or graphic instruments issued by University prior to the Bid Deadline which modify or
interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.
1.3 The term “Alternate” means a proposed change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents which, if accepted, may
result in a change to either the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or both.
1.4 The term “Bid Deadline” means the date and time on or before which Bids must be received, as designated in the
Advertisement for Bids and which may be revised by Addenda.
1.5 The term “Bidder” means a person or firm that submits a Bid.
1.6 The term “Bidding Documents” means the construction documents prepared and issued for bidding purposes including all
Addenda thereto.
1.7 The term “Estimated Quantity” means the estimated quantity of an item of Unit Price Work.
1.8 As used in these Instructions to Bidders, the term “Facility” means the University's Facility office issuing the Bidding
Documents.
1.9 The term “Lump Sum Base Bid” means the sum stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the
Bidding Documents, but not including Unit Price items or Alternates.
1.10 The term “Planholder” means a person or entity known by the Facility to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents
and who has provided a street address for receipt of any written pre-bid communications.
1.11 The term “Unit Price” means an amount stated in the Bid for which Bidder offers to perform an item of Unit Price Work for a
fixed price per unit of measurement.
1.12 As used in these Instructions to Bidders, the term "Business Day" means any day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, and the
holidays specified herein, and to the extent provided herein, if the Facility or applicable office of the University is closed for the whole of
any day, insofar as the business of that office is concerned, that day shall be considered as a holiday for the purposes of computing time
in these Instructions to Bidders. Holidays include January 1st, the third Monday in January, the third Monday in February, the last Monday
in May, July 4th, the first Monday in September, November 11th, Thanksgiving Day, December 25th, and every day designated by the
University as a holiday.
See Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
ARTICLE 2
BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
2.1 Bidder, by making a Bid, represents that:
2.1.1 Bidder has read, understood, and made the Bid in accordance with the provisions of the Bidding Documents.
2.1.2 Bidder has visited the Project site and is familiar with the conditions under which the Work is to be performed and the local
conditions as related to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.1.3 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception.
2.1.4 At the time of submission of the Bid, Bidder and all Subcontractors, regardless of tier, have the appropriate current and active
licenses issued by the State of California Contractors State License Board for the Work to be performed and any licenses specifically
required by the Bidding Documents. If Bidder is a joint venture, at the time of submission of the Bid, Bidder shall have the licenses
required by the preceding sentence in the name of the joint venture itself. The State of California Business and Professions Code,
Division 3, Chapter 9, known as the “Contractor's License Law,” establishes licensing requirements for contractors.
2.1.5 Bidder has read and shall abide by the nondiscrimination requirements contained in the Bidding Documents.
2.1.6 Bidder has the expertise and financial capacity to perform and complete all obligations under the Bidding Documents.


2.1.7 The person executing the Bid Form is duly authorized and empowered to execute the Bid Form on behalf of Bidder.
2.1.8 Bidder is aware of and, if awarded the Contract, will comply with Applicable Code Requirements in its performance of the
Work.
ARTICLE 3
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.1 COPIES
3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement for Bids
for the sum stated therein, if any. Documents are only available in full sets and shall not be returned.
3.1.2 Bidders shall use a complete set of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids.
3.1.3 University makes copies of the Bidding Documents available, on the above terms, for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for the
Work and does not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents.
3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.2.1 Bidder shall, before submitting its Bid, carefully study and compare the components of the Bidding Documents and compare
them with any other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction which relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted;
shall examine the Project site, the conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and the local conditions; and shall at once report
to University's Representative errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered. If Bidder is awarded the Contract, Bidder waives any
claim arising from any errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities, that Bidder, its subcontractors or suppliers, or any person or entity under
Bidder on the Contract became aware of, or reasonably should have become aware of, prior to Bidder's submission of its Bid.
3.2.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be addressed only to the person or firm designated
in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
3.2.3 Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents will be made by Addenda issued as
provided in Article 3.5. Clarifications, interpretations, corrections, and changes to the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall
not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon them.
3.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
3.3.1 No substitutions will be considered prior to award of Contract. Substitutions will only be considered after award of the Contract
and as provided for in the Contract Documents.
3.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
3.4.1 Each Bidder shall list in the Bid Form all first-tier Subcontractors that will perform work, labor or render such services as
defined in Article 9 of the Bid Form. The Bid Form contains spaces for the following information when listing Subcontractors: (1) portion
of the Work; (2) name of Subcontractor; (3) city of Subcontractor's business location; (4) California contractor license number. An
inadvertent error in listing the California contractor license number shall not be grounds for filing a bid protest or grounds for considering
the bid nonresponsive if the corrected contractor’s license number is submitted in writing by, and actually received from, the Bidder within
24 hours after the bid opening and provided the corrected contractor’s license number corresponds to the submitted name and location
for that subcontractor. The failure to list, on the Bid Form, any one of the items set forth above will result in the University treating the Bid
as if no Subcontractor was listed for that portion of the Work and Bidder will thereby represent to University that Bidder agrees that it is
fully qualified to perform that portion of the Work and shall perform that portion of the Work.
3.4.2 Subcontractors listed in the Bid Form shall only be substituted after the Bid Deadline with the written consent of University and
in accordance with the State of California “Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.”
3.5 ADDENDA
3.5.1 Addenda will be issued only by University and only in writing. Addenda will be identified as such and will be mailed or delivered
to all Planholders. At its sole discretion, the University may elect to deliver Addenda via facsimile to Planholders who have provided a
facsimile number for receipt of Addenda.
3.5.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for inspection.


3.5.3 Addenda will be issued such that Planholders should receive them no later than 3 full business days prior to the Bid Deadline.
Addenda withdrawing the request for Bids or postponing the Bid Deadline may be issued any time prior to the Bid Deadline.
3.5.4 Each Bidder shall be responsible for ascertaining, prior to submitting a Bid, that it has received all issued Addenda.
3.6.1 University will provide builder's risk property insurance subject to the deductibles in the policy as required by the General
Conditions if the Contract Sum exceeds $300,000 at the time of award and the requirements of the Project are not excluded by such
coverage. A summary of the provisions of the policy is included as an Exhibit to the Contract; the policy may be reviewed at the Facility
office. Bidder agrees that the University’s provision of builder’s risk property insurance containing said provisions meets the University’s
obligation to provide builder’s risk property insurance under the Contract and, in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the
policy and any summary or description of the provisions contained herein or otherwise, the provisions of the policy shall control and shall
be conclusively presumed to fulfill the University’s obligation to provide such insurance.
ARTICLE 4
PRE-BID CONFERENCE
4.1 Bidder shall attend the Pre-Bid Conference at which the requirements of the Bidding Documents are reviewed by University,
comments and questions are received from Bidders, and a Project site visit is conducted. University requires all Pre-Bid Conference
attendees to arrive for the meeting on time and to sign an attendance list, which in turn is used to determine if Bidders meet this
requirement. Any Bidder not attending the Pre-Bid Conference in its entirety will be deemed to have not complied with the requirements
of the Bidding Documents and its Bid will be rejected.
ARTICLE 5
BIDDING PROCEDURES
5.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS
5.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the Bid Form included with the Bidding Documents. Bids not submitted on the University's Bid Form
shall be rejected.
5.1.2 The Bid Form shall be filled in legibly in ink or by typewriter. All portions of the Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form
must be signed before the Bid is submitted. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Article 5.1.2 will result in the Bid being
rejected as nonresponsive.
5.1.3 Bidder's failure to submit a price for any Alternate or Unit Price will result in the Bid being considered as nonresponsive. If
Alternates are called for and no change in the Lump Sum Base Bid is required, indicate “No Change” by marking the appropriate box.
5.1.4 Bidder shall make no stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify the Bid in any manner.
5.1.5 The Bid Form shall be signed by a person or persons legally authorized to bind Bidder to a contract. Bidder's Representative
shall sign and date the Declaration included in the Bid Form. Failure to sign and date the declaration will cause the Bid to be rejected.
5.2 BID SECURITY
5.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by Bid Security in the amount of 10% of the Lump Sum Base Bid as security for Bidder's
obligation to enter into a Contract with University on the terms stated in the Bid Form and to furnish all items required by the Bidding
Documents. Bid Security shall be a Bid Bond on the form provided by University and included herein, or a certified check made payable
to “The Regents of the University of California.” When a Bid Bond is used for Bid Security, failure to use University's Bid Bond form will
result in the rejection of the Bid. Bidder must use the Bid Bond form provided by the University or an exact, true and correct photocopy of
such form. The Bid Bond form may not be retyped, reformatted, transcribed onto another form, or altered in any manner except for the
purpose of completing the form.
5.2.2 If the apparent lowest responsible Bidder fails to sign the Agreement and furnish all items required by the Bidding Documents
within the time limits specified in these Instructions to Bidders, University may reject such Bidder's Bid and select the next apparent
lowest responsible Bidder until all Bids have been exhausted or University may reject all Bids. The Bidder whose Bid is rejected for such
failure(s) shall be liable for and forfeit to University the amount of the difference, not to exceed the amount of the Bid Security, between
the amount of the Bid of the Bidder so rejected and the greater amount for which University procures the Work.
5.2.3 If a Bid Bond is submitted, the signature of the person executing the Bid Bond must be notarized. If an attorney-in-fact
executes the Bid Bond on behalf of the surety, a copy of the current power of attorney bearing the notarized signature of the appropriate
corporate officer shall be included with the Bid Bond. Additionally, the surety issuing the Bid Bond shall be, on the Bid Deadline, an
admitted surety insurer (as defined in the California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120).


5.2.4 Bid Security will be returned after the contract has been awarded. Notwithstanding the preceding, if a Bidder fails or refuses,
within 10 days after receipt of notice of selection, to sign the Agreement or submit to University all of the items required by the Bidding
Documents, the University will retain that Bidder's Bid Security. If the Bid Security is in the form of a Bid Bond, the Bid Security will be
retained until the University has been appropriately compensated; if the Bid Security is in the form of certified check, the University will
negotiate said check and after deducting its damages, return any balance to Bidder.
5.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
5.3.1 The Bid Form, Bid Security, and all other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed
opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the office designated in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for receipt of
Bids. The envelope shall be identified with the Project name, Bidder's name and address, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the
Project for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope
with the notation “SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof.
5.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location on or before the Bid Deadline. A Bid received after the Bid Deadline will be
returned to Bidder unopened.
5.3.3 Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.
5.3.4 Oral, telephonic, electronic mail (e-mail), facsimile, or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not be accepted.
5.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
5.4.1 Prior to the Bid Deadline, a submitted Bid may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the Facility receiving Bids at the location
designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of Bidder and, in order to be effective, must be received
on or before the Bid Deadline. A modification so made shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.
5.4.2 A withdrawn Bid may be resubmitted on or before the Bid Deadline, provided that it then fully complies with the Bidding
Requirements.
5.4.3 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted.
5.4.4 Bids may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled within 60 days after the Bid Deadline unless otherwise provided in
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
ARTICLE 6
CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
6.1 OPENING OF BIDS
6.1.1 Bids which have the required identification as stipulated in Article 5.3.1 and are received on or before the Bid Deadline will be
opened publicly.
6.2 REJECTION OF BIDS
6.2.1 University will have the right to reject all Bids.
6.2.2 University will have the right to reject any Bid not accompanied by the required Bid Security or any other item required by the
Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any other way incomplete or irregular.
6.3 AWARD
6.3.1 University will have the right, but is not required, to waive nonmaterial irregularities in a Bid. If the University awards the
Contract, it will be awarded to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid as determined by University and who is not
rejected by University for failing or refusing, within 10 days after receipt of notice of selection, to sign the Agreement or submit to
University all of the items required by the Bidding Documents.
6.3.2 University will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the
Bidding Documents. The opening of Bids and evaluation of Alternates will be conducted in accordance with a procedure that, at
University's option, either (i) prescribes, prior to the time of Bid opening, the order in which Alternates will be selected or (ii) prevents,
before the determination of the apparent low Bidder has been made, information that would identify which bid belongs to which Bidder
from being revealed to the representative of the University selecting the Alternates to be used in determining the low Bidder. After
determination of the apparent low Bidder has been made, University will publicly disclose the identity of each Bidder that submitted a Bid
and the amount of each such Bid.


6.3.3 University will determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Lump Sum Base Bid plus all Unit Prices multiplied by
their respective Estimated Quantities as stated in the Bid Form, if any, plus the daily rate for Compensable Delay multiplied by the
"multiplier" as stated in the Bid Form, plus the amounts of all Alternates to be included in the Contract Sum at the time of award. The
Contract Sum will be the sum of the Lump Sum Base Bid and the additive or deductive amounts for all Alternates that University has
selected to be included in the Contract Sum as of the time of award.
6.3.4 The University will post the Bid results in a public place at the address where the Bids are received (unless another address is
specified in the Bidding Documents).
6.3.5 University will select the apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and notify such Bidder on University's form within
50 days (unless the number of days is modified in Supplementary Instructions to Bidders) after the Bid Deadline or reject all Bids. Within
10 days after receipt of notice of selection as the apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, Bidder shall submit to University all
of the following items:
.1 Three originals of the Agreement signed by Bidder.
.2 Three originals of the Payment Bond required under Article 11 of the General Conditions.
.3 Three originals of the Performance Bond required under Article 11 of the General Conditions.
.4 Certificates of Insurance on form provided by University required under Article 11 of the General Conditions.
.5 Name of, qualifications of, and references for the Superintendent proposed for the Work.
.6 Names of all Subcontractors, with their addresses, telephone number, facsimile number, contact person, portion of
the Work, California contractor license number, and designation of any Subcontractor as a Small Business Enterprise (SBE),
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE), Women-owned Business Enterprise (WBE) and Disabled Veteran Business
Enterprise (DVBE) on Report of Subcontractor Information in the form contained in the Exhibits. Evidence, as required by
University, of the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors such as statements of experience, statements of
financial condition, and references
.7 Preliminary Contract Schedule as required under Article 3 of the General Conditions.
.8 If Bidder wishes to utilize securities in lieu of retention beginning with the first Application for Payment, Selection of
Retention Options accompanied by a completed Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retention and Deposit
of Retention in the form contained in the Exhibits.
.9 Cost Breakdown as required by Article 9 of the General Conditions.
6.3.6 Prior to award of the Contract, University will notify Bidder in writing, if University, after due investigation, objects to a
Subcontractor or Superintendent proposed by Bidder, in which case Bidder shall propose a substitute acceptable to University.
Substitution of Superintendent shall be made in accordance with Article 3 of the General Conditions. Substitution of a Subcontractor shall
be made in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. Failure of University to object to a proposed Superintendent or
Subcontractor prior to award shall not preclude University from requiring replacement of Superintendent or any Subcontractor based
upon information received subsequent to award, information which cannot be properly evaluated prior to award due to time constraints,
or information relating to a failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract.
6.3.7 If Bidder submits three originals of the signed Agreement and all other items required to be submitted to University within 10
days after receipt of notice of selection as the apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, and if all such items comply with the
requirements of the Bidding Documents and are acceptable to University, University will award the Contract to Bidder by signing the
Agreement and returning a signed copy of the Agreement to Bidder.
6.3.8 If University consents to the withdrawal of the Bid of the apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or the apparent
lowest responsive and responsible Bidder fails or refuses to sign the Agreement or submit to University all of the items required by the
Bidding Documents, within 10 days after receipt of notice of selection, or that Bidder is not financially or otherwise qualified to perform
the Contract, University may reject such Bidder's Bid and select the next apparent lowest responsible Bidder, until all Bids are
exhausted, or reject all Bids. Any Bidder whose Bid is rejected because the Bidder has failed or refused, within 10 days after receipt of
notice of selection, to sign the Agreement or submit to University all of the items required by the Bidding Documents, shall be liable to the
University for all resulting damages.
ARTICLE 7
BID PROTEST
7.1 FILING A BID PROTEST
7.1.1 Any Bidder, person, or entity may file a Bid protest. The protest shall specify the reasons and facts upon which the protest is
based and shall be in writing and received by the Facility not later than 5:00 p.m. on the 3rd business day following:
.1 if the Bid Form does not contain any Alternate(s), the date of the Bid opening;
.2 if the Bid Form contains any Alternate(s), the date of posting in a public place of Bid results.
7.1.2 If a Bid is rejected by the Facility, and such rejection is not in response to a Bid protest, any Bidder, person or entity may
dispute that rejection by filing a Bid protest (limited to the rejection) in writing and received by the Facility not later than 5:00 pm on the
3rd business day following the rejected Bidder’s receipt of the notice of rejection.


7.1.3 For the purpose of computing any time period in this Article 7, the date of receipt of any notice shall be the date on which the
intended recipient of such notice actually received it. Delivery of any notice may be by any means, with verbal or written confirmation of
receipt by the intended recipient.
7.2 RESOLUTION OF BID CONTROVERSY
7.2.1 Facility will investigate the basis for the Bid protest and analyze the facts. Facility will notify Bidder whose Bid is the subject of
the Bid protest of evidence presented in the Bid protest and evidence found as a result of the investigation, and, if deemed appropriate,
afford Bidder an opportunity to rebut such evidence, and permit Bidder to present evidence that it should be allowed to perform the Work.
If deemed appropriate by Facility, an informal hearing will be held. Facility will issue a written decision within 15 days following receipt of
the Bid protest, unless factors beyond Facility's reasonable control prevent such a resolution, in which event such decision will be issued
as expeditiously as circumstances reasonably permit. The decision will state the reasons for the action taken by Facility. A written copy
of the decision will be furnished to the protestor, the Bidder whose Bid is the subject of the Bid protest, and all Bidders affected by the
decision. As used in this Article 7, a Bidder is affected by the decision on a Bid protest if a decision on the protest could have resulted in
the Bidder not being the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder for the Contract. A written copy of the Facility’s decision must be
received by the protester, the Bidder whose Bid is the subject of the Bid protest, and all Bidders affected by the decision no later than 3
business days prior to award of the contract.
7.2.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of Article 7.2.1, at the election of Facility, a Bid protest may be referred directly to University's
Construction Review Board without prior investigation and review by Facility. The Chair of the Construction Review Board will either
decide the Bid protest or appoint a Hearing Officer. If a Hearing Officer is appointed, the Hearing Officer will review the Bid protest in
accordance with the provisions of Article 7.2.4.
7.2.3 Bidder whose Bid is the subject of the protest, all Bidders affected by the Facility's decision on the protest, and the protestor
have the right to appeal to the Construction Review Board if not satisfied with Facility's decision. The appeal must be in writing and shall
specify the decision being appealed and all the facts and circumstances relied upon in support of the appeal. A copy of the appeal must
be received by the Chair, Construction Review Board, not later than 5:00 p.m. on the 3rd business day following appellant's receipt of the
written decision of Facility, at the following address:
Chair, Construction Review Board

University of California
Office of the President
1111 Franklin Street, 6th Floor
Oakland, CA 94607-5200
Attention: Director, Construction Services
And, by e-mail to:
constructionreviewboard@ucop.edu
A copy of the appeal must be sent to all parties involved in the Bid protest and to Facility, to the same address and in the same manner
as the original protest. An appeal received after 5:00 p.m. is considered received as of the next business day. If the final date for receipt
of an appeal falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or University holiday, the appeal will be considered timely only if received by 5:00 p.m. on the
following business day. The burden of proving timely receipt of the appeal is on the appealing party.
7.2.4 The Chair of the Construction Review Board will review the Facility's decision and the appeal, and issue a written decision, or if
appropriate, appoint a Hearing Officer to conduct a hearing and issue a written decision. If a hearing is held, the hearing shall be held not
later than the 10th day following the appointment of the Hearing Officer unless the Hearing Officer for good cause determines otherwise.
The written decision of the Chair or Hearing Officer will state the basis of the decision, and the decision will be final and not subject to
any further appeal to University. The Chair or Hearing Officer may consult with the University's Office of the General Counsel on the
decision as to legal form. The University will complete its internal Bid protest procedures before award of the Contract.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Contract Time: As specified in Article 4 of the Agreement, bound herein.
2. Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be addressed only to the person or firm listed in the
Project Directory, bound herein.
3. The Pre-Bid Conference will be conducted at the time and location specified in the Advertisement for Bids, bound herein.
(Attendance at the Pre-Bid Conference is mandatory.)
4. Bids will be received only at the location specified in the Advertisement for Bids, bound herein.
5. Bids will be opened at the time and location specified in the Advertisement for Bids, bound herein.
6. Contractor will be assessed as liquidated damages the sum listed in Article 5 of the Agreement for each day the Work remains
incomplete beyond the expiration of the Contract Time. See Article 5 of the Agreement for detailed requirements.
7. Prequalifications: To be allowed to submit a bid, Bidders must have the minimum experience described in the Prequalification
Questionnaire contained in the Bidding Documents and also posted on the website listed in the Advertisement for Bids. To
allow University to evaluate Bidders, each Bidder must: complete the Prequalification Questionnaire (no other form will be
accepted) consisting of an experience record and required attachments (if any); and either place it in a sealed envelope and
submit it so that it is received at the place and time stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids, or upload it to the UCLA Online
Planroom so that it is received by the time stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids. University reserves the right (but is not
obligated) to request, receive and evaluate supplemental information after the specified time and date at its sole determination.
The envelope shall be clearly labeled, "Prequalification Documents" and state the project name and Bidder name. (NOTE:
Oral, telephonic, electronic mail (e-mail), facsimile or telegraphic qualifications are invalid and will not be accepted.)
8. Not Used.
9. California State General Prevailing Wage Determination: The California State General Prevailing Wage Determination for this
Project is 2020-1. Bidder is required to refer to the California Department of Industrial Relations website
(http://www.dir.ca.gov/OPRL/DPreWageDetermination.htm) and confirm the correct Prevailing Wage Determination for this
Project.
10. Article 1.12 of the Instructions to Bidders is replaced with the following revised article:
1.12 As used in these Instructions to Bidders, the term "Business Day" means any day other than a Saturday, a
Sunday, and the holidays specified herein, and to the extent provided herein, if Facility or applicable office of
University is closed for the whole of any day, insofar as the business of that office is concerned, that day shall be
considered as a holiday for the purposes of computing time in these Instructions to Bidders. Holidays include
January 1st and either December 31st or January 2nd, the third Monday in January, the third Monday in February, the
last Friday in March, the last Monday in May, July 4th and either July 3rd or July 5th if it falls on a weekend, the first
Monday in September, November 11th and either November 10th or November 12th if it falls on a weekend,
Thanksgiving Day and the Friday after, December 25th and either December 24th or December 26th, and every day
designated by University as a holiday.
11. Article 3.1.1 of the Instructions to Bidders is replaced with the following revised article:
3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents as indicated in the Advertisement for Bids.
12. Article 3.5.1 of the Instructions to Bidders is replaced with the following revised article:
3.5.1 Addenda will be issued only by University. Addenda will be identified as such and will be posted on the
UCLA Online Planroom website (https://www.uclaplanroom.com). At its sole discretion, the University may elect to
deliver Addenda via facsimile or via e-mail to Planholders who have provided a facsimile number or an e-mail
address for receipt of Addenda.
13. Article 4.1 of the Instructions to Bidders is replaced with the following revised article:
4.1 Bidder shall attend the Pre-Bid Conference at which the requirements of the Bidding Documents are
reviewed by University, comments and questions are received from Bidders, and a Project site visit is conducted.
University requires all Pre-Bid Conference attendees to:
1. Arrive for the meeting on time.

2. Sign an attendance list at the beginning of the Conference.
LF: SUPP 140416 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders - 1


3. Sign an attendance list at the conclusion of the site visit.
4.2 Any Bidder not complying with the requirements of Article 4.1 in its entirety will be deemed to have not
complied with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and its Bid will be rejected.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
LF: SUPP 140416 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders - 2


INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
The following information is made available for the convenience of bidders and is not a part of the Contract. The information is provided
subject to the provisions of Article 3 of the General Conditions.
1. The University of California has contracts for materials, equipment and/or services with the suppliers listed on the Office of the
President Procurement Services website at http://www.ucop.edu/procurement-services/for-suppliers/ucop-designated-
construction-agreements.html. General or others submitting bids for University construction projects may enter into
agreements with these suppliers that utilize the pricing and terms contained in the University-supplier agreements. University
does not represent or warrant that materials/equipment/services of these suppliers meet the requirements of University’s
construction contracts. Use of such suppliers shall not relieve Contractor from its obligation to meet all contractual
requirements in any contracts with University. University will not be a party to any agreements with such suppliers and accepts
no performance obligations or liability with respect to such agreements.
END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
LF INFO ATB 02/13/13 Information Available to Bidders - 1


BID FORM
FOR: CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION
LOS ANGELES CAMPUS
AUGUST 2020
BID TO: Contracts Administration

Box 951365
(310) 825-7015
BID FROM:
(Name of Firm Submitting Bid)
(Address)
(City, State, Zip Code)
(Telephone No.) (Date Bid submitted)
Note: All portions of this Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form must be signed before the Bid is
submitted. Failure to do so will result in the Bid being rejected as non-responsive.
LF 170717 Bid Form - 1


1.0 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS
Bidder, represents that a) Bidder and all Subcontractors, regardless of tier, has the appropriate
current and active Contractor's licenses required by the State of California and the Bidding
Documents; b) it has carefully read and examined the Bidding Documents for the proposed Work on
this Project; c) it has examined the site of the proposed Work and all Information Available to
Bidders; d) it has become familiar with all the conditions related to the proposed Work, including the
availability of labor, materials, and equipment; e) Bidder and all Subcontractors, regardless of tier,
are currently registered with the California Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to California
Labor Code Section 1725.5 and 1771.1. Bidder hereby offers to furnish all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, transportation, and services necessary to complete the proposed Work on this
Project in accordance with the Contract Documents for the sums quoted. Bidder further agrees that it
will not withdraw its Bid within 60 days after the Bid Deadline, and that, if it is selected as the
apparent lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, that it will, within 10 days after receipt of notice
of selection, sign and deliver to University the Agreement in triplicate and furnish to University all
items required by the Bidding Documents. If awarded the Contract, Bidder agrees to complete the
proposed Work within 150 days after the date of commencement specified in the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 ADDENDA
Bidder acknowledges that it is Bidder's responsibility to ascertain whether any Addenda have been
issued and if so, to obtain copies of such Addenda from University as specified in the Instructions to
Bidders. Bidder therefore agrees to be bound by all Addenda that have been issued for this Bid.
3.0 NOT USED.
4.0 LUMP SUM BASE BID
$
, , .
(Place figures in appropriate boxes.)
5.0 SELECTION OF APPARENT LOW BIDDER
Refer to the Instructions to Bidders for selection of apparent low bidder.
6.0 UNIT PRICES - NOT USED.
7.0 DAILY RATE OF COMPENSATION FOR COMPENSABLE DELAYS
Bidder shall determine and provide below the daily rate of compensation for any Compensable Delay
caused by University at any time during the performance of the Work:
$ times 15 (multiplier)
, .
(Place figures in appropriate boxes.)
Failure to fill in a dollar figure for the daily rate for Compensable Delay shall be interpreted as a daily
rate of “zero.”
University will perform the extension of the daily rate times the multiplier.
The daily rate shown above will be the total amount of Contractor entitlement for each day of
Compensable Delay caused by University at any time during the performance of the Work and shall


constitute payment in full for all delay costs, direct or indirect (including, without limitation,
compensation for all extended home office overhead and extended general conditions), of the
Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, persons, and entities under or claiming through
Contractor on the Project. The number of days of Compensable Delay shown as a "multiplier" above
is not intended as an estimate of the number of days of Compensable Delay anticipated by the
University. The University will pay the daily rate of compensation only for the actual number of days
of Compensable Delay, as defined in the General Conditions; the actual number of days of
Compensable Delay may be greater or lesser than the "multiplier" shown above. Bidder shall not bid
less than zero dollars for the daily rate (i.e., the daily rate cannot be a negative number.)
8.0 ALTERNATES - NOT USED.


9.0 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Bidder will use Subcontractors for the Work: YES NO
If “yes”, provide in the spaces below (a) the name, the location of the place of business, and the
California contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render
service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a
subcontractor licensed by the state of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor,
specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings
contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the
prime contractor's total bid, (b) the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor. The
prime contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each such portion as is defined by the prime
contractor in its bid.
Subcontractor
Portion of the DIR
Work Activity Name of Location of Registration
(e.g. electrical, Business Business (City) License No. No.
mechanical,
concrete)
(Note: Add additional pages if required.)


10.0 LIST OF CHANGES IN SUBCONTRACTORS DUE TO ALTERNATES - NOT USED.
11.0 BIDDER INFORMATION
TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:
(Corporation, Partnership, Individual, Joint Venture, etc.)
IF A CORPORATION, THE CORPORATION IS ORGANIZED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE

OF:
THE STATE OF:
(State)
NAME OF PRESIDENT
OF THE CORPORATION:
(Insert Name)
NAME OF SECRETARY
OF THE CORPORATION:
(Insert Name)
IF A PARTNERSHIP, NAMES OF ALL GENERAL PARTNERS:
(Insert Names)
CALIFORNIA CONTRACTORS LICENSE(S):
(Classification) (License Number) (Expiration Date)
(For Joint Venture, list Joint Venture's license and licenses for all Joint Venture partners.)
12.0 REQUIRED COMPLETED ATTACHMENTS
The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:
1. Bid Security in the form of

(Bid Bond or Certified Check)


13.0 DECLARATION
I, , hereby declare that I am the

(Printed Name)
of
(Title) (Name of Bidder)
submitting this Bid Form; that I am duly authorized to execute this Bid Form on behalf of Bidder; and that all
information set forth in this Bid Form and all attachments hereto are, to the best of my knowledge, true,
accurate, and complete as of its submission date.
I further declare that this bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person,
partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or
sham; that the Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or
sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or
anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the Bidder has not in any
manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid
price of the Bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of
that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone
interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the
Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents
thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation,
partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to
effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
I declare, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing is true and correct and that this
declaration was executed at:

(Name of City if within a City, otherwise Name of County),
in the State of , on .
(State) (Date)
(Signature)


BID BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, ,as Principal,
and , as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, hereinafter called THE REGENTS, in the sum
of 10% of the Lump Sum Base Bid amount for payment of which in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, WHEREAS, Principal has submitted a Bid for the work
described as follows:
NOW, THEREFORE, if Principal shall not withdraw said Bid within the time period specified after the Bid Deadline, as defined
in the Bidding Documents, or within 60 days after the Bid Deadline if no time period be specified, and, if selected as the apparent lowest
responsible Bidder, Principal shall, within the time period specified in the Bidding Documents, do the following:
(1) Enter into a written agreement, in the prescribed form, in accordance with the Bid.
(2) File two bonds with THE REGENTS, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for
labor and materials, as required by the Bidding Documents.
(3) Furnish certificates of insurance and all other items as required by the Bidding Documents.
In the event of the withdrawal of said Bid within the time period specified, or within 60 days if no time period be specified, or
the disqualification of said Bid due to failure of Principal to enter into such agreement and furnish such bonds, certificates of insurance,
and all other items as required by the Bidding Documents, if Principal shall pay to THE REGENTS an amount equal to the difference, not
to exceed the amount hereof, between the amount specified in said Bid and such larger amount for which THE REGENTS procure the
required work covered by said Bid, if the latter be in excess of the former, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain
in full force and effect.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by THE REGENTS, Surety shall pay reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred
by THE REGENTS in such suit.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands this _______ day of _______________, 20____.
Principal: ___________________________________________ Surety: _____________________________________________

(Name of Firm) (Name of Firm)
By: ________________________________________________ By: ________________________________________________

(Signature) (Signature)
_________________________________________________ _________________________________________________
(Printed Name) (Printed Name)
Title: _______________________________________________ Title: _______________________________________________
Addresses for Notices:
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
NOTE: Notary acknowledgement for Surety and Surety's Power of Attorney must be attached.
LF BID BOND REV 3.1:01/02/96 Bid Bond - 1


PREQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE
***THIS COMPLETED FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED IN ADVANCE OF THE BID***
The Undersigned declares under penalty of perjury that all of the qualification information submitted with this
form is true and correct and that this Declaration was executed in
County, State of , on .
Signed:
Typed Name and Title
Firm Name and Full Address
Firm's Firm's Firm's

Telephone Number Fax Number License Number
Name and Title of Firm's Contact Person for Questions
Each prospective Bidder must answer all of the following questions and provide all requested information,
where applicable. Any prospective Bidder failing to do so will be deemed to be not responsive and not
responsible with respect to this Prequalification at the sole discretion of the University of California. In
addition, Bidder must list accurate names and telephone numbers of applicable contact references. If
University is unable, after reasonable efforts, to confirm any information submitted by Bidder, said information
will not be accepted as a qualifying information. All Bidders that have submitted a Prequalification
Questionnaire will be notified in writing of whether or not they have successfully achieved Prequalification
status. Prospective Bidders that affirmatively respond (i.e. answer YES) to all questions, submit all required
information and supporting data, and are determined to have accurately responded to the questions will be
prequalified. Only those Bidders that have been determined to be prequalified will be eligible to submit a bid
for this Project.
If the prospective Bidder is determined by the University not to be prequalified, the prospective Bidder may
request a review by the Facility. Any such request must be received by the Facility within 3 calendar days
after receipt by the prospective Bidder of the determination. The decision resulting from such review is final
and is not appealable within the University of California. Any person or entity not satisfied with the outcome of
the prequalification must file a writ challenging the outcome within 10 calendar days from the date of the
University's written notice regarding prequalification determination. Any assertion that the outcome of the
prequalification process was improper will not be a ground for a bid protest.
All information submitted for Prequalification evaluation will be considered official information acquired in
confidence, and the University will maintain its confidentiality to the extent permitted by law.
WHERE NECESSARY, COPY THE FORMS IN THIS PACKAGE. USE ONLY THESE FORMS.
Refer to Supplementary Instructions to Bidders for additional information.
LF PQ 170809 Prequalification Questionnaire - 1


PRIOR CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE: To be allowed to submit a bid, Bidders must have the minimum
experience described below. Submit, on this form only proof of the following prior construction
experience:
1. Bidder successfully completed (3) projects, each meeting the following criteria
a. Fully completed by Bidder since January 1, 2015; and
b. Work included tenant improvements; and
c. Tenant Improvement work was performed in an Institutional or Educational facility;

and
d. The cost of said Tenant Improvement work was at least $900,000.00.
NOTES:
A. "Fully completed" shall be defined as a Certificate of Occupancy was issued on the

project.
B. Bidder, the licensed entity listed on Page 1 of this Questionnaire, must have been
the contractor on each project submitted for consideration. Bidder may not use
experience performed by a parent company, a sister subsidiary company, or a
subsidiary to the Bidder. Additionally, Bidder may not use experience where Bidder
was one member of a separately licensed joint venture entity.
C. If Bidder is a joint venture, all construction experience must have been performed by
the joint venture entity itself.


(Copy Additional Pages as Needed)
BIDDER NAME: ______________________________
Project Name Project Location (City & State)
Owner's Name & Telephone Owner's Contact Person's Name & Telephone
Design Professional's or General Contractor's Design Professional's or General Contractor's

Name / Telephone / Email Contact Person's Name /Telephone / Email
Project Start Date Project Completion Date
1.a Was work fully completed by Bidder since January 1, 2015?

□Yes □No
1.b Did work include tenant improvements?
□Yes □No
1.c Did work include Tenant Improvement work was performed in an
Institutional or Educational facility? □Yes □No
1.d Was cost of said Tenant Improvement work at least $900,000.00?
□Yes □No
END OF PREQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE


AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is made as of the _______ day of {MONTH}, 2020, by and between
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA (“University”),
whose facility is: University of California, Los Angeles
whose address for notices is: UCLA Contracts Administration

1060 Veteran Avenue
Box 951365
and Contractor: {Contractor Name}
whose address for notices is: {Contractor Address}
for the Project: CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION
Los Angeles Campus, Los Angeles County
Los Angeles, California 90095
Order Number {ORDER#}
University's Kelly J. Schmader

Responsible Administrator Assistant Vice Chancellor - Facilities Management
University's Representative is: Michael McGinnis
whose address for notices is: 731 Young Dr. South 3rd Floor
Architectural Contract Moore, Ruble, Yudell Architects

Documents for the Work 933 Pico Blvd.
prepared by: Santa Monica, CA 90405
Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing MEP California Engineering Corp.

Contract Documents for the 12920 Mackenzie Drive
Work prepared by: Tustin Ranch CA, 92782
University and Contractor hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1 WORK
Contractor shall provide all work required by the Contract Documents (the "Work"). Contractor agrees to do
additional Work arising from changes ordered by University pursuant to Article 7 of the General Conditions.
Contractor shall (1) pay all sales, consumer and other taxes and (2) obtain and pay for any governmental
licenses and permits necessary for the work, other than building and utility permits.
ARTICLE 2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

"Contract Documents" means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions
to Bidders, Bid Form, this Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Exhibits,
LF AGRMT 110606 Agreement - 1


Specifications, List of Drawings, Drawings, Addenda, Notice to Proceed, Change Orders, Notice of
Completion, and all other documents identified in this Agreement that together form the contract between
University and Contractor for the Work (the "Contract"). The Contract constitutes the complete agreement
between University and Contractor and supersedes any previous agreements or understandings.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT SUM

Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, University shall pay to Contractor, for the performance
of the Work, ${UCLA: TYPE IN AMOUNT IN FIGURES}, the "Contract Sum."
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT TIME

Contractor shall commence the Work on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed and fully complete the
Work within 150 days (the "Contract Time") thereafter.
By signing this agreement, Contractor represents to University that the Contract Time is reasonable for
completion of the Work and that Contractor will complete the Work within the Contract Time. Time limits
stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
ARTICLE 5 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

If Contractor fails to complete the Work within the Contract Time, Contractor shall pay to University, as
liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum of $1,000.00 for each day after the expiration of the
Contract Time that the Work remains incomplete. After Substantial Completion, the rate for liquidated
damages shall be reduced to the sum of $200.00 per day. University and Contractor agree that if the Work is
not completed within the Contract Time, University's damages would be extremely difficult or impracticable to
determine and that the aforesaid amounts are reasonable estimates of and reasonable sums for such
damages. University may deduct any liquidated damages due from Contractor from any amounts otherwise
due to Contractor under the Contract Documents. This provision shall not limit any right or remedy of
University in the event of any other default of Contractor other than failing to complete the Work within the
Contract Time.
ARTICLE 6 COMPENSABLE DELAY

If Contractor is entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum as a result of a Compensable Delay, determined
pursuant to Articles 7 and 8 of the General Conditions, the Contract Sum will be increased by the sum of
${UCLA: AMOUNT IN FIGURES} per day for each day for which such compensation is payable.
ARTICLE 7 DUE AUTHORIZATION

The person or persons signing the Agreement on behalf of Contractor hereby represent and warrant to
University that this Agreement is duly authorized, signed and delivered by Contractor.


THIS AGREEMENT is entered into by University and Contractor as of the date set forth above.
CONTRACTOR: UNIVERSITY:
THE REGENTS OF THE

{} UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
(Name of Firm)
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA,
a LOS ANGELES
(Type of Organization)
By: By:
{}
{}
(Title) (Title)
California Contractor's License(s):
(Name of Licensee)
(Classification and License Number)
(Expiration Date)
(Employer Identification Number)
Attach notary acknowledgment for all signatures of Contractor. If signed by other than the sole proprietor, a
general partner or corporate officer, attach original notarized Power of Attorney or Corporate Resolution.


GENERAL CONDITIONS
LOS ANGELES CAMPUS
LF: GC 190912 General Conditions - 1


TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 Basic Definitions
1.2 Ownership and Use of Contract Documents
1.3 Interpretation
ARTICLE 2. UNIVERSITY
2.1 Information and Services Provided by University
2.2 Access to Project Site
2.3 University's Right to Stop the Work
2.4 University's Right to Carry Out the Work
2.5 University's Right to Replace University's Representative
ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR
3.1 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor
3.2 Supervision and Construction Procedures
3.3 Labor and Materials
3.4 Contractor's Warranty
3.5 Taxes
3.6 Permits, Fees, and Notices
3.7 Applicable Code Requirements
3.8 Superintendent
3.9 Schedules Required of Contractor
3.10 As-Built Documents
3.11 Documents and Samples at Project Site
3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Environmental Product Declarations
3.13 Use of Site and Clean Up
3.14 Cutting, Fitting, and Patching
3.15 Access to Work
3.16 Royalties and Patents
3.17 Differing Site Conditions
3.18 Concealed, Unforeseen, or Unknown Conditions or Events
3.19 Hazardous Materials
3.20 Information Available to Bidders
3.21 Liability for and Repair of Damaged Work
3.22 Indemnification
ARTICLE 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 Administration of the Contract by University's Representative
4.2 Contractor Change Order Requests
4.3 Claims
4.4 Assertion of Claims
4.5 Decision of University's Representative on Claims
4.6 Mediation
4.7 Litigation and Arbitration
4.8 Waiver
ARTICLE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work
5.2 Subcontractual Relations
5.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
ARTICLE 6. CONSTRUCTION BY UNIVERSITY OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 University's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts
6.2 Mutual Responsibility
6.3 University's Right to Clean Up
ARTICLE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 Changes
7.2 Definitions
7.3 Change Order Procedures
7.4 Field Orders
7.5 Variation in Quantity of Unit Price Work
7.6 Waiver
ARTICLE 8. CONTRACT TIME
8.1 Commencement of the Work
8.2 Progress and Completion
8.3 Delay
8.4 Adjustment of the Contract Time for Delay
8.5 Compensation for Delay
8.6 Waiver


ARTICLE 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 Cost Breakdown
9.2 Progress Payment
9.3 Application for Payment
9.4 Certificate for Payment
9.5 Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retention and Deposit of Retention Into Escrow
9.6 Beneficial Occupancy
9.7 Substantial Completion
9.8 Final Completion, Final Payment and Release of Retention
ARTICLE 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs
10.2 Safety of Persons and Property
10.3 Emergencies
ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 Contractor's Insurance
11.2 Builder's Risk Property Insurance
11.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
ARTICLE 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 Uncovering of Work
12.2 Correction of Defective Work and Guarantee to Repair Period
ARTICLE 13. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
13.1 Termination by Contractor
13.2 Termination by University for Cause
13.3 Suspension by University for Convenience
13.4 Termination by University for Convenience
ARTICLE 14. STATUTORY AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
14.1 Patient Health Information (if applicable)
14.2 Nondiscrimination
14.3 Prevailing Wage Rates
14.4 Payroll Records
14.5 Apprentices
14.6 Work Day
ARTICLE 15. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
15.1 Governing Law
15.2 Successors and Assigns
15.3 Rights and Remedies
15.4 Survival
15.5 Complete Agreement
15.6 Severability of Provisions
15.7 University's Right to Audit
15.8 Methods of Delivery for Specified Documents
15.9 Time of the Essence
15.10 Mutual Duty to Mitigate
15.11 UC Fair Wage


ARTICLE 1
GENERAL PROVISION
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS - The term "Applicable Code Requirements" means all laws, statutes, the most recent
building codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of all public authorities having jurisdiction over University, Contractor,
any Subcontractor, the Project, the Project site, the Work, or the prosecution of the Work including without limitation the requirements set
forth in Article 3.7.
1.1.2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT - The term "Application for Payment" means the submittal from Contractor wherein payment
for certain portions of the completed Work is requested in accordance with Article 9.
1.1.3 BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY - The term "Beneficial Occupancy" means University's occupancy or use of any part of the Work
in accordance with Article 9.
1.1.4 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT - The term "Certificate for Payment" means the form signed by University's Representative
attesting to Contractor's right to receive payment for certain completed portions of the Work in accordance with Article 9.
1.1.5 CHANGE ORDER - See Article 7.2 of the General Conditions.
1.1.6 CLAIM - See Article 4.3 of the General Conditions.
1.1.7 COMPENSABLE DELAY - The term "Compensable Delay" means a delay that entitles Contractor to an adjustment of the
Contract Sum and an adjustment of the Contract Time pursuant to Articles 7 and 8 of the General Conditions.
1.1.8 CONTRACT - The term "Contract" shall have the meaning identified in Article 2 of the Agreement.
1.1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The term "Contract Documents" means all documents listed in Article 2 of the Agreement, as
modified by Change Order, including but not limited to the Drawings and Specifications.
1.1.10 CONTRACT MILESTONE - The term "Contract Milestone" means any requirement in the Contract Documents that reflects a
planned point in time for the start or completion of a portion of the Work measured from i) the date of the Notice to Proceed or ii) the date
of another Contract Milestone defined in the Contract Documents, as applicable.
1.1.11 CONTRACT SCHEDULE - The term "Contract Schedule" means the graphical representation of a practical plan, in
accordance with the Specifications, to perform and complete the Work within the Contract Time in accordance with Article 3.
1.1.12 CONTRACT SUM - The term "Contract Sum" means the amount of compensation stated in the Agreement for the
performance of the Work, as adjusted by Change Order.
1.1.13 CONTRACT TIME - The term "Contract Time" means the number of days set forth in the Agreement, as adjusted by Change
Order, within which Contractor must achieve Final Completion.
1.1.14 CONTRACTOR - The term "Contractor" means the person or firm identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.
1.1.15 CONTRACTOR FEE - See Article 7.3 of the General Conditions.
1.1.16 COST OF EXTRA WORK - See Article 7.3 of the General Conditions.
1.1.17 DAY - The term "day," as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean calendar day, unless otherwise specifically provided.
1.1.18 DEFECTIVE WORK - The term "Defective Work" means work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, omitted, incomplete, deficient, or
does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, directives of University's Representative, or the requirements of any
inspection, reference standard, test, or approval specified in the Contract Documents.
1.1.19 DRAWINGS - The term "Drawings" means the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location, and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. The Drawings
are listed in the List of Drawings.
1.1.20 EXCUSABLE DELAY - The term "Excusable Delay" means a delay that entitles Contractor to an adjustment of the Contract
Time but not an adjustment of the Contract Sum, pursuant to Articles 7 and 8 of the General Conditions.
1.1.21 EXTRA WORK - The term "Extra Work" means Work beyond or in addition to the Work required by the Contract Documents.
1.1.22 FIELD ORDER - See Article 7.2 of the General Conditions.
1.1.23 FINAL COMPLETION - The term "Final Completion" means the date at which the Work has been fully completed in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents pursuant to Article 9.8.1 of the General Conditions.
1.1.24 GUARANTEE TO REPAIR PERIOD - See Article 12.2 of the General Conditions.
1.1.25 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL - The term “Hazardous Material” means any substance or material identified as hazardous under
any California or federal statute governing handling, disposal and/or cleanup of any such substance or material.
1.1.26 PROJECT - The term "Project" means the Work of the Contract and all other work, labor, equipment, and materials necessary
to accomplish the Project. The Project may include construction by University or by Separate Contractors.


1.1.27 PROJECT SITE - The term “Project Site” or “Project site” or “Site” or “site” means lands and facilities upon which the Work
pertaining to physical construction operations is performed, including such access and other lands and facilities designated in the
Contract Documents for use by Contractor.
1.1.28 SEPARATE CONTRACTOR - The term "Separate Contractor" means a person or firm under separate contract with University
performing other work related to the Project.
1.1.29 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES - See Article 3.12 of the General Conditions.
1.1.30 SPECIFICATIONS - The term "Specifications" means that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written
requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related
services.
1.1.31 SUBCONTRACTOR - The term "Subcontractor" means a person or firm that has a contract with Contractor or with a
Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work. Unless otherwise specifically provided, the term Subcontractor includes Subcontractors
of all tiers.
1.1.32 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION - See Article 9.7 of the General Conditions.
1.1.33 SUPERINTENDENT - The term "Superintendent" means the person designated by Contractor to represent Contractor at the
Project site in accordance with Article 3.
1.1.34 TIER - The term "tier" means the contractual level of a Subcontractor or supplier with respect to Contractor. For example, a
first-tier Subcontractor is under subcontract with Contractor, a second-tier Subcontractor is under subcontract with a first-tier
Subcontractor, and so on.
1.1.35 UNEXCUSABLE DELAY - The term "Unexcusable Delay" means a delay that does not entitle Contractor to an adjustment of
the Contract Sum and does not entitle Contractor to an adjustment of the Contract Time.
1.1.36 UNILATERAL CHANGE ORDER - See Article 7.2 of the General Conditions.
1.1.37 UNIVERSITY - The term "University" means The Regents of the University of California.
1.1.38 UNIVERSITY'S BUILDING OFFICIAL - The term "University's Building Official,” or “Certified Building Official,” means the
individual University has designated to act in the capacity as the "Building Official" as defined by the California Building Standards Code.
University's Building Official will determine whether the Work complies with Applicable Code Requirements and will determine whether
and when it is appropriate to issue a Certificate of Occupancy.
1.1.39 UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE - The term "University's Representative" means the person identified as such in the
Agreement.
1.1.40 UNIVERSITY'S RESPONSIBLE ADMINISTRATOR - The term "University's Responsible Administrator" means the person, or
his or her authorized designee, who is authorized to execute the Agreement, Change Orders, Field Orders, and other applicable
Contract Documents on behalf of University,
1.1.41 WORK - The term "Work" means all construction, services and other requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by
Change Order, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services provided or to
be provided by Contractor to fulfill Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.2 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The Contract Documents and all copies thereof furnished to or provided by Contractor are the property of University and are
not to be used on other work.
1.3 INTERPRETATION
1.3.1 The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. In the case
of conflict between terms of the Contract Documents, the following order of precedence shall apply:
.1 The Agreement,
.2 The Supplementary Conditions,
.3 The General Conditions,
.4 The Specifications,
.5 The Drawings.
1.3.2 With respect to the Drawings, figured dimensions shall control over scaled measurements and specific details shall control
over typical or standard details.
1.3.3 With respect to the Contract Documents, Addenda shall govern over other portions of the Contract Documents to the extent
specifically noted; subsequent Addenda shall govern over prior Addenda only to the extent specifically noted.
1.3.4 Organization of the Specifications into various subdivisions and the arrangement of the Drawings shall not control Contractor
in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade.
1.3.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, technical words and abbreviations contained in the Contract Documents
are used in accordance with commonly understood construction industry meanings; and non-technical words and abbreviations are used
in accordance with their commonly understood meanings.


1.3.6 The Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any," and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact
that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either
statement. The use of the word "including," when following any general statement, shall not be construed to limit such statement to
specific items or matters set forth immediately following such word or to similar items or matters, whether or not nonlimiting language
(such as "without limitation," "but not limited to," or words of similar import) is used with reference thereto, but rather shall be deemed to
refer to all other items or matters that could reasonably fall within the broadest possible scope of such general statement.
1.3.7 Whenever the context so requires, the use of the singular number shall be deemed to include the plural and vice versa. Each
gender shall be deemed to include any other gender, and each shall include corporation, partnership, trust, or other legal entity
whenever the context so requires. The captions and headings of the various subdivisions of the Contract Documents are intended only
for reference and convenience and in no way define, limit, or prescribe the scope or intent of the Contract Documents or any subdivision
thereof.
ARTICLE 2
UNIVERSITY
2.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY UNIVERSITY
2.1.1 If required for performance of the Work, as determined by University's Representative, University will make available a survey
describing known physical characteristics, boundaries, easements, and utility locations for the Project site.
2.1.2 University is not subject to any requirement to obtain or pay for local building permits, inspection fees, plan checking fees, or
certain utility fees. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, University will obtain and pay for any utility permits,
demolition permits, easements, and government approvals for the use or occupancy of permanent structures required in connection with
the Work.
2.1.3 Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of the Contract Documents as University deems reasonably
necessary for execution of the Work.
2.2 ACCESS TO PROJECT SITE
2.2.1 University will provide, no later than the date designated in the Contract Schedule accepted by University's Representative,
access to the lands and facilities upon which the Work is to be performed, including such access and other lands and facilities
designated in the Contract Documents for use by Contractor.
2.3 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If Contractor fails to correct Defective Work as required by Article 12.2 or fails to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents, University or University's Representative may direct Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the
cause for such order has been eliminated by Contractor. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment of Contract Time or Contract
Sum as a result of any such order. University and University's Representative have no duty or responsibility to Contractor or any other
party to exercise the right to stop the Work.
2.4 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, fails to provide sufficient labor, materials,
equipment, tools, and services to maintain the Contract Schedule, or otherwise fails to comply with any material term of the Contract
Documents, and, after receipt of written notice from University, fails within 2 days, excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays, or
within such additional time as University may specify, to correct such failure, University may, without prejudice to other remedies
University may have, correct such failure at Contractor's expense. In such case, University will be entitled to deduct from payments then
or thereafter due Contractor the cost of correcting such failure, including without limitation compensation for the additional services and
expenses of University's consultants made necessary thereby. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover
such amounts, Contractor shall pay the additional amount to University.
2.5 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO REPLACE UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE
2.5.1 University may at any time and from time to time, without prior notice to or approval of Contractor, replace University's
Representative with a new University's Representative. Upon receipt of notice from University informing Contractor of such replacement
and identifying the new University's representative, Contractor shall recognize such person or firm as University's Representative for all
purposes under the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR
3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.1.1 Contractor and its Subcontractors shall review and compare each of the Contract Documents with the others and with
information furnished or made available by University, and shall promptly report in writing to University's Representative any errors,
inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents or inconsistencies with Applicable Code Requirements observed by Contractor
or its Subcontractors.
3.1.2 Contractor and its Subcontractors shall take field measurements, verify field conditions, and carefully compare with the
Contract Documents such field measurements, conditions, and other information known to Contractor before commencing the Work.
Errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered at any time shall be promptly reported in writing to University's Representative.


3.1.3 If Contractor and its Subcontractors perform any construction activity involving an error, inconsistency, or omission referred to
in Articles 3.1.1 and 3.1.2, without giving the notice required in those Articles and obtaining the written consent of University's
Representative, Contractor shall be responsible for the resultant losses, including, without limitation, the costs of correcting Defective
Work.
3.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.2.1 Contractor shall supervise, coordinate, and direct the Work using Contractor's best skill and attention. Contractor shall be
solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, and the coordination of
all portions of the Work.
3.2.2 Contractor shall be responsible to University for acts and omissions of Contractor's agents, employees, and Subcontractors,
and their respective agents and employees.
3.2.3 Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by acts
or omissions of University or University's Representative in the administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections, or approvals
required or performed by persons or firms other than Contractor.
3.2.4 Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of all portions of the Work, including those portions already performed under this
Contract, to determine that such portions conform to the requirements of the Contract and are ready to receive subsequent Work.
3.2.5 Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order among its employees and Subcontractors. Contractor shall
provide competent, fully qualified personnel to perform the Work.
3.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.3.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools,
construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper
execution and Final Completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in
the Work.
3.4 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY
3.4.1 Contractor warrants to University that all materials and equipment used in or incorporated into the Work will be of good quality,
new, and free of liens, claims, and security interests of third parties; that the Work will be of good quality and free from defects; and that
the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract. If required by University's Representative, Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
3.5 TAXES
3.5.1 Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by Contractor.
3.6 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES
3.6.1 Except for the permits and approvals which are to be obtained by University or the requirements with respect to which
University is not subject as provided in Article 2.1.2, Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, approvals, government fees,
licenses, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and performance of the Work. Contractor shall deliver to University all
original licenses, permits, and approvals obtained by Contractor in connection with the Work prior to the final payment or upon
termination of the Contract, whichever is earlier.
3.7 APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the following Applicable Code Requirements:
.1 All laws, statutes, the most recent building codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of all
public authorities having jurisdiction over University, Contractor, any Subcontractor, the Project, the
Project site, the Work, or the prosecution of the Work.
.2 All requirements of any insurance company issuing insurance required hereunder.
.3 The Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act and all other Applicable Code Requirements relating to
safety.
.4 Applicable titles in the State of California Code of Regulations.
.5 Applicable sections in the State of California Labor Code.
.6 All Applicable Code Requirements relating to nondiscrimination, payment of prevailing wages, payroll
records, apprentices, and work day.
Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor shall comply with the provisions regarding nondiscrimination, payment of prevailing wages,
payroll records, apprentices, and work day set forth in Article 14.
3.7.2 Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all Applicable Code Requirements, including all environmental laws
and all notice requirements under the State of California Safe Drinking Water and Enforcement Act of 1986 (State of California Health
and Safety Code Section 25249.5 and applicable sections that follow). Contractor shall promptly notify University's Representative in
writing if Contractor becomes aware during the performance of the Work that the Contract Documents are at variance with Applicable
Code Requirements.
3.7.3 If Contractor performs Work which it knows or should know is contrary to Applicable Code Requirements, without prior notice
to University and University's Representative, Contractor shall be responsible for such Work and any resulting damages including,
without limitation, the costs of correcting Defective Work.


3.8 SUPERINTENDENT
3.8.1 Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent satisfactory to University who shall be in attendance at the Project site at
all times during the performance of the Work. Superintendent shall represent Contractor and communications given to and received from
Superintendent shall be binding on Contractor.
3.8.2 Failure to maintain a Superintendent on the Project site at all times Work is in progress shall be considered a material breach
of this Contract, entitling University to terminate the Contract or alternatively, issue a stop work order until the Superintendent is on the
Project site. If, by virtue of issuance of said stop work order, Contractor fails to complete the Contract on time, Contractor will be
assessed Liquidated Damages in accordance with the Agreement.
3.8.3 The Superintendent approved for the Project must be able to read, write and verbally communicate in English.
3.8.4 The Superintendent may not perform the Work of any trade, pick-up materials, or perform any Work not directly related to the
supervision and coordination of the Work at the Project site when Work is in progress.
3.9 SCHEDULES REQUIRED OF CONTRACTOR
3.9.1 Contractor shall submit a Preliminary Contract Schedule to University's Representative in the form and within the time limit
required by the Specifications. University's Representative will review the Preliminary Contract Schedule with Contractor within the time
limit required by the Specifications or, if no such time period is specified, within a reasonable period of time.
3.9.2 Contractor shall submit a Contract Schedule and updated Contract Schedules to University's Representative in the form and
within the time limits required by the Specifications and acceptable to University's Representative. University's Representative will
determine acceptability of the Contract Schedule and updated Contract Schedules within the time limits required by the Specifications or,
if no such time period is specified, within a reasonable period of time. If University's Representative deems the Contract Schedule or
updated Contract Schedule unacceptable, it shall specify in writing to Contractor the basis for its objection.
3.9.3 The Preliminary Contract Schedule, the Contract Schedule, and updated Contract Schedules shall represent a practical plan to
complete the Work within the Contract Time. Schedules showing the Work completed in less than the Contract Time may be acceptable
if judged by University's Representative to be practical. Schedules showing the Work completed beyond the Contract Time may be
submitted under the following circumstances:
.1 If accompanied by a Change Order Request seeking an adjustment of the Contract Time consistent the
requirements of Article 8.4 for Adjustment of the Contract Time for Delay; or
.2 If the Contract Time has passed, or if it is a practical impossibility to complete the Work within the Contract Time,
then the updated Contract Schedule or fragnet schedule shall show completion at the earliest practical date.
University's Representative will timely review the updated Contract Schedule or Fragnet Schedule submitted by Contractor. If
University's Representative determines that additional supporting data are necessary to fully evaluate the updated Contract Schedule or
Fragnet Schedule, University's Representative will request such additional supporting data in writing. Such data shall be furnished no
later than 10 days after the date of such request. University's Representative will render a decision promptly and in any case within 30
days after the later of the receipt of the updated Contract Schedule or Fragnet Schedule or the deadline for furnishing such additional
supporting data. Failure of University's Representative to render a decision by the applicable deadline will be deemed a decision denying
approval of the updated Contract Schedule or Fragnet Schedule. Acceptance of any schedule showing completion beyond the Contract
Time by University's Representative shall not change the Contract Time and is without prejudice to any right of University. The Contract
Time, not the Contract Schedule, shall control in the determination of liquidated damages payable by Contractor under Article 4 and
Article 5 of the Agreement and in the determination of any delay under Article 8 of the General Conditions.
3.9.4 If a schedule showing the Work completed in less than the Contract Time is accepted, Contractor shall not be entitled to
extensions of the Contract Time for Excusable Delays or Compensable Delays or to adjustments of the Contract Sum for Compensable
Delays until such delays extend the Final Completion of the Work beyond the expiration of the Contract Time.
3.9.5 Contractor shall prepare and keep current, to the reasonable satisfaction of University's Representative, a Submittal Schedule,
in the form contained in the Exhibits, for each submittal, as required by the Specifications, and that are coordinated with the other
activities in the Contract Schedule.
3.9.6 The Preliminary Contract Schedule, Contract Schedule, and the Updated Contract Schedules shall meet the following
requirements:
.1 Schedules must be suitable for monitoring progress of the Work.
.2 Schedules must provide necessary data about the timing for University decisions and University furnished
items.
.3 Schedules must be in sufficient detail to demonstrate adequate planning for the Work.
.4 Schedules must represent a practical plan to perform and complete the Work within the Contract Time.
3.9.7 University's Representative's review of the form and general content of the Preliminary Contract Schedule, Contract Schedule,
and Updated Contract Schedules is for the purpose of determining if the above-listed requirements have been satisfied.
3.9.8 Contractor shall plan, develop, supervise, control, and coordinate the performance of the Work so that its progress and the
sequence and timing of Work will permit its completion within the Contract Time, any Contract milestones and any Contract phases.
3.9.9 In preparing the Preliminary Contract Schedule, the Contract Schedule, and updated Contract Schedules, Contractor shall
obtain such information and data from Subcontractors as may be required to develop a reasonable and appropriate schedule for
performance of the work and shall provide such information and data to University's Representative upon request. Contractor shall
continuously obtain from Subcontractors information and data about the planning for and progress of the Work and the delivery of


equipment, shall coordinate and integrate such information and data into updated Contract Schedules, as appropriate, and shall monitor
the progress of the Work and the delivery of equipment.
3.9.10 Contractor shall act as the expeditor of potential and actual delays, interruptions, hindrances, or disruptions for its own forces
and those forces of Subcontractors, regardless of tier.
3.9.11 Contractor shall cooperate with University's Representative in the development of the Contract Schedule and updated Contract
Schedules. University's Representative's acceptance of or its review comments about any schedule or scheduling data shall not relieve
Contractor from its sole responsibility to plan for, perform, and complete the Work within the Contract Time. Acceptance of or review
comments about any schedule shall not transfer responsibility for any schedule to University's Representative or University nor imply
their agreement with (1) any assumption upon which such schedule is based or (2) any matter underlying or contained in such schedule.
Failure of University's Representative to discover errors or omissions in schedules that it has reviewed, or to inform Contractor that
Contractor, Subcontractors, or others are behind schedule, or to direct or enforce procedures for complying with the Contract Schedule
shall not relieve Contractor from its sole responsibility to perform and complete the Work within the Contract Time and shall not be a
cause for an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
3.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
3.10.1 Contractor shall maintain one set of As-built drawings and specifications, which shall be kept up to date during the Work of the
Contract. All changes which are incorporated into the Work which differ from the documents as drawn and written shall be noted on the
As-built set. Notations shall reflect the actual materials, equipment and installation methods used for the Work and each revision shall be
initialed and dated by Superintendent. Prior to filing of the Notice of Completion each drawing and the specification cover shall be signed
by Contractor and dated attesting to the completeness of the information noted therein. As-built Documents shall be turned over to
University's Representative and shall become part of the Record Documents.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT PROJECT SITE
3.11.1 Contractor shall maintain the following at the Project site:
.1 One as-built copy of the Contract Documents, in good order and marked to record current changes and
selections made during construction.
.2 The current accepted Contract Schedule.
.3 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
.4 All other required submittals.
These shall be available to University's Representative and shall be delivered to University's Representative for submittal to University
upon the earlier of Final Completion or termination of the Contract.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES, AND ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS
3.12.1 Definitions:
.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by
Contractor or a Subcontractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams,
and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate or describe materials or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.
.4 Environmental Product Declarations are those documents and other submissions required to be furnished
by Contractor or a Subcontractor pursuant to California Public Contract Code Section 3500 et seq., the
Buy Clean California Act, as further described in Article 3.12.9 below.
3.12.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate,
for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required, how Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the
design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
3.12.3 Contractor shall review, approve, and submit to University's Representative Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the
Work or in the activities of University or of Separate Contractors. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract
Documents may be returned without action by University's Representative.
3.12.4 Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or
similar submittals until the respective submittal has been reviewed by University's Representative and no exceptions have been taken by
University's Representative. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals and the Contract Documents.
3.12.5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, Contractor represents that it has
determined or verified materials and field measurements and conditions related thereto, and that it has checked and coordinated the
information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings for related Work.
3.12.6 If Contractor discovers any conflicts, omissions, or errors in Shop Drawings or other submittals, Contractor shall notify
University's Representative and receive instruction before proceeding with the affected Work.
3.12.7 Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by University's
Representative's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless Contractor has specifically informed
University's Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and University's Representative has given written


approval of the specific deviation. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples, or similar submittals by University's Representative's review, acceptance, comment, or approval thereof.
3.12.8 Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar
submittals, to revisions other than those requested by University's Representative on previous submittals.
3.12.9 Environmental Product Declarations
3.12.9.1 Contractor shall comply with California Public Contract Code Section 3500 et seq., the Buy Clean California Act
(“BCCA”).
3.12.9.2 The term “Eligible Materials,” as used herein, shall mean the same as defined by the BCCA, and shall include at a
minimum the following materials:
(1) Carbon steel rebar.
(2) Flat glass.
(3) Mineral wool board insulation.
(4) Structural steel.
3.12.9.3 Compliance with the BCCA and this Article applies to all Eligible Materials for the Project.
3.12.9.4 Contractor shall submit to University a current facility-specific Environmental Product Declaration (“EPD”), Type III,
as defined by the International Organization for Standardization (“ISO”) standard 14025, or similarly robust life cycle
assessment methods that have uniform standards in data collection consistent with ISO standard 14025, industry acceptance,
and integrity, for each Eligible Material proposed to be used on the Project.
3.12.9.5 Eligible Materials installed on the Project by Contractor must comply with any standards to the extent established in
the BCCA or by University, whichever is more stringent. The facility-specific global warming potential for any Eligible Material
must not exceed any existing maximum acceptable global warming potential for that material pursuant to the BCCA or by
University, whichever is more stringent (“EM Standards”).
3.12.9.6 Contractor shall not install any Eligible Materials on the Project until Contractor submits a facility-specific EPD for
that material which demonstrates that the material complies with any existing EM Standards and this Article. Contractor shall
be responsible for any losses, expenses, penalties or damages of any type incurred or sustained by University, including any
tear out and replacement of Defective Work, which are caused by Contractor’s failure to comply with the requirements of the
BCCA or this Article.
3.13 USE OF SITE AND CLEAN UP
3.13.1 Contractor shall confine operations at the Project site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, and the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the Project site with materials or equipment.
3.13.2 Contractor shall, during performance of the Work, keep the Project site and surrounding area free from the accumulation of
excess dirt, waste materials, and rubbish caused by Contractor. Contractor shall remove all excess dirt, waste material, and rubbish
caused by Contractor; tools; equipment; machinery; and surplus materials from the Project site and surrounding area at the completion
of the Work.
3.13.3 Personnel of Contractor and Subcontractors shall not occupy, live upon, or otherwise make use of the Project site during any
time that Work is not being performed at the Project site, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
3.14 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING
3.14.1 Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of the Work required to make all parts of the Work come together properly
and to allow the Work to receive or be received by work of Separate Contractors shown upon, or reasonably implied by, the Contract
Documents.
3.14.2 Contractor shall not endanger the Work, the Project, or adjacent property by cutting, digging, or otherwise. Contractor shall not
cut or alter the work of any Separate Contractor without the prior consent of University's Representative.
3.15 ACCESS TO WORK
3.15.1 University, University's Representative, their consultants, and other persons authorized by University will at all times have
access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access and for
inspection.
3.16 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
3.16.1 Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees required for the performance of the Work. Contractor shall defend suits or
claims resulting from Contractor's or any Subcontractor's infringement of patent rights and shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless
University and University's Representative from losses on account thereof.
3.17 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
3.17.1 If Contractor encounters any of the following conditions at the site, Contractor shall immediately notify University's
Representative in writing of the specific differing conditions before they are disturbed and before any affected Work is performed, and
permit investigation of the conditions:
.1 Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site (including Hazardous Materials) which differ materially from those
indicated in this Contract, or if not indicated in this Contract, in the Information Available to Bidders; or


.2 Unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract.
3.17.2 Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time as the result of extra costs and/or
delays resulting from a materially differing site condition, if and only if Contractor fulfills the following conditions:
.1 Contractor fully complies with Article 3.17.1; and
.2 Contractor fully complies with Article 4 (including the timely filing of a Change Order Request and all other
requirements for Change Orders Requests and Claims).
3.17.3 Adjustments to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time shall be subject to the procedures and limitations set forth in Articles 7
and 8.
3.18 CONCEALED, UNFORESEEN, OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS OR EVENTS
3.18.1 Except and only to the extent provided otherwise in Articles 3.17, 7 and 8 of the General Conditions, by signing the
Agreement, Contractor agrees:
.1 To bear the risk of concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events, if any, which may be encountered in
performing the Contract; and
.2 That Contractor's bid for the Contract was made with full knowledge of this risk.
In agreeing to bear the risk of concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events, Contractor understands that, except and only to
the extent provided otherwise in Articles 3.17, 7 and 8, concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events shall not excuse
Contractor from its obligation to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and shall not entitle Contractor to an
adjustment of the Contract Sum.
3.18.2 If Contractor encounters concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events that may require a change to the design
shown in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately notify University's Representative in writing such that University's
Representative can determine if a change to the design is required. Contractor shall be liable to University for any extra costs incurred as
the result of Contractor's failure to immediately give such notice.
3.18.3 If, as the result of concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events, University issues a Change Order or Field Order
that changes the design from the design depicted in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall be entitled, subject to compliance with all
the provisions of the Contract, including those set forth in Articles 4, 7 and 8, to an adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time,
for the cost and delay resulting from implementing the changes to the design. Except as provided in this Article 3.18.3, or as may be
expressly provided otherwise in the Contract, there shall be no adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time as a result of
concealed, unforeseen or unknown conditions or events.
3.18.4 Contractor shall, as a condition precedent to any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time under Article 3.18.3, fully
comply with Article 4 (including the timely filing of a Change Order Request and all other requirements for Change Orders Requests and
Claims).
3.19 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
3.19.1 University shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Material brought to the site by Contractor.
3.19.2 If Contractor: (i) introduces and/or discharges a Hazardous Material onto the site in a manner not specified by the Contract
Documents; and/or (ii) disturbs a Hazardous Material identified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall hire a qualified remediation
contractor at Contractor's sole cost to eliminate the condition as soon as possible. Under no circumstance shall Contractor perform Work
for which it is not qualified. University, in its sole discretion, may require Contractor to retain at Contractor's cost an independent testing
laboratory.
3.19.3 If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Material which may cause foreseeable injury or damage, Contractor shall immediately:
(i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such material or substance (except in an emergency
situation); and (iii) notify University (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing).
3.19.4 Subject to Contractor's compliance with Article 3.19.3, University shall verify the presence or absence of the Hazardous
Material reported by Contractor, except as qualified under Section 3.19.1 and 3.19.2, and, in the event such material or substance is
found to be present, verify that the levels of the hazardous material are below OSHA Permissible Exposure Levels and below levels
which would classify the material as a state of California or federal hazardous waste. When the material falls below such levels, Work in
the affected area shall resume upon direction by University. The Contract Time and Sum shall be extended appropriately as provided in
Articles 7 and 8.
3.19.5 University shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, arising from
a Hazardous Material on the Project site, if such Hazardous Material: (i) was not shown on the Contract Documents or Information
Available to Bidders; (ii) was not brought to the site by Contractor; and (iii) exceeded OSHA Permissible Exposure Levels or levels which
would classify the material as a state of California or federal hazardous waste. The indemnity obligation in this Article shall not apply to:
.1 claims, damages, losses or expenses arising from the breach of contract, negligence or willful misconduct of
Contractor, its suppliers, its Subcontractors of all tiers and/or any persons or entities working under Contractor; and
.2 claims, damages, losses or expenses arising from a Hazardous Material subject to Article 3.19.2.
3.19.6 In addition to the requirements in Article 3.22, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the University from and against
claims, damages, losses and expenses, arising from a Hazardous Material on the Project site, if such Hazardous Material exceeded
OSHA Permissible Exposure Levels or levels which would classify the material as a state of California or federal hazardous waste, and
was either i) shown on the Contract Documents or Information Available to Bidders; or (ii) brought to the site by Contractor. Nothing in


this paragraph shall obligate the Contractor to indemnify University in the event of the sole negligence of the University, its officers,
agents, or employees.
3.20 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
3.20.1 Any information provided pursuant to Information Available to Bidders is subject to the following provisions:
.1 The information is made available for the convenience of Bidders and is not a part of the Contract.
.2 Contractor may rely on written descriptions of physical conditions included in the information to the extent such
reliance is reasonable.
.3 Other components of the information, including but not limited to recommendations, may not be relied upon by
Contractor. University shall not be responsible for any interpretation of or conclusion drawn from the other
components of the information by Contractor.
3.21 LIABILITY FOR AND REPAIR OF DAMAGED WORK
3.21.1 Contractor shall be liable for any and all damages and losses to the Project (whether by fire, theft, vandalism, earthquake or
otherwise) prior to University's acceptance of the Project as fully completed except that Contractor shall not be liable for damages and
losses to the Project caused by earthquake in excess of magnitude 3.5 on the Richter Scale, tidal wave, or flood, provided that the
damages or losses were not caused in whole or in part by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, its officers, agents or employees
(including all Subcontractors and suppliers of all tiers). As used herein, “flood” shall have the same meaning as in the builder's risk
property insurance.
3.21.2 Contractor shall promptly repair and replace any Work or materials damaged or destroyed for which Contractor is liable under
Article 3.21.1.
3.22 INDEMNIFICATION
3.22.1 Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless University, University's consultants, University's Representative,
University's Representative's consultants, and their respective directors, officers, agents, and employees from and against losses
(including without limitation the cost of repairing defective work and remedying the consequences of defective work) arising out of,
resulting from, or relating to the following:
.1 The failure of Contractor to perform its obligations under the Contract.
.2 The inaccuracy of any representation or warranty by Contractor given in accordance with or contained in the
Contract Documents.
.3 Any claim of damage or loss by any Subcontractor against University arising out of any alleged act or omission of
Contractor or any other Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by Contractor or any Subcontractor.
.4 Any claim of damage or loss resulting from Hazardous Materials introduced, discharged, or disturbed by Contractor
as required per Article 3.19.6.
3.22.2 University shall not be liable or responsible for any accidents, loss, injury (including death) or damages happening or accruing
during the term of the performance of the Work herein referred to or in connection therewith, to persons and/or property, and Contractor
shall fully indemnify, defend and hold harmless University and protect University from and against the same as provided in Article 3.22.1
above. In addition to the liability imposed by law upon Contractor for damage or injury (including death) to persons or property by reason
of the negligence of Contractor, its officers, agents, employees or Subcontractors, which liability is not impaired or otherwise affected
hereby, Contractor shall defend, indemnify, hold harmless, release and forever discharge University, its officers, employees, and agents
from and against and waive any and all responsibility of same for every expense, liability, or payment by reason of any damage or injury
(including death) to persons or property suffered or claimed to have been suffered through any negligent act, omission, or willful
misconduct of Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, or any of its Subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either
of them or from the condition of the premises or any part of the premises while in control of Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, or
any of its Subcontractors or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, arising out of the performance of the Work called for
by this Contract. Contractor agrees that this indemnity and hold harmless shall apply even in the event of negligence of University, its
officers, agents, or employees, regardless of whether such negligence is contributory to any claim, demand, loss, damage, injury,
expense, and/or liability; but such indemnity and hold harmless shall not apply (i) in the event of the sole negligence of University, its
officers, agents, or employees; or (ii) to the extent that University shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor for Hazardous Materials
pursuant to Article 3.19.5.
3.22.3 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Article 3.22 that are made by an employee of Contractor or any
Subcontractor, a person indirectly employed by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor or any
Subcontractor may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Article 3.22 shall not be limited by any limitation on amount or type
of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any Subcontractor under Workers' Compensation acts, disability
benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
3.22.4 The indemnification obligations under this Article 3.22 shall not be limited by any assertion or finding that the person or entity
indemnified is liable by reason of a non-delegable duty.
3.22.5 Contractor shall indemnify University from and against Losses resulting from any claim of damage made by any Separate
Contractor against University arising out of any alleged acts or omissions of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly
employed by either of them, or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable.
3.22.6 Contractor shall indemnify Separate Contractors from and against Losses arising out of the negligent acts, omissions, or willful
misconduct of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or anyone for whose acts either of
them may be liable.


ARTICLE 4
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT BY UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE
4.1.1 University's Representative will provide administration of the Contract as provided in the Contract Documents and will be the
representative of University. University's Representative will have authority to act on behalf of University only to the extent provided in
the Contract Documents.
4.1.2 University's Representative will have the right to visit the Project site at such intervals as deemed appropriate by University's
Representative. However, no actions taken during such Project site visit by University's Representative shall relieve Contractor of its
obligations as described in the Contract Documents.
4.1.3 University's Representative will not have control over, will not be in charge of, and will not be responsible for construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since
these are solely Contractor's responsibility.
4.1.4 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specifically authorized,
University and Contractor shall communicate through University's Representative. Except when direct communication has been
specifically authorized in writing by University Representative, communications by Contractor with University's consultants and
University's Representative's consultants shall be through University's Representative. Communications by University and University's
Representative with Subcontractors will be through Contractor. Communications by Contractor and Subcontractors with Separate
Contractors shall be through University's Representative. Contractor shall not rely on oral or other non-written communications.
4.1.5 Based on University's Representative's Project site visits and evaluations of Contractor's Applications for Payment, University's
Representative will recommend amounts, if any, due Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
4.1.6 University's Representative will have the authority to reject the Work, or any portion thereof, which does not conform to the
Contract Documents. University's Representative will have the authority to stop the Work or any portion thereof. Whenever University's
Representative considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, University's
Representative will have the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. However, no authority of University's Representative conferred by the
Contract Documents nor any decision made in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority, will give rise to a duty or
responsibility of University or University's Representative to Contractor, or any person or entity claiming under or through Contractor.
4.1.7 University's Representative will have the authority to conduct inspections as provided in the Contract Documents, to take
Beneficial Occupancy and to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion; will receive for review and approval
any records, written warranties, and related documents required by the Contract Documents and assembled by Contractor; and will issue
a final Certificate for Payment upon Contractor's compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.1.8 University's Representative will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and the
judge of performance thereunder by Contractor. Should Contractor discover any conflicts, omissions, or errors in the Contract
Documents; have any questions about the interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents; question whether Work is within the
scope of the Contract Documents; or question that Work required is not sufficiently detailed or explained, then, before proceeding with
the Work affected, Contractor shall notify University's Representative in writing and request interpretation, clarification, or furnishing of
additional detailed instructions. University's Representative's response to questions and requests for interpretations, clarifications,
instructions, or decisions will be made with reasonable promptness. Should Contractor proceed with the Work affected before receipt of
a response from University's Representative, any portion of the Work which is not done in accordance with University's Representative's
interpretations, clarifications, instructions, or decisions shall be removed or replaced and Contractor shall be responsible for all resultant
losses.
4.2 CONTRACTOR CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS
4.2.1 Contractor may request changes to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for Extra Work, materially differing site conditions,
or Delays to Final Completion of the Work.
4.2.2 Conditions precedent to obtaining an adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, payment of money, or other relief
with respect to the Contract Documents, for any other reason, are:
.1 Timely submission of a Change Order Request that meets the requirements of Articles 4.2.3.1 and 4.2.3.2; and
.2 If requested, timely submission of additional information requested by University Representative pursuant to Article
4.2.3.3.
4.2.3 Change Order Request:
.1 A Change Order Request will be deemed timely submitted if, and only if, it is submitted within 7 days of the date
Contractor discovers, or reasonably should discover the circumstances giving rise to the Change Order Request,
unless additional time is allowed in writing by University's Representative for submission of the Change Order
Request, provided that if:
.1 the Change Order Request includes compensation sought by a Subcontractor; AND
.2 Contractor requests in writing to University's Representative, within the 7-day time period, additional time
to permit Contractor to conduct an appropriate review of the Subcontractor Change Order Request,
the time period for submission of the actual Change Order Request shall be extended by the number of days
specified in writing by University's Representative.
.2 A Change Order Request must state that it is a Change Order Request, state and justify the reason for the request,
and specify the amount of any requested adjustment of the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or other monetary


relief. If Contractor requests an adjustment to the Contract Sum or other monetary relief, Contractor shall submit the
following with the Change Order Request:
.1 a completed Cost Proposal in the form contained in the Exhibits meeting the requirements of Article 7; OR
.2 a partial Cost Proposal and a declaration of what required information is not then known to Contractor. If
Contractor failed to submit a completed Cost Proposal with the Change Order Request, Contractor shall
submit a completed Cost Proposal meeting the requirements of Article 7 within 7 days of the date
Contractor submitted the Change Order Request unless additional time is allowed by University's
Representative.
.3 Upon request of University's Representative, Contractor shall submit such additional information as may be
requested by University's Representative for the purpose of evaluating the Change Order Request. Such additional
information may include:
.1 If Contractor seeks an adjustment of the Contract Sum or other monetary relief, actual cost records for any
changed or extra costs (including without limitation, payroll records, material and rental invoices and the
like), shall be submitted by the deadline established by University's Representative, who may require such
actual cost records to be submitted and reviewed, on a daily basis, by University's Representative and/or
representatives of University's Representative.
.2 If Contractor seeks an adjustment of the Contract Time, written documentation demonstrating Contractor's
entitlement to a time extension under Article 8.4, which shall be submitted within 15 days of the date
requested. If requested, Contractor may submit a fragnet in support of its request for a time extension.
University may, but is not obligated to, grant a time extension on the basis of a fragnet alone which, by its
nature, is not a complete schedule analysis. If deemed appropriate by University's Representative,
Contractor shall submit a more detailed schedule analysis in support of its request for a time extension.
.3 If Contractor seeks an adjustment of the Contract Sum or other monetary relief for delay, written
documentation demonstrating Contractor's entitlement to such an adjustment under Article 7.3.9, which
shall be submitted within 15 days of the date requested.
.4 Any other information requested by University's Representative for the purpose of evaluating the Change
Order Request, which shall be submitted by the deadline established by University's Representative.
4.2.4 University's Representative will make a decision on a Change Order Request within a reasonable time after receipt of a
Change Order Request. In the event the Change Order Request is submitted pursuant to Article 8.4.1, University's Representative will
promptly review and accept or reject it within 30 days. A final decision is any decision on a Change Order Request which states that it is
final. If University's Representative issues a final decision denying a Change Order Request in whole or in part, Contractor may contest
the decision by filing a timely Claim under the procedures specified in Article 4.4.
4.2.5 Contractor may file a written demand for a final decision by University's Representative on all or part of any Change Order
Request as to which University's Representative has not previously issued a final decision pursuant to Article 4.2.4; such written demand
may not be made earlier than the 30th day after submission of the Change Order Request. Within 30 days of receipt of the demand,
University's Representative will issue a final decision on the Change Order Request. University's Representative's failure to issue a
decision within the 30-day period shall be treated as the issuance, on the last day of the 30-day period, of a final decision to deny the
Change Order Request in its entirety.
4.3 CLAIMS
4.3.1 The term "Claim" means a written demand or assertion by Contractor seeking an adjustment or interpretation of the terms of
the Contract Documents, payment of money, extension of time, or other relief with respect to the Contract Documents, including a
determination of disputes or matters in question between University and Contractor arising out of or related to the Contract Documents or
the performance of the Work. However, the term "Claim" shall not include, and the Claims procedures provided under this Article 4,
including but not limited to arbitration, shall not apply to the following:
.1 Claims respecting penalties for forfeitures prescribed by statute or regulation which a government agency
is specifically authorized to administer, settle, or determine.
.2 Claims respecting personal injury, death, reimbursement, or other compensation arising out of or resulting
from liability for personal injury or death.
.3 Claims by University, except as set forth in Articles 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7.
.4 Claims respecting stop payment notices.
4.3.2 A Claim arises upon the issuance of a written final decision denying in whole or in part Contractor's Change Order Request
pursuant to Articles 4.2.4 and 4.2.5.
4.3.3 A Claim must include the following:
.1 A statement that it is a Claim and a request for a decision pursuant to Article 4.5.
.2 A detailed factual narrative of events fully describing the nature and circumstances giving rise to the
Claim, including but not limited to, necessary dates, locations, and items of work affected.
.3 A certification, executed by Contractor, that the claim is filed in good faith. The certification must be made
on the Claim Certification form, included in the Exhibits to the Contract. The language of the Claim
Certification form may not be modified.
.4 A certification, executed by each Subcontractor claiming not less than 5% of the total monetary amount
sought by the claim, that the subcontractor's portion of the claim is filed in good faith. The certification
must be made on the Claim Certification form, included in the Exhibits to the Contract. The language of
the Claim Certification form may not be modified.
.5 A statement demonstrating that a Change Order Request was timely submitted as required by Article
4.2.3


.6 If a Cost Proposal or declaration was required by Article 4.2.3, a statement demonstrating that the Cost
Proposal or the declaration was timely submitted as required by Article 4.2.3.
.7 A detailed justification for any remedy or relief sought by the Claim, including to the extent applicable, the
following:
.1 If the Claim involves Extra Work, a detailed cost breakdown of the amounts claimed, including
the items specified in Article 7.3.2. An estimate of the costs must be provided even if the costs
claimed have not been incurred when the Claim is submitted. To the extent costs have been
incurred when the Claim is submitted, the Claim must include actual cost records (including
without limitation, payroll records, material and rental invoices and the like) demonstrating that
costs claimed have actually been incurred. To the extent costs have not yet been incurred at the
time the Claim is submitted, actual cost records must be submitted on a current basis not less
than once a month during any periods costs are incurred. A cost record will be considered
current if submitted within 30 days of the date the cost reflected in the record is incurred. At the
request of University's Representative, claimed extra costs may be subject to further verification
procedures (such as having an inspector verify the performance of alleged Extra Work on a
daily basis). The cost breakdown must include an itemization of costs for i) labor including
workers' names, classifications, regular hours and overtime hours worked, dates worked, and
other pertinent information; ii) materials stored or incorporated in the work including invoices,
purchase orders, location of materials either stored or incorporated into the work, dates
materials were transported to the project or incorporated into the work, and other pertinent
information; and iii) itemization of machinery and equipment including make, model, hours of
use, dates of use and equipment rental rates of any rented equipment.
.2 If the Claim involves an extension of the Contract Time, written documentation demonstrating
Contractor's entitlement to a time extension under Article 8.4, including the specific dates for
which a time extension is sought and the specific reasons for entitlement of a time extension.
.3 If the Claim involves an adjustment of the Contract Sum for delay, written documentation
demonstrating Contractor's entitlement to such an adjustment under Article 7.3.9, including but
not limited to, a detailed time impact analysis of the Contract Schedule. The Contract Schedule
must demonstrate Contractor's entitlement to such an adjustment under Article 7.3.9.
4.4 ASSERTION OF CLAIMS
4.4.1 Claims by Contractor shall be first submitted to University's Representative for decision.
4.4.2 Notwithstanding the making of any Claim or the existence of any dispute regarding any Claim, unless otherwise directed by
University's Representative, Contractor shall not cause any delay, cessation, or termination in or of Contractor's performance of the
Work, but shall diligently proceed with performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.4.3 Contractor shall submit a Claim in writing, together with all supporting data specified in Article4.3.3, to University's
Representative as soon as possible but not later than 30 days after the date the Claim arises under Article 4.3.2, provided that after
written notification to University's Representative within such time period, the time period for submission of the Claim shall be extended
by the number of days specified in writing by University's Representative where the Claim includes compensation sought by a
Subcontractor and Contractor requests an extension of time to permit it to discharge its responsibilities to conduct an appropriate review
of the Subcontractor claim.
4.4.4 Strict compliance with the requirements of Articles 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4 are conditions precedent to Contractor's right to an informal
conference to meet and confer to resolve a Claim, mediate a Claim, or arbitrate or litigate a Claim. Contractor specifically agrees to
assert no Claims via an informal conference, mediation, arbitration or litigation unless there has been strict compliance with Articles 4.2,
4.3, and 4.4. The failure of Contractor to strictly comply with the requirements of Articles 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4 constitutes a failure by
Contractor to exhaust its administrative remedies with the University, thereby denying any court or arbitration panel of jurisdiction to
adjudicate the Claim.
4.5 DECISION OF UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE ON CLAIMS
4.5.1 University's Representative will timely review Claims submitted by Contractor. If University's Representative determines that
additional supporting data are necessary to fully evaluate a Claim, University's Representative will request such additional supporting
data in writing. Such data shall be furnished no later than 10 days after the date of such request. University's Representative will render a
decision promptly and in any case within 30 days after the later of the receipt of the Claim or the deadline for furnishing such additional
supporting data; provided that, if the amount of the Claim is in excess of $50,000, the aforesaid 30-day period shall be 45 days. Failure
of University's Representative to render a decision by the applicable deadline will be deemed a decision denying the Claim on the date of
the deadline, unless, upon receipt of a Claim, Contractor and University mutually agree to extend the time periods provided herein, or
unless otherwise extended by law. The decision of University's Representative will be final and binding unless appealed in accordance
with Articles 4.5.2, 4.6, and 4.7. The University's Representative's decision on a Claim or dispute will include a written statement both
identifying all disputed and undisputed portions of the Claim and substantially including the following:
“This is a decision under Article 4.5 of the General Conditions of your contract. If you are dissatisfied with the decision, and if
you complied with the procedural requirements for asserting claims specified in Article 4 of the General Conditions of your
contract, you may have the right to demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of any
remaining issues in dispute, following which, if still dissatisfied, you may demand in writing a further resolution via nonbinding
mediation, after which you have the right to arbitrate or litigate this decision. If you fail to take appropriate action within 30 days
of the date of this decision, the decision shall become final and binding and not subject to further appeal.”
4.5.2 If either Contractor or University disputes University’s Representative’s decision on a Claim, then, within 30 days after the
decision of University’s Representative on the Claim, or, if no decision has been issued, within 30 days from the date of the applicable


deadline in Article 4.5.1 for University Representative to render a decision, such party (the “Disputing Party”) must provide written notice
demanding an informal conference to meet and confer. University shall schedule the conference within 30 days upon receipt of the
notice demanding an informal conference. The parties will attempt in good faith to resolve any controversy or Claim arising out of or
relating to this Contract by negotiation at the conference.
4.6 MEDIATION
4.6.1 Within 10 business days following the informal conference to meet and confer stated in Article 4.5.2, if the Claim or any portion
of the Claim remains in dispute, the University shall provide a written statement identifying the disputed and undisputed portions of the
Claim. Within 30 days of receipt of the statement, if either Contractor or University disputes any portion of the Claim, then the Disputing
Party must provide written notice to the non-disputing party demanding non-binding mediation. The Contractor and the University shall
share the associated costs equally and shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days. If the parties cannot agree upon a
mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the
disputed portion of the Claim, with each party bearing the fees and costs of its respective mediator. Mediation shall include, but not be
limited to, neutral evaluation, a dispute review board, or other negotiation or evaluation through an independent third party or board. The
Contractor and the University may mutually agree to waive any individual mediation in writing and proceed to arbitration or litigation
pursuant to this Contract.
4.7 LITIGATION AND ARBITRATION
4.7.1 Either party may provide a written notice of its election to arbitrate or provide written notice of its election to litigate the Claim
within 30 days after the mediation pursuant to Article 4.6.1, or, if the parties mutually agreed in writing to waive mediation, within 30 days
after the agreement is signed by both parties.
4.7.2 If a notice of election to arbitrate or litigate is not given by either party within 30 days pursuant to Article 4.7.1, University's
Representative's decision on the Claim will be final and binding and not subject to appeal or challenge.
4.7.3 If the Disputing Party gives timely notice of its election to arbitrate the University's Representative's decision on a Claim,
Disputing Party shall have the right, within 120 days after a Notice of Completion, or a Notice of Cessation, as applicable, is filed for the
Contract, to make a demand for arbitration in accordance with Article 4.7. Failure to perfect a Claim for which a timely election to
arbitrate has been made by the timely filing of a demand for arbitration and timely payment of all applicable and required fees to the
American Arbitration Association (“AAA”) shall result in the University’s Representative’s decision on said Claim becoming final and
binding and not subject to appeal or challenge. If the Disputing Party makes a timely demand for arbitration, and the amount of the
Claim in question, when combined with all other Claims, if any, which are the subject of previously filed demands for arbitration that have
not been resolved by settlement or arbitration award, is $100,000 or more, then the other party may elect to litigate all such Claims by
filing a written notice with the AAA within 30 days after its receipt of notice from the AAA of the Disputing Party's demand for arbitration of
the Claim that raises the total amount of Claims subject to arbitration to $100,000 or more. If the other party fails to give notice of its
election to litigate within such 30-day period, it shall be deemed to have consented to arbitration and waived the right to litigate. If after
commencement of arbitration the amount of unresolved Claims in arbitration are allowed to be increased to $100,000 or more, through
an AAA-allowed amendment or otherwise, either party may elect to litigate within 30 days following the date that the electing party first
receives written notification from the AAA that total Claims in arbitration equal or exceed $100,000. If neither party gives notice of its
election to litigate within such 30-day period as applicable, then both parties shall be deemed to have consented to arbitration and
waived the right to litigate..
4.7.4 A demand for arbitration pursuant to Article 4.7.3 shall include a copy of the Claim presented to University’s Representative
pursuant to Article 4.4, a copy of the decision of University's Representative pursuant to Article 4.5, if any, a copy of the University’s
written statement identifying the portion of the Claim that remained in dispute following the informal conference pursuant to Article 4.6.1,
and a summary of the remaining portions of the Claim in dispute. The demand shall state the amount in controversy, if any, and state
the remedy sought. The demand shall identify the University’s Responsible Administrator as the representative of the responding party
and the Office of the General Counsel as counsel for the responding party. The demand shall be filed with the AAA and shall not be
deemed to have been made until all applicable fees have been paid to the AAA by the demanding party. Copies of the demand and
attachments shall be sent to University's Responsible Administrator as the representative of the responding party and the University’s
Office of General Counsel as attorney for the responding party, at the addresses set forth in the Project Directory, at the time the
demand for arbitration is initiated with the AAA.
4.7.5 Except as modified by this Article 4.7, arbitration shall be initiated and conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of the AAA then in effect. The following additional modifications shall be made to the aforesaid AAA rules:
.1 Civil discovery shall be permitted for the production of documents and taking of depositions. Other discovery may
be permitted at the discretion of the arbitrator. All disputes regarding discovery shall be decided by the arbitrator.
.2 University's Representative and/or University's consultants, shall if required by agreement with University, upon
demand by University join in and be bound by the Arbitration. University's Representative and University's
consultants will have the same rights in any arbitration proceeding as are afforded by the AAA rules to Contractor
and University.
.3 Contractor's sureties shall be bound by any arbitration award and may join in any arbitration proceeding.
.4 Except as provided in Articles 4.7.5.2.2. and 4.7.25.3 above, no Subcontractor or other person shall have a right or
obligation to join in or be a party to any arbitration proceeding provided for in this Article 4 either directly, by joinder,
by consolidation or actions, by counterclaim or crossclaim, or otherwise without the express written consent of
University, Contractor, and the joining party.
.5 If more than one demand for arbitration is made by a party with respect to Claims referred to University's
Representative, all such Claims shall be consolidated into a single arbitration unless the parties otherwise agree in
writing.
.6 If total Claims are less than $50,000, the AAA expedited procedures as modified by this Article 4 shall apply. If total
Claims are between $50,000 and $100,000 they shall be heard by a single arbitrator who shall be an attorney. If


total Claims are in excess of $100,000 and are submitted to arbitration, either by agreement or by failure to elect
litigation the controversy shall be heard by a panel of three arbitrators, one of which shall be an attorney.
.7 No arbitrator shall be appointed and no discovery may be commenced prior to the date of Final Completion unless
University and Contractor otherwise agree.
.8 The exclusive forum for determining arbitrability shall be the Superior Court of the State of California. The AAA shall
not submit to any arbitrator any matter concerning the arbitrability of the dispute if the arbitrability is contested.
.9 If the expedited procedures of the AAA are applicable, the AAA shall submit simultaneously to each party an
identical list of 7 proposed arbitrators drawn from the National Panel of Commercial Arbitrators, and each party may
strike 3 names from the list on a peremptory basis and return the list to the AAA within 10 days from the date of
receipt.
.10 Except as provided herein, the arbitration shall be conducted and enforced under California law, including the
California Arbitration Act (California Code of Civil Procedure section 1280 and following). The Federal Arbitration
Act shall not apply to the arbitration.
4.7.6 Unless University and Contractor otherwise agree in writing, the arbitration decision shall be binding upon the parties, made
under and in accordance with the laws of the State of California, supported by substantial evidence, and in writing. If the total of all
Claims or cross Claims submitted to arbitration is in excess of $50,000, the award shall contain the basis for the decision, findings of fact,
and conclusions of law. Any arbitration award shall be subject to confirmation, vacation, or correction under the procedures and on the
grounds specified in the California Code of Civil Procedure including without limitation Section 1296. The expenses and fees of the
arbitrators and the administrative fees of the AAA shall be divided among the parties equally. Each party shall pay its own counsel fees,
witness fees, and other expenses incurred for its own benefit.
4.7.7 University may, but is not required, to assert as a counterclaim any matter arising out of the claims asserted by Contractor in
the arbitration. University’s failure to assert any such counterclaim in an arbitration shall be without prejudice to the University’s right to
assert the counterclaim in litigation or other proceeding.
4.7.8 Any litigation shall be filed in the Superior Court of the State of California for the County in which the contract was to be
performed.
4.8 WAIVER
4.8.1 A waiver of or failure by University or University's Representative to enforce any requirement in this Article 4 in connection with
any Claim shall not constitute a waiver of, and shall not preclude University or University's Representative from enforcing such
requirements in connection with any other Claims.
4.8.2 Contractor agrees and understands that no oral approval, either express or implied, of any Claim shall be binding upon
University unless and until such approval is ratified by execution of a written Change Order.
ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.1.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall submit in writing, prior to entering into subcontract
agreements, the names and addresses of all Subcontractors proposed for the Work that were not previously listed in Contractor's Bid.
5.1.2 Any Subcontractor may be disqualified if University or University's Representative determines that such Subcontractor fails to
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents or for any other reason.
5.1.3 In accordance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act, nothing herein shall be deemed to entitle Contractor,
without the approval of University, to substitute other subcontractors for those named in Contractor's List of Subcontractors and List of
Changes in Subcontractors Due to Alternates contained in the completed Bid Form; and, except with such approval, no such substitution
shall be made.
5.1.4 Except as hereinafter provided, any increase in the cost of the Work resulting from the replacement or substitution of a
Subcontractor, as required by University or University's Representative pursuant to Article 5.1.1 shall be borne solely by Contractor and
Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time on account of such replacement or
substitution.
5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.2.1 Any part of the Work performed for Contractor by a first-tier Subcontractor shall be pursuant to a written subcontract. Each
such subcontract shall require the Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to
Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which
Contractor assumes towards University by the Contract Documents, and to perform such portion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Each such subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of University under the Contract Documents, with
respect to the Work to be performed by Subcontractor, so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Contractor shall
cause each such subcontract to expressly include the following requirements:
.1 Subcontractor waives all rights that Subcontractor may have against University for damages caused by
fire or other perils covered by builder's risk property insurance carried by Contractor or University, except
for such rights Subcontractor may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by University under Article
11.
.2 University and entities and agencies designated by University will have access to and the right to audit
and the right to copy at University's cost all of Subcontractor's books, records, contracts, correspondence,


instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, purchase orders, and memoranda relating to the Work.
Subcontractor shall preserve all such records and other items for a period of at least 3 years after Final
Completion.
.3 Subcontractor recognizes the rights of University under Article 5.3, Contingent Assignment of
Subcontracts, and agrees, upon notice from University that University has elected to accept said
assignment and to retain Subcontractor pursuant to the terms of the subcontract, to complete the
unperformed obligations under the subcontract and, if requested by University, to execute a written
agreement confirming that Subcontractor is bound to University under the terms of the subcontract.
5.2.2 Upon the request of University, Contractor shall promptly furnish to University a true, complete, and executed copy of any
subcontract.
5.2.3 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and
University, except when, and only to the extent that, University elects to accept the assignment of the subcontract with such
Subcontractor pursuant to Article 5.3, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts.
5.3 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
5.3.1 Contractor hereby assigns to University all its interest in first-tier subcontracts now or hereafter entered into by Contractor for
performance of any part of the Work. The assignment will be effective upon acceptance by University in writing and only as to those
subcontracts which University designates in writing. University may accept said assignment at any time during the course of the Work
and prior to Final Completion in the event of a suspension or termination of Contractor's rights under the Contract Documents. Such
assignment is part of the consideration to University for entering into the Contract with Contractor and may not be withdrawn prior to
Final Completion.
ARTICLE 6
CONSTRUCTION BY UNIVERSITY OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 University reserves the right to award separate contracts for, or to perform with its own forces, construction or operations
related to the Work or other construction or operations at or affecting the Project site, including portions of the Work which have been
deleted by Change Order. Contractor shall cooperate with University's forces and Separate Contractors.
6.1.2 University will provide coordination of the activities of University's forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of
Contractor. Contractor shall participate with University and Separate Contractors in joint review of construction schedules and Project
requirements when directed to do so. Contractor shall make necessary revisions to the Contract Schedule after such joint review.
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.1 Contractor shall afford University and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their
materials and equipment and performance of their activities. Contractor shall connect, schedule, and coordinate its construction and
operations with the construction and operations of University and Separate Contractors as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.2 If a portion of the Work is dependent upon the proper execution or results of other construction or operations by University or
Separate Contractors, Contractor shall inspect such other construction or operations before proceeding with that portion of the Work.
Contractor shall promptly report to University's Representative apparent discrepancies or defects which render the other construction or
operations unsuitable to receive the Work. Unless otherwise directed by University's Representative, Contractor shall not proceed with
the portion of the Work affected until apparent discrepancies or defects have been corrected. Failure of Contractor to so report within a
reasonable time after discovering such discrepancies or defects shall constitute an acknowledgment that the other construction or
operations by University or Separate Contractors is suitable to receive the Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
6.3 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises between Contractor and Separate Contractors as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for
maintaining the Project site and surrounding areas free from waste materials and rubbish, University may clean up and allocate the cost
between those firms it deems to be responsible.
ARTICLE 7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 CHANGES
7.1.1 University may, from time to time, order or authorize additions, deletions, and other changes in the Work by Change Order or
Field Order without invalidating the Contract and without notice to sureties. Absence of such notice shall not relieve such sureties of any
of their obligations to University.
7.1.2 Contractor may request a Change Order under the procedures specified in Article 4.2.
7.1.3 A Field Order may be issued by University, does not require the agreement of Contractor, and shall be valid with or without the
signature of Contractor.
7.1.4 Contractor shall proceed promptly with any changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the relevant Change Order or
Field Order.


7.2 DEFINITIONS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a Contract Document (as shown in the Exhibits) which has been signed by both University and Contractor,
and states their agreement, as applicable, to the following:
.1 A change in the Work, if any.
.2 The amount of an adjustment of the Contract Sum, if any.
.3 The amount of an adjustment of the Contract Time, if any.
.4 A modification to any other Contract term or condition.
7.2.2 A Unilateral Change Order may be issued by University, without Contractor' signature, where University determines that a
change in the Work requires an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time, even though no agreement has been reached
between University and Contractor with regard to such change in the Work.
7.2.3 A Field Order (as shown in the Exhibits) is a Contract Document issued by University that orders Contractor to perform Work.
A Field Order may, but need not, constitute a change in the Work and may, but need not, entitle Contractor to an adjustment of the
Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
7.3.1 Contractor shall provide a Change Order Request and Cost Proposal pursuant to Article 4.2 and this Article 7.3 of the General
Conditions. Adjustments of the Contract Sum resulting from Extra Work and Deductive Work shall be determined using one of the
methods described in this Article 7.3. Adjustments of the Contract Time shall be subject to the provisions in Article 8. Contractor's
obligation to provide Cost Proposals shall be subject to the following:
.1 The obligation of Contractor to provide Cost Proposals is not Extra Work, and shall not entitle Contractor to an
adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
.2 The failure of Contractor to timely provide a Cost Proposal pursuant to Article 4.2 and this Article 7.3.1 is a material
breach of the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in implementing a change for which Contractor
failed to timely provide a Cost Proposal consistent with the requirements of Article 4.2 and this Article 7.3.1.
7.3.2 The term "Cost of Extra Work" as used in this Article 7.3 shall mean actual costs incurred or to be incurred by Contractor and
each Subcontractor regardless of tier involved, to the extent not otherwise disallowed under Article 7.3.3, and shall be limited to the
following (to the extent Contractor demonstrates that the costs are both reasonable and actually incurred, if such costs have been
incurred):
.1 Straight-time wages or salaries for employees employed at the Project site, or at fabrication sites off the
Project site, incurred as a result of the performance of the Extra Work.
.2 Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes for employees employed at the Project site, or at fabrication sites off the
Project site, incurred as a result of the performance of the Extra Work.
.3 Overtime wages or salaries, specifically authorized in writing by University's Representative, for
employees employed at the Project site, or at fabrication sites off the Project site, incurred as a result of
the performance of the Extra Work.
.4 Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes for overtime Work specifically authorized in writing by University's
Representative, for employees employed at the Project site, or at fabrication sites off the Project site,
incurred as a result of the performance of the Extra Work.
.5 Costs of materials and consumable items which are furnished and incorporated into the Extra Work, as
approved by University's Representative. Such costs shall be charged at the lowest price available to
Contractor but in no event shall such costs exceed competitive costs obtainable from other
subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, and distributors in the area of the Project site. All discounts,
rebates, and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus materials and consumable items shall accrue to
University and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.
.6 Sales taxes on the costs of materials and consumable items which are incorporated into and used in the
performance of the Extra Work pursuant to Article 7.3.2.5 above.
.7 Rental charges for necessary machinery and equipment, whether owned or hired, as authorized in writing
by University's Representative, exclusive of hand tools, used directly in the performance of the Extra
Work. Such rental charges shall not exceed the current Equipment Rental Rates published by the
California Department of Transportation for the area in which the work is performed. Such rental rates are
found at http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/equipmnt.html. Contractor shall attach a copy of said schedule
to the Cost Proposal. The charges for any machinery and equipment shall cease when the use thereof is
no longer necessary for the Extra Work.
.8 Additional costs of royalties and permits due to the performance of the Extra Work.
.9 The cost for Insurance and Bonds shall not exceed 2% of items .1 through .8 above.
University and Contractor may agree upon rates to be charged for any of the items listed in this Article 7.3.2. Such agreed upon rates
shall be subject to audit pursuant to Article 15.7. Contractor shall promptly refund to University any amounts (including associated mark-
ups) in excess of the actual costs of such items.
7.3.3 Cost of Extra Work shall not include any of the following:
.1 Supervision.
.2 Superintendent(s).
.3 Assistant Superintendent(s).
.4 Project Engineer(s).
.5 Project Manager(s).


.6 Scheduler(s).
.7 Estimator(s).
.8 Small tools (Replacement value does not exceed $300).
.9 Office expenses including staff, materials and supplies.
.10 On-site or off-site trailer and storage rental and expenses.
.11 Site fencing.
.12 Utilities including gas, electric, sewer, water, telephone, facsimile, copier equipment.
.13 Data processing personnel and equipment.
.14 Federal, state, or local business income and franchise taxes.
.15 Overhead and Profit.
.16 Costs and expenses of any kind or item not specifically and expressly included in Article 7.3.2.
7.3.4 The term "Contractor Fee" shall mean the full amount of compensation, both direct and indirect (including without limitation all
overhead and profit), to be paid to Contractor for its own Work and the Work of all Subcontractors, for all costs and expenses not
included in the Cost of Extra Work, whether or not such costs and expenses are specifically referred to in Article 7.3.3. The Contractor
Fee shall not be compounded.
The Contractor Fee shall be computed as follows:
.1 Fifteen percent (15%) of the cost of that portion of the Extra Work to be performed by the prime contractor
with its own forces.
.2 Fifteen percent (15%) of the cost of that portion of the Work to be performed by a Subcontractor with its
own forces, plus 5% for the prime contractor. Total combined Contractor and Subcontractor fee shall not
exceed 20%.
.3 Fifteen percent (15%) of the cost of that portion of the Work to be performed by a sub-subcontractor with
its own forces, or any lower tier of Subcontractor, plus 5% for the Subcontractor, plus 5% for the prime
contractor. Total combined Contractor, Subcontractor and all sub-subcontractor fee shall not exceed 25%.
7.3.5 Compensation for Extra Work shall be computed on the basis of one or more of the following:
.1 Where the Work involved is covered by Unit Prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of
the Unit Prices to the quantities of the items involved.
.2 Where Unit Prices are not applicable, a mutually agreed upon lump sum supported by a Cost Proposal
pursuant to 7.3.1.
.3 Where Contractor and University cannot agree upon a lump sum, by Cost of Extra Work plus Contractor
Fee applicable to such Extra Work.
7.3.6 As a condition to Contractor's right to an adjustment of the Contract Sum pursuant to Article 7.3.5.3, Contractor must keep
daily detailed and accurate records itemizing each element of cost and shall provide substantiating records and documentation, including
time cards and invoices. Such records and documentation shall be submitted to University's Representative on a daily basis.
7.3.7 For Work to be deleted by Change Order, the reduction of the Contract Sum shall be computed on the basis of one or more of
the following:
.1 Unit Prices stated in the Contract Documents.
.2 Where Unit Prices are not applicable, a lump sum agreed upon by University and Contractor, based upon
the actual costs which would have been incurred in performing the deleted portions of the Work as
calculated in accordance with Articles 7.3.2 and 7.3.3, supported by a Cost Proposal pursuant to Article
7.3.1.
7.3.8 If any one Change involves both Extra Work and Deleted Work in the same portion of the Work, a Contractor fee will not be
allowed if the deductive cost exceeds the additive cost. If the additive cost exceeds the deductive cost, a Contractor Fee will be allowed
only on the difference between the two amounts.
7.3.9 The Contract Sum will be adjusted for a delay if, and only if, Contractor demonstrates that all of the following three conditions
are met:
.1 Condition Number One: The delay results in an extension of the Contract Time pursuant to Article 8.4.1.
.2 Condition Number Two: The delay is caused solely by one or more of the following:
.1 An error or omission in the Contract Documents; or
.2 University's decision to change the scope of the Work, where such decision is not the
result of any default or misconduct of Contractor; or
.3 University's decision to suspend the Work, where such decision is not the result of
any default or misconduct of Contractor; or
.4 The failure of University (including University acting through its consultants, Design
Professionals, Separate Contractors or University's Representative) to perform any
Contract obligation where the failure to so perform is not the result of any default or
misconduct of Contractor.
.5 A materially differing site condition pursuant to Article 3.17.
.3 Condition Number Three: The delay is not concurrent with a delay caused by an event other than those
listed in Article 7.3.9.2.
7.3.10 For each day of delay that meets all three conditions prescribed in Article 7.3.9 the Contract Sum will be adjusted by the daily
rate included in the Agreement and specifically identified as the rate to be paid to Contractor for Compensable Delays. Pursuant to
Article 9.7.4, said daily rate shall not apply to delays occurring after Substantial Completion.


7.3.11 Except as provided in Articles 7 and 8, Contractor shall have no claim for damage or compensation for any delay, interruption,
hindrance, or disruption.
7.3.12 If for any reason one or more of the conditions prescribed in Article 7.3.9 is held legally unenforceable, the remaining
conditions must be met as a condition to obtaining an adjustment of the Contract Time under Article 7.3.10.
7.4 FIELD ORDERS
7.4.1 Field Orders issued by University Representative shall be subject to the following:
.1 A Field Order may state that it does or does not constitute a change in the Work.
.2 If the Field Order states that it does not constitute a change in the Work and Contractor asserts that the Field Order
constitutes a change in the Work, in order to obtain an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Time for the
Work encompassed by the Field Order, Contractor must follow all procedures set forth in Article 4, starting with the
requirement of submitting a timely Change Order Request within 7 days of Contractor's receipt of the Field Order;
failure to strictly follow those procedures is a bar to any Claim for an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract
Time arising from performance of the Work described in the Field Order.
.3 If the Field Order states that it does constitute a change in the Work, the Work described in the Field Order shall be
considered Extra Work and Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum and Contract Time,
calculated under and subject to Contractor's compliance with the procedures for verifying and substantiating costs
and delays in Articles 7 and 8.
.4 In addition, if the Field Order states that it does constitute a change in the Work, the Field Order may or may not
contain University's estimate of adjustment of Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. If the Field Order contains an
estimate of adjustment of Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Field Order is subject to the following:
.1 Contractor shall not exceed University's estimate of adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time without
prior written notification to University's Representative.
.2 If Contractor asserts that the change in the Work encompassed by the Field Order may entitle Contractor
to an adjustment of Contract Sum or Contract Time in excess of University's estimate, in order not to be
bound by University's estimate Contractor must follow all procedures set forth in Article 4, starting with the
requirement of submitting a timely Change Order Request within 7 days of Contractor's receipt of the Field
Order; failure to strictly follow those procedures is a bar to any Claim for an adjustment of the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, in excess of University's estimate, arising from performance of the Work described
in the Field Order.
7.4.2 Upon receipt of a Field Order, Contractor shall promptly proceed to perform the Work as ordered in the Field Order
notwithstanding any disagreement by Contractor concerning whether the Work is extra.
7.5 VARIATION IN QUANTITY OF UNIT PRICE WORK
7.5.1 University has the right to increase or decrease the quantity of any Unit price item for which an Estimated Quantity is stated in
the Bid Form.
7.6 WAIVER
7.6.1 A waiver of or failure by University or University's Representative to enforce any requirement in this Article 7, including without
limitation the requirements in Articles 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 7.3.11, or 7.3.12 in connection with any adjustment of the Contract Sum,
will not constitute a waiver of, and will not preclude University or University's Representative from enforcing, such requirements in
connection with any other adjustments of the Contract Sum.
7.6.2 Contractor agrees and understands that no oral approval, either express or implied, of any adjustment of the Contract Sum by
University or its agents shall be binding upon University unless and until such approval is ratified by execution of a written Change Order.
ARTICLE 8
CONTRACT TIME
8.1 COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK
8.1.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be set forth in the Notice to Proceed. The date of commencement of the Work
shall not be postponed by the failure of Contractor, Subcontractors, or of persons or firms for whom Contractor is responsible, to act.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 By signing the Agreement:
.1 Contractor represents to University that the Contract Time is reasonable for performing the Work and that
Contractor is able to perform the Work within the Contract Time.
.2 Contractor agrees that University is purchasing the right to have Contractor present on the Project site for
the full duration of the Contract Time, even if Contractor could finish the Contract in less than the Contract
Time.
8.2.2 Contractor shall not, except by agreement or instruction of University in writing, commence operations on the Project site or
elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by Contractor. The dates of commencement and
Final Completion of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.


8.2.3 Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve full completion of the Work within the Contract
Time. If University's Representative determines and notifies Contractor that Contractor's progress is such that Contractor will not achieve
full completion of the Work within the Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately and at no additional cost to University, take all
measures necessary, including working such overtime, additional shifts, Sundays, or holidays as may be required to ensure that the
Work is fully completed within the Contract Time. Upon receipt of such notice from University's representative, Contractor shall
immediately notify University's Representative of all measures to be taken to ensure full completion of the Work within the Contract Time.
Contractor shall reimburse University for any extra costs or expenses (including the reasonable value of any services provided by
University's employees) incurred by University as the result of such measures.
8.3 DELAY
8.3.1 Except and only to the extent provided otherwise in Articles 7 and 8, by signing the Agreement, Contractor agrees:
.1 to bear the risk of delays to the Work; and
.2 that Contractor's bid for the Contract was made with full knowledge of this risk.
In agreeing to bear the risk of delays to the Work, Contractor understands that, except and only to the extent provided otherwise in
Articles 7 and 8, the occurrence of events that delay the Work shall not excuse Contractor from its obligation to achieve Final Completion
of the Work within the Contract Time, and shall not entitle Contractor to an adjustment of the Contract Sum.
8.4 ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONTRACT TIME FOR DELAY
8.4.1 Subject to Article 8.4.2, the Contract Time will be extended for each day of delay for which Contractor demonstrates that all of
the following four conditions have been met; a time extension will not be granted for any day of delay for which Contractor fails to
demonstrate compliance with the four conditions:
.1 Condition Number One: The delay is critical. A delay is critical if and only to the extent it delays a work
activity that cannot be delayed without delaying Final Completion of the Work beyond the Contract Time.
Under this Article 8.4.1.2, if the Contract Schedule shows Final Completion of the Work before expiration
of the Contract Time, a delay is critical if and only to the extent the delay pushes Final Completion of the
Work to a date that is beyond the Contract Time.
.2 Condition Number Two: Within 7 days of the date Contractor discovers or reasonably should discover an
act, error, omission or unforeseen condition or event causing the delay, is likely to have an impact on the
critical path of the Project (even if Contractor has not yet been delayed when Contractor discovers or
reasonably should discover the critical path impact of the act, error, omission or unforeseen condition
giving rise to the delay) Contractor submits both a timely and complete Change Order Request that meets
the requirements of Article 4.2.
.3 Condition Number Three: The delay is not caused by:
.1 A concealed, unforeseen or unknown condition or event except for a materially
differing site condition pursuant to Article 3.17; or
.2 The financial inability, misconduct or default of Contractor, a Subcontractor or
supplier; or
.3 The unavailability of materials or parts.
.4 Condition Number Four: The delay is caused by:
.1 Fire; or
.2 Strikes, boycotts, or like obstructive actions by labor organizations; or
.3 Acts of God (As used herein, "Acts of God" shall include only earthquakes in excess
of a magnitude of 3.5 on the Richter Scale and tidal waves); or
.4 A materially differing site condition pursuant to Article 3.17; or
.5 An error or omission in the Contract; or
.6 University's decision to change the scope of the Work, where such decision is not the
result of any default or misconduct of Contractor; or
.7 University's decision to suspend the Work, where such decision is not the result of
any default or misconduct of Contractor; or
.8 The failure of University (including University acting through its consultants, Design
Professionals, Separate Contractors or University's Representative) to perform any
Contract obligation unless such failure is due to Contractor's default or misconduct; or
.9 “Adverse weather,“ but only for such days of adverse weather, or on-site conditions
caused by adverse weather, that are in excess of the number of days specified in the
Supplementary Conditions. In order for a day to be considered a day of adverse
weather for the purpose of determining whether Contractor is entitled to an
adjustment in Contract Time, both of the following conditions must be met:
.1 the day must be a day in which, as a result of adverse weather, less than
one half day of critical path work is performed by Contractor; and
.2 the day must be identified in the Contract Schedule as a scheduled work
day.
8.4.2 If and only if a delay meets all four conditions prescribed in Article 8.4.1, then a time extension will be granted for each day that
Final Completion of the Work is delayed beyond the Contract Time, subject to the following:
.1 When two or more delays (each of which meet all four conditions prescribed in Article 8.4.1) occur concurrently on
the same day, and each such concurrent delay by itself without consideration of the other delays would be critical,
then all such concurrent delays shall be considered critical. For the purpose of determining whether and to what


extent the Contract Time should be adjusted pursuant to Article 8.4.2, such concurrent critical delays shall be treated
as a single delay for each such day.
.2 Contractor shall be entitled to a time extension for a day of delay that meets all four requirements of Article 8.4.1 if
the delay is concurrent with a delay that does not meet all four conditions of Article 8.4.1.
8.4.3 If for any reason one or more of the four conditions prescribed in Article 8.4.1 is held legally unenforceable, then all remaining
conditions must be met as a condition to obtaining an extension of the Contract Time under Article 8.4.2.
8.5 COMPENSATION FOR DELAY
8.5.1 To the maximum extent allowed by law, any adjustment of the Contract Sum as the result of delays shall be limited to the
amounts specified in Article 7. Such adjustment shall, to the maximum extent allowed by law, constitute payment in full for all delay
related costs (including costs for disruption, interruption and hindrance, general conditions, on and off-site overhead and profit) of
Contractor, its Suppliers and Subcontractors of all tiers and all persons and entities working under or claiming through Contractor in
connection with the Project.
8.5.2 By signing the Agreement, the parties agree that University is buying the right to do any or all of the following, which are
reasonable and within the contemplation of the parties:
.1 To order changes in the Work, regardless of the extent and number of changes, including without
limitation:
.1 Changes to correct errors or omissions, if any, in the Contract Documents.
.2 Changes resulting from University's decision to change the scope of the Work
subsequent to execution of the Contract.
.3 Changes due to unforeseen conditions.
.2 To suspend the Work or any part thereof.
.3 To delay the Work, including without limitation, delays resulting from the failure of University or University's
Representative to timely perform any Contract obligation and delays for University's convenience.
8.6 WAIVER
8.6.1 A waiver of or failure by University or University's Representative to enforce any requirement in this Article 8, including without
limitation the requirements in Article 8.4, in connection with any or all past delays shall not constitute a waiver of, and shall not preclude
University or University's Representative from enforcing, such requirements in connection with any present or future delays.
8.6.2 Contractor agrees and understands that no oral approval, either express or implied, of any time extension by University or its
agents shall be binding upon University unless and until such approval is ratified by execution of a written Change Order.
See Supplementary Conditions
ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 COST BREAKDOWN
9.1.1 Within 10 days after receipt of the Notice of Selection as the apparent lowest responsible Bidder, and with the Agreement,
Contractor shall submit to University's Representative a Cost Breakdown of the Contract Sum in the form contained in the Exhibits. The
Cost Breakdown shall itemize as separate line items the cost of each Work Activity and all associated costs, including but not limited to
warranties, as-built documents, overhead expenses, and the total allowance for profit. Insurance and bonds shall each be listed as
separate line items. The total of all line items shall equal the Contract Sum. The Cost Breakdown, when approved by University's
Representative, shall become the basis for determining the cost of Work performed for Contractor's Applications for Payment.
9.2 PROGRESS PAYMENT
9.2.1 University agrees to pay monthly to Contractor, subject to Article 9.4.3, an amount equal to 95% of the sum of the following:
.1 Cost of the Work in permanent place as of the date of Contractor's Application for Payment.
.2 Plus cost of materials not yet incorporated in the Work, subject to Article 9.3.5.
.3 Less amounts previously paid.
Under this Article 9.2.1, University may but is not required, to pay Contractor more frequently than monthly.
9.2.2 After Substantial Completion and subject to Article 9.4.3, University will make any of the remaining progress payments in full.
9.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 On or before the 10th day of the month or such other date as is established by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall
submit to University's Representative an itemized Application for Payment, for the cost of the Work in permanent place, as approved by
University's Representative, which has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, less amounts previously paid.
The Application for Payment shall be prepared as follows:
.1 Use the form contained in the Exhibits.
.2 Itemize in accordance with the Cost Breakdown.
.3 Include such data substantiating Contractor's right to payment as University's Representative may
reasonably require, such as invoices, certified payrolls, daily time and material records, and, if securities


are deposited in lieu of retention pursuant to Article 9.5, a certification of the market value of all such
securities as of a date not earlier than 5 days prior to the date of the Application for Payment.
.4 Itemize retention.
9.3.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment on account of (1) changes which have not been authorized by
Change Orders or (2) amounts Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor because of a dispute or other reason.
9.3.3 If required by University, an Application for Payment shall be accompanied by (1) a summary showing payments that will be
made to Subcontractors covered by such application and conditional releases upon progress payment or final payment and (2)
unconditional waivers and releases of claims and stop payment notices, in the form contained in the Exhibits, from each Subcontractor
listed in the preceding Application for Payment covering sums disbursed pursuant to that preceding Application for Payment.
9.3.4 Contractor warrants that, upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work, for which Certificates for Payment have been
previously issued and payment has been received from University, shall be free and clear of all claims, stop payment notices, security
interests, and encumbrances in favor of Contractor, Subcontractors, or other persons or firms entitled to make claims by reason of
having provided labor, materials, or equipment relating to the Work.
9.3.5 At the sole discretion of University, University's Representative may approve for inclusion in the Application for Payment the
cost of materials not yet incorporated in the Work but already delivered and suitably stored either at the Project site or at some other
appropriate location acceptable to University's Representative. In such case, Contractor shall furnish evidence satisfactory to University's
Representative (1) of the cost of such materials and (2) that such materials are under the exclusive control of Contractor. Only materials
to be incorporated in the Work will be considered for payment. Any payment shall not be construed as acceptance of such materials nor
relieve Contractor from sole responsibility for the care and protection of such materials; nor relieve Contractor from risk of loss to such
materials from any cause whatsoever; nor relieve Contractor from its obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract;
nor act as a waiver of the right of University to require fulfillment of all terms of the Contract. Nothing contained within this Article 9.3.5
shall be deemed to obligate University to agree to payment for any non-incorporated materials or any part thereof, payment being in the
sole and absolute discretion of University.
9.4 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
9.4.1 If Contractor has submitted an Application for Payment in accordance with Article 9.3, University's Representative shall, not
later than 5 working days after the date of receipt of the Application for Payment, issue to University, with a copy to Contractor, a
Certificate for Payment for such amount as University's Representative determines to be properly due.
9.4.2 If any such Application for Payment is determined not to be in accordance with Article 9.3, University will inform Contractor as
soon as practicable, but not later than 5 working days after receipt. Thereafter, Contractor shall have 3 days to revise and resubmit such
Application for Payment; otherwise University's Representative may issue a Certificate for Payment in the amount that University's
Representative determines to be properly due without regard to such Application for Payment.
9.4.3 Approval of all or any part of an Application for Payment may be withheld, a Certificate for Payment may be withheld, and all or
part of a previous Certificate for Payment may be nullified and that amount withheld from a current Certificate for Payment on account of
any of the following:
.1 Defective Work not remedied.
.2 Third-party claims against Contractor or University arising from the acts or omissions of Contractor or
Subcontractors.
.3 Stop payment notices.
.4 Failure of Contractor to make timely payments due Subcontractors for material or labor.
.5 A reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the balance of the Contract Sum then unpaid.
.6 Damage to University or Separate Contractor for which Contractor is responsible.
.7 Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; and that the unpaid
balance of the Contract Sum would not be adequate to cover University's damages for the anticipated
delay.
.8 Failure of Contractor to maintain and update as-built documents.
.9 Failure of Contractor to submit schedules or their updates as required by the Contract Documents.
.10 Failure to provide conditional or unconditional releases from any Subcontractor or supplier, if such
waiver(s) have been requested by University's Representative.
.11 Performance of Work by Contractor without properly processed Shop Drawings.
.12 Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with Article 5 of the Agreement.
.13 Failure to provide updated Reports of Subcontractor Information and Self-Certifications, as applicable.
.14 Failure to provide a Final Distribution of Contract Dollars with final Application for Payment.
.15 Any other failure of Contractor to perform its obligations under the Contract Documents.
9.4.4 Subject to the withholding provisions of Article 9.4.3, University will pay Contractor the amount set forth in the Certificate for
Payment no later than 10 days after the issuance of the Certificate for Payment.
9.4.5 Neither University nor University's Representative will have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a
Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.
9.4.6 Neither a Certificate for Payment nor a progress payment made by University will constitute acceptance of Defective Work.
9.5 DEPOSIT OF SECURITIES IN LIEU OF RETENTION AND DEPOSIT OF RETENTION INTO ESCROW
9.5.1 At the request and expense of Contractor, a substitution of securities may be made for any monies retained by University
under Article 9.2 to ensure performance under the Contract Documents. Securities equivalent in value to the retention amount required
by the Contract Documents for each Certificate for Payment shall be deposited by Contractor with a state or federally chartered bank in


the State of California ("Escrow Agent"), which shall hold such securities pursuant to the escrow agreement referred to in Article 9.5.3
until retention is due in accordance with Article 9.8. Securities shall be valued as often as conditions of the securities market warrant, but
in no case less than once per month. Contractor shall deposit additional securities so that the current market value of the total of all
deposited securities shall be at least equal to the total required amount of retention.
9.5.2 Alternatively to Article 9.5.1, and at the request and expense of Contractor, University will deposit retention directly with
Escrow Agent. Contractor may direct the investment of such deposited retention into interest bearing accounts or securities, and such
deposits or securities shall be held by Escrow Agent upon the same terms provided for securities deposited by Contractor. Contractor
and its surety shall bear the risk of failure of the Escrow Agent selected.
9.5.3 A prerequisite to the substitution of securities in lieu of retention or the deposit of retention into escrow shall be the execution
by Contractor, University, and Escrow Agent of an Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retention and Deposit of
Retention in the form contained in the Exhibits. Contractor shall submit the Selection of Retention Options and the Escrow Agreement for
Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retention and Deposit of Retention not later than the date when 50% of the Work has been completed.
The terms of such escrow agreement are incorporated into the requirements of this Article 9.5.
9.6 BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY
9.6.1 University reserves the right, at its option and convenience, to occupy or otherwise make use of any part of the Work at any
time prior to Substantial Completion or Final Completion upon 10 days' notice to Contractor. Such occupancy or use is herein referred to
as "Beneficial Occupancy." Beneficial Occupancy shall be subject to the following conditions:
.1 University's Representative will make an inspection of the portion of the Project to be beneficially occupied
and prepare a list of items to be completed or corrected prior to Final Completion. Prior to Beneficial
Occupancy, University will issue a Certificate of Beneficial Occupancy on University's form.
.2 Beneficial Occupancy by University shall not be construed by Contractor as an acceptance by University
of that portion of the Work which is to be occupied.
.3 Beneficial Occupancy by University shall not constitute a waiver of existing claims of University or
Contractor against each other.
.4 Contractor shall provide, in the areas beneficially occupied and on a 24 hour and 7 day week basis as
required, utility services, heating, and cooling for systems which are in operable condition at the time of
Beneficial Occupancy. All responsibility for the operation and maintenance of equipment shall remain with
Contractor while the equipment is so operated. Contractor shall submit to University an itemized list of
each piece of equipment so operated with the date operation commences.
.5 The Guarantee to Repair Periods, as defined in Article 12.2, will commence upon the occupancy date
stated in the Certificate of Beneficial Occupancy except that the Guarantee to Repair Periods for that part
of equipment or systems that serve portions of the Work for which University has not taken Beneficial
Occupancy or issued a Certificate of Substantial Completion shall not commence until University has
taken Beneficial Occupancy for that portion of the Work or has issued a Certificate of Substantial
Completion with respect to the entire Project.
.6 University will pay all normal operating and maintenance costs resulting from its use of equipment in areas
beneficially occupied.
.7 University will pay all utility costs which arise out of the Beneficial Occupancy.
.8 Contractor shall not be responsible for providing security in areas beneficially occupied.
.9 University will use its best efforts to prevent its Beneficial Occupancy from interfering with the conduct of
Contractor's remaining Work.
.10 Contractor shall not be required to repair damage caused by University in its Beneficial Occupancy.
.11 Except as provided in this Article 9.6, there shall be no added cost to University due to Beneficial
Occupancy.
.12 Contractor shall continue to maintain all insurance required by the Contract in full force and effect.
9.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.7.1 "Substantial Completion" means the stage in the progress of the Work, as determined by University's Representative, when
the Work is complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents except only for completion of minor items which do not impair
University's ability to occupy and fully utilize the Work for its intended purpose and a Certificate of Occupancy has been issued by
University.
9.7.2 When Contractor gives notice to University's Representative that the Work is substantially complete, unless University's
Representative determines that the Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant an inspection to determine Substantial Completion,
University's Representative will inspect the Work. If University's Representative determines that the Work is not substantially completed,
University's Representative will prepare and give to Contractor a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected before
establishing Substantial Completion. Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an
item on such list does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon
notification that the items on the list are completed or corrected, as applicable, University's Representative will make an inspection to
determine whether the Work is substantially complete. Costs for additional inspection by University's Representative shall be deducted
from any monies due and payable to Contractor.
9.7.3 When University's Representative determines that the Work is substantially complete, University's Representative will arrange
for inspection by University's Building Official and other officials, as appropriate, for the purpose of issuing a Certificate of Occupancy.
After a Certificate of Occupancy has been issued by University, University's Representative will prepare a Certificate of Substantial
Completion on University's form as contained in the Exhibits, which, when signed by University, shall establish the date of Substantial
Completion and the responsibilities of University and Contractor for security, maintenance, utilities, insurance, and damage to the Work.


University's Representative will prepare and furnish to Contractor a comprehensive “punch list” of items to be completed or corrected
prior to Final Completion.
9.7.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Guarantee to Repair Period for the Work covered
by the Certificate of Substantial Completion, shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work except that Substantial
Completion shall not commence the Guarantee to Repair Period for any equipment or systems that:
.1 Are not operational (equipment or systems shall not be considered operational if they cannot be used to
provide the intended service); or
.2 Are not accepted by University.
The Guarantee to Repair Period for equipment or systems which become operational and accepted subsequent to Substantial
Completion will begin on the date of their written acceptance by University.
9.7.5 The daily rate included in the Agreement and specifically identified as the rate to be paid to Contractor for Compensable
Delays shall not apply to any delays occurring after the Work is substantially completed.
9.8 FINAL COMPLETION, FINAL PAYMENT, AND RELEASE OF RETENTION
9.8.1 Upon receipt of notice from Contractor that the Work is ready for final inspection, University's Representative will make such
inspection. Final Completion shall be when University's Representative determines that the Work is fully completed and in accordance
with the Contract Documents, including without limitation, satisfaction of all "punch list" items, and determines that a Certificate of
Occupancy has been issued by the University. University will file a Notice of Completion within 15 days after Final Completion. After
receipt of the final Application for Payment, if University's Representative determines that Final Completion has occurred, University's
Representative will issue the final Certificate for Payment.
9.8.2 Final payment and retention shall be released to Contractor, as set forth in Article 9.8.3, after:
.1 Contractor submits the final Application for Payment and all submittals required in accordance with Article 9.3;
.2 Contractor submits all guarantees and warranties procured by Contractor from Subcontractors, all operating
manuals for equipment installed in the Project, as-built documents, and all other submittals required by the Contract
Documents;
.3 Contractor submits the Final Distribution of Contract Dollars in the form contained in the Exhibits; and
.4 University's Representative issues the final Certificate for Payment.
At its sole discretion, after Final Completion, University may waive the requirement that Contractor submit a final Application for Payment
before making final payment and/or release of retention to Contractor.
9.8.3 Final payment shall be paid not more than 10 days after University's Representative issues the final Certificate for Payment.
Retention shall be released to Contractor 35 days after the filing of the Notice of Completion.
9.8.4 Acceptance of final payment by Contractor shall constitute a waiver of all claims, except claims for retention and claims
previously made in writing and identified by Contractor as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1 Contractor shall take adequate precautions for safety of and shall provide adequate protection to prevent damage, injury, or
loss to the following:
.1 Employees involved in the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby.
.2 The Work in place and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off
the Project site, under care, custody, or control of Contractor or Subcontractors.
.3 Other property at the Project site and adjoining property.
10.2.2 Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Work, adequate safeguards for
safety and protection, including providing adequate lighting and ventilation, posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations, and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
10.2.3 When use or storage of explosives, other hazardous materials, equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of
the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and carry on such activities only under the supervision of properly qualified
personnel.
10.2.4 Contractor shall designate a responsible member of Contractor's organization at the Project site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. That person shall be the Superintendent, unless otherwise designated by Contractor in writing to University and
University's Representative.
10.2.5 Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work or the Project site to be loaded so as to endanger the safety of persons
or property.


10.3 EMERGENCIES
10.3.1 In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act to prevent or minimize damage, injury, or
loss. Contractor shall promptly notify University's Representative, which notice may be oral followed by written confirmation, of the
occurrence of such an emergency and Contractor's action.
ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
11.1.1 Contractor shall, at its expense, purchase and maintain in full force and effect such insurance as will protect itself and
University from claims, such as for bodily injury, wrongful death, and property damage, which may arise out of or result from the Work
required by the Contract Documents, whether such Work is done by Contractor, by any Subcontractor, by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. The amounts of such insurance and any additional
insurance requirements are specified in the Supplementary Conditions. See Article 3.21 regarding the scope and extent of Contractor's
liability for and repair of damaged Work.
11.1.2 The following policies and coverages shall be furnished by Contractor:
.1 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE subject to terms no less broad than the Insurance
Services Office’s (ISO) form CG 0001 (2004 or later edition), or a substitute form providing coverage at
least as broad as the ISO form specified, covering all Work done by or on behalf of Contractor and
providing insurance for bodily injury, wrongful death, personal injury, property damage, and contractual
liability. There shall be no limitations or exclusions of coverage beyond those contained in the standard
ISO form CG 0001 (2004 or later edition). Except with respect to bodily injury and property damage
included within the products and completed operations hazards, the aggregate limit shall apply separately
to Work required of Contractor by these Contract Documents. Contractor shall continue to maintain
Products/Completed Operations liability insurance coverage for a minimum completed operations period
of 10 year(s) or the applicable Statute of Repose as provided by the law of the jurisdiction where the
project is located as shown in the policy(ies), whichever is less. All terms and conditions of such coverage
shall be maintained during this completed operations period, including the required minimum coverage
limits and the requirement to provide the University with coverage as an additional insured for completed
operations as specified under this Article 11.1 and the Supplementary Conditions.
.2 BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE subject to terms no less broad than the Insurance
Services Office’s (ISO) form CA 0001 (1990 or later edition), or a substitute form providing coverage at
least as broad as the ISO form specified, covering owned, hired, leased, and non-owned automobiles
used by or on behalf of Insured, and providing liability insurance for bodily injury and property damage
arising from the use or operation of such auto(s) with a minimum combined single limit of not less than
$1,000,000 per accident. The minimum limits required may be satisfied by combination of primary and
umbrella/excess policies. The Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance shall be provided by Contractor
for all on site and off site Work.
.3 WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE as required by Federal and
State of California law. Contractor shall also require all of its Subcontractors to maintain this insurance
coverage.
11.1.3 The coverages required under this Article 11 shall not in any way limit the liability of Contractor.
11.1.4 Contractor’s Certificates of Insurance, executed by a duly authorized representative of each broker of record or each insurer
as evidence of the insurance required by these Contract Documents and on the form contained in the Exhibits, shall be submitted by
Contractor to University prior to the commencement of Work by the Contractor. The Certificates of Insurance shall provide for no
cancellation or modification of coverage without prior written notice to University, in accordance with policy provisions.
11.1.5 In the event Contractor does not comply with these insurance requirements, University may, at its option, provide insurance
coverage to protect University; and the cost of such insurance shall be paid by Contractor and may be deducted from the Contract Sum.
11.1.6 Contractor's insurance as required by Article 11.1.2, shall, by endorsement to the policies, include the following:
.1 The Regents of the University of California, The University of California, University, and each of their
Representatives, consultants, officers, agents, employees, and each of their Representative's consultants,
regardless of whether or not identified in the Contract Documents or to the Contractor in writing, will be
included as additional insureds on the Contractor’s General Liability insurance for and relating to the Work
to be performed by the Contractor and Subcontractors. Additional Insured provision or endorsement shall
be at least as broad as the CG 20 07 04 in combination with the CG 20 37 07 04 (or earlier versions of
CG 20 10 and CG 20 37 or Form B - CG 20 10 11 85 by itself), as published by Insurance Services
Offices (ISO) and shall be included with Certificates of Insurance. The additional insured requirement shall
not apply to Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability insurance.
Further, the amount of insurance available to the University shall be for the full amount of the loss up to
the available policy limits and shall not be limited to any minimum requirements stated in the Contract
Documents.


.2 University, University's consultants, University's Representative, and University's Representative's
consultants will not by reason of their inclusion as insureds incur liability to the insurance carriers for
payment of premiums for such insurance.
.3 Coverage provided is primary and is not in excess of or contributing with any insurance or self-insurance
maintained by University, University's consultants, University's Representative, and University's
Representative's consultants. This provision, however, shall only apply as per the stipulations of Article
11.1.6.1.
11.1.7 The form and substance of all insurance policies required to be obtained by Contractor shall be subject to approval by
University. All policies required by Articles 11.1.2.1, 11.1.2.2, and 11.1.2.3 shall be issued by companies with ratings and financial
classifications as specified in the Supplementary Conditions.
11.1.8 Contractor shall, by mutual agreement with University, furnish any additional insurance as may be required by University.
Contractor shall provide Certificates of Insurance evidencing such additional insurance.
11.1.9 The Certificate of Insurance shall show (1) all companies affording coverage and (2) the name of the insured exactly in the
manner as shown on the Bid Form. The name of the insured must be the name under which the entity is licensed by the Contractors
State License Board.
11.1.10 If insurance company refuses to use the Certificate of Insurance form as contained in the Exhibits, it must provide a Certificate
of Insurance evidencing compliance with this Article including those provisions noted under DESCRIPTION OF
OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES section of the Certificate of Insurance Exhibit by including an endorsement to its Certificate of
Insurance form covering those noted provisions exactly as they appear on the Certificate of Insurance Exhibit.
11.1.11 At the request of University, Contractor shall submit to University copies of the policies obtained by Contractor.
11.2.1 If and only if the Contract Sum exceeds $300,000 at the time of award, University will provide its standard builder's risk
property insurance, subject to the deductibles, terms and conditions, exclusions, and limitations as contained in the provisions of the
policy. A copy of University's standard builder's risk property insurance policy is available at University's Facility office. In addition, a
summary of the provisions of the policy is included as an Exhibit to the Contract. Contractor agrees that University's provision of its
standard builder's risk property insurance policy meets University's obligation to provide builder's risk property insurance under the
Contract and, in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the policy and any summary or description of the provisions contained
herein or otherwise, the provisions of the policy shall control and shall be conclusively presumed to fulfill University's obligation to provide
such insurance. The proceeds under such insurance policies taken out by University insuring the Work and materials will be payable to
University and Contractor as their respective interests, from time to time, may appear. Contractor shall be responsible for the deductible
amount in the event of a loss. In addition, nothing in this Article 11.2 shall be construed to relieve Contractor of full responsibility for loss
of or damage to materials not incorporated in the Work, and for Contractor's tools and equipment used to perform the Work, whether on
the Project site or elsewhere, or to relieve Contractor of its responsibilities referred to under this Article 11. Materials incorporated in the
Work, as used in this Article 11.2, shall mean materials furnished while in transit to, stored at, or in permanent place at the Project site.
11.2.2 Insurance policies referred to under this Article 11.2 shall:
.1 Include a provision that the policies are primary and do not participate with nor are excess over any other
valid collectible insurance carried by Contractor.
.2 Include a waiver of subrogation against Contractor, its Subcontractors, agents, and employees.
11.2.3 Builder's risk insurance coverage under this Article 11.2 will expire on the date of Final Completion recited in a Notice of
Completion filed pursuant to Article 9.8.1. Should a Notice of Completion be filed more than 10 days after the date of Final Completion,
the date of Final Completion recited in the Notice of Completion will govern.
11.3 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.3.1 Contractor shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract (Performance Bond) and payment of
obligations arising thereunder (Payment Bond) on the forms contained in Exhibits 3 and 2.
11.3.2 The Payment Bond and Performance Bond shall each be in the amount of the Contract Sum.
11.3.3 The Payment Bond and Performance Bond shall be in effect on the date the Contract is signed by University.
11.3.4 Contractor shall promptly furnish such additional security as may be required by University to protect its interests and those
interests of persons or firms supplying labor or materials to the Work. Contractor shall furnish supplemental Payment and Performance
Bonds each in the amount of the current Contract Sum at the request of University.
11.3.5 Surety companies used by Contractor shall be, on the date the Contract is signed by University, an admitted surety insurer (as
defined in the California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120).
11.3.6 The premiums for the Payment Bond and Performance Bond shall be paid by Contractor.


ARTICLE 12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to University's Representative's request or direction, or contrary to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by University's Representative, be uncovered for University's
Representative's observation and be replaced at Contractor's expense without adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered, which is not required by the Contract Documents to be observed or inspected prior
to its being covered and which University's Representative has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered,
University's Representative may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered and replaced by Contractor. If such Work is in
accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering and replacing the Work shall be added to the Contract Sum by
Change Order; and if the uncovering and replacing of the Work extends the Contract Time, an appropriate adjustment of the Contract
Time shall be made by Change Order. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay such costs
and shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
12.2 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK AND GUARANTEE TO REPAIR PERIOD
12.2.1 The term "Guarantee to Repair Period" means a period of 1 year, unless a longer period of time is specified, commencing as
follows:
.1 For any Work not described as incomplete in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the date of
Substantial Completion.
.2 For space beneficially occupied or for separate systems fully utilized prior to Substantial Completion
pursuant to Article 9.6, from the first date of such Beneficial Occupancy or actual use, as established in a
Certificate of Beneficial Occupancy.
.3 For all Work other than .1 or .2 above, from the date of Final Completion.
12.2.2 Contractor shall (1) correct Defective Work that becomes apparent during the progress of the Work or during the Guarantee to
Repair Period and (2) replace, repair, or restore to University's satisfaction any other parts of the Work and any other real or personal
property which is damaged or destroyed as a result of Defective Work or the correction of Defective Work. Contractor shall promptly
commence such correction, replacement, repair, or restoration upon notice from University's Representative or University, but in no case
later than 10 days after receipt of such notice; and Contractor shall diligently and continuously prosecute such correction to completion.
Contractor shall bear all costs of such correction, replacement, repair, or restoration, and all losses resulting from such Defective Work,
including additional testing, inspection, and compensation for University's Representative's services and expenses. Contractor shall
perform corrective Work at such times that are acceptable to University and in such a manner as to avoid, to the extent practicable,
disruption to University's activities.
12.2.3 If immediate correction of Defective Work is required for life safety or the protection of property and is performed by University
or Separate Contractors, Contractor shall pay to University all reasonable costs of correcting such Defective Work. Contractor shall
replace, repair, or restore to University's satisfaction any other parts of the Work and any other real or personal property which is
damaged or destroyed as a result of such Defective Work or the correction of such Defective Work.
12.2.4 Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work and materials which are not in accordance with the Contract
Documents and which are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by University.
12.2.5 If Contractor fails to commence correction of Defective Work within 10 days after notice from University or University's
Representative or fails to diligently prosecute such correction to completion, University may correct the Defective Work in accordance
with Article 2.4; and, in addition, University may remove the Defective Work and store salvageable materials and equipment at
Contractor's expense.
12.2.6 If Contractor fails to pay the costs of such removal and storage as required by Articles 12.2.4 and 12.2.5 within 10 days after
written demand, University may, without prejudice to other remedies, sell such materials at auction or at private sale, or otherwise
dispose of such material. Contractor shall be entitled to the proceeds of such sale, if any, in excess of the costs and damages for which
Contractor is liable to University, including compensation for University's Representative's services and expenses. If such proceeds of
sale do not cover costs and damages for which Contractor is liable to University, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by such deficiency.
If there are no remaining payments due Contractor or the remaining payments are insufficient to cover such deficiency, Contractor shall
promptly pay the difference to University.
12.2.7 Contractor's obligations under this Article 12 are in addition to and not in limitation of its warranty under Article 3.4 or any other
obligation of Contractor under the Contract Documents. Enforcement of Contractor's express warranties and guarantees to repair
contained in the Contract Documents shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies University may have
under the Contract Documents or at law or in equity for Defective Work. Nothing contained in this Article 12 shall be construed to
establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations of Contractor under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the
Guarantee to Repair Period relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work and in no way limits either
Contractor's liability for Defective Work or the time within which proceedings may be commenced to enforce Contractor's obligations
under the Contract Documents.


ARTICLE 13
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
13.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR
13.1.1 Subject to Article 13.1.2, Contractor shall have the right to terminate the Contract only upon the occurrence of one of the
following:
.1 Provided that University has not commenced reasonable action to remove any order of a court within the
90 day period, the Work is stopped for 90 consecutive days, through no act or fault of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, or any employee or agent of Contractor or any Subcontractor, due to an issuance of an
order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction or due to an act of government, such as a
declaration of a national emergency making material unavailable.
.2 University fails to perform any material obligation under the Contract and fails to cure such default within
30 days, or University has not commenced to cure such default within 30 days where such cure will
require a reasonable period beyond 30 days and diligently prosecutes the same to completion, after
receipt of notice from Contractor stating the nature of such default(s).
.3 Repeated suspensions by University, other than such suspensions as are agreed to by Contractor under
Article 13.3, which constitute in the aggregate more than 20% of the Contract Time.
13.1.2 Upon the occurrence of one of the events listed in Article 13.1.1, Contractor may, upon 10 days additional notice to University
and University's Representative, and provided that the condition giving rise to Contractor's right to terminate is continuing, terminate the
Contract.
13.1.3 Upon termination by Contractor, University will pay to Contractor the sum determined by Article 13.4.4. Such payment will be
the sole and exclusive remedy to which Contractor is entitled in the event of termination of the Contract by Contractor pursuant to Article
13.1; and Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation or damages and expressly waives the same.
13.2 TERMINATION BY UNIVERSITY FOR CAUSE
13.2.1 University will have the right to terminate the Contract for cause at any time after the occurrence of any of the following events:
.1 Contractor becomes insolvent or files for relief under the bankruptcy laws of the United States.
.2 Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors or fails to pay its debts as the same
become due.
.3 A receiver is appointed to take charge of Contractor's property.
.4 The commencement or completion of any Work activity on the critical path is more than 30 days behind
the date set forth in the Contract Schedule for such Work activity, as a result of an Unexcusable Delay.
For a Contract with a Contract Time of less than 300 days, the 30-day period shall be reduced to the
number of days commensurate with 10% of the Contract Time.
.5 Contractor abandons the Work.
13.2.2 Upon the occurrence of any of the following events, University will have the right to terminate the Contract for cause if
Contractor fails to promptly commence to cure such default and diligently prosecute such cure within 5 days after notice from University,
or within such longer period of time as is reasonably necessary to complete such cure:
.1 Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply skilled supervisory personnel, an adequate
number of properly skilled workers, proper materials, or necessary equipment to prosecute the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
.2 Contractor fails to make prompt payment of amounts properly due Subcontractors after receiving payment
from University.
.3 Contractor disregards Applicable Code Requirements.
.4 Contractor persistently or materially fails to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.5 Contractor is in default of any other material obligation under the Contract Documents.
.6 Contractor persistently or materially fails to comply with applicable safety requirements.
13.2.3 Upon any of the occurrences referred to in Articles 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, University may, at its election and by notice to
Contractor, terminate the Contract and take possession of the Project site and all materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor; accept the assignment of any or all of the subcontracts; and then complete the
Work by any method University may deem expedient. If requested by University, Contractor shall remove any part or all of Contractor's
materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery from the Project site within 7 days of such request; and
if Contractor fails to do so, University may remove or store, and after 90 days sell, any of the same at Contractor's expense.
13.2.4 If the Contract is terminated by University as provided in this Article 13.2, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further
payment until the expiration of 35 days after Final Completion and acceptance of all Work by University.
13.2.5 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of completing the Work, including all additional costs and
expenses made necessary thereby, including costs for University staff time, plus all losses sustained, including any liquidated damages
provided under the Contract Documents, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs, expenses, losses, and liquidated
damages exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, Contractor shall pay such excess to University.
13.2.6 No termination or action taken by University after termination shall prejudice any other rights or remedies of University
provided by law or by the Contract Documents upon such termination; and University may proceed against Contractor to recover all
losses suffered by University.


13.3 SUSPENSION BY UNIVERSITY FOR CONVENIENCE
13.3.1 University may, at any time and from time to time, without cause, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend, delay, or interrupt
the Work in whole or in part for such period of time, up to 90 days, as University may determine, with such period of suspension to be
computed from the date of delivery of the written order. Such order shall be specifically identified as a "Suspension Order" under this
Article 13.3. The Work may be stopped for such further period as the parties may agree. Upon receipt of a Suspension Order, Contractor
shall, at University's expense, comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize costs allocable to the Work covered by the
Suspension Order during the period of Work stoppage. Within 90 days after the issuance of the Suspension Order, or such extension to
that period as is agreed upon by Contractor and University, University shall either cancel the Suspension Order or delete the Work
covered by such Suspension Order by issuing a Change Order.
13.3.2 If a Suspension Order is canceled or expires, Contractor shall continue with the Work. A Change Order will be issued to cover
any adjustments of the Contract Sum or the Contract Time necessarily caused by such suspension. Any Claim by Contractor for an
adjustment of the Contract Sum or the Contract Time shall be made within 21 days after the end of the Work suspension. Contractor
agrees that submission of its claim within said 21 days is an express condition precedent to its right to Arbitrate or Litigate such a claim.
13.3.3 The provisions of this Article 13.3 shall not apply if a Suspension Order is not issued by University. A Suspension Order shall
not be required to stop the Work as permitted or required under any other provision of the Contract Documents.
13.4 TERMINATION BY UNIVERSITY FOR CONVENIENCE
13.4.1 University may, at its option, terminate this Contract, in whole or from time to time in part, at any time by giving notice to
Contractor. Upon such termination, Contractor agrees to waive any claims for damages, including loss of anticipated profits, on account
thereof; and, as the sole right and remedy of Contractor, University shall pay Contractor in accordance with Article 13.4.4.
13.4.2 Upon receipt of notice of termination under this Article 13.4, Contractor shall, unless the notice directs otherwise, do the
following:
.1 Immediately discontinue the Work to the extent specified in the notice.
.2 Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services, or facilities, except as may be
necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is not discontinued.
.3 Promptly cancel, on the most favorable terms reasonably possible, all subcontracts to the extent they
relate to the performance of the discontinued portion of the Work.
.4 Thereafter do only such Work as may be necessary to preserve and protect Work already in progress and
to protect materials, plants, and equipment on the Project site or in transit thereto.
13.4.3 Upon such termination, the obligations of the Contract shall continue as to portions of the Work already performed and, subject
to Contractor's obligations under Article 13.4.2, as to bona fide obligations assumed by Contractor prior to the date of termination.
13.4.4 Upon such termination, University shall pay to Contractor the sum of the following:
.1 The amount of the Contract Sum allocable to the portion of the Work properly performed by Contractor as
of the date of termination, less sums previously paid to Contractor.
.2 Plus an amount equal to the lesser of $50,000 or 5% of the difference between the Contract Sum and the
amount of the Contract Sum allocable to the portion of the Work properly performed by Contractor as of
the date of termination.
.3 Plus previously unpaid costs of any items delivered to the Project site which were fabricated for
subsequent incorporation in the Work.
.4 Plus any proven losses with respect to materials and equipment directly resulting from such termination.
.5 Plus reasonable demobilization costs.
.6 Plus reasonable costs of preparing a statement of the aforesaid costs, expenses, and losses in connection
with such termination.
The above payment shall be the sole and exclusive remedy to which Contractor is entitled in the event of termination of the Contract by
University pursuant to Article 13.4; and Contractor will be entitled to no other compensation or damages and expressly waives same.
ARTICLE 14
STATUTORY AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
14.1 PATIENT HEALTH INFORMATION (if applicable)
Contractor acknowledges that its employees, agents, subcontractors, consultants and others acting on its behalf may come into contact
with Patient Health Information ("PHI") while performing work at the Project Site. This contact is most likely rare and brief (e.g. walking
through a clinic where patient files may be visible, overhearing conversations between physicians while working or touring a hospital,
noticing a relative or acquaintance receiving treatment in a University facility, etc.). Contractor shall immediately notify University
Representative of any such contact. Any and all forms of PHI should not be examined closer, copied, photographed, recorded in any
manner, distributed or shared. Contractor will adopt procedures to ensure that its employees, agents and subcontractors refrain from
such activity. If Contractor, its employees, agents or subcontractors do further examine, copy, photograph, record in any manner,
distribute or share this information, Contractor will report such actions immediately to the University Representative. Contractor will
immediately take all steps necessary to stop any such actions and will ensure that no further violations of this contractual responsibility
will occur. Contractor will report to University Representative within five (5) days after Contractor gives University Representative notice
of the event/action of the steps taken to prevent future occurrences.
14.2 NONDISCRIMINATION
14.2.1 For purposes of this Article 14.2, the term Subcontractor shall not include suppliers, manufacturers, or distributors.


14.2.2 Contractor shall comply and shall ensure that all Subcontractors comply with Section 12900 through 12996, of the State of
California Government Code.
14.2.3 Contractor agrees as follows during the performance of the Work:
.1 Contractor shall provide equal treatment to, and shall not willfully discriminate against or allow harassment of any
employee or applicant for employment on the basis of: race; color; religion; sex; age; ancestry; national origin;
sexual orientation; physical or mental disability; veteran's status; medical condition (as defined in Section 12926 of
the State of California Government Code and including cancer-related medical conditions and or genetic
characteristics); genetic information (as defined in the Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act of 2008 and
including family medical history); marital status; gender identity, pregnancy, or citizenship (within the limits imposed
by law or University's policy) or service in the uniformed services (as defined by the Uniformed Services
Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994). Contractor will also take affirmative action to ensure that any
such employee or applicant for employment is not discriminated against on any of the bases identified above. Such
equal treatment shall apply, but not be limited to the following: employment; upgrade; demotion or transfer;
recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and
selection for training, including apprenticeship. Contractor also agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The
Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state
that qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to: race; color; religion; sex; age;
ancestry; national origin; sexual orientation; physical or mental disability; veteran's status; medical condition (as
defined in Section 12926 of the State of California Government Code and including cancer-related medical
conditions and or genetic characteristics); genetic information (as defined in the Genetic Information
Nondiscrimination Act of 2008 and including family medical history); marital status; gender identity, pregnancy, or
citizenship (within the limits imposed by law or University's policy) or service in the uniformed services (as defined by
the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994). For purposes of this provision: (1)
"Pregnancy" includes pregnancy, childbirth, and medical conditions related to pregnancy and childbirth; and (2)
"Service in the uniformed services" includes membership, application for membership, performance of service,
application for service, or obligation for service in the uniformed services.
.2 Contractor and all Subcontractors will permit access to their records of employment, employment advertisements,
application forms, and other pertinent data and records by University or any appropriate agency of the State of
California designated by University for the purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with this Article 14.2.
The outcome of the investigation may result in the following:
.1 A finding of willful violation of the provisions of this Contract or of the Fair Employment Practices Act may
be regarded by University as (1) a basis for determining that Contractor is not a "responsible bidder" as to
future contracts for which such Contractor may submit bids or (2) a basis for refusing to accept or consider
the bids of Contractor for future contracts.
.2 University may deem a finding of willful violation of the Fair Employment Practices Act to have occurred
upon receipt of written notice from the Fair Employment Practices Commission that it has (1) investigated
and determined that Contractor has violated the Fair Employment Practices Act and (2) issued an order
under the State of California Government Code Section 12970 or obtained an injunction under
Government Code Section 12973.
.3 Upon receipt of such written notice from the Fair Employment Practices Commission, University may
notify Contractor that, unless it demonstrates to the satisfaction of University within a stated period that the
violation has been corrected, Contractor's bids on future projects will not be considered.
.4 Contractor agrees that, should University determine that Contractor has not complied with this Article 14.2,
Contractor shall forfeit to University, as a penalty, for each day or portion thereof, for each person who
was denied employment as a result of such non-compliance, the penalties provided in Article 14.3 for
violation of prevailing wage rates. Such penalty amounts may be recovered from Contractor; and
University may deduct any such penalty amounts from the Contract Sum.
.5 Nothing contained in this Article 14.2 shall be construed in any manner so as to prevent University from
pursuing any other remedies that may be available at law.
.6 Contractor shall meet the following standards for compliance and provide University with satisfactory
evidence of such compliance upon University's request, which shall be evaluated in each case by
University:
.1 Contractor shall notify its Superintendent and other supervisory personnel of the
nondiscrimination requirements of the Contract Documents and their responsibilities thereto.
.2 Contractor shall notify all sources of employee referrals (including unions, employment
agencies, and the State of California Department of Employment) of the nondiscrimination
requirements of the Contract Documents by sending to such sources and by posting the Notice
of Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO).
.3 Contractor or its representative shall, through all unions with whom it may have agreements,
develop agreements that (1) define responsibilities for nondiscrimination in hiring, referrals,
upgrading, and training and (2) implement an affirmative nondiscrimination program, in terms of
the unions' specific areas of skill and geography, such that qualified minority women,


nonminority women, and minority men shall be available and given an equal opportunity for
employment.
.4 Contractor shall notify University of opposition to the nondiscrimination requirements of the
Contract Documents by individuals, firms, or organizations during the term of the Contract.
.7 Contractor shall include the provisions of the foregoing Articles 14.2.3.2.1 through 14.2.3.2.6 in all
subcontracts with Subcontractors, so that such provisions will be binding upon each such Subcontractor.
14.3 PREVAILING WAGE RATES
14.3.2 Contractor shall comply and shall ensure that all Subcontractors comply with prevailing wage law pursuant to the State of
California Labor Code, including but not limited to Section 1720 et seq. of the State of California Labor Code. Compliance with these
sections is required by this Contract. The Work under this Contract is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the State of
California Department of Industrial Relations.
14.3.3 The State of California Department of Industrial Relations has ascertained the general prevailing per diem wage rates in the
locality in which the Work is to be performed for each craft, classification, or type of worker required to perform the Work. A copy of the
general prevailing per diem wage rates will be on file at University's principal facility office and will be made available to any interested
party upon request. Contractor shall post a copy of the general prevailing per diem wage rates as well as job site notices as prescribed
by regulation at the job site. By this reference, such schedule is made part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall pay not less than
the prevailing wage rates, as specified in the schedule and any amendments thereto, to all workers employed by Contractor in the
execution of the Work. Contractor shall cause all subcontracts to include the provision that all Subcontractors shall pay not less than the
prevailing rates to all workers employed by such Subcontractors in the execution of the Work. Contractor shall forfeit to University, as a
penalty, not more than $200 for each calendar day or portion thereof for each worker that is paid less than the prevailing rates as
determined by the Director of Industrial Relations for the work or craft in which the worker is employed for any portion of the Work done
by Contractor or any Subcontractor. The amount of this penalty shall be determined pursuant to applicable law. Such forfeiture amounts
may be deducted from the Contract Sum or sought directly from the surety under its Performance Bond if there are insufficient funds
remaining in the Contract Sum. Contractor shall also pay to any worker who was paid less than the prevailing wage rate for the work or
craft for which the worker was employed for any portion of the Work, for each day, or portion thereof, for which the worker was paid less
than the specified prevailing per diem wage rate, an amount equal to the difference between the specified prevailing per diem wage rate
and the amount which was paid to the worker. Review of any civil wage and penalty assessment shall be made pursuant to section
1742 of the California Labor Code.
14.4 PAYROLL RECORDS
14.4.2 Contractor and all Subcontractors shall keep an accurate payroll record, showing the name, address, social security number,
job classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each
journeyworker, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed in connection with the Work. All payroll records shall be certified as
being true and correct by Contractor or Subcontractors keeping such records; and the payroll records shall be available for inspection at
all reasonable hours at the principal office of Contractor on the following basis:
.1 A certified copy of an employee's payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to such
employee or the employee's authorized representative on request.
.2 A certified copy of all payroll records shall be made available for inspection upon request to University, the
State of California Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards
of the State of California Division of Industrial Relations.
.3 A certified copy of all payroll records shall be made available upon request by the public for inspection or
copies thereof made; provided, however, that the request by the public shall be made to either University,
the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. The public
shall not be given access to such records at the principal offices of Contractor or Subcontractors. Any
copy of the records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or
any public agency by University shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure
of an individual's name, address, and social security number. The name and address of Contractor
awarded the Contract or performing the Contract shall not be marked or obliterated.
14.4.3 Contractor shall file a certified copy of the payroll records with the entity that requested the records within 10 days after receipt
of a written request. Contractor shall inform University of the location of such payroll records for the Project, including the street address,
city, and county; and Contractor shall, within 5 working days, provide notice of change of location of such records. In the event of
noncompliance with the requirements of this Article 14.4 or with the State of California Labor Code Section 1776, Contractor shall have
10 days in which to comply following receipt of notice specifying in what respects Contractor must comply. Should noncompliance still be
evident after the 10 day period, Contractor shall forfeit to University, as a penalty, $100 for each day, or portion thereof, for each worker,
until strict compliance is accomplished. Such forfeiture amounts may be deducted from the Contract Sum.
14.5 APPRENTICES
14.5.1 For purposes of this Article 14.5, the term Subcontractor shall not include suppliers, manufacturers, and distributors.


14.5.2 Only apprentices, as defined in the State of California Labor Code Section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeship
standards and written apprentice agreements under Chapter 4, Division 3, of the State of California Labor Code, are eligible to be
employed by Contractor and Subcontractors as apprentices. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance
with the provisions of the apprenticeship standards and written apprentice agreements under which the apprentice is training and in
accordance with prevailing wage law pursuant to the Labor Code, including but not limited to Section 1777.5. The Contractor bears
responsibility for compliance with this section for all apprenticeable occupations.
14.5.3 Every apprentice shall be paid the standard wage to apprentices, under the regulations of the craft or trade at which the
apprentice is employed, and shall be employed only at the Work in the craft or trade to which the apprentice is indentured.
14.5.4 When Contractor or Subcontractors employ workers in any apprenticeship craft or trade on the Work, Contractor or
Subcontractors shall 1) send contract award information to the applicable joint apprenticeship committee that can supply apprentices to
the site of the public work and 2) apply to the joint apprenticeship committee, which administers the apprenticeship standards of the craft
or trade in the area of the Project site, for a certificate approving Contractor or Subcontractors under the apprenticeship standards for the
employment and training of apprentices in the area of the Project site. The committee will issue a certificate fixing the number of
apprentices or the ratio of apprentices to journeypersons who shall be employed in the craft or trade on the Work. The ratio will not
exceed that stipulated in the apprenticeship standards under which the joint apprenticeship committee operates; but in no case shall the
ratio be less than 1 hour of apprentice work for every 5 hours of journeyperson work, except as permitted by law. Contractor or
Subcontractors shall, upon the issuance of the approval certificate in each such craft or trade, employ the number of apprentices or the
ratio of apprentices to journeypersons fixed in the certificate issued by the joint apprenticeship committee or present an exemption
certificate issued by the Division of Apprenticeship Standards.
14.5.5 "Apprenticeship craft or trade," as used in this Article 14.5, shall mean a craft or trade determined as an apprenticeship
occupation in accordance with rules and regulations prescribed by the Apprenticeship Council.
14.5.6 If Contractor or Subcontractors employ journeyworkers or apprentices in any apprenticeship craft or trade in the area of the
Project site, and there exists a fund for assisting to allay the cost of the apprenticeship program in the trade or craft, to which fund or
funds other contractors in the area of the Project site are contributing, Contractor and Subcontractors shall contribute to the fund or funds
in each craft or trade in which they employ journeyworkers or apprentices on the Work in the same amount or upon the same basis and
in the same manner done by the other contractors. Contractor may include the amount of such contributions in computing its bid for the
Contract; but if Contractor fails to do so, it shall not be entitled to any additional compensation therefor from University.
14.5.7 In the event Contractor willfully fails to comply with this Article 14.5, it will be considered in violation of the requirements of the
Contract.
14.5.8 Nothing contained herein shall be considered or interpreted as prohibiting or preventing the hiring by Contractor or
Subcontractors of journeyworker trainees who may receive on-the-job training to enable them to achieve journeyworker status in any
craft or trade under standards other than those set forth for apprentices.
14.6 WORK DAY
14.6.1 Contractor shall not permit any worker to labor more than 8 hours during any 1 day or more than 40 hours during any 1
calendar week, except as permitted by law and in such cases only upon such conditions as are provided by law. Contractor shall forfeit
to University, as a penalty, $25 for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, for each
day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any 1 day and 40 hours in any 1 calendar week in
violation of the terms of this Article 14.6 or in violation of the provisions of any law of the State of California. Such forfeiture amounts may
be deducted from the Contract Sum. Contractor and each Subcontractor shall keep, or cause to be kept, an accurate record showing the
actual hours worked each day and each calendar week by each worker employed on the Project, which record shall be kept open at all
reasonable hours to the inspection of University, its officers and agents, and to the inspection of the appropriate enforcement agency of
the State of California.
ARTICLE 15
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
15.1 GOVERNING LAW
15.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of California.
15.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
15.2.1 University and Contractor respectively bind themselves and their successors, permitted assigns, and legal representatives to
the other party and to the successors, permitted assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants,
agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract, in whole or in
part, without prior written consent of the other party. Notwithstanding any such assignment, each of the original contracting parties shall
remain legally responsible for all of its obligations under the Contract.
15.3 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
15.3.1 All University's rights and remedies under the Contract Documents will be cumulative and in addition to and not in limitation of
all other rights and remedies of University under the Contract Documents or otherwise available at law or in equity.
15.3.2 No action or failure to act by University or University's Representative will constitute a waiver of a right afforded them under the
Contract, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a condition or breach thereunder, except as may
be specifically agreed in writing. No waiver by University or University's Representative of any condition, breach or default will constitute
a waiver of any other condition, breach or default; nor will any such waiver constitute a continuing waiver.


15.3.3 No provision contained in the Contract Documents shall create or give to third parties any claim or right of action against
University, University's Representative, or Contractor.
15.4 SURVIVAL
15.4.1 The provisions of the Contract which by their nature survive termination of the Contract or Final Completion, including all
warranties, indemnities, payment obligations, and University's right to audit Contractor's books and records, shall remain in full force and
effect after Final Completion or any termination of the Contract.
15.5 COMPLETE AGREEMENT
15.5.1 The Contract Documents constitute the full and complete understanding of the parties and supersede any previous
agreements or understandings, oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof. The Contract may be modified only by a written
instrument signed by both parties or as provided in Article 7.
15.6 SEVERABILITY OF PROVISIONS
15.6.1 If any one or more of the provisions contained in the Contract Documents should be invalid, illegal, or unenforceable in any
respect, the validity, legality, and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein shall not in any way be affected or impaired
thereby.
15.7 UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO AUDIT
15.7.1 University and entities and agencies designated by University will have access to and the right to audit and the right to copy at
University's cost all of Contractor's books, records, contracts, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, purchase
orders, and memoranda relating to the Work. Contractor shall preserve all such records and other items during the performance of the
Contract and for a period of at least 3 years after Final Completion.
15.8 METHODS OF DELIVERY FOR SPECIFIED DOCUMENTS
15.8.1 The following documents must be delivered in a manner specified in Article 15.8.2:
.1 Contractor Notices of election to litigate or arbitrate;
.2 Written demand for an informal conference to meet and confer pursuant to Article 4.5;
.3 University’s written statement identifying remaining disputes following informal conference pursuant to Article 4.6;
.4 Written demand for non-binding mediation pursuant to Article 4.6;
.5 Contractor claims pursuant to Article 4.3;
.6 Contractor notices of conditions pursuant to Articles 3.17, 3.18, or 3.19;
.7 University’s notices of Contractor’s failure to perform and/or correct defective work pursuant to Articles 4.1.6, 12.2
and 13.2.3;
.8 University’s notice to stop work pursuant to Article 2.3.1;
.9 Notices of termination or suspension pursuant to Article 13.
15.8.2 Delivery methods for documents specified in Article 15.8.1:
.1 By personal delivery.
.2 Sent by facsimile copy where receipt is confirmed.
.3 Sent by Express Mail, or another method of delivery providing for overnight delivery where receipt is confirmed.
.4 Sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested.
15.8.3 The documents identified in Article 15.8.1 shall only be effective if delivered in the manner specified in Article 15.8.2. Subject
to the forgoing, such documents shall be deemed given and received upon actual receipt in the case of all except registered or certified
mail; and in the case of registered or certified mail, on the date shown on the return receipt or the date delivery during normal business
hours was attempted. Delivery of the specified documents shall be made at the respective street addresses set forth in the Agreement.
Such street addresses may be changed by notice given in accordance with this Article 15.8.
15.9 TIME OF THE ESSENCE
15.9.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
15.10 MUTUAL DUTY TO MITIGATE
15.10.1 University and Contractor shall use all reasonable and economically practicable efforts to mitigate delays and damages to the
Project and to one another with respect to the Project, regardless of the cause of such delay or damage.
15.11 UC FAIR WAGE
15.11.1 Contractor shall pay all persons providing construction services and/or any labor on site, including any University location, no
less than the UC Fair Wage (defined as $13 per hour as of 10/1/15, $14 per hour as of 10/1/16, and $15 per hour as of 10/1/17) and
shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local working condition requirements.
END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1. NOT USED
2. MODIFICATION OF GENERAL CONDITIONS, ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACT TIME
Rainy weather in excess of the following number of days will be granted a Contract Time extension pursuant to
Article 8.4 of the General Conditions:
January ........... - 6 days July ................... - 1 day

February ......... - 6 days August .............. - 0 days
March.............. - 6 days September ........ - 1 day
April ................ - 3 days October ............. - 2 days
May ................. - 1 day November ......... - 3 days
June ................ - 1 day December ......... - 5 days
3. NOT USED
4. MODIFICATION OF GENERAL CONDITIONS, ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS
Contractor shall furnish and maintain insurance in the amounts below.
The insurance required by 11.1.2.1 and 11.1.2.2 shall be (i) issued by companies with a Best rating of A-
or better, and a financial classification of VIII or better (or an equivalent rating by Standard & Poor or
Moody's) or (ii) guaranteed, under terms consented to by the University (such consent to not be
unreasonably withheld), by companies with a Best rating of A- or better, and a financial classification of
VIII or better (or an equivalent rating by Standard & Poor or Moody's). Such insurance shall be written for
not less than the following:
11.1.2.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance – Minimum

Limits of Liability Requirements
Each Occurrence - Combined Single Limit for
Bodily Injury and Property Damage .......................................................$2,000,000
Products - Completed Operations Aggregate ........................................ $2,000,000
Personal and Advertising Injury .............................................................$2,000,000
General Aggregate .................................................................................$2,000,000
11.1.2.2 Business Automobile Liability Insurance - Limits of Liability

Each Accident - Combined Single Limit for
Bodily Injury and Property Damage .......................................................$1,000,000
Insurance required by Article 11.1.2.3 shall be issued by companies (i) that have a Best rating of B+ or
better, and a financial classification of VIII or better (or an equivalent rating by Standard & Poor or
Moody's); or (ii) that are acceptable to the University. Such insurance shall be written for not less than the
following:
11.1.2.3 WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY - Minimum

Requirements
Worker's Compensation (as required by Federal and

State of California law)
Employer's Liability:
Each Employee ......................................................................................$1,000,000
Each Accident ........................................................................................$1,000,000
Policy Limit .............................................................................................$1,000,000
In the event that Contractor and/or Subcontractor utilize drone(s)/Unmanned Aerial Vehicle(s) in the performance of
their Work, the following Article is added to the General Conditions pursuant to Article 11.1.2:
11.1.2.4 The Contractor shall obtain, either itself or through the applicable Subcontractor(s) in use of
drone(s)/Unmanned Aerial Vehicle(s) (UAV(s)) in the performance of their Work, separate
Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) insurance. Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall maintain
and show evidence of coverage pursuant to this Article 11.1.2.5 while Work involving
drone(s)/UAV(s) is being completed. The insurance required by this paragraph shall be (i)
issued by companies with a Best rating of A- or better, and a financial classification of VIII or
better (or an equivalent rating by Standard & Poor’s or Moody's) or (ii) guaranteed, under terms
LF SC 200331 Supplementary Conditions - 1


consented to by the University (such consent to not be unreasonably withheld), by companies
with a Best rating of A- or better, and a financial classification of VIII or better (or an equivalent
rating by Standard & Poor’s or Moody's).
Contractor and/or Subcontractor in use of a drone/UAV in the performance of their Work shall
meet all FAA requirements for certification and comply with all FAA rules for operation of the
drone/UAV and any established University policy relating to operation of unmanned aircraft
systems at University location.
Such UAV Liability coverage as provided by a UAS insurance policy shall be written for not less
than the following minimum limits:
UAV / UAS Insurance –Limits of Liability Minimum Requirements

Per Occurrence ......................................................................................$1,000,000
Annual Aggregate ..................................................................................$1,000,000
Such UAS insurance policy must include coverage for Bodily Injury (Liability), Property Damage
(Liability) and Physical Damage to the UAV and support systems. Contractor and/or
Subcontractor shall be required to also show evidence of the following under its UAS policy:
Such UAS insurance shall, by endorsement to the policies, also include the following:
.1 The Regents of the University of California and each of their Representatives,

consultants, officers, agents, employees, and each of their Representative's
consultants shall be included as additional insureds on a primary non-contributory
basis.
.2 As to all liability insurance policies, each shall include a waiver of subrogation

endorsement evidencing that the Contractor and/or Subcontractor waives all rights of
recovery by subrogation against University, University’s Representative, University’s
Representative’s consultants, their respective officers, agents, or employees.
.3 If insurance policy providing coverage requires that each UAV be scheduled, the
Contractor and/or Subcontractor shall meet all reporting requirements of the
insurance company to schedule insurance for the actual unit (drone/UAV) in use in
the performance of their Work.
5. MODIFICATION OF GENERAL CONDITIONS, ARTICLE 14 – STATUTORY AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS
The following new Subparagraph 14.4.4 is added to Article 14.4:
14.4.4 Contractor and every Subcontractor required to submit certified payrolls shall use the web-
based electronic certified payroll reporting (eCPR) system to be named by University. The
software shall be a web-based eCPR system accessed by a web browser. Contractor and each
Subcontractor will be furnished a log-on identification and password to access University's
reporting system. Use of the system may entail additional data entry of weekly payroll
information including, without limitation: employee identification, labor classification, total hours
worked and hours worked on the project, wage and benefit rates paid, etc. The required
software shall be used regardless of the ability to interface with Contractor's or Subcontractor's
payroll and accounting software or system. On-line training in the use of the system will be
available via the Internet. University may elect to schedule training classes in the use of the
software and Contractor shall have all necessary personnel attend and shall require attendance
by all Subcontractors.
6. MODIFICATION OF GENERAL CONDITIONS, ARTICLE 15 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original but all of
which together shall constitute one and the same Agreement. The counterparts of this Agreement may be executed
via a University approved digital signature process and shall have the same force and effect as the use of a manual
signature. University reserves the right to reject any digital signature that cannot be positively verified by the
University system as an authentic digital signature.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
LF SC 200331 Supplementary Conditions - 2

INDEX TO EXHIBITS
Exhibit 1 Certificate of Insurance
Exhibit 2 Payment Bond
Exhibit 3 Performance Bond
Exhibit 4 Application for Payment
Exhibit 5A Selection of Retention Options
Exhibit 5B Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities In Lieu of Retention and Deposit of
Retention
Exhibit 6 Submittal Schedule
Exhibit 7 Cost Proposal
Exhibit 8 Field Order
Exhibit 9 Change Order
Exhibit 10A Conditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment
Exhibit 10B Conditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment
Exhibit 11A Unconditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment
Exhibit 11B Unconditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment
Exhibit 12 Summary of Builder's Risk Insurance Policy
Exhibit 13 Self-Certification
Exhibit 14 Report of Subcontractor Information
Exhibit 15 Contractor's Daily Report
Exhibit 16 Final Distribution of Contract Dollars
Exhibit 17 Certificate of Substantial Completion
Exhibit 18 General Contractor Claim Certification
Exhibit 19 Subcontractor Claim Certification
Exhibit 20 Notice of Completion
LF REV :06/04/13 Index to Exhibits - 1 of 1

LF 12/16/13 Certificate of Insurance

Exhibit 1 - 1 of 1
Project No. {#}

Bond No.
PAYMENT BOND
THAT WHEREAS, The Regents of the University of California ("The Regents") has
awarded to {_______________________________________________________} as Principal a contract
dated the _____ day of {_______________}, 20{__}, (the "Contract") for the work described as follows:
{Project Name}
Order Number {_________}
Project Number {#}
AND WHEREAS, the Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with the Contract,
to secure the payment of claims of laborers, mechanics, material suppliers, and other persons as provided
by law;
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal and {________________} as Surety,

are held and firmly bound unto The Regents in the sum of {____________________________________}
Dollars (${______________}), for which payment well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if Principal, or its heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns approved by The Regents, or its subcontractors shall fail to pay any
of the persons named in State of California Civil Code Section 9100, or amounts due under the State of
California Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the Contract, or for
any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the State of California Employment
Development Department from the wages of employees of Principal and subcontractors pursuant to Section
13020 of the State of California Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor, that
Surety will pay for the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this bond, otherwise the above
obligation shall become and be null and void.
This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in State of California Civil
Code Section 9100 as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this
bond.
Surety, for value received, hereby expressly agrees that no extension of time, change,
modification, alteration, or addition to the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of the
Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, shall in any way affect the obligation of this bond; and it
does hereby waive notice of any such extension of time, change, modification, alteration, or addition to the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of the Contract, or to the work to be performed
thereunder.
Surety's obligations hereunder are independent of the obligations of any other surety for the
payment of claims of laborers, mechanics, material suppliers, and other persons in connection with the
Contract; and suit may be brought against Surety and such other sureties, jointly and severally, or against
any one or more of them, or against less than all of them without impairing The Regents' rights against the
other.
LF: Payment Bond Payment Bond

10/12/12 Exhibit 2 - 1 of 2
In the event suit is brought upon this bond, the parties not prevailing in such suit shall pay
reasonable attorneys' fees and costs incurred by the prevailing parties in such suit.
Correspondence or claims relating to this bond shall be sent to Surety at the address set
forth below.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of
{_________________}, {____}.
Principal: Surety:
By: By:
Title: Title:
Address for Notices:
LF: Payment Bond Payment Bond

10/12/12 Exhibit 2 - 2 of 2
Project No. {#}

Bond No.
PERFORMANCE BOND
THAT WHEREAS, The Regents of the University of California ("The Regents") has
awarded to {_______________________________________________________} as Principal a contract
dated the _____ day of {___________}, {_____}, (the "Contract"), which Contract is by this reference made
a part hereof, for the work described as follows:
{Project Name}
Order Number {_________}
Project Number {#}
AND WHEREAS, Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with the Contract,
guaranteeing the faithful performance thereof;
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal and {________________________} as

Surety, are held and firmly bound unto The Regents in the sum of {___________________________}
Dollars (${_________}), to be paid to The Regents or its successors and assigns; for which payment, well
and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if Principal, or its heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, or assigns approved by The Regents, shall promptly and faithfully perform the
covenants, conditions, and agreements of the Contract during the original term and any extensions thereof
as may be granted by The Regents, with or without notice to Surety, and during the period of any
guarantees or warranties required under the Contract, and shall also promptly and faithfully perform all the
covenants, conditions, and agreements of any alteration of the Contract made as therein provided, notice of
which alterations to Surety being hereby waived, on Principal's part to be kept and performed at the time and
in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall
indemnify, defend, protect, and hold harmless The Regents as stipulated in the Contract, then this obligation
shall become and be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect.
No extension of time, change, alteration, modification, or addition to the Contract, or of the

work required thereunder, shall release or exonerate Surety on this bond or in any way affect the obligation
of this bond; and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension of time, change, alteration,
modification, or addition.
Whenever Principal shall be and declared by The Regents to be in default under the
Contract, Surety shall promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly:
1. Undertake through its agents or independent contractors, reasonably acceptable to

The Regents, to complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions and to pay and perform
all obligations of Principal under the Contract, including without limitation, all obligations with respect to
warranties, guarantees, and the payment of liquidated damages, or, at Surety's election, or, if required by
The Regents,
2. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions, and, upon determination by The Regents of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract
between such bidder and The Regents and make available as work progresses (even though there should
be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this
LF REV 3.1:01/02/96 Performance Bond

Exhibit 3 - 1 of 2
paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract Sum, and to pay
and perform all obligations of Principal under the Contract, including, without limitation, all obligations with
respect to warranties, guarantees, and the payment of liquidated damages; but, in any event, Surety's total
obligations hereunder shall not exceed the amount set forth in the third paragraph hereof. The term
"balance of the Contract Sum," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by The
Regents to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount paid by The
Regents to Principal.
Surety's obligations hereunder are independent of the obligations of any other surety for the
performance of the Contract, and suit may be brought against Surety and such other sureties, jointly and
severally, or against any one or more of them, or against less than all of them without impairing The
Regents' rights against the others.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation
other than The Regents or its successors or assigns.
Surety may join in any arbitration proceedings brought under the Contract and shall be
bound by any arbitration award.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by The Regents, Surety shall pay reasonable
attorney's fees and costs incurred by The Regents in such suit.
Correspondence or claims relating to this bond shall be sent to Surety at the address set
forth below.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of
{________________}, {____}.
Principal: Surety:
By: By:
Title: Title:
Address for Notices:
LF REV 3.1:01/02/96 Performance Bond

Exhibit 3 - 2 of 2
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Number: Period to:
TO UNIVERSITY: THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES

AND UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE:
FROM CONTRACTOR:
Address:
Project Name:
Project #: Order #:
Contract Date: Application Date:
CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY: Additions Deductions
Change Orders approved in previous months: Total: $ $
Change Orders approved this month:

Number: Date Approved:
$ $
$ $
$ $
Total: $ $
NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS: $
Application is made for payment under the Contract as shown below and in Schedule 1 attached hereto:
1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM ...................................................................................$
2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS....................................................................$
3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± Line 2) .........................................................$
4. TOTAL AMOUNT COMPLETED TO DATE (Column E on Schedule 1) .................$
5. RETENTION: 5% of Completed Work (Column H on Schedule 1).........................$
a. Current Value of Securities Deposited in Escrow ...................$
b. Current Value of Retention Deposited in Escrow....................$
c. Retention Held by University....................................................$
Current Retention Value (a + b + c).........................................$
6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETENTION (Line 4 less Line 5) ......................................$
7. TOTAL AMOUNT PREVIOUSLY PAID.....................................................................$
8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE (Line 6 less Line 7)......................................................$
9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETENTION (Line 3 less Line 6) .............................$
LF REV 4.1:07/01/06 Application for Payment

Exhibit 4 - 1 of 6
The undersigned Contractor hereby represents and warrants to University that all Work, for which
Certificates for Payment have previously been issued and payment received from University, is free and
clear of all claims, stop notices, security interests, and encumbrances in favor of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, and any other persons or firms entitled to make claims by reason of having provided labor,
materials, or equipment related to the Work.
The following Schedules are attached and incorporated herein, and made a part of this Application
for Payment:
Schedule 1 Cost Breakdown Schedule

Schedule 2 Certification of Current Market Value of Securities in Escrow in Lieu of
Retention
Schedule 3 List of Subcontractors
Schedule 4 Declaration of Releases of Claims
(Contractor)
By:
(Name)
(Title)
DECLARATION
I, , hereby declare that I am the
of Contractor submitting this

Application for Payment; that I am duly authorized to execute and deliver this Application for Payment on
behalf of Contractor; and that all information set forth in this Application for Payment and all Schedules
attached hereto are true, accurate, and complete as of its date.
I declare, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration
was subscribed at
, , State of
on , 20 .
(Signature)
(Print Name)

Exhibit 4 - 2 of 6
Project Name:
Project #: Application #: Application Date:
Order #: Period To:
Contract Date: Contractor:
SCHEDULE 1
TO
COST BREAKDOWN
A B C D E F G H
DESCRIPTION OF TOTAL AMOUNT
ITEM WORK ACTIVITY % TOTAL AMOUNT COMPLETED ON AMOUNT
NO. OR SCHEDULE COMPLETE COMPLETED PRIOR APPLICATION OF THIS
OTHER ITEM D TO DATE TO DATE FOR PAYMENT APPLICATION RETENTION
VALUE (C x D) (E - F)

Exhibit 4 - 3 of 6
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT #: APPLICATION #:
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE 2
TO
CERTIFICATION OF CURRENT MARKET VALUE

OF SECURITIES IN ESCROW IN LIEU OF RETENTION
As of , 20 (not earlier than 5 days prior to the date of the Application for Payment of
which this certification is a part), the aggregate market value of securities on deposit in Escrow Account
Number with
(Escrow Agent)
is Dollars ($ ).
(Escrow Agent) (Contractor)
By: By:
(Name) (Name)
(Title) (Title)
Date: Date:
NOTE: Notary acknowledgment for Contractor and Escrow Agent must be attached.

Exhibit 4 - 4 of 6
PROJECT NAME:
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE 3
TO
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Subcontractors listed below are all Subcontractors furnishing labor, services, or materials for the period
referred to in the Application for Payment referenced above, of which this Schedule 3 is a part:
Subcontracted Date Work

Name of Subcontractor Work Activity Activity Completed
(Contractor)
By:
(Name)
(Title)
(Date)

Exhibit 4 - 5 of 6
PROJECT NAME:
CONTRACTOR:
SCHEDULE 4
TO
DECLARATION OF RELEASE OF CLAIMS
Contractor hereby certifies that attached hereto are releases and waivers of claims and stop notices from all
Subcontractors furnishing labor, services, or materials covered by the Certificate for Payment dated
, 20 , except those listed below:
(Contractor)
By:
(Name)
(Title)
Date:

Exhibit 4 - 6 of 6
SELECTION OF RETENTION OPTIONS
SELECTION OPTION 1 Check here for Option 1

University will withhold retention
OR SELECT OPTION 2 Check here for Option 2
herewith elect to substitute securities in the form of:

(Type of Security)
in lieu of retention being withheld by University for

the above-referenced project.
OR SELECT OPTION 3 Check here for Option 3
herewith elect to have retention on the above-

referenced project paid directly to the Escrow (Type of Security to be Purchased)
Account.
An Escrow Account will be opened with*:

(Name of state or federally chartered bank in California)
whose address is:

(Street)
(City, County)
(State, Zip Code)
On Behalf of Contractor** On Behalf of University

(Signature shall be by the authorized party who will sign the Acknowledged and Approved
Escrow Agreement.)
By: By:
(Name) (Name)
(Title) (Title)
* Note: Contractor and its surety bear the risk of failure of the bank selected.
** Signature shall be by the authorized party who signs the Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in
Lieu of Retention and Deposit of Retention (“Escrow Agreement”).
Note: If a completed and signed Escrow Agreement is not submitted with this form, University will
not allow deposit of securities in lieu of retention.
LF REV 3:06/06/11 Selection of Retention Options

Exhibit 5A - 1 of 1
RETURN THIS AGREEMENT SIGNED BY CONTRACTOR AND ESCROW AGENT TO:

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES
CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATION
1060 VETERAN AVENUE, SUITE 125
BOX 951365
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90095-1365
Escrow Account No.:
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR

DEPOSIT OF SECURITIES IN LIEU OF RETENTION
AND
DEPOSIT OF RETENTION
This Escrow Agreement is made as of , 20 , and entered into by and
between THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, whose address is University of
California, Office of the President, 1111 Franklin St., 6th Floor, Oakland, California 94607, hereinafter called
"University," and ,
whose address is ,
hereinafter called "Contractor," and ,
a state or federally chartered bank in the state of California, whose address is
hereinafter called "Escrow Agent."
For consideration hereinafter set forth, University, Contractor, and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
(1) Contractor has the option to deposit securities with Escrow Agent as a substitute for
retention required to be withheld by University pursuant to the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to
as "Contract," entered into between University and Contractor for the Project titled
Project Number , in the amount of $ ,
dated . Alternatively, on written request of Contractor, University shall deposit retention

directly with Escrow Agent. Contractor and its surety shall be at risk for the failure of the Escrow Agent
selected. When Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for retention, Escrow Agent shall notify
University within 5 days after the deposit. At all times, Contractor shall have on deposit securities the
market value of which is at least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under
the terms of the Contract. Securities shall be held in the name of The Regents of the University of
California, Los Angeles; and Contractor shall be designated as the beneficial owner.
(2) Escrow Agent shall review the market value of securities deposited in escrow under this
Escrow Agreement as often as conditions of the securities market warrant, but in no case less than once per
month. Escrow Agent shall promptly notify University and Contractor of the market value of the deposited
securities if such market value is less than the total amount of retention required to be withheld under the
terms of the Contract. Contractor shall promptly deposit additional securities so that the current market
value of the total of all deposited securities shall be at least equal to the total required amount of retention.
Escrow Agent shall, within 5 days after University's request, provide a statement to University of the current
market value of all securities deposited under this Escrow Agreement as of a date not earlier than 5 days
prior to such request. The provisions of this Paragraph 2 shall not apply to securities consisting of monetary
deposits as allowed by Paragraph 7 held by a bank as Escrow Agent, provided the bank provides monthly
statements reflecting the status of the monetary deposits held by the bank to University and Contractor.
LF REV 4:07/08/11 Escrow Agreement
Exhibit 5B - 1 of 5
(3) Contractor shall not use any or all of the securities deposited in lieu of retention under this
Escrow Agreement for any other obligations, including deposits in lieu of retention for other contracts.
Contractor represents, covenants and warrants that all deposited securities shall be lien free when tendered
to the Escrow Agents and shall remain lien free during their retention by the Escrow Agent.
(4) University shall make progress payments to Contractor for those funds which otherwise
would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provision, provided that Escrow Agent
holds securities in the form and amount specified herein.
(5) Prior to Contractor's submission of each Application For Payment, Escrow Agent shall
issue a current statement of (a) the value of the securities currently being deposited in lieu of retention and
(b) the current value of all securities being held in escrow pursuant to this Escrow Agreement. Such
statement shall be no more than 5 days old at the time of submission, shall be notarized or have a
guarantee of signature, and shall be submitted to Contractor with a copy to University under separate cover.
Contractor shall attach such original statement to each Application For Payment. The provisions of this
Paragraph 5 shall not apply to securities consisting of monetary deposits as allowed by Paragraph 7 held by
a bank as Escrow Agent, provided the bank provides monthly statements reflecting the status of the
monetary deposits held by the bank to University and Contractor.
(6) If, at the request of Contractor, University deposits retention directly with Escrow Agent,
Escrow Agent shall hold such retention for the benefit of Contractor until such time as the escrow created
under the Contract is terminated. All terms and conditions of this Escrow Agreement and the rights and
responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when University deposits retention
directly with Escrow Agent.
(7) University will allow Contractor to deposit the following securities in lieu of retention and
direct the investment of the retention deposits into any of the following which at the time of payment are
legal investments under the laws of the State of California:
a. Direct obligations of the United States of America (including obligations issued or held in
book-entry form on the books of the Department of the Treasury of the United States of
America or any Federal Reserve Bank), or obligations the timely payment of the principal of
and interest on which are fully guaranteed by the United States of America, or tax-exempt
obligations which are rated in the highest rating category of a nationally recognized bond
rating agency.
b. Obligations, debentures, notes or other evidence of indebtedness issued or guaranteed by

any of the following: Banks for Cooperatives, Federal Intermediate Credit Banks, Federal
Home Loan Bank System, Export-Import Bank of the United States, Federal Financing
Bank, Federal Land Banks, Federal Farm Credits, Government National Mortgage
Association, Farmer's Home Administration, Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, or
Federal Housing Administration.
c. Bonds of the State of California or those for which the faith and credit of the State of
California are pledged for the payment of principal and interest.
d. Interest-bearing bankers acceptances and demand or time deposits (including certificates

of deposit) in banks, provided such deposits are either (1) secured at all times, in the
manner and to the extent provided by law, by collateral security described in clauses a or b
of this Paragraph 7 continuously having a market value at least equal to the amount so
invested so long as such underlying obligations or securities are in the possession of the
Securities Investors Protection Corporation, (2) in banks having a combined capital and
surplus of at least One Hundred Million Dollars, or (3) fully insured by the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation.
e. Taxable government money market portfolios restricted to obligations with maturities of one
(1) year or less, issued or guaranteed as to payment of principal and interest by the full faith
and credit of the United States of America.

Exhibit 5B - 2 of 5
f. Commercial paper rated in the highest rating category of a nationally recognized rating
agency, and issued by corporations organized and operating within the United States of
America and having total assets in excess of Five Hundred Million Dollars.
(8) Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees, costs, and expenses incurred by Escrow
Agent in administering the escrow account. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by
Contractor and Escrow Agent. All fees, costs, and expenses of this Escrow Agreement and any transactions
carried out hereunder shall be billed by Escrow Agent to Contractor. In the event that any fees, costs, or
expenses shall remain unpaid in excess of 30 days from the date due, Escrow Agent may withhold such
unpaid amount from any income distributable to Contractor, but shall not withhold such unpaid amount from
any income distributable to University.
(9) Interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all
interest earned on the interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be held in escrow.
Interest may be withdrawn by Contractor from time to time, without notice to University, only to the extent
that the total amount held in escrow meets or exceeds the required amount of retention.
(10) Except as provided in Paragraph 9, Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any
part of the escrow account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization
from University to Escrow Agent stating that University consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to
be withdrawn by Contractor. University shall not be obligated to consent to any withdrawal to the extent of
stop notice claims which cannot be satisfied from other funds then due and payable to Contractor.
(11) University shall have the right to draw upon the securities, any interest earned on the
securities, and any interest earned on the interest in the event of default by Contractor. Upon 7 days written
notice to Escrow Agent from University, with a copy to Contractor, Escrow Agent shall immediately convert
the securities, any interest earned on the securities, and all interest earned on the interest to cash and shall
distribute the cash as instructed by University. Escrow Agent shall have no duty to determine whether a
default has occurred and may rely solely upon the written notice of such default from University.
(12) Upon receipt of written notification from University certifying that final payment is due under
the Contract, Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor the amount, if any, by which the value of all
securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the escrow account exceeds 125% of all
stop notice claims on file. Escrow Agent shall pay the remaining amount to University or as directed by
University. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all monies and securities on
deposit and payment of fees and charges.
(13) Escrow Agent shall rely upon the written notifications from University and Contractor
pursuant to this Escrow Agreement; and University and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from
Escrow Agent's release, conversion, and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth herein.
(14) Escrow Agent shall have the right to terminate this Escrow Agreement upon 30 days notice
to all parties hereunder. Upon receipt of such notice, University and Contractor shall appoint a successor
Escrow Agent in writing and deliver written notice of such appointment to Escrow Agent. Thereupon,
Escrow Agent shall deliver all assets in its custody to such successor Escrow Agent and all responsibility of
Escrow Agent under this Escrow Agreement shall terminate; provided, however, if Contractor and University
fail to appoint a successor Escrow Agent on or before the end of the 30 day notice period, then Escrow
Agent is authorized and instructed to return all assets, documents, and other items in its custody to
University and this Escrow Agreement shall be terminated without further instruction.
(15) The duties and responsibilities of Escrow Agent shall be limited to those expressly set forth
in this Escrow Agreement; provided, however, that, with Escrow Agent's written consent, the duties and
responsibilities in this Escrow Agreement may be amended at any time or times by an instrument in writing
signed by all parties.
(16) Whenever Contractor tenders securities to be deposited in lieu of retention, an authorized

representative of the Contractor shall declare under penalty of perjury that the securities are lien free and
shall remain lien free during their retention by the Escrow Agent. The declaration shall be in the following
form:

Exhibit 5B - 3 of 5
"The undersigned, on behalf of {NAME OF CONTRACTOR} whose

address is {STREET ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE} represents,
covenants and warrants that the securities tendered herewith are lien free
and shall remain lien free during their retention by the Escrow Agent.
I, {NAME}, hereby declare that I am the {TITLE} of {NAME OF

CONTRACTOR}, that I am duly authorized to make this representation,
and that I declare under perjury under the laws of the State of California
that the foregoing is true and correct."
(Signature) (Date)
(17) The names of the persons authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on
behalf of University and on behalf of Contractor in connection with this Escrow Agreement, and exemplars
of their respective signatures, are as set forth below. Such names may be changed by written notice to the
other parties.
1. 1.
(Name) (Name)
(Telephone Number) (Telephone Number)
2. 2.
(Name) (Name)

Exhibit 5B - 4 of 5
Contractor, Escrow Agent, and University hereby agree to the covenants contained herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Contractor, Escrow Agent, and University have executed this Escrow
Agreement, the day and year first written above.
UNIVERSITY: CONTRACTOR:
By: By:
(Title) (Title)
By: By:
(Title) (Title)
ESCROW AGENT:
By:
(Signature)
(Printed Name)
(Title)
(Telephone Number)

Exhibit 5B - 5 of 5
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Project Name:
Project #: Order #:
Contract Date: Subcontractor:
Spec. Section: Work Activity:
Scheduled Actual Calendar Days

Completion Completion Required to
Event Date Date Complete
1. Received by Contractor and Time for

Checking
2. First Delivered to University's

Representative and Time for Checking
3. Return to Contractor
4. Corrections Completed and Time for

Corrections
5. Next Delivered to University's

Representative and Time for Checking
6. Return to Contractor
7. Approval for Job Information
8. Approval for Fabrication and Time for

Fabrication
9. Fabrication Completed
10. Shipping Date and Time Enroute
11. Delivery to Job
LF REV 3.1:01/02/96 Submittal Schedule

Exhibit 6 - 1 of 1
COST PROPOSAL
Date: Change Order Request #:

Project Name:
Project #: Order #:
Contract Date:
Scope of Change:
Instructions:
1. Complete this form by providing (a) all information required above, (b) the amount and justification
based upon the Contract Schedule for any proposed adjustment of Contract Time, (c) the proposed
adjustment of Contract Sum, (d) the attached "Cost Proposal Summary," and (e) the attached form
titled, "Supporting Documentation for the Cost Proposal Summary."
2. Attach the form titled "Supporting Documentation for the Cost Proposal Summary" for Contractor
and each Subcontractor involved in the Extra Work. Each such form shall be completed and signed
by Contractor or Subcontractor actually performing the Work activity identified on the form. Attach
supporting data to each such form to substantiate the individually listed costs. The costs provided
on these forms shall be used to substantiate Additional Costs shown on the Cost Proposal
Summary.
3. The Contractor Fee shall be computed on the Cost of Extra Work of Contractor and each
Subcontractor involved in the Extra Work; and shall constitute full compensation for all costs and
expenses related to the subject change and not listed in the "Supporting Documentation for the
Cost Proposal Summary," including overhead and profit.
4. Refer to Subparagraph 7.3 of the General Conditions for the method of computing the Contractor
Fee.
LF REV 2:06/06/11 Cost Proposal

Exhibit 7 - 1 of 4
Adjustment of the Contract Time (Include justification based upon the Contract Schedule):
(Days)
Refer to Article 8 of the General Conditions.
Adjustment of the Contract Sum (Total from line 18, col. 4 of Cost Proposal Summary):
Refer to Article 7 of the General Conditions.
SUBMITTED: RECEIVED:
(Contractor) (University's Representative)
By: By:
Title: Title:
Date: Date:

Exhibit 7 - 2 of 4
COST PROPOSAL SUMMARY
Project Name:
Project #: Order #:
Contractor Name: Change Request #:
(1) (2) (3) (4)

2nd & Lower
Contractor 1st Tier Subs Tier Subs Total
1. Straight Time Wages/Salaries - Labor
2. Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes - Labor
3. Overtime Wages/Salaries - Labor
ACTUAL 4. Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes -

Overtime
COSTS 5. Materials and Consumable Items
6. Sales Taxes (On line 5)
7. Rental Charges
8. Royalties
9. Permits
10. Total Direct Expense (Sum of lines 1-9)
11. Insurance & Bonds (Up to 2% of line 10)
12. Sub-Sub (15% of line 10; col. 3)
13. Subcontractor (5% of line 10; col. 3)
CONTRACTOR 14. Subcontractor (15% of line 10; col. 2)
FEE 15. Contractor (5% of line 10; col. 2 & 3)
16. Contractor (15% of line 10; col. 1)
17. Contractor Fee (Sum of lines 12-16)
TOTAL 18. Sum of lines 10, 11, & 17; col. 4
Actual Costs are from line 12 of the attached forms titled, "Supporting Documentation for the Cost Proposal Summary" for Contractor
and each Subcontractor involved in the Extra Work.

Exhibit 7 - 3 of 4
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR THE COST PROPOSAL SUMMARY
Project Name:
Project #: Order #:
Contractor/
Subcontractor Name: Change Request #:
Work Activity:
COST ITEM COST(1)
1. Straight Time Wages/Salaries -- Labor

2. Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes -- Labor: % of line 1
3. Overtime Wages/Salaries - Labor
(Attach University Representative's written authorization)
ACTUAL 4. Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes -- Overtime: % of line 3
COSTS 5. Materials and Consumable items
6. Sales Taxes: % of line 5
7. Rental Charges (attach CalTrans Schedule)
8. Royalties
9. Permits
10. Total Direct Expense – sum of lines 1-9
11. Insurance and Bonds: % of line 10 (up to 2% of line 10)
TOTAL 12. Sum of lines 10 and 11
(Company Name) (Contractor’s Company Name)
(Signature)(2) (Signature)(3)
(Title) (Title)
(Date) (Date)
Notes: (1) Round off all costs to the nearest dollar.

(2) This form shall be prepared and signed by Contractor or Subcontractor actually performing the Work activity indicated
above.
(3) If this form is signed by a Subcontractor, it shall be reviewed and signed by Contractor certifying the accuracy of the
information.

Exhibit 7 - 4 of 4
FIELD ORDER
FIELD ORDER NO.
Project Name:
Project Number: Contract Date:
To Contractor:
Address:
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
LF ExFOREV 1:06/16/08 Field Order

Exhibit 8 - 1 of 2
Estimated Adjustment Estimated Adjustment

of Contract Sum: $ of Contract Time: Days
(Name of University's Representative - typed or printed)
(Signature)
(Title) (Date)
(Name of University's Designated Administrator -

typed or printed)
(Signature)
(Title) (Date)
Note: If the Work described above constitutes a change, this Field Order will be superseded by a Change
Order that will include the scope of the change in the Work and any actual adjustments of the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
LF ExFOREV 1:06/16/08 Field Order

Exhibit 8 - 2 of 2
CHANGE ORDER
CHANGE
ORDER NO. Reference Field Order #:
Project Name:
Project Number: Contract Date:
To Contractor:
Address:
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE:
Adjustment of Contract Sum: Adjustment of Contract Time:
Original Contract Sum: $ Original Contract Time: days
Prior Adjustments: $ Prior Adjustments: days
Contract Sum Prior to this Change: $ Contract Time Prior to this Change: days
Adjustment for this Change: $ Adjustment for this Change: days
Revised Contract Sum: $ Revised Contract Time: days
LF 07/03/13 Change Order

Exhibit 9 - 1 of 2
Contractor waives any claim for further adjustments of the Contract Sum and the Contract Time related to
the above described change in the Work.
Recommended: Accepted:
(Signature of University's Representative) (Name of Contractor - typed or printed)
(Printed Name) (Signature)
(Date) (Printed Name & Title)
(Date)
Reviewed and Recommended:
(Signature of University's Designated Administrator)
(Printed Name)
(Date)
Funds Sufficient:
(Signature of University's Accounting Office)
(Printed Name)
(Date)
Approved:
UNIVERSITY: THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY

OF CALIFORNIA
By:
(Signature)
(Printed Name and Title)
Date:
LF 07/03/13 Change Order

Exhibit 9 - 2 of 2
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND

RELEASE ON PROGRESS PAYMENT
NOTICE:
THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES THE CLAIMANT'S LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT
BOND RIGHTS EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT OF PAYMENT. A PERSON SHOULD NOT RELY ON THIS
DOCUMENT UNLESS SATISFIED THAT THE CLAIMANT HAS RECEIVED PAYMENT.
Identifying Information
Name of Claimant:
Name of Customer:
Job Location:
Owner:
Through Date:
Conditional Waiver and Release
This document waives and releases lien, stop payment notice, and payment bond rights the claimant has
for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job through
the Through Date of this document. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or
material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to
the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless
listed as an Exception below. This document is effective only on the claimant's receipt of payment from
the financial institution on which the following check is drawn:
Maker of Check:
Amount of Check: $
Check Payable to:
Exceptions
This document does not affect any of the following:

(1) Retentions.
(2) Extras for which the claimant has not received payment.
(3) The following progress payments for which the claimant has previously given a conditional
waiver and release but has not received payment:
Date(s) of waiver and release:
Amount(s) of unpaid progress payment(s): $
(4) Contract rights, including (A) a right based on rescission, abandonment, or breach of
contract, and (B) the right to recover compensation for work not compensated by the
payment.
Signature
Claimant's Signature:
Claimant's Title:
Date of Signature:
07/06/12 Conditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment

Exhibit 10A - 1 of 1
CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND

RELEASE ON FINAL PAYMENT
NOTICE:
THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES THE CLAIMANT'S LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT
BOND RIGHTS EFFECTIVE ON RECEIPT OF PAYMENT. A PERSON SHOULD NOT RELY ON THIS
DOCUMENT UNLESS SATISFIED THAT THE CLAIMANT HAS RECEIVED PAYMENT.
Name of Claimant:
Name of Customer:
Job Location:
Owner:
Conditional Waiver and Release
for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job. Rights
based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written change
order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by the
claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. This document
is effective only on the claimant's receipt of payment from the financial institution on which the following
check is drawn:
Maker of Check:
Amount of Check: $
Check Payable to:
Exceptions
This document does not affect any of the following: Disputed claims for extras in the amount of:
$ .
Signature
Claimant's Title:
Date of Signature:
07/06/12 Conditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment

Exhibit 10B - 1 of 1
UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND

RELEASE ON PROGRESS PAYMENT
NOTICE TO CLAIMANT:
UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE ON PROGRESS PAYMENT NOTICE TO CLAIMANT: THIS

DOCUMENT WAIVES AND RELEASES LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND
RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE
RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE
NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE
FORM.
Name of Claimant:
Name of Customer:
Job Location:
Owner:
Through Date:
Unconditional Waiver and Release
for labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job through
the Through Date of this document. Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or
material delivered, pursuant to a written change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to
the date that this document is signed by the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless
listed as an Exception below. The claimant has received the following progress payment:
$ .
Exceptions
This document does not affect any of the following:

(1) Retentions.
(2) Extras for which the claimant has not received payment.
(3) Contract rights, including (A) a right based on rescission, abandonment, or breach of
contract, and (B) the right to recover compensation for work not compensated by the
payment.
Signature
Claimant's Title:
Date of Signature:
07/06/12 Unconditional Waiver and Release on Progress Payment

Exhibit 11A - 1 of 1
UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND

RELEASE ON FINAL PAYMENT
NOTICE:
THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES AND RELEASES LIEN, STOP PAYMENT NOTICE, AND PAYMENT BOND
RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE
RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE
NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE
FORM.
Name of Claimant:
Name of Customer:
Job Location:
Owner:
Unconditional Waiver and Release
for all labor and service provided, and equipment and material delivered, to the customer on this job.
Rights based upon labor or service provided, or equipment or material delivered, pursuant to a written
change order that has been fully executed by the parties prior to the date that this document is signed by
the claimant, are waived and released by this document, unless listed as an Exception below. The
claimant has been paid in full.
Exceptions
This document does not affect any of the following: Disputed claims for extras in the amount of:
$ .
Signature
Claimant's Title:
Date of Signature:
07/06/12 Unconditional Waiver and Release on Final Payment

Exhibit 11B - 1 of 1
EXHIBIT 12
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
Master Builder’s Risk Program
Coverage Summary
This document summarizes the Builder’s Risk policy and is not intended to reflect all the terms,
conditions, or exclusions of such policy as of the effective date of coverage. This document is not an
insurance policy and does not amend, alter or extend the coverage afforded by the listed policy. The
actual insurance policy defines all the terms, exclusions and conditions of coverage, and not this
summary. Should any ambiguities or conflicts between the summary and policy exist, the policy terms
and conditions will apply.
Some Projects may be excluded and/or must be underwritten separately and may be subject to
different rates, deductibles, and terms and conditions (see page 15). Therefore, this document
should be used as a guideline only.
INSURANCE COMPANY: Allianz Global Risks U.S. Insurance Company
BEST’S RATING: A+
NAMED INSURED: Regents of the University of California
INSURING AGREEMENT
This Policy, subject to the Limit of Liability and the terms, conditions, and limitations contained herein or
endorsed hereon, insures against all risks of direct physical loss of or direct physical damage to Insured
Property while at the construction site, stored off-site, or in the course of transit within the Territorial
Limits specified in the Schedule during the Period of Insurance of each Insured Project.
LIMITS OF LIABILITY
SCHEDULE OF LIMITS
This Company shall not be liable for more than the Limit of Liability, as stated in Confirmation of
Coverage, in any one Occurrence for any one Insured Project, subject to the following limits and
sublimits:
MASTER POLICY LIMITS, BY CONSTRUCTION CLASS
$150,000,000 per project, per occurrence; except,

$ 25,000,000 per project, Joisted Masonry construction
$ 25,000,000 per project, Wood Frame construction
NOTE: The Total Estimated Construction Cost is estimated through project completion and reported
on the original Builder’s Risk Insurance Application. This Limit of Liability (Total Project Value (TPV))
will correspond with the Total Estimated Construction Cost as shown on the original Builder’s Risk
Insurance Application. If the construction costs should increase, the Limit of Liability (TPV) should be
subsequently increased, once advance notice has been given by the University’s Representative to
Willis Towers Watson.
170901 Exhibit 12
Summary of Builder’s Risk Insurance Policy - 1
KEY SUBLIMITS (percentage or dollar value, whichever is less):
1. $25,000,000 for Wood Frame Construction
2. $25,000,000 for Joisted Masonry Construction
3. $50,000,000 for Structural Renovations
4. $500,000 for Pollution Cleanup Expenses
5. 15% of the declared estimated Total Project Value or minimum of $2,500,000, subject to a
maximum of $30,000,000 for Demolition and Increased Cost of Construction
6. 25% of the adjusted property damage loss or minimum of $1,000,000, subject to a maximum of
$5,000,000 for Expediting Expense/Extra Expense
maximum of $10,000,000 for Insured Property while Stored Off-site
maximum of $10,000,000 for Insured Property while in the Course of Inland Transit
(continental US)
maximum of $30,000,000 for Debris Removal
10. $750,000 for Valuable Papers
11. $1,000,000 for Trees, Grass, Shrubbery, Seed and Plants
12. 10% of estimated Total Project Value or minimum of $1,000,000, subject to a maximum of
$10,000,000 for Frost, Freeze, Falling of Ice
13. 15% of the adjusted property damage loss or minimum of $1,000,000, subject to a maximum of
$15,000,000 for Green/LEED Rating System
14. 10% of the adjusted property damage loss or minimum of $250,000, subject to a maximum of
$500,000 for Mold/Fungi
maximum of $10,000,000 for additional Architects, Engineering and Professional Fees
16. $500,000 for Claims Preparation Expenses
17. $750,000 for Protection Services and Equipment Refills
18. $50,000 for Reward Payment
19. $1,000,000 for Off Premises Service Interruption – Direct Damage
170901 Exhibit 12
KEY TERMS AND CONDITIONS
NAMED INSURED
The Regents of the University of California and all affiliated and subsidiary companies, corporations,
ventures, partnerships or other organizations, all owned, controlled or managed by the Named Insured
and all as now exist or may hereafter be constituted or acquired.
ADDITIONAL INSUREDS
General Contractors, Construction Managers and subcontractors of every tier. Additionally, any other
person or entity(ies) as identified on a Project Declaration Endorsement, Quarterly Report
Endorsement, or to the extent required by a written contract or agreement. As respects architects,
engineers, manufacturers and suppliers, the foregoing is limited to their site activities only.
ATTACHMENT/TERMINATION
Insurance hereunder applies to all projects specifically declared under the Master Policy in a Quarterly
Report Endorsement or in a Project Declaration Endorsement, where the project is scheduled to begin
during the term of the Master Policy. The Master Policy term commences on September 1, 2017 at
12:01AM and ends on September 1, 2020 at 12:01AM.
Coverage for each Insured Project declared under the Master Policy will go into effect and continue in
full force and effect during the Coverage Period specified in the Confirmation of Coverage.
NOTIFICATION OF COVERAGE/TERMINATION: The Confirmation of Coverage Period will correspond with the Estimated Dates of
Commencement and Completion of Work as indicated on the original Builder’s Risk Insurance Application. If construction is not completed on
time and coverage beyond the Estimated Date of Completion of Work is required, prior notification must be given by the University
Representative to Willis Towers Watson in order to ensure that coverage remains in force for the project.
DEDUCTIBLES (Basis for determining Deductible is the Total Project Value on record with the insurance
company at time of loss. Total Project Value will correspond with the Total Estimated Construction Cost
reported.)
NOTE: The contractor shall be responsible for the deductibles.
All Other Perils (except Water Damage; Electrical/Mechanical Breakdown and/or Hot-testing)
$10,000 for Projects up to a value of $25,000,000
$25,000 for Projects exceeding $25,000,000 in value
Water Damage
$25,000 for projects up to a value of $25,000,000
$50,000 for projects valued $25,000,000 up to $50,000,000
$75,000 for projects exceeding $50,000,000 in value
Frost/Freeze/Falling Ice: $100,000
Electrical/Mechanical Breakdown and/or Hot Testing

$50,000 for Projects up to a value of $25,000,000
$100,000 for Projects valued $25,000,000 up to $100,000,000
$250,000 for Projects exceeding $100,000,000 in value
170901 Exhibit 12
KEY EXCLUSIONS
PROPERTY EXCLUDED
This Policy does not insure:
1. Land, but this exclusion does not apply to excavation and grading as long as the cost of the
excavation and grading is included in the Limit of Liability as stated in Confirmation of Coverage.
2. Contractor’s plant and equipment, machinery, tools, or property of similar nature not destined to
become a permanent part of the Insured Project but this exclusion shall not apply to formwork,
fences, shoring, falsework and temporary buildings as long as the value of these items are
included in the estimated Limit of Liability as stated in Confirmation of Coverage.
3. Automobiles or other vehicles, watercraft or aircraft.
4. Water.
5. Accounts, bills, currency, deeds, securities, books, records, manuscripts, other similar papers, or
data processing media.
6. Existing buildings or structures or any other existing property.
7. Owner supplied material, equipment, machinery and supplies, unless the value of such is included
in the Limit of Liability as stated in Confirmation of Coverage.
8. Transmission and/or distribution lines; including wires, cables, poles, towers and all equipment
attached thereto beyond 1,000 feet from the perimeter of the project site.
9. Partially or completely excavated or open trench, pipeline or workface, at any one time beyond
1,000 feet in length.
EXCLUDED CAUSES OF LOSS
1. Loss or damage caused by, or resulting from, wear and tear, moth, vermin, termites or other insects,
inherent vice, latent defect, gradual deterioration, wet or dry rot and rust, corrosion, erosion or normal
settling, shrinkage, and/or expansion of buildings and/or foundations.
2. Any loss of use or occupancy or consequential loss of any nature howsoever caused.
3. Liquidated damages and/or penalties for delay or detention in connection with guarantees of
performance or efficiency.
4. Hostile or warlike action.
5. Nuclear reaction, nuclear radiation, or radioactive contamination.
6. Any cost or expenses incurred to test for, monitor, or assess the existence, concentration or effects
of Fungi.
170901 Exhibit 12
7. Loss or damage caused by or resulting from infidelity or dishonesty on the part of the Insured and/or
any employee of the Insured; inventory shortage or unexplained disappearance.
8. Loss or damage caused by or resulting from the enforcement of any ordinance or law, or any order of
governmental or municipal authority; by suspension, lapse, termination and/or cancellation of any
license, lease, or permit, or any injunction or process of any court, unless otherwise endorsed herein.
9. Loss or damage caused by, resulting form, contributed to or made worse by actual, alleged, or
threatened release, discharge, escape or dispersal of Contaminants and/or Pollutants.
10. Loss or damage to Insured Property while aboard any aircraft or watercraft.
11. The cost of making good faulty or defective workmanship, material, construction, designs, plans
and/or specifications unless direct physical loss or direct physical damage not otherwise excluded
under this policy ensues and then this Policy will cover such ensuing loss or damage only.
12. Loss, damage, corruption, destruction, distortion, interruption, disruption, erasure, deletion, alteration,
loss of use, reduction in functionality, loss of access to, denial of access to or breakdown of
Electronic Data from any cause whatsoever.
13. Loss or damage to Used Equipment caused by mechanical and/or electrical breakdown.
14. Loss or damage directly or indirectly caused by, resulting from, contributed to, or aggravated by Land
Movement.
15. Loss or damage directly or indirectly caused by, resulting from, contributed to, or aggravated by
Flood.
16. Loss or damage covered under any guarantee or warranty, expressed or implied, by any
manufacturer or supplier whether or not such manufacturer or supplier is an Insured under this
policy.
17. Terrorism.
18. Loss or damage arising out of the performance of the professional activities of any
consulting engineer, architect, or designer, or any person employed by them or any others
whose acts they are legally liable for whether or not named as an Insured under this Policy.
170901 Exhibit 12
SELECTED EXTENSIONS OF COVERAGE
1. EXPEDITING/EXTRA EXPENSES
Subject to the stated sublimit, this Policy is extended to cover extra charges for overtime, night work,
work on public holidays, the extra cost of rental construction equipment, express freight, including air
freight all incurred solely:
A. to facilitate the repair or replacement of the Insured Property which has sustained physical loss
or physical damage from a peril insured, or;
B. which are necessary to return the work on the Insured Property to the same schedule actually
being observed immediately prior to the sustaining of physical loss or physical damage from a
peril insured.
This Policy does not cover charges incurred to expedite work on parts of the Insured Property
which have not sustained physical loss or physical damage.
2. DEMOLITION AND INCREASED COST OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of direct physical loss and/or direct physical damage
by perils insured under this Policy, the Company shall also pay:
(i) The increased cost to repair, replace or re-erect the Insured Property caused by the
enforcement of any building, zoning or land use ordinance or law in force at the time of
loss. If the Insured Property is replaced, it must be intended for similar occupancy of the
current Insured Property, unless otherwise required by zoning or land use ordinance or
law.
(ii) The cost to demolish and clear the construction site of undamaged parts of the Insured
Property caused by the enforcement of any building, zoning or land use law in force at
the time of the loss.
B. In no event, however, shall the Company be liable for costs associated with the enforcement of
any ordinance or law which requires any Insured or others to test for, monitor, clean up,
remove, contain, treat, detoxify, or neutralize, or in any way respond to or assess the
discharge, dispersal, release or escape of smoke, vapors, soot, fumes, acids, alkali, toxic
chemicals, liquids or gasses, waste materials or other irritants, any Contaminants and/or
Pollutants.
C. The Company shall not pay for the increased cost of construction until the Insured Property is
actually repaired, replaced, or re-erected at the same construction site or elsewhere and as
soon as reasonably possible after the loss or damage, not to exceed thirty (30) months.
170901 Exhibit 12
D. In no event, however, shall the Company pay more:
(i) If the Insured Property is repaired, replaced or re-erected at the same construction site
than the amount the insured actually spends to:
a) Demolish and clear the construction site; and
b) Repair, replace or re-erect the Insured Property but not for more than property of like
height, floor area and style at the same construction site.
(ii) If the Insured Property is not repaired, replaced, or re-erected at the same construction
site than:
a) The amount the Insured actually spends to demolish and clear the construction site; and
b) The cost to replace, at the same construction site, the damaged or destroyed Insured
Property with other property;
1) of like kind and quality;
2) of like height, floor area and style; and
3) used for the same purpose.
(iii) Than the stated sublimit of Demolition and Increased Cost of Construction.
3. PROTECTION SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT REFILLS
Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of direct physical loss or direct physical damage to Insured
Property by perils insured under this Policy, this insurance shall also pay the cost for services rendered
by the Fire Department, Police Department or other governmental authority to save or protect Insured
Property from direct physical loss or damage by an insured peril, for which the Insured is liable,
provided they are assumed by contract or written agreement prior to a loss or they are required by a
local ordinance.
This policy also covers cost or expense to recharge or refill any fire protective equipment owned, in the
control of, or used to protect the Insured Property when discharged:
A. To prevent or control direct physical loss or direct physical damage by an insured peril; or
B. Accidentally; or
C. As a result of malfunction of the equipment.
In respect items B. and C. above, the Company will pay for amounts in excess of amounts recoverable
under any manufacturer’s or supplier’s warranty.
170901 Exhibit 12
4. PLANS, BLUEPRINTS, AND SPECIFICATIONS
Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of direct physical damage to records, documents,
drawings, plans, blueprints or specifications by perils insured under this policy, this insurance shall
also pay the costs of mechanical reproduction from originals.
5. TREES, GRASS, SHRUBBERY, SEED AND PLANTS
Subject to the stated sublimit, this policy is extended to insure direct physical loss or direct physical
damage to trees, grass, shrubbery, seed and plants caused by or resulting from fire, lightning,
windstorm, hail, explosion, smoke, collision by aircraft or vehicle, riot, riot attending a strike or civil
commotion, vandalism or malicious mischief.
6. DEBRIS REMOVAL
Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of direct physical loss or physical damage to Insured
Property by perils insured under this policy, this insurance shall also pay the cost of removal of
material and debris being a part of the Insured Property located at the construction site and the cost
to demolish and clear the construction site of undamaged parts caused by the enforcement of any
building, zoning or land use law in force at the time of the loss.
This Policy also covers cost or expense to:
A. Extract Contaminants and/or Pollutants from the debris; or

B. Extract Contaminants and/or Pollutants from land and/or water; or
C. Remove, restore, or replace land and/or water made necessary due to the presence of
Contaminants and/or Pollutants; or
D. Remove or transport any property, material, or debris to a site for storage or decontamination
required because the property, material, or debris is affected by Contaminants and/or
Pollutants, whether or not such removal, transport, or decontamination is required by law or
regulation.
E. This sub-clause (Items A - D above), is subject to a sublimit for Pollution Cleanup Expenses.
It is a condition precedent to recovery under this clause, that the Company shall have paid, or agreed
to pay for direct physical loss or direct physical damage to the Insured Property and that the Insured
shall give written notice to the Company of intent to claim for cost of removal of debris or the cost of
cleanup no later than (12) twelve months after the date the original physical loss or physical damage
occurred.
7. ARCHITECT, ENGINEERING AND PROFESSIONAL FEES
Subject to the stated sublimit, Architect, Engineering and Professional Fees shall mean the
additional architectural and engineering expenses, excluding any costs for redesign or betterment, or
owner’s consultant service expenses, or owner’s legal, appraisal, title and/or inspection fees incurred
to facilitate repair or replacement of the Insured Property which has sustained physical loss or
physical damage from an insured peril.
170901 Exhibit 12
8. GREEN/LEED
Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of a direct physical loss or direct physical damage not
otherwise excluded in the policy to Insured Property by perils insured under the policy the Insurer
shall also pay the reasonable additional cost, if any, incurred by the Insured to repair or replace
such damaged or destroyed Insured Property in a manner and with products or materials of
otherwise equivalent quality and function that meet the requirements of the LEED Rating System.
Coverage under this extension applies only if the Insured Project has been registered with the US
Green Building Council during the Period of Insurance specified as stated in Confirmation of
Coverage and prior to any loss, and only to the initial and intended building certification level that
has been registered with the US Green Building Council, in accordance with the criteria outlined in
order to comply with the requirements of the LEED Rating System existing at the time of the loss
or damage to the Insured Project, which upon completion will undergo the process of being
certified by the US Green Building Council.
This coverage extension includes the additional coverages below as part of and not in addition to
the sublimit as stated:
(1) CERTIFICATION FEES

Coverage is provided herein for the registration and certification fees charged by U.S. Green
Building Council for the Insured to obtain LEED certification;
(2) COMMISSIONING EXPENSE

Coverage is provided herein for the reasonable expense incurred by the Insured to hire a
professional engineer to provide commissioning or retro-commissioning services, including
overseeing the repairs and replacement of damaged or destroyed Insured Property in order to
verify and document that the replacement systems have been installed and calibrated properly
and perform according to the documented design criteria and manufacturers' specifications; and to
conduct a Test-and-Balance analysis of heating, ventilating or air conditioning systems (HVAC) as
part of the commissioning or retro-commissioning , even if the HVAC system did not sustain any
physical loss or damage;
(3) FLUSH-OUT OF RECONSTRUCTED SPACE

Coverage is provided herein for the reasonable expense incurred by the Insured to flush out the
reconstructed space with 100% outside air through new filtration media following reconstruction in
a manner consistent with the LEED Rating System;
(4) LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL FEES

Coverage is provided herein for the reasonable expense incurred by the Insured to hire a LEED
Accredited Professional to participate in the design and construction of the damaged or destroyed
building.
(5) RECYCLING EXPENSE

DEBRIS REMOVAL is extended to cover the reasonable additional cost incurred, if any, to sort,
collect and transport recyclable debris to recycling facilities instead of landfills. Any income or
remuneration derived from this recycling will be used to reduce the amount of the loss.
170901 Exhibit 12
GREEN / LEED EXCLUSIONS:

No coverage is provided under this extension:
A. If no such products or materials exist at the time of the loss or damage; or

B. If the Insured does not repair or replace the damaged or destroyed Insured Property.
In no event will the policy pay more than the lesser of the:
A. The cost to repair; or

B. The cost to replace;
the damaged Insured Property in a manner and with products or materials of otherwise
equivalent quality and function that meet the requirements of the LEED Rating System existing
at the time of the loss or damage.
No coverage is provided under this extension of coverage for any of the following items:
A. Re-registering the Insured project with the US Green Building Council.

B. Failure to meet the registered LEED Building Rating certification level.
C. Land and land values.
D. Any additional cost incurred to comply with any law or ordinance.
E. Personal property of others in the Insured’s care, custody or control.
F. Raw materials, stock-in-process and finished goods.
G. Motor vehicles.
H. Property located outside the Territorial Limits of the policy.
9. CLAIMS PREPARATIONS EXPENSE
Subject to the stated sublimit, this policy is extended to include reasonable expenses incurred by
the Insured, or by the Insured’s representatives for preparing the details of a claim resulting from a
loss which would be payable under this policy. However, the Company shall not liable for
expenses incurred by the Insured in utilizing or retaining the services of attorneys, insurance
agents or brokers; or any subsidiary, related or associated entities either partially or wholly owned
by an attorney or public adjuster.
10. MOLD/FUNGI
Subject to the stated sublimit, in the event of direct physical loss or direct physical damage to Insured
Property by perils insured under the policy, the insurance shall also pay, subject to the Limit of
Liability and the terms, conditions, and limitations of this policy, the cost to clean up or remove
Mold/Fungi from Insured Property located at the construction site.
Not withstanding any terms or conditions, this policy does not insure any cost or expense incurred to
test for, monitor, or assess the existence, concentration or effects of Mold/Fungi.
170901 Exhibit 12
11. REWARD PAYMENT
Subject to the stated sublimit, the Company will reimburse the Named Insured for rewards that the
Named Insured paid to others for information leading to:
A. The successful return of undamaged stolen Insured Property to the Insured or a law
enforcement agency; or
B. The arrest and convictions of any persons responsible for having damaged or stolen
Covered Property.
The reward payments must be documented.
The most that the Company will pay under this Coverage Extension in any one “occurrence” is
25% of the covered loss of or damage to Insured Property, prior to the application of any
applicable Deductible and recovery of any Insured Property, up to the stated Sublimit.
12. OFF-PREMISES SERVICE INTERRUPTION – DIRECT DAMAGE
Subject to the stated sublimit, the Company will pay for direct physical loss of or damage to Insured
Property at the project site directly caused by an off premises service interruption. The interruption
must result from direct physical loss or damage directly caused by a covered cause of loss to property
located away from the project site and used to provide any of the following services to the project site:
A. Water;
B. Power, including steam and natural gas; or
C. Communication, including video, voice and data.
SELECTED GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. REQUIREMENTS IN CASE OF LOSS
In the event of loss or damage to Insured Property the Insured shall:
A. Give immediate notice to the insurance company;
B. Protect the Insured Property from further loss or damage;
C. Within ninety (90) days from the date of discovery of the loss or damage, the
Named Insured shall render a statement to the Insurer signed and sworn to by the
Named Insured stating the knowledge and belief of the Insured as to the time and cause
of the loss or damage and the interest of the Insured and all others in the Insured
Property;
D. Exhibit to any person designated by the Insurer all that remains of the Insured
Property.
E. Coordinate and cooperate with investigation and/or inspection of property and

provide documentation as requested by the insurance adjuster. Do NOT destroy
or salvage damaged property unless authorized to do so by the insurance
adjuster.
170901 Exhibit 12
F. Submit to examinations under oath by any person named by the Insurer and produce for
examination all writings, books of account, bills, invoices and other vouchers, or certified
copies thereof if originals be lost, at such reasonable time and place as may be
designated by the Insurer or its representative, and permit extracts and copies thereof to
be made. No such examination under oath or examination of books or documents shall
be deemed to be a waiver of any defense which the Insurer might otherwise have with
respect to any loss or claim; but all such examinations and acts shall be deemed to have
been made or done without prejudice to the Company’s liability.
G. Subject to the Limit of Liability and the terms, conditions, and limitations of the policy, all
adjusted losses shall be paid or made good to the Named Insured within sixty (60) days
after presentation and acceptance of the satisfactory proof of interest and loss to the
Insurer. No amount shall be paid on an adjusted loss or made good if the Insured has
collected the same from others.
2. VALUATION
Subject to the Limit of Liability, sublimits or Aggregate Limit of Liability, the Insurer shall not be
liable beyond the cost to repair, replace, or re-erect the Insured Property at the time and place
of loss, with materials of like kind and quality, less the cost of betterment, salvage, or other
recovery including contractors reasonable profit and overhead in the proportion as that included
in the original contract documents, or 15% profit and overhead, whichever is lesser. If the
Insured Property is not replaced, then the loss shall be settled on the Actual Cash Value basis
with proper deduction for depreciation, salvage or other recovery and exclusive of profit and
overhead.
3. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
In the case of direct physical loss or direct physical damage to Insured Property by perils insured
under the policy, it shall be lawful and necessary for the Insured, his or their factors, servants, or
assigns, to sue, labor, and travel for in and about the defense, safeguard, and recovery of the
Insured Property, or any part thereof, without prejudice to this insurance, nor shall the acts of the
Insured or Insurer, in recovering, saving, and preserving the Insured Property in case of loss be
considered a waiver or an acceptance of abandonment. The expenses so incurred shall be borne
by the Insured and the Insurer proportionately to the extent of their respective interests.
4. OTHER INSURANCE
This Policy shall not provide coverage to the extent of any other insurance, whether prior or
subsequent hereto in date, and by whomsoever effected, directly or indirectly covering the same
property against the same peril; and the Company shall be liable for direct physical loss or direct
physical damage only for the excess value beyond the amount due from such other insurance,
subject to the applicable Deductible.
170901 Exhibit 12
5. INSUREDS’ REPRESENTATIVE
The first Named Insured shall be the sole and irrevocable agent of each and every Insured for
the purpose of:
A. Payment of premium;
B. Giving or receiving notice of cancellation;
C. Requesting amendments to this policy and accepting amendments to the policy made by
the Insurer.
6. LOSS PAYABLE
Loss, if any, shall be payable to the first Named Insured and/or its assigned designee.
7. PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere in the policy, the Owner and/or tenants may
occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Insured Property, provided
that the Insured warrants that all fire protection shall be in service and fully operational during
such occupancy or use.
SELECTED DEFINITIONS
The following terms have been defined in the Master Policy and will be applied in the interpretation of
certain wording used herein or within the Master Policy.
1. FLOOD:
Flood shall mean the rising, overflowing or breaking of boundaries of rivers, lakes, streams,
ponds or similar natural or man-made bodies of water, or from waves, tidal waves, tidal waters,
wave wash, or spray from any of the foregoing, surface waters, rain accumulation run off, all
whether driven by wind or not.
2. CONTAMINANTS OR POLLUTANTS:
Contaminants and/or Pollutants shall mean any material which after its release or discharge can
cause or threaten damage to human health and/or human welfare, or causes or threatens
damage, deterioration, loss of value, marketability and/or loss of use to Insured Property;
including, but not limited to, bacteria, virus, or hazardous substances as listed in the Federal
Water Pollution Control Act, Clean Air Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976,
and/or Toxic Substances Control Act, or as designated by the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency.
3. LAND MOVEMENT:
Land Movement shall mean all land movement however caused, whether by natural event or
man-made including but not limited to, earthquake, volcanic eruption, tsunami, subsidence,
landslide, mudflow, or rockfall.
170901 Exhibit 12
4. OCCURRENCE:
Occurrence shall mean any one loss, disaster, or casualty, or series of losses, disasters, or
casualties arising out of one event. With respect to the perils of Flood, Land Movement, or riots,
one event shall be construed to be all losses arising during a continuous period of seventy-two
(72) hours. With respect to the peril of Water Damage, one event shall be construed to be all
losses arising during a continuous period of ninety-six (96) hours.
The Insured may choose the time from which any such period shall be deemed to have
commenced, provided it shall not be earlier than the time of the first loss sustained by the Insured
during the Occurrence.
5. WATER DAMAGE:
All water damage excluding flood, however caused, whether by natural event or man-made,
including but not limited to interior water damage, damage due to water from pipe breakage or
sprinkler leakage, damage from rainfall and/or resulting runoff; all whether wind driven or not.
170901 Exhibit 12
PROJECTS EXCLUDED AND/OR MUST BE UNDERWRITTEN SEPARATELY. THESE

PROJECTS MAY BE SUBJECT TO DIFFERENT RATES, DEDUCTIBLES, TERMS AND
CONDITIONS.
(A) Construction Cost exceeds:
 $150 Million regardless of Construction Type (Standalone project-specific policy may apply
on projects over $100 Million)
 $25 Million for Wood Frame (Standalone project-specific policy may apply on projects over
$10 Million)
 $25 Million for Joisted Masonry
 $50 Million for Structural Renovations
(B) Project involves the following:
 Construction occurring outside of the State of California

 Co-Generation Facility
 Stadium or arena
 Bridge
 Tunnel
 Excavations greater than 1,000 feet in length or 40 feet in depth
 Transmission and/or distribution lines extending greater than 1,000 feet in length from the
perimeter project site including cable, telecom, wires, poles, towers, and electrical
 Directional Drilling
 Gas Turbine
 Power Plants
(C) Project involves the following, without being delivered in combination with other new “ground-
up” construction:
 Water or Sewer Pipelines, Cut and Cover, Open Trench, Utility Relocations (exceeding
$25M in value), Central Utility Plants, Waste Water, or Water Treatment Facilities.
(Standalone projects means when the scope of work is not included in the estimated
Construction Cost of a building project).
(D) Project requires coverage for:
 Land Movement (e.g. Earthquake)

 Flood
 Terrorism
 Delay in Completion/Business Interruption
END OF EXHIBIT 12
170901 Exhibit 12
{PROJECT NAME}
University of California, Los Angeles Project No.: {#}
EXHIBIT 13
SELF-CERTIFICATION
For the Contractor and each Subcontractor indicated on the Report of Subcontractor Information,
the following must be completed.
OR
For the Consultant and each Sub-consultant, the following must be completed.
Indicate all Business category(ies) that apply by initialing next to the applicable category(ies):
Small Business Enterprise (SBE) - an independently owned and operated concern

(Initial if certified, or certifiable, as small business by the Federal Small Business
applicable) Administration (SBA). (Size standards by Standard Industrial Classification codes
required by the Federal Acquisition Regulations, Section 19.102, may be found at
http://www.sba.gov/content/table-small-business-size-standards.) The eligibility
requirements for California contracting purposes is on the Department of General
Services website at
http://www.dgs.ca.gov/pd/Programs/OSDS/SBEligibilityBenefits.aspx. The University
may rely on written representation by the vendors regarding their status.
Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise (DVBE) - a business that is at least 51%

(Initial if owned by one or more disabled veterans or, in the case of any publicly owned
applicable) business, at least 51% of the stock of which is owned by such individuals and whose
management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more of such
individuals. A Disabled Veteran is a veteran of the military, naval, or air service of the
United States with a service connected disability who is a resident of the State of
California. To qualify as a veteran with a service connected disability, the person
must be currently declared by the United States Veterans Administration to be 10% or
more disabled as a result of service in the armed forces.
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) - a business concern that is at least

(Initial if 51% owned by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals or, in
applicable) the case of any publicly owned business, at least 51% of the stock of which is owned
by such individuals and whose management and daily business operations are
controlled by one or more of such individuals. Socially disadvantaged individuals are
those who have been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because
of their identity as members of a group without regard to their individual qualities.
Economically disadvantaged individuals are those socially disadvantaged individuals
whose ability to compete in the free private enterprise system has been impaired due
to diminished capital and credit opportunities as compared to others in the same
business area who are not socially disadvantaged. Business owners who certify that
they are members of named groups (Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Native
Americans, Asian-Pacific Americans, Asian-Indian Americans) are to be considered
socially and economically disadvantaged.
Women-Owned Business Enterprise (WBE) - a business that is at least 51% owned

(Initial if by a woman or women who also control and operate it. “Control” in this context
applicable) means exercising the power to make policy decisions. “Operate” in this context
means being actively involved in the day-to-day management.
None of the above categories apply.

(Initial if
applicable)
11/15/13 Exhibit 13
Self-Certification Page 1 of 2
{PROJECT NAME}
University of California, Los Angeles Project No.: {#}
I hereby certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that I have read this
certification and know the contents thereof, and that the business category indicated above reflects
the true and correct status of the business in accordance with Federal Small Business Administration
criteria and Federal Acquisition Regulations, FAR 19 pertaining to small, disadvantaged, women-
owned, and disabled veteran business enterprises. I understand that falsely certifying the status of
this business, obstructing, impeding or otherwise inhibiting any University of California official who is
attempting to verify the information on this form may result in suspension from participation in
University of California business contracts for a period up to five (5) years and the imposition of any
civil penalties allowed by law.
INFORMATION FURNISHED BY:

(Print or Type Name of Owner and/or Principal)
(Name of Business or Firm)
a
(Insert type of business e.g. corporation, sole proprietorship, partnership, etc.)
By:
(Print Name) (Title)
(Signature) (Date)
PRIVACY NOTICE
The State of California Information Practices Act of 1977 (effective July 1, 1978) requires the
University of California to provide the following information to individuals who are asked to supply
personal information about themselves. Information furnished on the Self-Certification form may,
in some cases, identify personal information of an individual.
• The University of California, Los Angeles, is requesting the information contained in this
form and the accompanying Report of Subcontractor Information.
• The Small Business Coordinator at the University of California, Los Angeles, is
responsible for maintaining the requested information. The contact information for the
Small Business Coordinators may be found at: http://www.ucop.edu/procurement-
services/_files/sbdmgr.xlsx.
• The maintenance of information is authorized in part by Public Contract Code section
10500.5.
• Furnishing the information requested on this form is mandatory. If SBE, DBE, WBE
and/or DVBE status is applicable, furnishing such information is mandatory.
• Failure to provide the information may be a violation of bidding procedures and/or breach
of the contract and the University may pursue any and all remedies permitted by the
provisions of the Contract Documents.
• The information on this form is collected for monitoring and reporting purposes in
accordance with state law and University policy.
• The individual may access information contained in this form and related forms by
contacting the Small Business Coordinator(s).
11/15/13 Exhibit 13
Self-Certification Page 2 of 2
(NOTE: THIS EXHIBIT IS NOT TO BE SUBMITTED WITH BID)
EXHIBIT 14
LF REV 1:05/01/06 Exhibit 14

Report of Subcontractor Information - 1 of 1
CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORT
Prime Contractor: Subcontractor:
Job Name & Area: Date:
NOTE: Please indicate, by category, the number of workers on site, and the hours, for the above date.
CATEGORY # HOURS CATEGORY # HOURS CATEGORY # HOURS
Superintendents Foreman Carpenters
Laborers Operating Eng. Pipefitters
Cement Finishers Sheet Metal Masons

Lathers Ironworkers Plasterers
Truck Drivers Painters Electricians

Plumbers
Work Force: Work Force: Total Work Force:

Superintendents Workers
& Foremen
Materials Delivered:
Description of Work and Location:
Injuries or Accidents:
Special Notes (incl. Union Representatives and Special Visitors):
NOTE: Contractor and each subcontractor on site shall completely fill out a Contractor's Daily Report, on
forms provided by University's Representative (refer to Exhibits, bound herein), for each day
worked. It is the responsibility of Contractor to submit all Daily Reports, including those of
subcontractors, by 9:00 a.m. the following work day. Failure to submit Daily Reports in a timely
manner may result in delayed progress payment(s).
(Signature) (Printed Name)
LF REV 0:03/22/96 Contractor’s Daily Report

Exhibit 15 - 1 of 1
PROJECT NAME: _______________________________________________________________________________ Project No. __________________________
EXHIBIT 16
LF REV 1:05/01/06 Exhibit 16

Final Distribution of Contract Dollars - 1 of 1
EXHIBIT 17
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Project Name: {FILL IN}
Project Number: {FILL IN} Order Number: {FILL IN}
Contractor: {FILL IN}
Date of Issuance: {FILL IN}
The Work has been reviewed and the date of Substantial Completion is hereby established as of the date of
issuance above.
A Certificate of Occupancy has been issued by the University’s Building Official John MacDougall on
{Month, Day, Year}.
A list of items to be completed or corrected is included herein. The failure to include any items on such list
does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
In accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor is notified as follows:
1. Without limitation of Contractor's obligation to fully complete the Work within the Contract Time,
Contractor shall complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within {#} days
from the date of Substantial Completion.
2. University will be responsible for {INSERT "NONE" OR STATE ANY UNIVERSITY
RESPONSIBILITIES AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: security, maintenance, utilities (e.g.
water, sewer, electrical, gas, etc.)}.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for all Contract requirements except items or responsibilities of
University set forth in Paragraph 2 above.
4. List of items to be completed or corrected: {INSERT "SEE ATTACHED LIST" OR IDENTIFY ITEMS
TO BE COMPLETED/CORRECTED}
LF REV 0:02/01/04 Certificate of Substantial Completion

Exhibit 17 - 1 of 2
UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE:
(Name of Firm)
(Signature)
(Typed or Printed Name)
(Title)
(Date)
UNIVERSITY: THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
(Signature)
(Typed or Printed Name)
(Title)
(Date)
LF REV 0:02/01/04 Certificate of Substantial Completion

Exhibit 17 - 2 of 2
PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________________________________ Project No. __________________
EXHIBIT 18
GENERAL CONTRACTOR CLAIM CERTIFICATION
Pursuant to Article 4.3.3 of the General Conditions, I certify as follows:
1. The Claim to which this certification is attached is made in good faith.
2. Amounts claimed for costs, expenses and damages incurred by Contractor are accurate and
complete. Supporting data for amounts incurred by Contractor is accurate and complete. Any
such supporting data, including any such new amounts, submitted after the execution of this
certification, will be accurate and complete.
3. To the best of my knowledge and belief, amounts claimed, and supporting data submitted by
Contractor on behalf of any and all subcontractors or suppliers, of all tiers, or any person or entity
under Contractor, are accurate and complete. Contractor will not submit, after the date of
execution of this certification, any such supporting data, including any such new amounts that, to
the best of my knowledge and belief, is not accurate and complete.
4. The amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment of the Contract Sum for which the
Contractor believes the University is liable.
5. Attached hereto is a certification that has been executed by each Subcontractor claiming not less
than 5% of the total monetary amount sought by the claim to which this certification is attached.
6. I am duly authorized to certify the Claim on behalf of the Contractor.
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and
correct and that this declaration was executed at: ,

(Name of City if within a City, otherwise Name of County)
(State) (Date)
(Signature)
(Print Name)
(Name of Contractor)
LF REV 0:12/01/04 General Contractor Claim Certification

Exhibit 18 - 1 of 1
PROJECT NAME: ____________________________________________________________ Project No. __________________
EXHIBIT 19
SUBCONTRACTOR CLAIM CERTIFICATION
Pursuant to Article 4.3.3 of the General Conditions, I certify as follows:
1. The portion of the Claim made on behalf of the Subcontractor to which this certification is
attached is made in good faith.
2. Amounts claimed for costs, expenses and damages incurred by the Subcontractor are accurate
and complete. Supporting data for amounts incurred by the Subcontractor is accurate and
complete. Any such supporting data, including any such new amounts, submitted to Contractor
after the execution of this certification, will be accurate and complete.
3. To the best of my knowledge and belief, amounts claimed, and supporting data submitted to
Contractor by the Subcontractor on behalf of any and all subcontractors or suppliers to
Subcontractor, of all tiers, or any person or entity under Subcontractor, are accurate and
complete. Subcontractor will not submit, after the date of execution of this certification, any such
supporting data, including any such new amounts that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, is
not accurate and complete.
4. The amount requested accurately reflects the amount for which the Subcontractor believes the
University is liable to Contractor.
5. I am duly authorized to certify the Claim on behalf of the Subcontractor.
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and
correct and that this declaration was executed at: ,

(Name of City if within a City, otherwise Name of County)
(State) (Date)
(Signature)
(Print Name)
(Name of Subcontractor)
LF REV 0:12/01/04 Subcontractor Claim Certification

Exhibit 19 - 1 of 1
WHEN RECORDED, MAIL TO:

LISA COMPTON
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES
CAPITAL PROGRAMS
1060 VETERAN AVE, SUITE 125
BOX 951365
LOS ANGELES, CA 90095-1365
NOTICE OF COMPLETION
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that on the {DAY OF MONTH} day of {MONTH, YEAR}, the Work on
the <ProjectName> <Project#> {ORDER#} Project was completed. The name of the owner is THE
REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, hereinafter referred to as "The Regents." The address
of The Regents is University of California, Office of the President, 1111 Franklin St., 6th Floor, Oakland,
California 94607-5200. The Regents is the owner in fee simple of the real property commonly known as
{BUILDING NAME, IF ANY}, {BUILDING #, IF ANY}, {NAMES OF STREETS ABUTTING PROJECT, IF
ANY, AND STREET ADDRESS, IF ANY}, University of California Los Angeles, {CITY IN WHICH PROJECT
IS LOCATED}, {COUNTY IN WHICH PROJECT IS LOCATED} and of all improvements and buildings
thereon including the above-named Project. The name of the original Contractor is {Contractor Firm Name}.
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA:
By: ____________________________________________
{insert UCLA name & title}
I, {SIGNER'S NAME}, say that I am the {SIGNER'S TITLE} of the Los Angeles campus of the
University of California, and as such, make this verification on behalf of The Regents, a corporation; and
that I have read the above Notice of Completion and know the contents thereof and that the facts stated
therein are true. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on
_________________, at ___________________________________________.
________________________________________________
(Signature)
(Note: Attach Notarization of Signature)
LF NOC 10/15/12 Notice of Completion

Exhibit 20 - 1 of 2
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF ________________________________________)
On _____________________________________, before me, Notary Public, personally appeared

_______________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of
satisfactory evidence) to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and
acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that
by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity on behalf of the person(s) acted,
executed the instrument.
I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing
paragraph is true and correct.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, my hand and official seal.
__________________________________________________
Signature
My Commission expires: ___________________________
LF NOC 10/15/12 Notice of Completion

Exhibit 20 - 2 of 2

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
LOS ANGELES CAMPUS
AUGUST 2020
LF REV 3.1:01/02/96 Specifications - 1


INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES
SECTION 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 35 43 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
SECTION 01 43 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
SECTION 01 54 00 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
SECTION 01 55 00 VEHICULAR ACCESS & PARKING
SECTION 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRICADES & ENCLOSURES
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 71 33 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 01 73 23 BRACING & ANCHORING
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING & PATCHING
SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 01 81 15 CALGREEN REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
SECTION 08 12 16 ALUMINUM FRAMES
SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING
SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING
SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 09 65 16 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS
SECTION 09 81 00 ACOUSTIC INSULATION
SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE
SECTION 10 21 23 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK
SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES
SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
LF 131015 Index to Specifications - 1


SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
SECTION 12 36 61 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 21 10 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
SECTION 22 11 19 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 09 23 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 00 10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 09 43 DIGITAL NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 28 16 SWITCHES, DISCONNECT AND SAFETY
SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27-COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 27 51 23 MEDICAL CLINIC ROOM STATUS AND EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
LIST OF DRAWINGS
END OF INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS
LF 131015 Index to Specifications - 2


SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
1. GENERAL
1.1 STORAGE
A. Contractor's use of the Project site for the Work and storage is restricted to the areas designated on the
Drawings or as approved by University's Representative. Refer also to Section 01 60 00, PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS.
1.2 WATCHMAN'S SERVICES
A. During all hours that Work is not being prosecuted, furnish such watchman's services as Contractor may
consider necessary to safeguard materials and equipment in storage on the Project site, including Work in
place or in process of fabrication, against theft, acts of malicious mischief, vandalism, and other losses or
damages.
B. University will not be liable for any loss or damage.
1.3 RUBBER-TIRED EQUIPMENT
A. Where carts, hand trucks, wheelbarrows, and similar wheeled conveyances are used on or in any portions
of any structure, equip with pneumatic tires.
1.4 SITE DECORUM
A. Contractor shall control the conduct of its employees so as to prevent unwanted interaction initiated by
Contractor's employees with UCLA students, UCLA staff, or other individuals (except those associated
with the Project), adjacent to the Project site. Unwanted interaction by Contractor employees would
include whistling at or initiating conversations with passersby. In the event that any Contractor employee
initiates such unwanted interaction, or utilizes profanity, Contractor shall, either upon request of
University's Representative or on its own initiative, replace said employee with another of equivalent
technical skill, at no additional cost to University. No radios, other than two-way communication type, will
be allowed on the Project site. The use of cigarettes, cigars, oral tobacco, electronic cigarettes and all
other tobacco products is prohibited on the UCLA Westwood campus and other sites owned or leased by
UCLA.
1.5 CONTROL OF CONSTRUCTION WATER
A. Provide impermeable floor coverings and suitable dams to prevent damage by water used for the Work.
Immediately clean up and remove all surplus water and water spilled in non-working areas. Do not allow
water to overflow gutters or flood streets.
1.6 WORK HOURS
A. Unless otherwise approved in advance by University's Representative, all deliveries and stocking the floor
with materials shall be accomplished only during the following hours:
Mondays through Fridays 5:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m.
Saturdays 5:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.
No work shall be performed on Sundays or University holidays.
B. Unless otherwise approved in advance by University's Representative, all noised deemed in the sole
opinion of University’s Representative to be excessive shall be accomplished only during the following
hours:
Mondays through Fridays 5:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m.
C. Unless otherwise approved in advance by University's Representative, all remaining Work of this Project
shall be accomplished only during the following hours:
Mondays through Fridays 5:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
A. All signage shall be as approved by University's Representative.
B. University-Furnished Warning Signs: Whenever required by University's Representative, post University-
furnished warning signs in locations as directed.
C. Advertising Signage: The use of Contractor/subcontractor advertising signage is prohibited.
D. Project Sign: Contractor shall furnish support structures consisting of 6" x 6" painted wooden posts to
support 2 University-furnished project signs. University will deliver the signs to the Project site and
Contractor shall install them by bolting support structure to the wooden signs and placing them in locations
approved by University's Representative.
1.8 MEDICAL CENTER DIRECTORY SIGNS
A. For projects within the Medical Center only, remove all directory signs as needed in a manner which will
preserve and protect signs from damage. Contact University's Representative to determine where signs
should be delivered within the Medical Center.
LF 131015 Work Restrictions

Section 01 14 00 - 3


1.9 KEY PROTOCOL
A. Room Access Key Protocol: Contractor shall furnish to University’s Representative a list of all rooms
(including mechanical and electrical rooms) to which Contractor will need access. University’s
Representative will furnish a key ring for access to those specific areas. Upon completion of the Project,
Contractor shall return the key ring to University’s Representative.
1.10 HISTORICAL, ARCHEOLOGICAL AND PALEONTOLOGICAL RESOURCES
A. In order to preserve and protect potentially historic, archeological or paleontological resources that could
be encountered on a construction site, University's Representative will give the information handout,
“UCLA Needs Your Help to Protect the Past” to Contractor at the Pre-Construction Meeting referenced in
Section 01 31 19, PROJECT MEETINGS. Contractor shall ensure that all appropriate Subcontractors
receive said handout, that they comply with all applicable requirements during excavation and
construction, and that they understand that the unauthorized collection of historic, archeological or
paleontological resources is prohibited by law. Contractor's responsibility includes (1) distributing the
information handout to all construction personnel working on a site prior to commencing any earthmoving
activities; (2) immediately halting all work in all areas where any potentially historic, archeological or
paleontological remains (as identified in the handout) are uncovered; and (3) immediately notifying
University's Representative if such materials are found. Contractor shall not resume work in the affected
areas until authorized by University's Representative.
1.11 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Provide traffic control barriers and flagperson(s) throughout the construction period.
1. Furnish flagperson(s) at pedestrian crossings of construction equipment right of ways one
hundred percent of the time such equipment is operating. When equipment is not operating,
such equipment right of ways shall be closed to equipment by means of a chain link gate.
2. Provide temporary traffic control barriers to ensure safety of all persons and property.
3. Furnish numbers of flagperson(s) necessary for vehicular and pedestrian traffic control.
Flagperson(s) shall be on duty at all times when the Work is in progress. See additional notes
on Drawings.
1.12 NOT USED
1.13 NOT USED
1.14 INTERRUPTION OF UTILITIES/BUILDING SERVICES
A. Maintain continuous utility services to all existing facilities during the period of construction except for the
following conditions:
1. Perform Work that involves "shut-down" of existing facilities at such times as will cause the least
inconvenience to the University activities, performing at night, on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays
and at the discretion of University's Representative. Furnish University's Representative written
notice of exact date and time of "shut-down" at least 15 working days in advance, unless a
longer period is specified or shown on the Drawings. On jobs with short performance time,
Contractor shall verify with University's Representative the number of days required in advance
for shut-down.
2. Include in Contractor's bid the cost of overtime necessary for the Work. No extra payment will
be allowed for overtime to meet this requirement or the Contract Schedule.
1.15 ACCESS TO OTHER PORTIONS OF BUILDING
A. Contractor shall submit written request to University’s Representative at least 72 hours in advance of
needing access to the suite below the Project Site. Contractor must obtain University’s Representative’s
written approval prior to accessing said suite.
2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3. EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Work Restrictions

Section 01 14 00 - 4


SECTION 01 25 13
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS REGARDING SPECIFICATION OF PRODUCTS, MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT BY
BRAND OR TRADE NAME
A. Products, material or equipment specified by both brand or trade name and model number are approved
for use, provided that Contractor complies with all Contract requirements. Specification of a product,
material or equipment by brand or trade name and model number is not a representation or warranty that
the product, material or equipment can be used without modification, to meet the requirements of the
plans and specifications; Contractor shall, at its sole cost, modify such products, material, or equipment so
that they comply with all requirements of the plans and specifications.
B. The first-named product, material or equipment specified by brand or trade name and model number is the
basis for the Project design and the use of any item other than the first-named one may require
modifications of that design. If Contractor uses any product, material or equipment other than the first-
named one, Contractor shall, at its sole cost:
1. Make all revisions and modifications to the design and construction of the Work necessitated by
the use of the product, material or equipment.
2. Be responsible for all costs of any changes resulting from the use of the product, material or
equipment including costs or changes which affect other parts of the Work, the work of Separate
Contractors, or any other property or operations of University.
C. When a product, material or equipment specified by brand or trade name is followed by the words “or
equal,” a substitution may be permitted if the substitution is equal to or superior to the first-named product,
material or equipment in quality, utility and appearance, and if the substitution complies with all other
requirements of the plans and specifications.
D. Not Used.
E. When catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names not followed by the designation "or equal" are
used in conjunction with a product, material or equipment required by the specifications, substitutions will
not be allowed and the named product, material or equipment must be used.
F. Specification of a product, material or equipment by brand or trade name and model number is not a
representation or warranty that the product, material or equipment is available; Contractor shall confirm,
prior to submitting its Bid, the availability of any product, material or equipment specified by brand or trade
name and model number.
1.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS, MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT, OTHER THAN THE FIRST-NAMED
PRODUCT, MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT, SPECIFIED BY BOTH BRAND OR TRADE NAME AND MODEL
NUMBER.
A. In addition to complying with all other submittal requirements of the Contract, submit within 70 days after
the date of commencement specified in the Notice to Proceed, for review and approval by University's
Representative, Contractor-prepared specifications and drawings, including design and engineering
calculations, prepared by an appropriate licensed professional, depicting all revisions and modifications to
the design and construction of the Work necessitated by the use of the product, material or equipment. If
no revisions or modifications are necessary, submit within 70 days after the date of commencement
specified in the Notice to Proceed, a written representation that no revisions or modifications to the design
or construction of the Work are necessitated by the use of the product, material or equipment. Contractor
shall utilize the first-named product, material or equipment if Contractor fails to make the appropriate
required submittal pursuant to this paragraph within the 70-day period.
B. A product, material or equipment, other than the first-named product, material or equipment, specified by
both brand or trade name and model number may be used if no revisions or modifications to the design or
construction of the Work are necessitated by the use of the product, material or equipment. If such
revisions or modifications are necessary, the product, material or equipment may be used only if the
revisions or modifications are approved in writing by University's Representative. Contractor has the
burden of demonstrating, through the procedures specified herein, that any such revisions or modifications
will not be detrimental to the quality, utility or appearance of the Project or any portion of the Project. The
University's Representative may refuse to approve any such proposed revisions or modifications where, in
the reasonable opinion of University's Representative, Contractor has failed to demonstrate, through the
procedures specified herein, that the revisions or modifications are not detrimental to the quality, utility or
appearance of the Project or any portion of the Project.
1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS
A. In addition to complying with all other submittal requirements of the Contract, submit written data
demonstrating that the proposed substitution is equal to or superior to the first-named product, material or
equipment in quality, utility and appearance and otherwise complies with all requirements of the plans and
specifications, including:
1. Complete technical data including drawings, performance specifications, samples, and test
reports of the article proposed for substitution.
2. Statement by Contractor that the proposed substitution is in full compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and Applicable Code Requirements.
3. List of Subcontractors, if any, that may be affected by the substitution.
LF 190417 Product Substitution Procedures

Section 01 25 13 - 5


4. Contractor-prepared specifications and drawings, including design and engineering calculations,
prepared by an appropriately licensed professional, depicting all revisions and modifications to
the design and construction of the Work necessitated by the use of the substitution. If no
revisions or modifications are necessary, submit a written representation that no revisions or
modifications to the design or construction of the Work are necessitated by the use of the
product, material or equipment.
B. At the request of and within the timeframes specified by University's Representative:
1. Submit samples as deemed necessary by University's Representative to evaluate the proposed
substitution.
2. Submit proposed substitution to tests deemed necessary by University's Representative to
evaluate the proposed substitution. Such tests shall be made by an independent Testing
Laboratory and at the sole expense of Contractor, after review and approval of the test
procedures by University's Representative. If re-testing is deemed necessary by University's
Representative to evaluate the proposed substitution, such re-testing shall be made by an
independent Testing Laboratory at the sole expense of the Contractor.
3. Furnish all additional information deemed necessary by University's Representative to evaluate
the proposed substitution.
C. If University's Representative, in reviewing a proposed substitution, requires revisions or corrections to be
made to previously accepted shop drawings and supplemental supporting data to be resubmitted,
Contractor shall do so within the time period specified by University's Representative. A proposed
substitution may be rejected if Contractor fails to submit such revisions, corrections, or supplemental
supporting data within the specified time period.
D. All requests for substitution, including the data required by Paragraph 1.3.A herein, must be submitted to
University's Representative not later than 35 days after the date of commencement specified in the Notice
to Proceed. No requests for substitutions of products, material or equipment subject to the 35-day
deadline shall be considered unless the request and supporting data is submitted on or before the
deadline, except those deemed, in University's Representative's sole opinion, to be necessary because (i)
previously specified or approved manufactured products, material or equipment are no longer
manufactured, (ii) of University initiated change orders, or (iii) it is in the best interest of University to
accept such substitution.
E. Not Used.
F. In reviewing the supporting data submitted for substitutions, University's Representative will use, for
purposes of comparison, all the characteristics of the specified material or equipment as they appear in
the manufacturer's published data even though all the characteristics may not have been particularly
mentioned in the Specifications. If more than 2 submissions of supporting data are required, the cost of
reviewing the additional supporting data shall be at Contractor's expense.
G. Contractor has the burden of demonstrating, through the procedures specified herein, that its proposed
substitution is equal to or superior to the first-named product, material or equipment in quality, utility and
appearance and complies with all other requirements of the plans and specifications. If revisions or
modifications to the design or construction of the work are necessitated by the use of the substitution,
Contractor also has the burden of demonstrating, through the procedures specified herein, that the use of
the substitution will not be detrimental to the quality, utility or appearance of the Project or any portion of
the Project.
H. The University's Representative may refuse to approve any requested substitution where, in the
reasonable opinion of University's Representative, Contractor has failed to demonstrate, through the
procedures specified herein, that the proposed substitution is equal to, or superior to, the first-named
product, material or equipment, in quality, utility and appearance and that the proposed substitution
complies with all other requirements of the plans and specifications.
I. University's Representative may reject any substitution not proposed in the manner and within the time
limits prescribed herein.
J. Substitutions are not allowed unless approved in writing by University's Representative. Any such
approval shall not relieve Contractor from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
K. The 35-day and 70-day submittal periods do not excuse Contractor from completing the Work within the
Contract Time or excuse Contractor from paying liquidated damages if Final Completion is delayed.
L. If revisions or modifications to the design or construction of the Work are necessitated by the use of a
substitution, the substitution may be used only if the revisions and modifications are approved in writing by
University's Representative. The University's Representative may refuse to approve any such proposed
revisions or modifications where, in the reasonable opinion of University's Representative, Contractor has
failed to demonstrate, through the procedures specified herein, that the revisions or modifications are not
detrimental to the quality, utility and appearance of the Project or any portion of the Project.
M. If a substitution request is finally rejected by University Representative, Contractor shall furnish and install:
1. the first-named product, material, or equipment; or
2. a product, material, or equipment, other than the first-named product, material or equipment,
specified by both brand or trade name and model number, provided Contractor complies with
the submittal requirements (including deadlines) specified in Paragraph 1.2 herein.
END OF SECTION
LF 190417 Product Substitution Procedures

Section 01 25 13 - 6


SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PROCEDURES
A. This Paragraph contains the procedures to be followed by Contractor upon discovery of any apparent
conflicts, omissions, or errors in the Contract Documents or upon having any question concerning
interpretation.
B. Procedures:
1. Notification by Contractor:
a. Submit all requests for clarification or additional information in writing to University's
Representative using the Request for Information (RFI) form furnished by University's
Representative or a similar form approved by University's Representative.
b. Number RFIs sequentially. Follow RFI number with sequential alphabetical suffix as
necessary for each resubmission. For example, the first RFI would be "001." The
second RFI would be "002." The first resubmittal of RFI "002" would be "002a."
c. Limit each RFI to one subject.
d. Submit an RFI if one of the following conditions occur:
1) Contractor discovers an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not
described in the Contract Documents.
2) Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions
of the Contract Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not
reasonably inferred from the intent of the Contract Documents.
3) Contractor discovers what appears to be an omission from the Contract
Documents that cannot be reasonably inferred from the intent of the
Contract Documents.
e. Contractor shall not:
1) Submit an RFI as a request for substitution.
2) Submit an RFI as a submittal.
3) Submit an RFI under the pretense of a Contract Documents discrepancy or
omission without thorough review of the Documents.
4) Submit an RFI in a manner that suggests that specific portions of the
Contract Documents are assumed to be excluded or by taking an isolated
portion of the Contract Documents in part rather than whole.
5) Submit an RFI in an untimely manner without proper coordination and
scheduling of Work of related trades.
If Contractor submits an RFI contrary to the above, Contractor shall pay the cost of all
review, which cost shall be deducted from the Contract Sum.
f. Contractor shall submit request for information or clarification immediately upon
discovery. Contractor shall submit RFIs within a time frame so as not to delay the
Contract Schedule while allowing the full response time described below.
2. Response Time:
a. University's Representative, whose decision will be final and conclusive, shall resolve
such questions and issue instructions to Contractor within a reasonable time frame. In
most cases, RFIs will receive a response within 14 days. If in the opinion of
University's Representative more than 14 days is required to prepare a response to
an RFI, Contractor will be notified in writing.
b. Should Contractor proceed with the Work affected before receipt of a response from
University's Representative, within the response time described above, any portion of
the Work which is not done in accordance with University's Representative's
interpretations, clarifications, instructions, or decisions is subject to removal or
replacement and Contractor shall be responsible for all resultant losses.
c. Failure to Agree: In the event of failure to agree as to the scope of the Contract
requirements, Contractor shall follow procedures set forth in Article 4 of the General
Conditions.
1.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Refer to General Conditions, Article 7.
B. Request for Estimate (RFE) and Special Drawings:
1. Changes in the Work will be initiated by University's Representative in the written form of a RFE
and numbered in sequence using the "500" series.
2. Special Drawings that are issued with RFE's will be numbered in sequence using the RFE
number.
3. Contractor shall price and return RFE's within 7 days after receipt.
C. Field Orders: Field Orders, if necessary to preclude unnecessary delays/costs, will be initiated by
University's Representative and numbered sequentially using the "300" series.
D. Change Orders will be numbered in sequence 1, 2, 3, etc.
E. Clarification Drawings: Clarification Drawings will be numbered in sequence using "1000" series.
LF 131015 Contract Modification Procedures

Section 01 26 00 - 1


F. Cost Proposals for changes as follows: Original and 2 copies to University's Representative, and 3 copies
to University's Project Manager. (Attach RFE and/or Field Order to each Cost Proposal.)
1. Submit in accordance with the General Conditions.
G. Cost Proposals shall show detailed breakdown of material, labor, etc., plus applicable percentages for
Contractor Fee as specified in Article 7 of the General Conditions. (Sample format for submittal will be
distributed at the Pre-Construction Meeting specified in Section 01 31 19, PROJECT MEETINGS.)
H. University's Representative will prepare and process Change Orders. Final distribution will be made by
University's Project Manager after Change Orders are fully executed.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Contract Modification Procedures

Section 01 26 00 - 2


SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACTOR'S CORRESPONDENCE
A. Contractor's correspondence directed to University's Representative.
1. Original to University's Representative.
2. 1 copy to University's Project Manager.
1.2 UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVE'S CORRESPONDENCE
A. University's Representative's correspondence directed to Contractor.
1. Original to Contractor.
2. 1 copy to University's Project Manager.
1.3 CERTIFIED PAYROLL RECORDS
A. In the event that Contractor or any of its Subcontractors that are required to submit certified payrolls fail to
fully complete the web-based electronic certified payroll reporting (eCPR) applicable to any period covered
by an Application for Payment, a delay in the University's processing said progress payment shall occur
until the eCPR is completed. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions Article 14.4.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS
A. Contractor and each subcontractor on site shall completely fill out a Contractor's Daily Report, on forms
furnished by University's Representative (refer to Exhibits, bound herein), for each day worked. It is the
responsibility of Contractor to submit all Daily Reports, including those of subcontractors, by 9:00 a.m. the
following work day. Failure to submit Daily Reports in a timely manner may result in delayed progress
payment(s).
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Administrative Requirements

Section 01 30 00 - 1


SECTION 01 31 13
PROJECT COORDINATION
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Coordinate the Work and do not delegate responsibility for coordination to any Subcontractor.
B. Anticipate the interrelationship of all Subcontractors and their relationship with the Work.
C. Resolve differences or disputes between Subcontractors concerning coordination, interference, or extent
of Work between sections of the Work.
D. Coordinate the Work of Subcontractors so that portions of the Work are performed in a manner that
minimizes interference with the progress of the Work.
E. Do not obstruct spaces and installations that are required to be clear by Applicable Code Requirements.
Refer to Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.
F. Apparatus and Equipment Locations:
1. Locations of apparatus and equipment indicated on the Drawings are approximate only, and are
subject to change to suit operational service as approved by University's Representative.
2. Furnish and install apparatus and equipment in a manner and in locations which keep openings
and passageways clear. Make changes in locations of equipment and materials which may be
necessary to accomplish these purposes as approved by University's Representative.
G. Do not cover any piping, wiring, ducts, or other installations until they have been inspected and approved,
and required certificates of inspection issued.
H. Remove and replace all Work which does not comply with the Contract Documents. Repair or replace any
other Work or property damaged by these operations with no adjustment of Contract Sum.
I. Coordinate all portions of the Work requiring careful coordination in order to fit in space available. Before
commencing such portions of the Work, prepare supplementary Drawings for review by University's
Representative.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Project Coordination

Section 01 31 13 - 1


SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
1. GENERAL
1.1 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Prior to commencement of Work, a pre-construction conference (Kick–Off Meeting) will be conducted by
University's Representative to discuss procedures which are to be followed during performance of the
Work.
B. Location: As designated by University's Representative.
C. Attending shall be:
1. University's Representative.
2. University.
3. University's consultants and University's Representative's consultants, as appropriate.
4. Contractor.
5. Contractor's Superintendent.
6. Subcontractors, as appropriate.
7. Others, as appropriate.
1.2 BILLING MEETING
A. A billing meeting shall be conducted by University's Representative each month prior to submittal of the
Application for Payment.
2. University.
4. Contractor.
1.3 PROGRESS MEETING
A. During the course of construction, progress meetings will be held to discuss and resolve field problems.
Progress meetings will be on a weekly basis unless determined otherwise by University's Representative.
2. University.
4. Contractor.
D. The minutes of these meetings will be prepared by University's Representative and issued as
expeditiously as possible to:
1. Contractor (number of copies agreed upon).
2. University's Project Manager (number of copies agreed upon).
E. Contractor shall submit in writing questions and answers (previously obtained verbally) to be confirmed at
each meeting in sufficient numbers for distribution to each person in attendance.
1.4 GUARANTEES, BONDS, AND SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS REVIEW MEETING
A. Eleven months following the date of Beneficial Occupancy, Substantial Completion, if applicable, or Final
Completion, whichever occurs earliest, a meeting shall be conducted by University for the purpose of
reviewing the guarantees, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts for materials and equipment.
B. Attending shall be:
1. University.
2. University's Consultants, as appropriate.
3. Contractor.
1.5 AS-BUILT DRAWING REVIEW MEETING
A. When required by University’s Representative, a meeting shall be conducted by University’s
Representative every 30 days to review the as-built drawings. Refer to Section 01 78 39, PROJECT
RECORD DOCUMENTS.
B. Attending shall be:
1. University’s Representative.
2. University.
3. University’s consultants, as appropriate.
4. Contractor.
LF 131015 Project Meetings

Section 01 31 19 - 1


1.6 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Project Meetings

Section 01 31 19 - 2


SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1. GENERAL
1.1 PRELIMINARY CONTRACT SCHEDULE
A. Submission:
1. Submit the Preliminary Contract Schedule to University's Representative within 10 days after
receipt of Notice of Selection as Apparent Lowest Responsible Bidder.
2. Within 7 days after receipt of the Preliminary Contract Schedule, University's Representative will
notify Contractor of its acceptance of, or its review comments about, the schedule so that
appropriate adjustments may be made by Contractor in the development of the Contract
Schedule.
B. Form:
1. Prepare the Preliminary Contract Schedule as a CPM, time-scaled network diagram showing
continuous flow from left to right.
2. Prepare the Preliminary Contract Schedule in sufficient detail to demonstrate preliminary
planning for the Work and to represent a practical plan to complete the Work within the Contract
Time.
3. Identify the following milestone events on the Preliminary Contract Schedule:
a. Long lead items ordered
b. All submittals returned
c. Wall layout ready for approval
d. Rough framing completed
e. Rough electrical completed
f. Rough plumbing completed
g. Rough HVAC completed
h. Mudding and taping completed
i. Ready for facilites POCs plumbing
j. Ready for Facilities to perform Points of Connection electrical
k. Flooring completed
l. Final inspections
m. Fire Alarm pretest completed
n. Certificate of Occupancy
o. Submittal of all close-out documentation, including as-built drawings
4. Identify all holidays and non-working days on the Preliminary Contract Schedule.
C. Activities: Identify all work activities which constitute the critical path.
1.2 CONTRACT SCHEDULE
A. Submission:
1. Submit the Contract Schedule, in the form and having general content acceptable to University's
Representative within 15 days following Notice to Proceed and prior to submitting the first
Application for Payment.
2. University's Representative will determine acceptability of the Contract Schedule within 7 days
after its receipt.
3. No Application for Payment will be processed nor shall any progress payment become due until
the Contract Schedule is accepted by University's Representative.
B. Form:
1. The Contract Schedule shall be a CPM, time-scaled network diagram showing continuous flow
from left to right.
2. Identify the following milestone events on the Contract Schedule:
a. Refer to Paragraph 1.1.B.3 above.
3. Identify all holidays and non-working days on the Contract Schedule.
4. If the Contract Schedule is shown on more than 1 sheet, furnish a summary sheet.
C. Activities:
1. Identify all Work activities in correct sequence for the completion of the Work. Work activities
shall include the following:
a. Major Contractor-furnished equipment, materials, and building elements, and
scheduled activities requiring submittals or University's prior approval.
1) Show dates for the submission, review, and approval of each submittal.
Dates shall be shown for the procurement, fabrication, delivery, and
installation of major equipment, materials, and building elements, and for
scheduled activities designated by University.
2) A minimum of 21 days shall be allotted for University's Representative to
review each submittal.
b. System test dates.
c. Scheduled overtime Work if required by Contract Documents.
d. Dates Contractor requests designated working spaces, storage areas, access, and
other facilities to be furnished by University.
e. Dates Contractor requests orders and decisions from University on designated items.
LF 131015 Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01 32 00 - 1


f. Dates Contractor requests University-furnished equipment.
g. Dates Contractor requests University-furnished utilities.
h. Connection and relocation of existing utilities.
i. Connecting to or penetrating existing structures.
j. Scheduled inspections as required by Codes, or as otherwise specified.
2. Identify all Work activities that constitute the critical path.
3. Critical Work activities are defined as Work activities which, if delayed or extended, will delay
the scheduled completion of one or more of the milestones specified in this Section or the
scheduled completion of the Work, or both. All other Work activities are defined as non-critical
Work activities and are considered to have float.
4. Float is defined as the time that a non-critical Work activity can be delayed or extended without
delaying the scheduled completion of milestones specified in this Section or the scheduled
completion of the Work, or both. Neither Contractor nor University shall have an exclusive right
to the use of float. The party using float shall document the effect on the updated Contract
Schedule.
5. Delays of any non-critical Work shall not be the basis for an extension of Contract Time until the
delays consume the float associated with that non-critical Work activity and cause the Work
activity to become critical.
6. The presentation of each Work activity on the Contract Schedule shall include a brief description
of the Work activity, the duration of the Work activity in days, and a responsibility code
identifying the organization or trades performing the Work activity.
7. Contractor shall furnish cost estimates for each Work activity which cumulatively equal the total
contract cost. Mobilization costs may be shown separately; however, other costs, i.e., profit and
bond shall be pro-rated throughout all activities.
D. Updating:
1. Review the Contract Schedule with University's Representative once each week to incorporate
in the Contract Schedule all changes in the progress, sequences, and scope of Work activities.
2. Prepare and submit to University's Representative an updated Contract Schedule once each
month, or as mutually agreed.
a. The updated Contract Schedule shall accurately represent the as-built condition of all
completed and in-progress Work activities as of the date of the updated Contract
Schedule.
b. The updated Contract Schedule shall incorporate all changes mutually agreed upon
by Contractor and University during preceding periodic reviews and all changes
resulting from Change Orders and Field Orders.
c. Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the updated Contract Schedule.
Contractor may change the Contract Schedule to modify the order or method of
accomplishing the Work only with prior agreement by University.
3. Contractor shall submit the updated Contract Schedule, in the form acceptable to University's
Representative, at least 7 days prior to submitting the Application for Payment.
4. University's Representative will determine acceptability of the updated Contract Schedule within
7 days after its receipt.
5. No Applications for Payment will be processed nor shall any progress payments become due
until updated Contract Schedules are accepted by University's Representative.
6. The accepted, updated Contract Schedule shall be the Contract Schedule of record for the
period it is current and shall be the basis for payment during that period.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01 32 00 - 2


SECTION 01 33 23
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, other than in connection with proposed substitutions, shall
be submitted to University's Representative only when specifically required; and University's
Representative will not review any other such submittals. Product Data and Samples for proposed
substitutions shall be submitted to University's Representative in accordance with Section 01 25 13,
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such copies of
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples as it may require for its own use.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions:
1. The terms "Shop Drawings" and "Product Data" as used herein also include fabrication,
erection, layout and setting drawings, manufacturers' standard drawings, descriptive literature,
catalogues, brochures, performance and test data, wiring and control diagrams, all other
drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit
systems, and methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials,
equipment, or systems and the positions thereof conform to the Contract Documents.
2. As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass-produced. The
term "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet
individual design requirements. Shop Drawings shall establish the actual detail of all
manufactured or fabricated items, indicate correct relation to adjoining Work, and amplify design
details of mechanical and electrical equipment in accurate relation to physical spaces in the
structure.
B. Manufacturers' Instructions: Where any item of Work is required by the Contract Documents to be
furnished, installed, or performed in accordance with a specified product manufacturer's instructions,
Contractor shall procure and distribute the necessary copies of such instructions to University's
Representative and all other concerned parties; and Contractor shall furnish, install, or perform the Work
in strict accordance therewith.
C. Submittal Schedule:
1. A schedule for submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples by Contractor (the
"Submittal Schedule"), and their processing and return by University's Representative, shall be
agreed upon by both parties in order that the items covered by these submittals will be available
when needed by the construction process and so that each party can plan its workload in an
orderly manner.
2. Contractor shall prepare the Submittal Schedule using a form to be furnished by University's
Representative at the Pre-Construction Meeting (see Section 01 31 19, PROJECT MEETINGS)
and coordinate it with the Contract Schedule. No submittals will be processed before the
Submittal Schedule has been submitted to and accepted by University's Representative, except
in such cases where the processing of submittals is required before the acceptance of the
Submittal Schedule.
3. In preparing the Submittal Schedule, Contractor shall first determine from the Contract Schedule
the date the particular item is needed for the Work. Working backwards, Contractor shall add
the required number of days for shipment, time for fabrication, and similar items to determine
the date of the first submittal.
4. The Submittal Schedule shall be adjusted to meet the needs of the construction process and
Contract Schedule. Submit digital copy of the Submittal Schedule after it is completed and each
time it is updated by Contractor.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present information required on Shop Drawings in a clear and thorough manner. Identify details by
reference to drawing and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown and specified. The room numbers
referenced or shown shall be the University-assigned room numbers, which Contractor can obtain from
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
B. Manufacturers' standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1. Modify the standard schematic drawings and other diagrams to delete information which is not
applicable to the Work.
2. Supplement standard information to furnish information specifically applicable to the Work.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Office Samples shall be of sufficient size and quality to clearly illustrate the following:
1. Functional characteristics of the products, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.
LF 160308 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples

Section 01 33 23 - 1


2. Full ranges of color, texture, and pattern.
B. Field Samples and Mock-Ups:
1. Erect at the Project site, at a location as directed by University's Representative.
2. Size: As specified.
3. Fabricate each Sample and mock-up to be complete and fully finished.
4. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS
A. Review, mark up as appropriate, and stamp Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to
submission. Submittals shall clearly show that they have been reviewed by Contractor for conformance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and for coordination of the Work.
B. Determine and Verify:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with Contract Documents.
C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
D. Notify University's Representative in writing, at time of submission, of any changes in the submittals from
requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Begin no fabrication or Work which requires submittals until the return of University's Representative's
final reviewed submittals.
1.7 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise approved in advance by University’s Representative, all submittals shall be in digital
format (PDF in Optical Character Recognition [OCR]).
B. Make submittals promptly in accordance with the Submittal Schedule and in such sequence as to cause
no delay in the Work or in the work of any Separate Contractor.
C. Number of Submittals Required:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit (1) digital copy identified by section number and contents (i.e. Sec 05
1200 – Shop Drawings – Structural Steel). After checking, University's Representative will return
the copy to Contractor.
2. Product Data, Qualifications and Other Submittals: Submit (1) digital copy which will be retained
by University's Representative. Each submittal (i.e. product literature, test reports, proof of
qualifications, etc.) shall be submitted as individual files identified by their section number and
contents. See examples below:
a. Sec 03 2600 – Test Report – Post Installed Anchors.
b. Sec 06 4116 – Qualifications – Casework Manufacturer.
3. Samples: Submit the number specified in the Section which requires them.
D. Submittals shall contain:
1. Date of submission and dates of any previous submissions.
2. Project name and number.
3. Contract identification.
4. The names of:
a. Contractor.
b. Subcontractor.
c. Supplier.
d. Manufacturer.
5. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials.
8. Reference standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
9. Identification of changes from requirements of the Contract Documents.
10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
11. An 8-inch x 3-inch blank space for review stamps.
12. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to the review of the submittal; verification of
materials and field measurements and conditions; and compliance of the information within the
submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
E. Resubmission Requirements:
1. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
a. Revise Shop Drawings or Product Data, and resubmit as specified for the initial
submittal.
b. Identify any changes which have been made other than those requested.
c. Note any departures from the Contract Documents or changes in previously reviewed
submittals which were not commented upon by University's Representative.
2. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
F. Distribution:
1. Distribute digital copies of Shop Drawings and Product Data, which carry University's
Representative's review stamp, to the following locations:
a. Contractor's Project site file.
b. As-built files maintained by Contractor.
c. Separate Contractors.

Section 01 33 23 - 2


d. Subcontractors.
e. Supplier or manufacturer.
2. Distribute samples which carry University's Representative's review stamp as directed.
G. University's Representative's Review: University's Representative will review Contractor's submittals, such
as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of such
submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details
such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of
equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor as required by the Contract
Documents.
H. Submittal of Qualifications: Unless otherwise specified, when technical specification sections or drawings
identify qualification criteria (prior experience; certification; manufacturer approval; etc.) for any entity
(installer; manufacturer; engineer; testing agency; etc.), Contractor shall submit proof that the entity meets
said criteria at least 15 days prior to start of the applicable work.
END OF SECTION

Section 01 33 23 - 3


SECTION 01 35 13
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES
A. Refer to General Conditions Article 3.19.
B. Lead Based Paint (LBP):
1. Lead coatings may exist on this Project site, and Work may involve the demolition, removal and
disposal of materials coated in LBP. University will disclose all known information about such
hazards, including location and quantity of lead in coating materials. If further information is
desired, Contractor shall furnish sampling and analysis.
2. Where LBP is determined or suspected to exist, Contractor shall comply with all regulations
pertaining to its removal, including the Cal/OSHA Lead Construction Standard (CCR Title 8
section 1532.1), CDPH Work Practices for Lead-Based Paint and Lead Hazards (CCR Title 17,
Div 1 Chap 8) and the General Industry Safety Orders hazard communication requirements
(CCR Title 8 section 5194). Contractor shall furnish all required employee monitoring, personal
protective equipment, and engineering controls designed to minimize lead exposures.
Contractor is responsible for characterization and disposal of all lead-containing waste and
debris. University will furnish environmental monitoring.
3. During construction and demolition work, Contractor shall prevent lead dust contamination of
surrounding areas. Contractor shall contact University's Office of Environment, Health & Safety
regarding all Project elements which may result in significant migration of lead-containing
materials off the Project site. Currently, the Department of Toxic Substances Control does not
generally consider intact painted building materials to be hazardous wastes. Paint separated
from its substrate shall be evaluated independently from the building material to determine
proper management. Materials or solvents meeting the requirements of a Federal Hazardous
Waste as determined by CCR Title 22 shall be disposed of at a location approved in advance by
University's Office of Environment, Health & Safety.
4. When an employee may be occupationally exposed to lead-containing coatings or paint
associated with construction and/or maintenance activities, Contractor is responsible for
complying with Cal/OSHA Lead Construction Standard (CCR Title 8, Section 1532.1).
1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL STORAGE
A. Materials: In occupied building areas, only sufficient materials and flammable or toxic substances
necessary for the Work being performed that day or shift shall be brought into the building and work areas.
In no case shall flammable or toxic substances be stored in the building, and these substances shall be
immediately removed from the building when not needed and not later than the end of the day's Work.
1.3 NOT USED
1.4 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
LF 150903 Special Project Procedures

Section 01 35 13 - 1


SECTION 01 35 43
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DUST CONTROL, AIR POLLUTION AND ODOR CONTROL
A. Contractor shall employ measures to prevent the creation of dust, air pollution and odors.
1. Comply with SCAQMD Rules 401, 402 and 403.
2. Unpaved areas where vehicles are operated shall be periodically wetted down or given an
equivalent form of treatment as defined in Air Quality Management District (AQMD) Rule 403 to
eliminate dust formation.
3. All volatile liquids including fuels or solvents shall be stored in closed containers.
4. No open burning of debris, lumber or other scrap will be permitted.
5. Equipment shall be maintained in a manner to reduce gaseous emissions.
6. Use alternative fuel construction equipment (i.e., compressed natural gas, liquid petroleum gas,
unleaded gasoline) and low-emission diesel construction equipment to the extent that the
equipment is readily available and cost effective.
7. Stockpiles of excavated materials shall be covered with material approved by University's
Representative.
8. Refer to Section 01 74 00, CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT, Paragraph 3.1.B, for silt
clean up.
1.2 NOISE CONTROL
A. The following noise control procedures shall be employed:
1. Maximum Noise: The Contractor shall use equipment and methods during the course of this
work that are least disruptive to adjacent offices or residences. Noise levels for trenchers,
graders, trucks and pile drivers shall not exceed 90 dBA at 50 feet as measured under the
noisiest operating conditions. For all other equipment, noise levels shall not exceed 85 dBA at
50 feet.
2. Equipment. Jack hammers shall be equipped with exhaust mufflers and steel muffling sleeves.
All diesel equipment shall have exhaust muffled. Air compressors shall be of a quiet type such
as a "whisperized" compressor.
3. Operations: Machines shall not be left idling. Electric power shall be used in lieu of internal
combustion engine power wherever possible. Equipment shall be maintained to reduce noise
from vibration, faulty mufflers, or other sources.
4. Scheduling: Noisy operations shall be scheduled so as to minimize their disturbance to
occupied adjacent areas and duration at any given location.
1.3 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
LF 171016 Environmental Procedures

Section 01 35 43 - 1


SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Work shall be performed in accordance with Applicable Code Requirements and applicable
requirements of all other regulatory agencies, including the following:
1. California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 8, Industrial Safety.
2. CCR, Title 13, Hazardous Materials Transportation.
3. CCR, Title 17, Radiation Safety.
4. CCR, Title 19, Public Safety.
5. CCR, Title 20, Public Utilities and Energy.
6. CCR, Title 21, Public Works.
7. CCR, Title 23, Underground Storage Tank Regulations.
8. CCR, Title 24
a. Part 1, Building Standards Administrative Code (2016).
b. Part 2, California Building Code (2013 IBC with 2016 California Amendments).
c. Part 3, California Electrical Code (2014 NEC with 2016 California Amendments).
d. Part 4, California Mechanical Code (2015 UMC with 2016 California Amendments).
e. Part 5, California Plumbing Code (2015 UPC with 2016 California Amendments).
f. Part 6, California Energy Code (2016).
g. Part 7, California Elevator Safety Construction Code.
h. Part 8, California Historical Building Code.
i. Part 9, California Fire Code (2015 IFC with 2016 California Amendments).
j. Part 10, California Code for Building Conversion.
k. Part 11, California Green Building Standards Code (2016).
l. Part 12, California Referenced Standards Code (2016).
9. CCR, Title 25, Housing and Community Development.
10. CCR, Title 26, Toxics.
11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Use current edition of NFPA shown in Chapter 35
of the 2016 California Building Code (CBC).
B. When the California Building Code does not specifically cover any subject relating to building design and
construction, recognized fire prevention engineering practices shall be employed. The following may be
used as authoritative guides when determining recognized fire prevention engineering practices:
1. The National Fire Codes.
2. The Fire Protection Handbook.
C. Unless otherwise specified, specific references to codes, regulations, standards, manufacturers'
instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies, when used to specify requirements for materials or
design elements, shall mean the latest edition of each in effect at the date of submission of bids, or the
date of the Change Order or Field Order, as applicable.
D. Representatives of the Los Angeles City Fire Department, Division of State Architect (DSA) and California
Occupational Safety and Health Act (Cal/OSHA) have the right to inspect all Work and workplace
conditions.
E. In accordance with California Labor Code ("CLC") Section 3099.2, all employees performing electrical
work for a contractor/subcontractor holding a C-10 license shall become certified pursuant to CLC Section
3099.
1.2 CONFLICTS
A. If a conflict exists between referenced regulatory requirements or between referenced regulatory
requirements and the Contract Documents, Contractor shall notify University's Representative and request
that the conflict be resolved. The fact that the Contract Documents may establish higher or more costly
requirements than the minimum Code or other regulatory requirements referenced above shall not
constitute a "conflict."
END OF SECTION
LF 170629 Regulatory Requirements

Section 01 41 00 - 1


SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
1. GENERAL
1.1 ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following abbreviations of organizations may be used in the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association
ACI American Concrete Institute
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
AFI Air Filter Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
AHERA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act
AI The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIMA Acoustical Insulating Material Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists
APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
AQMD Air Quality Management District
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASA American Standards Association
ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers Association, Inc.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWCI Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society, Inc.
AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc.
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Institute of America
BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators
CAC California Administrative Code
Cal/OSHA California Occupational Safety and Health Act
CARB California Air Resources Board
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
CCR California Code of Regulations
CDA Copper Development Association, Inc.
CE Corps of Engineers (U. S. Dept. of the Army)
CEC California Energy Commission
CESO California Elevator Safety Order
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fabric Manufacturers Institute
CLPCA California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association, Inc.
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standards of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce)
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
CTLA Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers
LF181211 References
Section 01 42 00 - 1


DHI Door & Hardware Institute
DISS Diameter Index Safety System
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
FFDA Federal Food and Drug Administration
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.
FS Federal Specification
FSC Forest Stewardship Council
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America (formerly FGMA)
GFI Ground Fault Interrupter
GBCI Green Building Certification Institute
HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air
HI Hydronics Institute
HMI Hoists Manufacturers Institute
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association
IBEW International Brothers of Electrical Workers
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineering Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IEC International Electric Code
IES Illuminating Engineers Society
IGCC Insulation Glass Certification Council
ISA Instrument Society of America
LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design
LIA Lead Industries Association
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
MIA Marble Institute of America
MIL U.S. Government, Military Specification
MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
MOC Ministry of Communications General
MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings
NAA National Arborist Association
NAAB National Association of Air Balance
NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
NBHA National Builders' Hardware Association
NBS National Bureau of Standards (U. S. Dept. of Commerce)
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NCPWB National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NEC National Electrical Code by NFPA
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESHAP National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants
NETA International Electrical Testing Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
NPA National Particleboard Association
NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NUSIG National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association, Inc.
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
OPL Omega Point Laboratories
OSHPD Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyl
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
LF181211 References
Section 01 42 00 - 2


PI Perlite Institute
PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Dept. of Commerce)
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (Grading Rules)
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SAS Saudi Arabian Standard Organization
SBC State Building Code
SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Assoc., Inc.
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
STC Sound Transmission Coefficient
SWI Sealant and Waterproofers Institute
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
UHMW Ultra-High Molecular Weight
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USDA United States Department of Agriculture
USGBC United States Green Building Council
USSG United States Steel Gauge
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)
WH Warnock Hersey
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Grading Rules)
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms, when used on the Drawings or in the Specifications, shall have the following
meanings:
1. ADEQUATE; CAREFUL; PROPER; SUFFICIENT; SUITABLE; SATISFACTORY: These terms
refer to interpretation by University's Representative, and are subject to approval upon request.
2. APPLICABLE CODES: "Codes listed in Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS."
3. APPROVED: "As approved by University's Representative."
4. AS DIRECTED: "As directed by University's Representative."
5. AS REQUIRED: "As required by Applicable Code Requirements; by good building practice; by
the conditions prevailing; by the Contract Documents; by University, or by University's
Representative".
6. AS SELECTED: "As selected by University's Representative."
7. BY OTHERS: Work on the Project that is outside the scope of Work to be performed by
Contractor under the Contract, but that will be performed by University, Separate Contractors, or
other means.
8. EQUAL: Of same quality, appearance, and utility to that specified, as determined by University's
Representative. Contractor bears the burden of proof of equality.
9. FURNISH: "Supply only, not install (unless required to be provided or installed elsewhere in the
Contract Documents)."
10. INCLUDE/INCLUDING: "Include/including, without limitation."
11. INSTALL: "Install or apply only, not furnish (unless required to be provided or furnished
elsewhere in the Contract Documents)".
12. INSTALLER: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
13. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS/INSTRUCTIONS/
RECOMMENDATIONS/SPECIFICATIONS: Manufacturer's written directions, instruction,
recommendations, specifications.
14. MUST; SHALL; TO; WILL: When used as a directive to Contractor, these terms indicate a
mandatory action.
15. NECESSARY: "Essential to completion of Work".
16. UNIVERSITY-FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED: "To be furnished by University at its
cost and installed by Contractor as part of the Work."
17. PROJECT SITE; JOB SITE: Geographical location of the Project.
18. PROVIDE: "Furnish and install".
19. SHOWN: "As indicated on the Drawings".
20. SPECIFIED: "As written in the Contract Documents."
21. SUBMIT: "Submit to University's Representative."
LF181211 References
Section 01 42 00 - 3


END OF SECTION
LF181211 References
Section 01 42 00 - 2


SECTION 01 43 00
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Definitions:
1. The term "University's Testing Laboratory" means a testing laboratory retained and paid for by
University for the purpose of reviewing material and product reports and performing other
services as determined by University.
2. The term "Contractor's Testing Laboratory" means a testing laboratory retained and paid for by
Contractor to perform the testing services required by the Contract Documents. Contractor's
Testing Laboratory shall be an organization other than University's Testing Laboratory and shall
be acceptable to University's Representative. It may be a commercial testing organization, the
testing laboratory of a trade association, the certified laboratory of a supplier or manufacturer,
Contractor's own forces, or other organization. Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall have
performed testing of the type specified for at least 5 years.
B. Tests, inspections, and acceptances of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by
Applicable Code Requirements shall be made promptly to avoid delay of the Work. Except as otherwise
specified, Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with Contractor's
Testing Laboratory. Contractor shall give University's Representative timely notice of when and where
tests and inspections are to be made.
C. If such procedures for testing, inspection, or acceptance reveal failure of the portions of the Work to
comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs made
necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for University's
Representative's services and expenses.
D. If University's Representative is to observe tests, inspections, or make acceptances required by the
Contract Documents, University's Representative will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal
place of testing.
E. Do not incorporate into the Work materials represented by samples under test without the written approval
of University's Representative.
1.2 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES REGARDING UNIVERSITY'S TESTING LABORATORY
A. Secure and deliver to University's Testing Laboratory specified quantities of representative samples of
materials proposed for use as specified.
B. Submit to University's Testing Laboratory the preliminary design mixes proposed to be used for concrete
and other materials which require review by University's Testing Laboratory.
C. Submit digital copy of product test reports as specified.
D. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To furnish University's Testing Laboratory access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For storage and curing of test samples.
E. Submit written notice to University's Representative and University's Testing Laboratory 72 hours in
advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
F. When tests or inspections are not performed after such notice, Contractor shall reimburse University for
University's Testing Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred.
1.3 TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS
A. Certain portions of the Work will be tested and/or inspected at various stages. Nothing in any prior
acceptance or satisfactory test result shall govern, if at any subsequent time the Work, or portion thereof,
is found not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, if any law, ordinance or public authority or the
Specifications or University's Representative's instructions require any work to be specially tested or
approved (including use of ionizing radiation for radiography), Contractor shall give University's
Representative timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by another authority
than University's Representative, of the date fixed for such inspection.
C. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by University's Representative.
D. Not Used.
1.4 ADDITIONAL TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. If initial tests or inspections made by University's Testing Laboratory or University's Geotechnical Engineer
reveal that any portion of the Work does not comply with Contract Documents, or if University's
Representative determines that any portion of the Work requires additional testing or inspection, additional
tests and inspections shall be made as directed.
1. If such additional tests or inspections establish that such portion of the Work complies with the
Contract Documents, all costs of such additional tests or inspections shall be paid by University.
2. If such additional tests or inspections establish that such portion of the Work fails to comply with
the Contract Documents, all costs of such additional tests and inspections, and all other costs
resulting from such failure, including compensation for University's Representative and
University's consultants, shall be deducted from the Contract Sum.
LF 170413 Quality Assurance

Section 01 43 00 - 1


1.5 TEST REPORTS
A. University's Testing Laboratory and Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall submit digital copy of all reports
to University's Representative, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or
non-compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. University's Representative will distribute digital copy of the reports to University, University's Consultants,
and Contractor.
1.6 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER
A. If applicable, University will retain and pay the expenses of a Geotechnical Engineer to perform inspection,
testing, and observation functions specified by University. The Geotechnical Engineer shall communicate
only with University and University's Representative. University's Representative will then give notice to
Contractor, with a copy to University, of any action required of Contractor.
1.7 UNIVERSITY'S INSPECTORS
A. University shall supply personnel, reporting to University's Representative, who shall observe construction
in progress. Inspectors shall have the following responsibilities and limitations on authority:
1. Act under the direction of University's Representative.
2. Observe installations and work in progress as a basis for determining conformance of the work,
materials and equipment with the Construction Documents. Inspector will report any
discrepancies observed to University's Representative and Contractor. Only University's
Representative has the authority to make approvals or rejections.
3. Only University's Representative shall interpret the requirements of the Construction
Documents. If any item is ambiguous, University's Representative shall make a written
interpretation. If Contractor requests changes or modifications to the Construction Documents,
University's Representative shall make a written determination on the requested changes or
modifications.
4. Prepare and submit an inspection report to University's Representative for each inspection
performed.
5. Review the monthly progress payment request before Contractor submits it to University's
Representative.
6. Assist University's Representative in reviewing the test and inspection results of testing
laboratories.
7. The Inspector is not authorized to permit deviations from the requirements of the Contract
Documents unless such deviation has been approved by University's Representative in writing.
8. The Inspector is not authorized to advise on or issue directions to Contractor about any aspect
of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or relating to safety
programs in connection with the Project.
B. The failure of University, University's Representative and its representatives and consultants, or
University's Inspector to observe or inspect the Work, or to detect deficiencies in the Work, or to inform
Contractor of any deficiencies which may be discovered, shall not relieve Contractor, its subcontractors
regardless of tier, or suppliers from their responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures, construction safety, nor from their responsibilities to carry out the work in
accordance with the Contract Documents and to detect and correct defective work. The term "defective
work" means work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, omitted, incomplete, deficient, or does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, directives of University's Representative, or the requirements of
any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval specified in the Contract Documents, or has been
damaged prior to final completion, unless responsibility for the protection of such work has been assumed
by University through beneficial occupancy in accordance with Article 9.6 of the General Conditions or
through substantial completion in accordance with Article 9.7 of the General Conditions.
1.8 INSPECTION REQUESTS
A. Contractor shall request inspection of completed portions of the Work via the UCLA Capital Programs
Inspection Website (https://inspection.capnet.ucla.edu/) at least 72 hours in advance of the inspection to
be performed. Instructions on creating a User Account will be furnished by University's Representative at
the Pre-Construction Meeting. Refer to Section 01 31 19, PROJECT MEETINGS.
B. For each inspection request received from Contractor for which University's Representative determines
that such work is not ready for inspection, University will back charge Contractor the amount of ($75.00)
per hour as partial compensation for the University's Inspector's time spent to respond to the unnecessary
request.
END OF SECTION
LF 170413 Quality Assurance

Section 01 43 00 - 2


SECTION 01 45 00
QUALITY CONTROL
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUPERINTENDENT
A. In addition to requirements specified in Article 3 of the General Conditions, submit Superintendent's
qualifications showing a minimum of 5 years' experience in coordinating projects of similar scope and size
as this Project within the United States.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Quality Control

Section 01 45 00 - 1


SECTION 01 51 00
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and maintain temporary utilities for construction operations and related necessary temporary
structures. Remove them when they are no longer needed.
B. Pay for connections for water and electricity to Project site sources.
C. University does not guarantee amounts of water and electricity available from existing University's
sources, nor will University be responsible for interruptions in service.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Install and use temporary utilities in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 41 00,
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS, and all Applicable Code Requirements.
2. MATERIALS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but shall be adequate for the required purposes. Their use and methods of
installation shall not create unsafe conditions or violate requirements of applicable codes and
requirements.
2.2 TOILET FACILITIES
A. Toilet facilities for use by workers on the job or other personnel of Contractor will be provided by University
in existing toilet facilities. These facilities shall be used for toilet purposes only and not for disposal of
materials or cleaning of tools.
2.3 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE
A. Telephone service will not be provided by University, except in case of emergency involving life and
safety. Contractor shall use the public pay phones available on campus or, after coordinating with
University's Representative, make arrangements with University's Information Technology Services (ITS)
department for temporary telephone service.
2.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. University will furnish electric power for construction purposes at no cost to Contractor.
1. The characteristics of current furnished by University are limited to that existing and available. If
current of other characteristics or quantity is required by Contractor, it shall supply the power as
necessary at no extra cost to University.
2. All parts of the permanent electrical system used for construction purposes shall be operated in
a manner so as to ensure the safety of all personnel and to prevent interference with the orderly
progress of the Work.
3. Contractor shall repair and make good all damage to existing electrical facilities caused by
Contractor's use, as requested and approved.
B. Furnish, install and maintain all temporary electrical equipment and connections (including, without
limitation, conduit and wires, drops, circuit breaker and disconnect switches) as necessary for the Work.
C. Service connections shall be made by Contractor to the existing electrical distribution system at the
following point(s) of connection:
1. Power for small tools and lighting may be taken from the existing 120 Volt 60 Hz 1-phase
convenience receptacles in the building.
2. Power for larger equipment may be taken directly from the existing 208Y/120V 3-phase 4-wire
lighting panelboard on the same floor of this Project.
D. The load connected to any circuit shall not exceed 25% of the circuit or feeder capacity as labeled in the
panelboard.
E. There shall be no disturbance to building occupants and functions. Cables and conductors shall not
prevent closing of fire labeled doors.
F. Before final acceptance, all temporary equipment and connections installed by Contractor shall be
removed in a manner approved by University's Representative.
2.5 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Water service outlet shall be provided at locations where shown and as approved. Contractor shall furnish,
install and maintain necessary temporary supply connections, piping, fittings, etc., as necessary for the
Work. Before final acceptance, all temporary connections and piping installed by Contractor shall be
removed in a manner approved by University's Representative. Water will be provided by University at no
cost to Contractor for construction purposes.
1. Contractor shall furnish and install a double check valve assembly, water meter, and pressure
regulator, approved by University's Representative, at the point of connection to University's
water system.
2.6 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide and maintain fire protection equipment including extinguishers, fire hoses, and other equipment as
necessary for complete fire protection during the course of the Work.
LF 131015 Temporary Utilities

Section 01 51 00 - 1


1. Install a reduced pressure type backflow device, approved by University's Representative, at
point of connection to University's water system.
B. Use fire protection equipment only for fighting fires.
2.7 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to meet
specified minimum conditions for installation of materials; and to protect equipment, materials, and
finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas to cure installed materials, to prevent excessive
humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS,
DIVISION 22, PLUMBING, Division 23, HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, and
Division 26, ELECTRICAL, as applicable.
B. Maintain and operate systems to furnish continuous service.
C. Modify and extend systems as required.
3.2 REMOVAL AND RECONDITIONING
A. Remove all temporary services installed as a requirement of the Contract Documents. Restore utilities to
their original condition at the completion of the Work.
B. Legally and properly dispose of all debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Temporary Utilities

Section 01 51 00 - 2


SECTION 01 54 00
CONSTRUCTION AIDS
1. GENERAL
1.1 TEMPORARY STAIRS, SCAFFOLD AND RUNWAYS
A. Provide all scaffolds, stairs, hoist plant, runways, platforms, and similar temporary construction as may be
necessary for the performance of the Contract. Such facilities shall be of the type and arrangement as
required for their specific use, substantially constructed throughout and strongly supported, well secured
and complying with all applicable rules and regulations of the Industrial Accident Commission of the State
of California and all applicable laws and ordinances. Refer to Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY
REQUIREMENTS.
B. Arrange for construction equipment access to areas which may be partly blocked by existing obstructions.
1.2 TEMPORARY HOISTS
A. Provide temporary hoist as required by job conditions for the installation of materials and equipment.
Install and operate in accordance with all safety regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to
Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.
1.3 TRENCHING AND SHORING
A. All trenching and shoring work shall be in full accordance with, but not necessarily limited to the following
codes and regulations: Titles 8, 19, 21, 22, & 24, State of California, California Code of Regulations
(CCR), California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
1. General Protection. Pursuant to Labor Code Sections 6705 and 6707, Contractor shall include
in its base bid all costs incident to the provision of adequate sheeting, shoring, bracing or
equivalent method for the protection of life and limb which shall conform to the applicable
Federal and State Safety Orders.
2. Before beginning excavation five feet or more in depth, Contractor shall submit to University's
Representative a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other
provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the
excavation. The proposed plan shall comply with the standards established by the California
Construction Safety Order and Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations (CCR). If the
detailed plan varies from such shoring system standards, it shall be prepared by a California
registered civil or structural engineer whose name and registration number shall be indicated on
the drawing. If a dispute arises as to whether the plan must be prepared by a registered civil or
structural engineer, University's Representative's determination of the matter shall be final and
conclusive on Contractor and University. The cost of any required engineering services shall be
borne by Contractor and shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract Sum.
3. Neither the review nor approval of any plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or
other provisions for worker protection shall relieve Contractor from its obligation to comply with
Construction Safety Orders Standards and CCR, Title 24, for the design and construction of this
protective Work, and Contractor shall indemnify University and University's Representative from
any and all claims, liability, costs, actions and causes of action arising out of or related to the
failure of these protective systems. Contractor shall defend University and its officers,
employees, and agents, and University's Representative in any litigation of proceeding brought
with respect to the failure of these protective systems.
4. Comply with State of California Construction Safety Orders, Article 6 - Excavations, Trenches,
Earthwork – whether or not the excavation, trench, or earthwork is five feet or more in depth.
1.4 USE OF CRANE
A. If Contractor elects to utilize a crane in the performance of Work of this Project, operation of crane shall be
in accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 8, and the following requirements.
1. To ensure compliance with these guidelines, notify University's Environment, Health and Safety
Department prior to crane use. Call (310) 825-5689 or email cranes@ehs.ucla.edu.
2. Entrance and exit path to and from the Project site shall be evaluated and predetermined to
ensure most appropriate and safest route. Alternate access routes may be necessary
depending on the size and tonnage of the crane used.
3. The crane travel path shall be predetermined by a California registered structural engineer to
ensure the safety and integrity of underground vaults, tunnels and equipment. Depending on the
size of the crane, alternative routes may be necessary.
4. Contractor, in consultation with University's Representative, shall predetermine the crane
operation location. Contractor shall arrange for inspection of the location by University Fire &
Life Safety Division prior to crane lift commencement.
5. In accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5025, a certificate indicating
that all required tests and examinations have been performed, including all identified defects
that have been corrected, shall be made available with each crane or at the Project site. The
certificate shall verify that the equipment is in safe operating condition at the time of
examination.
6. In accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5006.1, Contractor shall only
permit operators who have a valid certificate of competency (certificate) issued by an Accredited
Certifying Entity. Certificates shall be valid for a maximum of 5 years.
LF 180731 Construction Aids

Section 01 54 00 - 3


a. Exception to Section 5006.1: Mobile cranes having a boom length of less than 25 feet
or a maximum rated load capacity of less than 15,000 pounds.
7. Comply with the following during crane lift operations:
a. Building occupants and/or construction personnel may be required to evacuate areas
under the lift and swing radius. University Fire & Life Safety Division shall
predetermine this requirement on a per project basis. If evacuation of building
occupants is not feasible, document why relocation/evacuation is not feasible in
accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5002.
b. The entire swing radius shall be barricaded using, at a minimum, safety cones, barrier
tape, and/or saw horses. Furnish flagpersons to monitor and control all traffic.
Vehicular and pedestrian traffic is not permitted under the load at any time.
1) At Contractor’s option, it may hire University Community Service Officers
(CSOs) to assist in traffic control.
c. The immediate area shall be kept clear of all vehicles and equipment at all times.
Only trucks that are supplying equipment to be lifted may be located in the immediate
area.
8. All University personnel working in the lift area shall wear appropriate hard hats, safety shoes,
and safety glasses.
9. As necessary, notify or coordinate crane lift operations with the following departments:
a. Cal-OSHA - Tower Crane Certification Unit;
b. University’s Facilities Management - Outage Notification Coordinator: Robert Parker
(telephone 310-206-9411);
c. Capital Programs, Structural Engineers;
d. University’s Facilities Management - Grounds Senior Superintendent for landscape
protection (telephone 310-825-1827);
e. Building Coordinators (Employee Notification);
f. University’s Transportation Services - Traffic Management (telephone 310-825-0702);
g. University’s Environment, Health and Safety Department (telephone 310-825-5689 /
email cranes@ehs.ucla.edu);
h. UC Police Department (Escorts, CSOs, etc.).
B. Additional Requirements for Use of Cranes Outside Construction Fences:
1. Pedestrians shall not be allowed to walk under the load at any time. To ensure this, the entire
swing radius shall be barricaded and traffic in both directions shall be prohibited. Objects to be
used as pedestrian barricades shall include barrier tape, cones, saw-horses, lift personnel,
flagpersons, CSOs or any combination of these.
2. Furnish the services of flagpersons, CSOs, etc. to control or prohibit pedestrian access when
the lift area is immediately adjacent to high traffic areas, including entrances to buildings and
major walkways. One flagperson/CSO is recommended for each point of entry into the lift area.
3. It may be necessary to evacuate portions of the top two floors when a crane is used to deliver or
remove equipment and materials from the roof of an occupied building. Occupants shall be
evacuated in the areas immediately beneath the swing radius of the boom, from rooms with
external facing windows and areas immediately beneath the pick or drop location. University's
Representative and the University Fire & Life Safety Division representative will predetermine
the extent of the evacuation.
4. Engineering calculations from a California registered civil or structural engineer may be used in
lieu of evacuation building occupants from areas beneath crane activities.
C. Additional Requirements for Use of Cranes Entirely Inside Construction Fences:
1. Contractor shall ensure that both the crane and crane operators are currently certified under
Cal-OSHA requirements. Contractor shall submit digital copy of such documentation to
University's Representative in advance.
2. Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors working adjacent to crane activities have
administered “crane awareness safety” or equivalent training to their employees. Contractor
shall submit digital copy of such documentation to University's Representative in advance.
3. At all times that the boom or load travels outside the perimeter of the construction fence, the
crane operation shall be immediately subject to the additional requirements for use of cranes
outside construction fences.
4. When the crane or load encroaches upon University streets, and barricades and warning signs
cannot control moving traffic, the crane operation shall be conducted using flagpersons trained
in accordance with Cal-OSHA.
D. References:
1. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, GISO Sections 344.60-344.81:
a. License Requirements - Crane and Derrick Certification.
b. Tower Cranes – Operating Permit and Certification Requests.
c. Certification Requirements.
2. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, GISO Sections 4884 – 5049:
a. Cranes and Other Hoisting Equipment.
b. Overhead Loads.
c. Mobile Crane and Tower Crane - Operator Qualifications and Certification.
3. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, CSO Sections 1597 – 1599:
a. Vehicles, Traffic Control, Flaggers, Barricades and Warning Signs.

Section 01 54 00 - 4


END OF SECTION

Section 01 54 00 - 5


SECTION 01 55 00
VEHICULAR ACCESS & PARKING
1. GENERAL
1.1 USE OF PUBLIC THOROUGHFARES AND UNIVERSITY ROADS
A. Contractor shall make its own investigation of the condition of available public thoroughfares and
University roads, and of the clearances, restrictions, bridge load limits, and other limitations affecting
transportation and ingress and egress at the Project site.
B. Where materials are transported in the prosecution of the Work, do not load vehicles beyond the capacity
recommended by manufacturer of the vehicles or prescribed by any applicable state or local law or
regulation.
C. Use only established roads on the campus; provided, however, that such temporary haul roads as may be
required in the work shall be constructed and maintained by Contractor, subject to the approval of
D. Provide protection against damage whenever it is necessary to cross existing sidewalks, curbs, and
gutters in entering upon the University roads. Repair and make good at the expense of Contractor all
damages thereto, including damage to existing utilities and paving, arising from the operations under the
Contract.
E. Truck staging is not allowed on campus or on any residential street surrounding the campus.
1.2 PARKING
A. No vehicle shall be allowed to park on the UCLA campus without displaying the appropriate permit(s), as
follows:
1. For Parking in Designated Parking Space (i.e. Parking Structure, Open Lot) and For
Construction Parking at the Project Site in Non-Fenced Areas on Hardscape: A valid parking
permit is required. Permits may be purchased by the day, week, month or quarter on an as-
available basis. Permits may be purchased on a daily basis from any Parking Service Kiosk. For
longer term parking, permits must be purchased directly from Parking Service located at 555
Westwood Plaza (Parking Structure Number 8). Permits are valid in the area of assignment
only. Violators are subject to citation.
2. Mobility:
a. Contractors and Subcontractors who are currently engaged in work on more than one
project on the Campus and need mobility between project sites, or who need in-and-
out privileges during the day from parking structures/lots, shall be required to make
those arrangements at the time permits are obtained. A valid permit and contractor
placard must be displayed. No mobility will be allowed in Dickson Court (Portola
Plaza) or at meters, handicap stalls or stalls otherwise reserved, or in designated fire
lanes. Violators will be cited.
b. Card keys will be issued ONLY to Contractors and Subcontractors who have two or
more construction projects in process on the UCLA Campus.
B. PARKING ARRANGEMENTS FOR THIS PROJECT: Contractor shall arrange and pay for all parking for
itself, its subcontractors, and its employees.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Vehicular Access & Parking

Section 01 55 00 - 1


SECTION 01 56 00
TEMPORARY BARRICADES & ENCLOSURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 TEMPORARY BARRICADES
A. Provide temporary barricades as necessary. Maintain barricades in a clean and neat condition until no
longer required and removal is approved or requested.
B. When Work involves modification to an existing egress corridor, Contractor shall provide temporary
barricades as necessary, constructed in a manner that maintains the fire resistive integrity of the affected
corridor(s). Construction and placement of the barricades shall be approved by University's
Representative.
1.2 REMOVAL AND RECONDITIONING
A. Temporary facilities, barricades, utilities and other construction of temporary nature shall be removed from
the Project site as soon as the progress of the work will permit in the opinion of University's
Representative; and the portions of the Project site and building occupied by same shall be reconditioned
and restored to original condition. For temporary utilities, refer to Section 01 51 00, TEMPORARY
UTILITIES.
B. Legally dispose of all debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations.
1.3 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Temporary Barricades & Enclosures

Section 01 56 00 - 1


SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Deliver manufactured products in their original unbroken containers or bundles, clearly labeled with
manufacturer's name, brand, and grade seal or model number.
B. Keep materials clean, dry, and undamaged. Handle materials and equipment in a manner to avoid
damage to products and their finishes.
C. Promptly remove damaged or defective products from the Project site and replace with no adjustment of
Contract Sum.
1.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store manufactured products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and with seals and labels
intact and legible.
1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations (refer
to Section 01 51 00, TEMPORARY UTILITIES).
B. Exterior Storage:
1. Store materials and equipment above ground on blocking or skids to prevent soiling, staining,
and damage.
2. Cover products which are subject to damage by the elements with impervious protective sheet
coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.
3. Store sand, rock, or aggregate material in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
C. Arrange storage to allow adequate inspection.
D. Periodically inspect stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and
are free from damage and deterioration.
E. Use of mechanical and electrical rooms for storage of materials or furniture is prohibited.
F. Protection After Installation:
1. Prevent damage to materials and equipment.
2. Use whatever protective materials or methods are necessary to prevent damage to installed
products from traffic, construction operations, and weather. Remove protection when no longer
required.
3. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions in interior spaces for the Work in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions for the materials and equipment being protected.
1.3 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) LABEL
A. Materials and equipment, for which UL standards have been established and their label service is
available, shall bear the appropriate UL Label.
1.4 MANUFACTURERS' TRADE MARKS AND NAMES
A. University's Representative reserves the right to review and request the removal or redesign of
manufacturers' trade marks and names on items of materials and equipment which will be exposed to
view in the completed Work. Such removal or redesign shall be with no adjustment of Contract Sum.
1.5 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Product Requirements

Section 01 60 00 - 1


SECTION 01 71 33
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION
1. GENERAL
1.1 SURROUNDING SITE CONDITION SURVEY
A. Prior to commencing the Work, Contractor and University's Representative shall tour the Project site
together to examine and record damage to existing adjacent buildings and improvements. This record
shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage due to Contractor's operations and shall
be signed by all parties making the tour. Any cracks, sags, or damage to the adjacent buildings and
improvements not noted in the original survey, but subsequently discovered, shall be reported to
1.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES (Refer also to General Conditions)
A. The Drawings show, if applicable, existing above and below grade structures, drainage lines, storm drains,
sewers, water, gas, electrical, hot water, and other utilities which are known to University.
B. Locate all known existing utility installations before proceeding with construction operations which may
cause damage to such installations. The existing installations shall be kept in service where shown and
damage shall be repaired with no adjustment of Contract Sum.
C. If any other structures or utilities are encountered, request University's Representative to furnish direction
on how to proceed with the Work.
D. If any structure or utility is damaged, take immediate action to ensure the safety of persons and property.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Protection of Adjacent Construction

Section 01 71 33 - 2


SECTION 01 73 23
BRACING & ANCHORING
1. GENERAL
1.1 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature and calculations for anchoring and fastening devices to University's
Representative for approval.
B. For concrete, except as listed below, use two-piece expansion anchors or drilled-in fasteners as shown.
Concrete nails are not permitted.
C. The use of low velocity powder-activated tools is permitted only for the conditions described below. The
use of medium and high velocity powder-activated fasteners as defined by ANSI A10.3 is prohibited.
1. Permitted Uses of Low Velocity Powder-Actuated Fasteners:
a. Anchoring metal track for interior non-load bearing walls. Note: Door frames shall be
fastened with two-piece expansion anchors.
b. Fastening of furring strips to concrete walls.
c. Temporary fastening and concrete forming.
d. Installation of incidental straps and wires used to suspend the following:
1) Metal duct work of 25 pounds per linear foot or less;
2) Piping of 1" diameter or less;
3) Electrical conduit of 2" diameter or less.
e. Fastening of plaster accessories, flashing and similar items with negligible loading.
f. Low Velocity Powder-Actuated Fasteners are not allowed at the tension side of the
concrete deck.
g. All anchoring to Post Tension slabs shall be confirmed with University’s
Representative.
2. Requirements for Low Velocity Powder Actuated Fasteners.
a. Minimum shank: .143 inch diameter; minimum penetration: 1.25 inches for 3000 psi
concrete; minimum rated tensile strength: 310 lbs; minimum rated shear strength: 420
lbs. Contractor shall submit calculations to substantiate selection.
b. Weight suspended from each connection shall not exceed 200 lbs.
c. Where designated by University's Representative, anchors, fasteners and ties
installed utilizing low velocity powder-actuated tools will be tested by an independent
testing laboratory to resist two times the design load. Any such anchor, fastener or tie
which fails such a test shall be replaced by Contractor at no cost to University.
3. Procedures for use of low velocity powder actuated tools:
a. The use of low velocity powder actuated tools shall comply with Federal OSHA safety
requirements and California Code of Regulations Title 24, including the requirement
that the operator of the tool be trained and certified. Submit certification.
b. Submittal of manufacturer's literature and calculations for anchoring and fastening
devices shall include load calculations and minimum spacing for fasteners for each
specific use. Design for a factor of safety of two times allowable load. Calculations
shall be signed by Contractor's structural engineer. Structural engineer shall be
registered in California.
c. Conform to SMACNA low velocity shotpin installation requirements.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Bracing & Anchoring

Section 01 73 23 - 1


SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING & PATCHING
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included
1. Patching and matching existing Work altered or disturbed to accommodate new construction.
2. Patching and matching existing Work damaged or defaced during new construction as required
to restore to condition at time of award of Contract.
3. Matching of new Work in existing construction to adjacent existing Work unless otherwise noted.
4. Execute cutting, patching and matching in a manner to prevent damage to other Work and to
provide proper surfaces for the installation of repairs, penetrations through surfaces, equipment
or other items.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.
B. Product Literature and Shop Drawings: Submit for review materials, methods, or systems different from
existing Work to be matched.
C. Samples as requested by University's Representative.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria
1. Patching shall achieve security and protection where exposed to weather, and shall preserve
the continuity of existing fire ratings.
2. Cutting, patching and matching shall successfully duplicate the undisturbed adjacent finishes,
colors, textures, and profiles. Where there is dispute over whether the duplication is successful
or has been achieved to a reasonable degree, the judgment of University's Representative shall
be final.
3. Contractor shall notify University’s Representative in writing if non-complying existing
construction or field conditions are encountered.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 60 00, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be as required to match the appearance, quality and performance of the existing finishes to
be duplicated and materials to be replaced.
B. Where the existing finish to be duplicated was achieved with materials now out of production or otherwise
unavailable, obtain review and acceptance of substitutions by University's Representative.
C. Provide primers, sealers, underlayments, backing, blocking, furring, suspension systems and related items
required for any purpose in patching existing Work.
D. Materials shall be subject to the review of and acceptance by University's Representative.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, deviating only as approved by
University's Representative to achieve a good match.
B. For the following items, employ the installer or fabricator to perform any cutting, patching or matching of
such items:
1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistance elements.
2. Fireproofing.
3. Finishes surfaces exposed to view.
C. Adjust and fit products to provide a neat installation.
D. Keep noise to a minimum. Inform University's Representative of locations where Work will be noisy, and
obtain University's Representative’s approval of the times during which such Work will be done.
E. Finish or refinish surfaces as required to match adjacent finishes. Refinish to nearest intersection or
refinish entire assembly.
F. Patching of old ceramic tile surfaces:
1. Match tile if practical.
2. If matching tile is unavailable, provide stock tile of color acceptable to University's
Representative. Install replacement tile in a uniform, rectilinear pattern that is symmetrical to the
repair area (e.g., not a zigzag or checkerboard). Pattern shall be acceptable to University's
Representative.
3. Minor small screw holes may be filled with a rubberized grout of a color close to the tile color.
LF 131015 Cutting & Patching

Section 01 73 29 - 1


3.2 PAINTING
A. Extent of Painting:
1. Paint over the entire surface plane, unless otherwise noted.
2. Over patched wall, soffit or ceiling surfaces, paint to the nearest cut off line for the entire
surface, such as the intersection with the adjacent wall or ceiling, a beam, a pilaster, or to
nearest opening frame where a total cut off does not occur within 10 feet of the patch, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Ensure painted surfaces do not present a spotty, touched-up appearance.
C. Provide a smooth continuous surface in texture, coverage, and color.
3.3 PAVEMENT
A. Asphaltic and Portland Cement concrete shall be patched to match adjacent surfaces and thickness, with
similar material (e.g., exposed aggregate concrete, colored concrete, etc.).
B. Remove and replace all damaged concrete and all concrete to be demolished to the nearest full depth
joint. Surface scribed and partial depth sawn joints shall not be acceptable in lieu of full depth joints unless
specifically approved by University’s Representative.
C. Restore pavement markings.
D. Other paving materials and systems such as decomposed granite; stone pavers, etc. shall be replaced or
restored in kind. Replace or restore an entire panel or area to present a uniform appearance to the
satisfaction of University's Representative.
E. All new surfaces shall be within ¼inch elevation of adjacent surfaces. All slopes to adjacent surfaces shall
be less than 1 in 20, unless approved by University's Representative.
3.4 LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, restore to pre-existing condition, using similar materials.
3.5 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Matching non-compliant materials currently in place will not be acceptable.
B. Where equipment or devices have been removed, and where the active side of the pipe remains, cap or
plug all abandoned piping using either threaded or soldered fittings. Do not rely on the existing valves for a
positive shutoff.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Cutting & Patching

Section 01 73 29 - 2


SECTION 01 74 00
CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Clean up and disposal.
2. PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
3. EXECUTION
3.1 CONTINUOUS CLEAN UP
A. Under no circumstances shall rubbish, debris, waste, dust, dirt, or surplus materials be allowed to
accumulate in the building, or on the Project site, and all such shall be removed continually as the Work
progresses and by the end of each day's Work.
1. Materials: In occupied building areas, only sufficient materials and flammable or toxic
substances necessary for the Work being performed that day or shift shall be brought into the
building and work areas. In no case shall flammable or toxic substances be stored in the
building, and these substances shall be immediately removed from the building when not
needed and not later than the end of the day's Work.
2. Splatterings or spills of materials shall be promptly cleaned up at time of occurrence.
B. Contractor shall provide street sweeping whenever silt from construction site is carried over to adjacent
public thoroughfares.
3.2 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. University's Representative's Inspection: Notify University's Representative at least 24 hours in advance of
readiness for inspection. Any deficient cleaning operations, as determined by University's Representative,
shall be immediately corrected as approved at Contractor's expense.
B. Interior surfaces and areas where Work is performed shall be left in vacuum clean condition with all dust,
dirt, stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster droppings, and other blemishes and defects completely
removed. To the extent of Contractor's operations, use or materials, the following requirements apply to all
areas where Work is performed:
1. Walls: Bare and painted surfaces shall be cleaned and free of dust, lint, streaks, or stains.
2. Hardware and metal surfaces shall be cleaned and polished using non-corrosive and non-
abrasive materials.
3. Glass: New glass and soiled existing glass shall be washed and polished both sides and left
free of dirt and spots. Labels shall be removed.
4. Ceilings shall be clean and free of stains, handmarks, and defacing.
5. Fixtures and Equipment: New mechanical and electrical fixtures and like items shall be cleaned
and polished. Lighting fixtures shall be free of dust, dirt, stains, or waste material. Equipment
and machinery shall be cleaned, serviced, and ready for use. Existing items shall be cleaned as
required including ventilating supply and return equipment in walls and ceilings.
6. Surfaces not mentioned shall be cleaned according to the intent of this Section and as required
for University's Representative's approval.
3.3 DISPOSAL
A. Under no circumstances shall debris, rubbish, or waste material be disposed of on University's property by
burying or otherwise, and all shall be removed from University's property to a legal disposal area.
Contractor shall bear all dumping charges.
B. Contractor is prohibited from cleaning out buckets, containers, and tools contaminated with paints, plaster,
or any other materials in University storm drains.
3.4 CORRECTIVE WORK
A. Where existing Work has been dirtied, stained, defaced, or otherwise made defective and cleaning
operations are not satisfactory, as determined by University's Representative, Contractor shall remove the
Defective Work and install new Work as requested and approved, at no extra cost to University.
3.5 CLEAN UP SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Any clean up specified in other Sections of these Specifications shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of,
these requirements.
END OF SECTION
LF 131015 Cleaning & Waste Management

Section 01 74 00 - 1

CHS 14-215 EMPLOYEE HEALTH CENTER RENOVATION
University of California, Los Angeles PROJECT NO. 944129.01
SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to the University.
C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in prepara-

tion for reuse.
D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation
into the Work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total

non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 1
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for commencement of
the Work.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated
by the Work.
B. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individ-
uals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
C. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
F. Minutes of construction waste management conference.
1.6 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: With the Initial, at Substantial Completion and every Appli-
cation for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
8. Forms: Prepare construction waste reduction progress reports on forms acceptable to
University’s Representative.
B. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Waste reduction actions and submittals
that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
1. Final Waste Reduction Report.

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 2
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of the University.
B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with require-
ments in Division 01. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste manage-
ment coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposi-
tion.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of contain-
ers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and dis-
posal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
6. Revise construction waste management plan.
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this
Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue
analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout
waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of waste generated by the Work.
Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation pro-
cedures.
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Pro-
ject, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organiza-
tions, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and or-
ganizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled ma-
terials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 3
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
where materials separation will be performed.
D. Prohibited Universal Waste (5.408.2): Submit verification that prohibited universal waste mate-
rials are disposed of properly and are diverted from landfills. Do not send universal waste to a
municipal solid waste (garbage) landfill or a non-hazardous waste recycling center. Prohibited
universal waste materials include the following:
1. Electronic devices: Includes any electronic device that is a hazardous waste (with or
without a cathode ray tube (CRT), including televisions, computer monitors, cell phones,
VCRs, computer CPUs and portable DVD players.
2. Batteries: Most household-type batteries, including rechargeable nickel-cadmium batter-
ies, silver button batteries, mercury batteries, alkaline batteries and other batteries that
exhibit a characteristic of a hazardous waste.
3. Electric lamps: Fluorescent tubes and bulbs, high intensity discharge lamps, sodium vapor
lamps and electric lamps that contain added mercury, as well as any other lamp that ex-
hibits a characteristic of a hazardous waste. (e.g., lead).
4. Mercury-containing equipment: Thermostats, mercury switches, mercury thermometers,
pressure or vacuum gauges, dilators and weighted tubing, mercury rubber flooring, mer-
cury gas flow regulators, dental amalgams, counterweights, dampers and mercury added
novelties such as jewelry, ornaments and footwear.
5. Cathode Ray Tube (CRT): The glass picture tubes removed from devices such as televi-
sions and computer monitors.
6. Non-empty aerosol cans.
E. Form: Prepare construction waste identification and reduction work management plan using
form acceptable to University’s Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan dur-
ing the entire duration of the Contract. Comply with operation, termination, and removal re-
quirements in Division 01 Section "Environmental Procedures."
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible

for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 4
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management proce-
dures, as appropriate for the Work.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure mini-
mum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Environmental Procedures" for controlling dust and dirt,
environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall accrue to University.
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until re-
moved from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contami-
nated materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remain-
ing trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from University's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 5
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry lo-
cation. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals
from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.
B. Asphaltic Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
C. Carpet Tile: Stack carpet tile and in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation
Agency or carpet recycler.
D. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
E. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
F. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panel-

boards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
G. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equip-
ment from exposure to weather.
H. Glass: Separate by type.
I. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry loca-
tion. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or
hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
J. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
K. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
L. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
M. Paper: Separate by type. Protect from exposure to weather.
N. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Metal: Separate metals by type.
3. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 6
4. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Pro-
ject site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces
and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
5. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
O. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hang-
ers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
P. Plastic: Separate plastics by type.
Q. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
R. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber,
engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. Clean Cut-Offs of
Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator accepta-
ble to the University.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of ac-
cumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from University's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01 74 19

02/25/2020 Section 01 74 19 - 7

SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
1. GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS / CONTRACTOR’S AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to Section 01 78 39, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Deliver closeout submittals and samples to University’s Representative.
B. Include typed list identifying each item submitted as closeout document.
1.3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare data in form of instructional manual.
1. Where written instructions are required, use personnel skilled in technical writing to extent
necessary for communication of essential data.
2. Where drawings or diagrams are required, use personnel capable of preparing drawings clearly
in understandable format.
B. Examine for completeness.
C. Submit to University’s Representative digital copy (PDF or other standard file type approved by
University’s Representative) of completed volumes in draft form no later than 45 days prior to request for
final acceptance of the Work. This digital copy will be returned with University’s Representative’s
comments. Revise as necessary prior to final submittal of (1) final digital copy in same approved format.
D. Prepare and insert additional data in manuals when need for such data becomes apparent during
instruction of University’s personnel.
E. Identify each manual with title OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, title of project, and subject
matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
F. Separate contents into sections logically organized with section title clearly identified.
G. Manuals shall contain:
1. Table of contents.
2. Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor and appropriate
subcontractors.
3. List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors, suppliers, and service
representatives, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
4. General system or equipment description.
5. Copies of applicable shop drawings and product data.
6. Mark product data to clearly identify specific products and component parts.
7. Supplement product data with drawings necessary to illustrate relationship of component parts
of equipment and systems, include control and flow diagrams.
8. Arranged by product, system, or process flow, and subdivided by Specification section. Identify
following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. System or equipment identification, including:
1) Name of manufacturer.
2) Model number.
3) Serial number of each component.
d. Parts list for each component.
e. Operating instructions.
f. Maintenance instructions and schedules for equipment and systems.
g. Emergency instructions.
h. Wiring and piping diagrams.
i. Inspection and test procedures.
j. Precautions against improper use and maintenance.
9. Copies of warranties (see Paragraph 1.6 below).
10. Text material:
a. Furnish manufacturer’s standard printed material or typewritten specially prepared
data.
b. Furnish text in 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches format.
11. Drawings and diagrams.
H. Environmental Requirements:
1. Identify environmentally preferable materials and systems incorporated into the Project. Include:
product model; manufacture’s name, address, phone, and website; and local technical
representative, if any.
a. Verify that plastic products incorporated into the Project are labeled in accordance
with ASTM D1972. Where products are not labeled, furnish product data indicating
polymeric information in Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1) Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
2) Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
3) Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
4) Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
LF 160308 Close-Out Submittals

Section 01 78 00 - 1


5) Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).
6) Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).
7) Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is
made of resin other that the six listed above, or is made of more than one
resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
b. Describe maintenance procedures associated with environmentally preferable
materials and systems. Include cleaning recommended in accordance with ASTM
E1971.
1) Include potential environmental impacts of recommended maintenance
procedures and materials.
2) Include potential indoor air quality impacts of the recommended
maintenance procedures and materials.
3) Where the proposed maintenance procedures incorporate composting of
plastics, assess and the potential effect of each type of plastic to be
included on the composting process in accordance with ASTM D5509 or
ASTMD5512.
c. Identify maintenance agreements, take-back programs, green leases, and appropriate
contact information for the following:
1) Carpet.
2) Ceiling Tile.
3) Office Equipment.
d. Material Safety Data Sheet: Include MSDS in product specifications.
1.4 MATERIAL AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Manual:
1. Submit to University’s Representative digital copy (PDF or other standard file type approved by
University’s Representative) of each materials and finishes manual in final form.
2. Furnish (1) section for interior products, including applied materials and finishes, and (1) section
for exterior products.
B. Interior Products:
1. Furnish manufacturer’s data and instructions on care and maintenance of architectural products,
including applied materials and finishes.
2. Product Data: Furnish complete information on architectural products, including following, as
applicable:
a. Manufacturer’s catalog number.
b. Size.
c. Material composition.
d. Color.
e. Texture.
f. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
3. Care and Maintenance Instructions: Furnish information on care and maintenance including
manufacturers’ recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of
cleaning. Furnish information regarding cleaning agents and methods that could prove
detrimental to product. Include manufacturers’ recommended schedule for cleaning and
maintenance.
C. Exterior Products:
1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s data with instructions on inspection, maintenance, and repair
of products exposed to weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes.
2. Manufacturer’s Data: Furnish manufacturers’ data giving detailed information, including
following, as applicable.
a. Applicable standards.
b. Chemical composition.
c. Installation details.
d. Inspection procedures.
e. Maintenance information.
f. Repair procedures.
1.5 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish tools, spare parts, and maintenance and extra stock materials in quantities specified in individual
Specification sections.
B. Deliver to Project site and place in locations as approved; obtain receipt from subcontractors and
suppliers.
C. No later than at time of inspection for final acceptance, submit a letter identifying by item and quantity, all
spare parts and maintenance materials submitted.
1.6 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES, BONDS, SERVICE & MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

A. General: Guarantees from Subcontractors shall not limit Contractor's warranties and guarantees to
University. Whenever possible, Contractor shall cause warranties of Subcontractors to be made directly to
University. If such warranties are made to Contractor, Contractor shall assign such warranties to
University prior to final payment.

Section 01 78 00 - 2


B. Form of Guarantee: Submit written guarantees in the form contained at the end of this Section.
C. Submittal Requirements:
1. Assemble required guarantees, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts.
2. Number of original signed copies required: (2) each. Also submit (1) digital copy (PDF or other
standard file type approved by University’s Representative).
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed and in orderly sequence. Furnish complete information for each
item as follows:
a. Product or Work item.
b. Firm name, address, and telephone number; and name of principal.
c. Scope.
d. Date of beginning of guarantee, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
e. Duration of guarantee, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
f. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number; and name of responsible
principal.
g. Furnish information for University's personnel:
1) Correct procedure in case of failure.
2) Circumstances which might affect the validity of guarantee or bond.
D. Form of Submittals:
1. Prepare in duplicate packets.
2. Format:
a. Size 8½-inch x 11-inch sheets punched for 3-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to fit into
binders.
b. Identify each packet on the cover with typed or printed title "GUARANTEES AND
BONDS," and the following:
1) Title of Project.
2) Name of Contractor.
3. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
E. Time of Submittals:
1. Within 10 days after the date of Substantial Completion, and prior to request for final payment.
2. For Work activities, where Final Completion is delayed materially beyond the date of Substantial
Completion, furnish updated submittal within 10 days after Final Completion, listing the date of
Final Completion as the start of the Guarantee to Repair Period.
F. Submittals Required: Submit guarantees, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts specified in the
individual Sections.
REMAINDER OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Section 01 78 00 - 3


GUARANTEE
Date:
Project Name:
Project Number Order Number
Project Location:
GUARANTEE FOR (the "Contract"), between The Regents of the
(Specification Section); Contract No.
University of California ("University") and ("Contractor").
hereby guarantees to University
(Name of Subcontractor)
that the portion of the Work described as follows:
which it has provided for the above referenced Project, is of good quality; free from defects; free from any liens, claims, and security
interests; and has been completed in accordance with Specification Section and the other requirements of the Contract.
The undersigned further agrees that, if at any time within months after the date of the guarantee the undersigned receives
notice from University that the aforesaid portion of the Work is unsatisfactory, faulty, deficient, incomplete, or not in conformance with the
requirements of the Contract, the undersigned will, within 10 days after receipt of such notice, correct, repair, or replace such portion of
the Work, together with any other parts of the Work and any other property which is damaged or destroyed as a result of such defective
portion of the Work or the correction, repair, or replacement thereof; and that it shall diligently and continuously prosecute such
correction, repair, or replacement to completion.
In the event the undersigned fails to commence such correction, repair, or replacement within 10 days after such notice, or to diligently
and continuously prosecute the same to completion, the undersigned, collectively and separately, do hereby authorize University to
undertake such correction, repair, or replacement at the expense of the undersigned; and Contractor will pay to University promptly upon
demand all costs and expenses incurred by University in connection therewith.
SUBCONTRACTOR
Signed: Title:
Typed Name:
Name of Firm:
Contractor
License Number:
Address:
Phone Number:
CONTRACTOR
Signed: Title:
Typed Name:
Name of Firm:
END OF SECTION

Section 01 78 00 - 4


SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store Contractor's as-built documents and Samples in Contractor's field office separate from documents
used for construction.
B. Maintain as-built documents in order and in a clean, dry, legible condition.
C. Do not use as-built documents for construction.
1.2 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. University's Representative will, at no cost, furnish Contractor a digital set of Drawings of the original
Contract Documents, which shall be used for recording the "as-built" condition of the Work.
B. As-Built Drawings: Record the following kinds of information on the As-Built Drawings:
1. Locations of Work buried under or outside the building, such as plumbing and electrical lines
and conduits. Furnish horizontal and vertical dimensions from fixed points.
2. Actual numbering of each electrical circuit.
3. Locations of all HVAC, plumbing and electrical Work concealed inside the building; and other
work that is changed by Contractor from that shown on the Drawings.
4. Locations of all items, not necessarily concealed, which vary from the locations shown on the
Drawings.
C. The following requirements for As-Built Drawings are in addition to those specified elsewhere:
1. As-built conditions shall be carefully and neatly recorded using methods acceptable to
University's Representative. Final Drawings shall be submitted in PDF format, shall match size
of original Contract Drawings and comply with the following:
a. The Design Professional's seal on the drawings shall be crossed out.
b. Add Contractor's name and contact information on each drawing.
c. Add "AS-BUILT" to the lower right area of each drawing.
2. They shall be kept up to date during the entire progress of the Work and made available to
University's Representative at any time.
3. Additional drawings shall be furnished as required to accurately describe changes.
4. Record all changes in size, location, and other features of installation shown on the Drawings.
5. Record all locations of underground Work, points of connection, valves, manholes, catch basins,
capped stubouts, invert elevations, etc.
6. Record sufficient information such that Work concealed in, under or outside the building may be
located with ease and accuracy. This may be accomplished by dimensioning or by stating the
relationship to the spaces in the building near which the Work was installed. University's
Representative's decision on what constitutes sufficient information shall be final.
D. Shop Drawings: Furnish final Shop Drawings which have been updated to show actual conditions, for
Work specified in the individual Sections.
E. Specifications and Addenda:
1. Record the following:
a. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
b. Changes made by Addenda, Change Order, or Field Order, and clarifications and
interpretations made by Letter of Instruction. All changes made shall be shown on the
as-builts.
END OF SECTION
LF 180504 Project Record Documents

Section 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 81 15 - CALGREEN REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Sustainable Design Requirements, complete, as shown and specified. This
Section includes mandatory requirements in accordance with the 2016 California Green Building
Standards Code (CALGreen).
1. Division 01 Sections “Cleaning & Waste Management” and "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal”.
2. Technical Specifications throughout the Project Manual: contain CALGreen related
requirements.
1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. To substitute products that affect CALGreen, propose products that offer equivalent or
increased environmental sensitivity and meet the intent of the Contract Documents.
Substitutions that may affect CALGreen compliance shall be clearly identified.
B. Guidelines: Only one substitution for a CALGreen product will be considered. If the substitution
is rejected, furnish the specified product. Submit the following for review by University’s
Representative:
1. Product data, including manufacturer, website, and phone number.

2. Copy of VOC testing data.
3. The Contractor is responsible for re-submittals of calculations, documentation of
products, or material substitutions that affect CALGreen. Do not submit products for
substitution that do not meet these requirements.
4. Identify product substitution by Specification and CALGreen credit(s).
5. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product and amount of net
change to Contract Sum. Base the cost data on life cycle analysis for each affected
product, including annual energy consumption and maintenance costs.
6. State effect of substitution on construction schedule and changes required in other work
of products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Additional CALGreen related submittals are specified in the technical sections of this
Specification.
CalGreen Requirements
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 1
B. Total Project Materials Cost Data:
1. Furnish Statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project in Divisions 03-10
excluding labor, overhead, and profit.
2. Only include materials permanently installed in the project.
3. Apply consistent numbers to various CALGreen credits submittals requiring similar
material cost data.
4. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items:
a. Furniture.
b. Plumbing.
c. Mechanical.
d. Electrical.
e. Wood-based construction materials.
f. Rapidly-renewable construction materials.
5. Furnish the following with final project submittals:
a. Final Summary of Solid Waste Disposal and Diversion.

b. All approved Substitution Request Forms related to this Section.
C. CALGreen Action Plans: Within seven days of Notice to Proceed, submit Action Plans indicating
how the following will be met:
1. 5.410.4 Testing and adjusting. Plan of procedures for testing and adjusting systems.
Systems to be included for testing and adjusting shall include at a minimum:
a. HVAC systems and controls.

b. Indoor and outdoor lighting and controls.
c. Water heating systems.
2. 5.504.3 Covering of duct openings and protection of mechanical equipment during

construction, Construction indoor air quality management plan.
D. CALGreen Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports
comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with CALGreen action plans for the
following:
construction. Construction Indoor Air Quality Management (IAQ) plan: During
Construction.
E. CALGreen Documentation Submittals:
1. A5.408.3 Enhanced construction waste reduction: Comply with Section 01 74 19

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal".
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 2
a. Complete the construction waste calculation tables including: General description

of each type/category of waste generated; location of receiving agent
(recycler/landfill) for waste; quantity of waste diverted (by category) in tons or
cubic yards.
b. Furnish a narrative describing the project’s construction waste management
approach including a copy of the project’s construction w ste management plan.
Furnish any additional comments or notes to describe special circumstances or
considerations regarding the project’s credit approach.
c. Required documentation:
1) Copy of Construction Waste Management Plan.

2) Significant sampling of the hauling/recycling tags/tickets or receipts from the
project.
3) Statement from the recycling facilities indicating how the materials were
recycled/processed/used and documentation of the recovery rate (if
comingled).

construction. Furnish a copy of the project’s Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan.
3. 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets
(MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each
product used.
a. Furnish a listing of each adhesive, sealant and sealant primer product used on the
project. Include the manufacture’s name, product name, specific VOC data (in g/L
less water) for each product, and the corresponding allowable VOC from the
referenced standard.
b. Furnish a listing of each aerosol adhesive product used on the project. Include the
manufacture’s name, product name, specific VOC data (in g/L less water) for each
product, and the corresponding allowable VOC from the referenced standard.
4. 5.504.4.3 Paints and Coatings: Product data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for
paints and coatings used on the interior of the building indicating VOC content of each
product used.
a. Furnish a listing of each indoor paint and coating used on the project. Include the
b. Furnish a listing of each aerosol paint and coating used on the project. Include the
5. 5.504.4.4 Carpet Systems: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for carpet
systems, cushions, and adhesives.
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 3
6. 5.504.4.5: Composite wood products. Hardwood plywood, particleboard and medium

density fiberboard composite wood products used on the interior or exterior of the
building shall meet the requirements for formaldehyde as specified in Table 5.504.4.
a. A5.504.4.5.1 Early compliance with formaldehyde limits. Where complying

composite wood product is readily available, use composite wood products made
with either CARB-approved no-added formaldehyde (NAF) resins or CARB-approved
ultra-low emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins.
b. 5.504.4.5.2 Documentation. Documentation shall include at least one of the
following:
1) Product certifications and specifications.

2) Chain of custody certifications.
3) Chain of custody certifications.
7. A5.504.5.3 Filters: Product data for filters used in the building. In mechanically ventilated
buildings, suppy regularly occupied areas of the building with air filtration media for
outside and return air prior to occupancy that achieves at least a MERV of 8.
A. Contractor’s CALGreen Representative: Contractor’s CALGreen Representative shall oversee the

environmental goals for the project, shall instruct workers concerning these goals, and shall be
present on site when Work is in progress.
B. CALGreen Meetings: Schedule and conduct CALGreen meetings on a regular basis, but not less
than twice a month. Meeting attendees shall include at least the following: University’s
Representative, Contractor’s Project Manager, Contractor’s CALGreen Representative, and Sub-
Contractor Representatives as appropriate to stage of Work. Discuss CALGreen Certification at
regular job site meetings. Discuss CALGreen Certification goals and challenges at the following
meetings
1. Progress Meetings.
2. Subcontractor Meetings.
3. Monthly CALGreen Meetings.
C. CALGreen Training Program: Furnish environmental training for workers performing Work on
the Project site. Training shall include the following:
1. Overview of environmental issues related to the building industry.

2. CALGreen Building System: Requirements for this project.
3. Construction Waste Management (CWM) Acknowledgment. The Foreman for each new
Subcontractor on site shall receive a copy of the Construction Waste Management Plan
and complete the Acknowledgment Form found in the 2016 California Green Building
Standards Code.
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 4
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of laws, codes, ordinances and
regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary
approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks:
1. Adhesives, adhesive bonding primers, adhesive primers, sealants, sealant primers and
caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management
district rules where applicable or SCAQMD Rule 1168 VOC limits, as shown in Tables
5.504.4.1 and 5.504.4.2. Such products also shall comply with the Rule 1168 prohibition
on the use of certain toxic compounds (chloroform, ethylene dichloride, methylene
chloride, perchloroethylene and trichloroethylene), except for aerosol products as
specified in subsection 2 below.
2. Aerosol adhesives and smaller unit sizes of adhesives and sealant or caulking compounds
(in units of product, less packaging, which do not weigh more than one pound and do not
consist of more than 16 fluid ounces) shall comply with statewide VOC standards and
other requirements, including prohibitions on use of certain toxic compounds, of
California Code of Regulations, Title 17, commencing with Section 94507.
B. 5.504.4.3 Paints and Coatings: Architectural paints and coatings shall comply with Table
5.504.4.3 unless more stringent local limits apply. 5.504.4.3.1 Aerosol paints and coatings.
Aerosol paints and coatings shall meet the Product-Weighted MIR Limits for ROC in Section
94522(a)(3) and other requirements, including prohibitions on use of certain toxic compounds
and ozone depleting substances (CCR, Title 17, Section 94520 et seq).
C. 5.504.4.4 Carpet Systems: All carpet installed in the building interior shall meet the testing and
product requirements of one of the standards listed in Section 5.504.4.4.
1. 5.504.4.4.1 Carpet cushion. All carpet cushion installed in the building interior shall meet
the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label program.
2. 5.504.4.4.2 Carpet adhesive. All carpet adhesive shall meet the requirements of Table
5.504.4.1.
D. 5.504.4.5 Composite wood products. Hardwood plywood, particleboard and medium density
fiberboard composite wood products used on the interior or exterior of the building shall meet
the requirements for formaldehyde as specified in Table 5.504.4.5.
1. A5.504.4.5.1 Early compliance with formaldehyde limits. Where complying composite

wood product is readily available, use composite wood products made with either CARB-
approved no-added formaldehyde (NAF) resins or CARB approved ultra-low emitting
formaldehyde (ULEF) resins.
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 5
2. 5.504.4.5.2 Documentation. Documentation shall include at least one of the following:
a. Product certifications and specifications.

b. Chain of custody certifications.
c. Other methods acceptable to the enforcing agency.
E. A5.504.5.3 Filters. In mechanically ventilated buildings, supply regularly occupied areas of the
building with air filtration media for outside and return air prior to occupancy that achieves at
least a MERV of 8. F. 5.508.1.1 CFCs. Install HVAC and refrigeration equipment that does not
contain CFCs.
F. 5.508.1.1 CFCs. Install HVAC and refrigeration equipment that does not contain CFCs.
G. 5.508.1.2 Halons. Install fire suppression equipment that does not contain Halons.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD EXECUTION OF CALGREEN REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring proper field execution of all CALGreen credits, and
submittal requirements; communication with sub-contractors of all requirements; and
submission of all documentation in a timely manner.
B. Contractor shall notify University’s Representative immediately of failure to meet any stated
CALGreen pre-requisite or credit requirement.
3.2 WATER EFFICIENCY AND CONSERVATION
A. Indoor Water Use.
1. A5.303.2– 20 percent savings. A schedule of plumbing fixtures and fixture fittings that will
reduce the overall use of potable water within the building by 20 percent shall be
furnished. A calculation demonstrating a 20 percent reduction in the building “water use
baseline” as established in Table A5.303.2 shall be furnished.
2. 5.303.4 Wastewater reduction. Each building shall reduce by 20 percent the generation of
wastewater by one of the following methods:
a. The installation of water-conserving fixtures meeting the criteria established in

sections 5.303.2 or 5.303.3 or,
b. Utilizing nonpotable water systems (captured rainwater, graywater, and
municipally treated wastewater (recycled water) complying with the current
edition of the CPC or other methods described in Section A5.304).
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 6
3. 5.303.6 Plumbing fixtures and fittings. Plumbing fixtures (water closets and urinals) and
fittings (faucets and showerheads) shall comply with the requirements listed for each
type in Items listed in Table 5.303.6.
a. Water closets (toilets) – flushometer type.

b. Water closets (toilets) – tank type.
c. Urinals.
d. Public lavatory faucets.
e. Public metering self-closing faucets.
3.3 BUILDING MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
A. 5.410.1 Recycling by occupants. Furnish readily accessible areas that serve the entire building
and are identified for the depositing, storage and collection of nonhazardous materials for
recycling.
3.4 INDOOR MOISTURE AND RADON CONTROL
A. 5.505.1 Indoor moisture control. Buildings shall meet or exceed the provisions of California
Building Code, CCR, Title 24, Part 2, Sections 1203.
3.5 AIR QUALITY AND EXHAUST
A. 5.506.1 Outside air delivery. For mechanically or naturally ventilated spaces in buildings, meet
the minimum requirements of Section 121 of the California Energy Code, CCR, Title 24, Part 6
and Chapter 4 of CCR, Title 8 or the applicable local code, whichever is more stringent.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage. Where
absorptive materials not intended for wet applications are exposed to moisture, immediately
remove from site and dispose of properly.
B. Protect installed materials using methods that do not support growth of molds and mildews.
Immediately remove from site and properly dispose of materials showing signs of mold and
signs of mildew, including materials with moisture stains.
END OF SECTION 01 81 15
02/25/2020 Section 01 81 15- 7
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
B. Related Section: Division 1 for restrictions on the use of the premises, and University-occupancy
requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to University.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements of work specified in other Sections that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
Selective Demolition
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control
and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure University’s on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Refer to Division 1 Section “Work Restrictions” for utility
shut-down requirements. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of University’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
University’s partial occupancy of completed Work.
C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to University prior to
start of demolition.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
F. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. University will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so University’s operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by University as
far as practical.
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 2
C. Notify University’s Representative of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings

before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work. Refer to General Conditions Paragraph 3.19 “Hazardous Materials.”
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service
during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of City of Los Angeles.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction furnished by University. University does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to University’s Representative.
E. Engage a California registered professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of

condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural
deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during
selective building demolition operations. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect
hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 3
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and
preconstruction photographs.
1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Furnish
photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
salvage operations.
2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Refer to Division 1 Section “Work Restrictions” for utility
shut-down requirements.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished. University will arrange to shut off indicated
services/systems when requested by Contractor.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities."
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 4
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations
as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Cleaning & Waste Management."
B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for
reuse of building elements. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on
Drawings without University’s Representative’s approval.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to University.
4. Transport items to University’s storage area designated by University.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 5
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by University’s Representative, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition, and cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement
at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of
concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain University’s property, remove demolished materials from Project
site.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off University’s property and legally dispose of them.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION
02/25/2020 Section 02 41 19 - 6
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage
and accessory items.
C. Qualification Data: For a California registered professional engineer.
D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 1
E. Welding certificates.
F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
A. Engineer Qualifications: Engineer licensed in State of California to perform engineering analysis,

and seal and sign documentation.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 2
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
Product: Provide Unistrut components, or equal.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 3-1/4 inches.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90
coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
I. Threaded Rod: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 3
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating
where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
J. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by an independent
testing agency.
K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
L. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
M. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than
3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts,
complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as
needed for fastening to inserts.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 4
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 “Interior Painting."
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 5
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Where units
are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel
strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not
less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
2.8 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to steel framing.
Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from
ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
work specified in other Sections. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for
embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 6
2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. Do not
quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. Shop prime
with primers specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Stripe paint corners,
crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish): As fabricated, unspecified.
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws,
and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: Two coats of clear
lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 8
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Metal Fabrications
02/25/2020 Section 05 50 00 - 9
SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Wood blocking, and nailers.

2. Plywood backing panels.
3. Preservative-Treated Plywood.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.

2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. Include data for
wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by
treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative
used and net amount of preservative retained.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Power-driven fasteners.
3. Powder-actuated fasteners.
4. Expansion anchors.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

02/25/2020 Section 06 10 53 - 1
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant treated material, an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominalthickness or less, 19

percent for more than 2-inch nominalthickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
Preservative Chemicals: Containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

02/25/2020 Section 06 10 53 - 2
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or
concrete.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber and any of
the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
2.5 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exterior sheathing.

02/25/2020 Section 06 10 53 - 3
B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with ground. Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency.
D. Application: Provide where indicated on Drawings as “Plywood.”.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of
Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
manufacturer for material being fastened.
F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by an independent testing and inspecting
agency. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

02/25/2020 Section 06 10 53 - 4
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with work
specified in other Sections.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous
rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 06 10 53 - 5
SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
B. Related Requirements: Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring,

blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other
construction before cabinet installation.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other
items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.
4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Plastic laminates, 12 by 12 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with
one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge.
Plastic-laminate-faced Architectural Cabinets

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 1
2. Corner pieces as follows:
a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,
18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
D. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.
E. Product Certificates: For the following:
1. High-pressure decorative laminate.

2. Adhesives.
F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program

certificates.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project. Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance
Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.
C. Manufacture millwork, casework and cabinetwork in accordance with the standards established
in the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Latest Edition, published jointly by the Woodwork
Institute, Architectural Woodwork Institute, and the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's
Association of Canada, in the grade or grades herein specified or as shown on the Drawings.
1. Before delivery to the Project site, submit a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance
Certificate indicating that the millwork products being supplied and certifying that said
products meet the requirements of the Grade or Grades specified.
2. Label each elevation of casework, each laminated plastic top and each solid surface top
with a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label in a location that will be concealed
after installation.
3. At completion of installation of the woodwork, submit a Woodwork Institute Certified
Compliance Certificate indicating the products installed and certifying that the installation
of said products meets the requirements of the Grade or Grades specified.
4. Fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Certified Compliance program shall be
at no additional cost to the University.
The foregoing shall not be construed to limit the power and authority of University's Repre-
sentative to reject millwork which does not, in University's Representative's opinion, meet with
the requirements, including standards of the Specifications of this contract.

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 2
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as directed .

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
acceptance.
A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Field Conditions" Article.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90
deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that
support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed
as indicated.

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from WI certification program indicating that

woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those
selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard. Provide products indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST”
on Drawings, or equal.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.

2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Edges: Grade HGS.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,

Grade VGS. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative

laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products as indicated in the
“FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 4
B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing
no urea formaldehyde.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type) for Flush Panel Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01602,
170 degrees of opening, self-closing.
B. Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. Product: Provide pulls as indicated in“FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on
Drawings, or equal. Material and Finish: As indicated.
C. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.
D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
E. Quick-latch Automatic Spring Catch: Provide Hafele Item No. 245.55.913, or equal.
F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
G. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
H. Desk Grommets: As indicated in“FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings.
I. Exposed Hardware Finish: Polished chrome.
J. Concealed Hardware Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber , kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
E. Screw Caps: Provide white, plastic snap-in caps at screw heads otherwise visible inside cabinets.

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 5
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify University’s Representative seven days in advance of the dates and times
woodwork fabrication will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for
shipment.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
D. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and in GANA's
"Glazing Manual." For glass in metal frames, secure glass with removable stops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.
B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 6
D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. Use filler matching finish of
items being installed.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 06 41 16 - 7
SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design
designation of testing and inspecting agency. Where Project conditions require modification to
a testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a testing

agency, for penetration firestopping.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to
conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with
additional qualifications specified in Section.
Penetration Firestopping
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 1
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following

requirements:
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a testing agency.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of testing and

inspecting agency.
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by the following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate

temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal.
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 2
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-
resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items
if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of

roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per
UL 1479. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both
ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 3
G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by testing and inspecting agency for
firestopping indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a
neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 4
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 5
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains.
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully
cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating
items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 6
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time acceptance. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying
with specified requirements.
3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-BK 0001-0999.

2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.
C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

D. Firestopping for Electrical Cables:

E. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes:

02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 7
F. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

G. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

H. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants:

END OF SECTION
02/25/2020 Section 07 84 13 - 8
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Latex joint sealants.
3. Acoustical joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.

2. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
3. Section 09 51 13 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with
acoustical sealant.
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for

testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for
adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those
submitted.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 1
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as approved by
2. Conduct field tests for each application and each kind of sealant and joint substrate
indicated.
3. Notify University’s Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when test
joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat
procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include
data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants
that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with
joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
F. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 2
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a testing

agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
H. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,

indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
I. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
J. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
K. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a testing agency.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated
to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods
specified in this Section.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 3
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Installer's Special Guarantee: Furnish to University a written guarantee for joint sealants against
all defects in materials and workmanship including failure to remain watertight, for two years
from date of acceptance. Refer to Division 1 Section “Close-out Submittals” for submittal form.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish to University a written guarantee in which joint-

sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period. Warranty Period: Five years from date of acceptance. Refer to Division 1
Section ”Close-out Submittals” for submittal form
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to

design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 4
C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match University’s Representative’s samples .
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 50. Products: Provide Pecora Corporation; 864, or equal.
B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Products: Pecora Corporation; 898, or equal.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
Provide Pecora Corporation; AC-20+, or equal.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Provide Pecora Corporation, AC-20 FTR, or
equal.
2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and
of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 5
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 6
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 7
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed
tooled joints.
G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 8
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand
Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend
cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite
side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether
joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant
configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new
sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing
or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of acceptance. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 9
3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: Match University’s Representative’s sample.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, and elevator entrances.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, neutral curing.

Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 10
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.

b. Other joints as indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.

END OF SECTION
Joint Sealants
02/25/2020 Section 07 92 00 - 11
SECTION 08 12 16 - ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior aluminum frames for doors installed in gypsum board partitions.

2. Interior aluminum doors.
B. Related Requirements: Section 08 14 16 “Flush Wood Doors” for rated doors installed in
aluminum frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum frames and doors:
1. Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening condition.
2. Include details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
3. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware.
4. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, connections, and accessories.
5. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following products:
1. Framing Member and Finish: 12 inches long. Include trim.

2. Corner Fabrication and Finish: 12-by-12-inch-long, full-size window corner, including full-
size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish.
3. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches square.
D. Product Schedule: For aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum frames and doors to include in maintenance manuals.
Aluminum Frames
02/25/2020 Section 08 12 16 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products manufactured by one of the following:
1. Wilson Partitions.
2. Modulex Products, Inc.
3. RACO Interior Products, Inc.
4. Western Integrated Materials, Inc.
5. Or equal.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames and frame-manufacturer's doors from single
source from single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Rated Frames: Frames for fire-rated door assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing
at positive pressure according to UL 10C. Frames for Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies:
Tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Air Leakage Rate:
Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Recycled Content of Aluminum Components: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

B. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, with alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish
requirements, and not less than 0.062 inch thick.
C. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.
D. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for indicated glass thickness.
E. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick; removable, snap-in casing trim glazing
stops and door stops, without exposed fasteners.
F. Doors: Manufacturer's standard, factory-assembled, 1-3/4-inch-thick, aluminum-framed door

construction.
1. Door Operation: Swinging.

2. Stiles: Wide 5 inch.
3. Rails: 5-inch top rail and 9-1/2-inch bottom rail.
G. Door Finish: Match frame and trim finish.
H. Frame and Trim Finish: Clear-anodized aluminum.
Aluminum Frames
02/25/2020 Section 08 12 16 - 2
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners

compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other
items being fastened.
B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals in black
color.
C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets in black.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded rubber or plastic, to

accommodate glazing thickness indicated; in black.
E. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints
at butted and mitered connections.
B. Factory prepare aluminum frames and doors to receive templated mortised hardware; include
cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware
Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." Locate
hardware cutouts and reinforcements as required by fire-rated label for assembly.
C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without
dismantling frame. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.
D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
Aluminum Frames
02/25/2020 Section 08 12 16 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size of
indicated aluminum frame.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; according
to manufacturer's written instructions. At fire-protection-rated openings, install fire-rated
frames according to NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.
B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no piece less than 48 inches;
components 96 inches or shorter shall be one piece.
1. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and
connections.
2. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members.
3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.
C. Glass: Install glass according to Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and aluminum-frame manufacturer's

written instructions.
D. Doors: Install doors aligned with frames and fitted with required hardware.
E. Door Hardware: Install according to Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" and aluminum-frame

manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections.
B. Doors: Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust
hardware to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods
recommended in writing by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.
Aluminum Frames
02/25/2020 Section 08 12 16 - 4
D. Touch Up: Repair marred frame surfaces to blend inconspicuously with adjacent unrepaired
surface so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches as viewed by University’s
Representative. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
END OF SECTION
Aluminum Frames
02/25/2020 Section 08 12 16 - 5
SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-laminate-faces.

2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements: Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:
1. Door core materials and construction.

2. Door edge construction
3. Door face type and characteristics.
4. Door louvers.
5. Factory-machining criteria.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing.
2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing
thicknesses.
3. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment.
4. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
5. Clearances and undercuts.
6. Requirements for veneer matching.
7. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 1
2. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.
3. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges
representing actual materials to be used.
4. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.
5. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Special warranties.
B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
C. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and
number to which door accesses.
A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in WI's Certified Compliance Program.
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the
remainder of construction period.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 2
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Furnish to University a written guarantee in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Close-out Submittals” for submittal form.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of veneer.
b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance
with UL 10C or NFPA 252. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of
tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with
standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for
size.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a
qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in
accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's

"Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Provide certificates from WI certification program indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grades specified.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 3
2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the
referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of
the referenced quality standard.
2.4 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACES
A. Interior Doors:
1. Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to the following:
a. ASSA ABLOY.
b. Eggers Industries.
c. Haley Brothers, Inc.
d. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.
e. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
f. Oregon Door.
g. Oshkosh Door Company.
h. Vancouver Door Company.
i. VT Industries Inc.
j. Or equal.
2. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

3. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade HGS.
4. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated.
5. Exposed Vertical Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces.
a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals

concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical
edges.
b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled
for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles
with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
c. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf in accordance
with WDMA T.M. 10.
6. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard.
1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to

eliminate through-bolting hardware.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 4
2) Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural-composite-

lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors scheduled to receive
exit devices in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
b. Either glued wood stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber.
7. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on

Drawings. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved
screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on
Drawings as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
8. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed or cold-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal
edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands
are applied.
2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of
0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and
approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.
B. Metal Louvers:
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.

b. Allegion plc.
c. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
d. ASSA ABLOY.
e. L & L Louvers, Inc.
f. McGill Architectural Products.
g. Or equal.
2. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V.

3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or
powder-coated finish.
C. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and
labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.

b. Allegion plc.
c. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 5
d. ASSA ABLOY.
e. L & L Louvers, Inc.
f. McGill Architectural Products.
g. Or equal.
2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or
powder-coated finish.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless
2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.

2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-156.115-
W, and hardware templates.
3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and
wiring to accommodate specified hardware.
5. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs
of fire-rated doors.
C. Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as
specified for associated doors.
D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware
that is not surface applied, before finishing.
2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 6
B. Factory finish doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.
1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at

Project site.
A. Inspection Agency: University will engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to
furnish reports to University’s Representative.
B. Inspections:
1. Provide inspection of installed Work through WI's Certified Compliance Program,

certifying that wood doors and frames, including installation, comply with requirements
of AWI/AWMCA/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for the specified grade.
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 7
2. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door in accordance with NFPA 80,
Section 5.2.
3. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door
equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically
controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements in
accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly

installations comply with specified requirements.
E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating
compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
Flush Wood Doors

02/25/2020 Section 08 14 16 - 8
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Door hardware, including electric hardware.
2. Storefront and entrance door hardware.
3. Third-party inspection report for fire-rated door assemblies.
4. Card Access control system.
5. Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.
6. Power supplies for electric hardware.
7. Low energy door operators plus sensors and actuators.
8. Remote button release hardware.
9. Door position switches.
10. Padlocks.
11. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.
12. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for electric hardware.
B. Related Divisions:
1. Division 06 – door hardware installation
2. Division 07 – sealant at exterior thresholds
3. Division 08 – interior aluminum frames, wood doors.
4. Division 21 – fire and life safety systems
C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.

1. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.
2. Signs, except where scheduled.
3. Installation.
4. Rough hardware.
5. Conduit, junction boxes & wiring.
6. Access doors and panels, except cylinders where detailed.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.

1. American National Standards Institute
a. ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes.
2. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
3. 2016 California Building Code
a. Chapter 11B – Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public Accommodations,
Commercial Buildings and Public Housing
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 1
4. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute

5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
a. NFPA 80 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
b. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
c. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
6. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
a. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
b. UL 305 – Panic Hardware
7. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code
8. Local applicable codes
9. SDI – Steel Door Institute
10. WI – Woodwork Institute
11. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute
12. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
B. Abbreviations
1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1 of this section.
2. Finishes: see 2.6 of this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. SUBMITTALS: Submit digital copy of schedule per Section 01 33 23. Organize vertically formatted
schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include
following information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7. Mounting locations for hardware.
8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone
number.
10. Catalog cuts.
11. Point-to-point wiring diagrams.
12. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware.
B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.
C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of Finish

Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this
section.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 2
D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive
of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from University’s
Representative for resolution.
E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish
operating samples on request.
F. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, riser
and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance
information, and supplier’s final inspection report.
G. Qualification Data: Submit evidence of qualifications for Hardware Supplier, Installer, and
Architectural Hardware Consultant as required in “Quality Assurance” Article in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualifications:
1. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person with not less than five years
of experience in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are
comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is
currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
2. Hardware Supplier Qualification: Direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of
work for project hardware consultation to University, Architect and Contractor.
Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies
that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended
function and performance of the openings.
3. Installer Qualifications: Shall have not less than three years’ experience installing door
hardware to extent of that indicated for this Project. Can read and understand
manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware schedule and printed installation
instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers’ furnished
fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to
discuss installation of hardware.
B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch
and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.
C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special
knowledge or effort.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure) compliant for
given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming
door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section
for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 3
E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified
performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and 2016 CBC
requirements.
F. Pre-Installation Meetings: Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades,
coordinate materials and techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems
installation. Include manufacturers' representatives of locks, panic hardware and door closers in
the meetings. Convene prior to commencement of related work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).

1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to University’s Representative.
B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete

with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations
in hardware schedule and door numbers.
C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight,
paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:
A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members
requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and
quality as type specified, subject to University’s Representative approval.
B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with work specified in other sections. Furnish hardware items
of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar
requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions
or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following
information:
1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.
2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.
3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.
4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal supplier prior
to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or foam, on the back of the
hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for continuous hinges, as well as at rim
panic hardware strike locations, silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations.
When the frame is grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without
dulling or breaking the installer’s bits.
5. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-
pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring
diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.
6. Coordinate: back-up power for doors with automatic operators.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 4
7. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at outswinging exteriors, and throughout where
adhesive-mounted seals occur.
8. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.
C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made
for proper hardware installation.
D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product packaging,
uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. Part of respective manufacturer’s regular terms of sale. Submit manufacturers’ written

warranties.
B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents warranty information:
C. Minimum warranties:
1. Locksets: Three years
2. Electronic Locks: One Year
3. Exit Devices: Three years mechanical
One year electrical
4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical
Two years electrical
5. Hinges: One year
6. Other Hardware Two years
1.8 COMMISSIONING:
A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:

1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and
stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.
2. With installer, access control subcontractor and electrical subcontractor present, test
electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation.
3. With installer and electrical subcontractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-
safety system for proper operation and release.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per 2016
California Building Code, Section 11B-404.2.7.
1. Panic hardware: locate between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 5
B. Handles, pull, latches, locks, other operable parts:

1. Readily openable from egress side with one hand and without tight grasping, tight
pinching, or twisting of the wrist to operate. 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-
309.4.
2. Force required to activate the operable parts: 5.0 pounds maximum, per 2016 California
Building Code Section 11B-309.4.
C. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior doors and 5.0-
pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.9, local
authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not
to exceed 15-pounds.
1. Exception: exterior doors’ pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-pounds if: at a single
location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction of eight, and one leaf of this bank is
fitted with a low- or high-energy operator.
D. Low-energy powered doors: comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.19. Reference: 2016 California
Building Code Section 11B-404.2.9, Exception 2.
1. Where powered door serves an occupancy of 150 or more, provide back-up battery
power or stand-by generator power, capable of supporting a minimum of 150 cycles.
2. Actuators, vertical bar type: minimum 2-inches wide, 30-inches high, bottom located
minimum 5-inches above floor or ground, top located minimum 35-inches above floor or
ground. Displays International Symbol of Accessibility, per 2016 California Building Code
Section 11B-703.7.
3. Actuators, plate type: use two at each side of the opening. Minimum 4-inches diameter or
4-inches square. Displays International Symbol of Accessibility, per 2016 California
Building Code Section 11B-703.7. Locate centerline of lower plate between 7- and 8-
inches above floor or ground, and upper plate between 30- and 44-inches above floor or
ground.
4. Actuator location: conspicuously located, clear and level floor/ground space for forward
or parallel approach.
E. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take
at least 5 seconds to move to a point 12 degrees from the latch, measured to the landing side of
the door, per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.7.
1. Spring hinges: adjust for 1.5 seconds minimum for 70 degrees to fully-closed.
F. Smooth surfaces at bottom 10 inches of push sides of doors, facilitating push-open with
wheelchair footrests, per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.10.
1. Applied kickplates and armor plates: bevel the left and right edges; free of sharp or
abrasive edges.
2. Tempered glass doors without stiles: bottom rail may be less than 10 inches if top leading
edge is tapered 60 degrees minimum.
G. Door opening clear width no less than 32 inches, measured from face of frame stop, or edge of
inactive leaf of pair of doors, to door face with door opened to 90 degrees. Hardware projection
not a factor in clear width if located above 30 inches and below 80 inches, and the hardware
projects no more than 4 inches. 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.3.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 6
1. Exception: doors not requiring full passage through the opening, that is, to spaces less
than 24 inches in depth, may have the clear opening width reduced to 20 inches.
Example: shallow closets.
2. Door closers and overhead stops: not less than 78 inches above the finished floor or
ground, per 2016 California Building Code 11B-307.4.
H. Thresholds: floor or landing no more than 0.50 inches below the top of the threshold of the
doorway, per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.5. Vertical rise no more than 0.25
inches, change in level between 0.25 inches and 0.50 inches: beveled to slope no greater than
1:2 (50 percent slope). 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-303.2 & ~.3.
I. Floor stops: Do not locate in path of travel. Locate no more than 4 inches from walls, per DSA
Policy #99-08 (Access).
J. Pairs of doors with independently-activated hardware both leafs: limit swing of right-hand or
right-hand-reverse leaf to 90 degrees to protect persons reading wall-mounted tactile signage,
per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-703.4.2.
K. Door and door hardware encroachment: when door is swung fully-open into means-of-egress
path, the door may not encroach/project more than 7 inches into the required exit width, with
the exception of door release hardware such as lockset levers or panic hardware. These
hardware items must be located no less than 34-inches and no more than 48-inches above the
floor/ground. 2016 California Building Code, Section 10 05 .7.1.
1. In I-2 occupancies, latch release hardware is not permitted to project in the required exit
width, regardless of its mounting height, per 2016 California Building Code, Section
10 05 .7.1 at Exception 1.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
ITEM: MANUFACTURER: 2ND MANUFACTURER:
Hinges (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Pivots (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Key System (SCH) Schlage TO MATCH EXISTING
Mechanical Locks (SCH) Schlage OR EQUAL
Electronic Locks (SCE) Schlage Electronics OR EQUAL
Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin OR EQUAL
Closers (LCN) LCN OR EQUAL
Auto Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Coordinators (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Silencers (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Push & Pull Plates (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Kickplates (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives OR EQUAL
Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson OR EQUAL
Thresholds (NGP) NGP OR EQUAL
Seals & Bottoms (NGP) NGP OR EQUAL
2.2 HINGING METHODS:
A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to maximum allowable.
Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow
door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise University’s Representative if
8-inch width is insufficient.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 8
B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and
frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s standard exceeds the
scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify University’s Representative of
deviation from scheduled hardware.
C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open widths
minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.
1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security
studs.
2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.
D. Pivots: high-strength forged bronze or stainless steel, tilt-on precision bearing and bearing pin.
1. Bottom and intermediate pivots: adjustability of minus 0.063 inch, plus 0.125 inch.
2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:
A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.

1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.
2. Universal lock case – 10 functions in one case.
3. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge.
4. Latchbolts: 0.75 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
5. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers
as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.
a. Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside lever does
not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful entry.
b. Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no exposed trim mount
screws.
c. Levers rotate up or down for ease of use.
6. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of mortise
cylinder.
7. Turnpieces: accessible offset turn-lever design not requiring pinching or twisting motions
to operate.
8. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
9. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid.
10. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction, lips of
sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
11. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 03L design to match existing.
12. Certifications:
a. ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
b. ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
13. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or both, per
CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 9
2.4 CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers:
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body.
Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header,
door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior doors
and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2016 California Building Code Section
11B-404.2.9, the University Fire Marshal may increase the allowable pressure for fire
doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds.
a. Exception: exterior doors’ pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-pounds if: at
a single location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction of eight, and one leaf
of this bank is fitted with a low- or high-energy operator.
7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve
for delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on
request.
10. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120 degrees F
to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
11. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
12. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
2.5 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design.
B. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-
open, friction and stop-only functions.
C. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled.
Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.
D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners.
Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide
overhead type.
2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with University’s
Representative for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note
degree of opening in submittal.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 10
E. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: polyurethane,
polypropylene, nylon brush, silicone rubber or solid high-grade neoprene as scheduled. Do not
furnish vinyl seal material. UL label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute products: certify
that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness and durability.
1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
2. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.
F. Sound-reducing adjustable seals: coordinate lockset backsets, rim exit device strikes, and
parallel arm closers. Fabricate 7ga “Z”-brackets as bridging pieces to facilitate installation.
Brackets: mild carbon steel, or stainless steel.
G. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms plus
head and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open when closer
is disconnected.
H. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC 2016 11B-404.2.5. Substitute
products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed
substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness.
2. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor
covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less
than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If
none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and request direction
from University’s Representative.
3. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb
depth.
4. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed of Division-7-compliant, leave no air space
between threshold and substrate.
5. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for
specified fastening methods.
6. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive
at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal
and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.
I. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Leave no
unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. Intent: door bears against silencers, seals make
minimal contact with minimal compression – only enough to effect a seal.
2.6 FINISH:
A. Generally: BHMA 626 Satin Chromium.

1. Areas using BHMA 626: furnish push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630,
Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled.
B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 11
1. Provide satin-chrome plated arms, tracks and covers where scheduled bright metallic
powder coat (MTLPC) not available.
C. Finish designators used in appended hardware schedule:
ANSI US Description Base Metal

626 US26D Satin Chromium Plated Over Nickel Brass, Bronze
628 US28 Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized Aluminum
630 US32D Satin Stainless Steel Stain. Steel 300 Ser
652 US26D Satin Chromium Plated Over Nickel Steel
689 US28 Aluminum Painted Any
719 US27 Mill Finish Aluminum Uncoated Aluminum
AL US28 Aluminum Mill Finish Aluminum
BLK Black Any
BRN Dark Brown Any
CL Clear Anodized Aluminum
GRY Grey Any
2.7 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:
A. Key System: Schlage QUAD Primus high-security utility-patented keyway, interchangeable core
throughout. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources, not available from after-
market keyblank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK charge. Initiate and conduct
meeting(s) with University’s Representative to determine system keyway(s), keybow styles,
structure, stamping, degree of physical security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish
University’s Representative’s written approval of the system; do not order keys or cylinders
without written confirmation of actual requirements from the University.
1. Existing factory-registered master key system.
2. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores. Remove at substantial
completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in University’s Representative
presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates.
3. Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property.
4. Furnish 10 construction keys.
5. Furnish 2 construction control keys.
6. Key Cylinders: furnish 6-pin solid brass construction.
B. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are

maintained.
C. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to University.
1. For estimate: 6 keys per change combination (maximum 24 change keys on keyed-alike
sets), 6 master keys per group, 6 grand-master keys, 3 control keys.
2. For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 12
3. All permanent cylinders and keys shall be sent directly from the factory to the University
for ID Stamping and verification, prior to installation by the Contractor.
D. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to University’s Representative
at completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make
corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of
wall/frame condition.
B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security
codes.
1. Notify University Representative of code conflicts before ordering material.
2. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per
California Building Code, Section 10 08 .1.9.2 and 11B-404.2.7.
3. Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.
4. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to
remain, match locations of existing hardware.
C. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and
other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true
to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and
operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by University’s
Representative.
1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc;
fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors
before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.
2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement
exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws.
3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for
Substitution with University Representative.
4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.
B. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See
paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 13
door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is
questionable or difficult, contact University Representative for direction.
C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout.
D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable degree of
swing.
E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to
operate freely and smoothly.
1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to
University’s Representative satisfaction.
2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.
a. Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom – do not force. Turn
valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process from that
point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns counterclockwise.
3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully-opened position
in no more than 10 seconds.
4. Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section.
B. Inspection of fire door assemblies and means-of-egress panic-hardware doors: Per 2016 NFPA-
80 5.2.1: hire an independent third-party inspection service to prepare a report listing these
doors, and include a statement that there are zero deficiencies with the fire-rated assemblies
and the openings with panic hardware.
C. Fire-rated doors:
1. Wood doors: adjust to 0.125 inches clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.
2. Steel doors: adjust to 0.063 inches minimum to 0.188 inches maximum clearance at
heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.
3. Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance (undercut) above
threshold or finish floor material under door.
D. Final inspection: Submit to University’s Representative a letter signed by installer stating that
upon completion installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:
1. Has re-adjusted hardware.
2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and
instructed University’s personnel.
3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Has submitted written report identifying problems.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 14
3.4 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical hardware systems, including adjustment and
maintenance procedures.
3.5 PROTECTION/CLEANING:
A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc.
Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.
B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation process.
3.6 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.
B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by University's
Representative.
C. Refer to Paragraph 2.1 above for list of manufacturers.
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 15
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1

For use on Door #(s):
240CO.1 240G.1
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER ITEMID FINISH MFR

2 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092TEU 03L CON 12/24 VDC 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/438 (AS REQ'D) 626 IVE
1 EA THRESHOLD 513 OR AS REQ'D PER DETAIL AL NGP
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W VON
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-38 (AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
1 EA NOTE WIRING DIAGRAM (AS REQ'D)
PRIMARY SEAL: INTEGRAL PART OF ALUM FRAME.
CARD READER BY ACCESS CONTROL SECTION.
SEE RELATED SECTIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL, POWER, AND WIRING.

174.1

2 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092TEU 03L CON 12/24 VDC 626 SCH
1 EA PA MOUNTING PLATE 4040XP-18PA 689 LCN
1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040XP-61 (AS REQ'D) (AS 689 LCN
REQUIRED)
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-6W VON
1 EA WIRE HARNESS CON-38 (AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
1 EA NOTE WIRING DIAGRAM (AS REQ'D)
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 16

CARD READER BY ACCESS CONTROL SECTION.
SEE RELATED SECTIONS FOR ACCESS CONTROL, POWER, AND WIRING.

174A.1 174B.1 174C.1 174E.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 03L 626 SCH
1 EA PA MOUNTING PLATE 4040XP-18PA 689 LCN
1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4040XP-61 (AS REQ'D) (AS 689 LCN
REQUIRED)

240.2 240A.1 240B.1 240D.1 240K.1 240L.1
240M.1 240P.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 03L 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 17

240H.1 240J.1 240Q.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050T 03L 626 SCH

240N.1

3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 03L L583-363 626 SCH
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 18

240.1

6 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 03L 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL US28 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 ST-2303 TBWMS 689 LCN
1 EA ASTRAGAL 158NA CL NGP
4021 USED FOR 1' LEAF.

240C.1

6 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 03L 626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL US28 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4021 ST-2303 TBWMS 689 LCN
1 EA ASTRAGAL 158NA CL NGP
4021 USED FOR 1' LEAF.
END OF SECTION
Door Hardware
02/25/2020 Section 087100 - 19
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Temperature Change: 120
deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility
with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 1
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass; 12 inches square.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For glazing installer, glass testing agency, and sealant testing agency.
F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a testing

agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets. For
glazing sealants, supply test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within
previous 36-month period.
H. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the
NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and
insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 2
E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer
for each product and installation method.
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing
Manual."
G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and
when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Do not
install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits
permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 3
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Furnish to University a written guarantee

in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate
within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects
developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and
cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. Refer to Division 1 Section “Close-out
Submittals” for submittal form. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses
as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites:
Not less than 6.0 mm.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float
glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"
Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or
Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.
Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-QI, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 4
2.3 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to
comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
B. Glass: Provide products indicated in “Glazing Schedule” Article, or equal.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone, or

thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Application: Use where soft compression
gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing
or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match University’s Representative’s samples.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 5
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Products: Provide one of the following:
1. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.

2. GE Construction Sealants - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800.
3. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
4. Or equal.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated. AAMA 806.3 tape, for
glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 6
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type GL-1 (Vision, Laminated): Provide as follows:
1. Overall Unit Thickness: Nominal 7.0 mm.

2. Lites: Laminated assembly; 2 plies. Clear, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully
tempered float glass as required by application. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm.
3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). Color: Clear.
4. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Glass Type GL-2 (Vision, Laminated, Patterned): Provide as follows:
1. Overall Unit Thickness: Nominal 7.0 mm.

2. Lites: Laminated assembly; 2 plies. Clear, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully
tempered float glass as required by application. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm.
Custom Pattern. Match Reeded patterned glass in adjacent, existing Door No. 14-221.
3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm). Color: Translucent white.
4. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

achieve necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 8
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
M. Backsplash Installation: Secure backsplash with sealant or mirror mastic as recommend by glass
manufacturer. Maintain uniform margins at perimeter of backsplash. Seal joint between glass
edge and adjacent surfaces.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 9
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal
without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by
gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 10
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Glazing
02/25/2020 Section 08 80 00 - 11
SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: Tempered glass mirrors
qualifying as safety glazing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process
used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass,
glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment
details.
C. Samples: For each type of the following:
1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.

2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.
F. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was
tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are
installed.
G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 1
A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing. Testing is
not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and
mirror backing matching those submitted.
A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure
to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling
mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass
surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified
warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that
are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of
the silver film. Warranty Period: Five years from date of the University’s acceptanceof the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
1. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc.

2. Gardner Glass, Inc.
3. Glasswerks LA, Inc.
4. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC.
5. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 2
6. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

7. Or equal.
B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.
2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C1503[; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating
process.
B. Tempered Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality for blemish requirements and complying with
ASTM C1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied;
tinted.
1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Tint Color: Bronze.
C. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201,
Category II.
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for
use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating
and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
a. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.

b. Macco Adhesives.
c. Palmer Products Corporation.
d. Pecora Corporation.
e. Or equal.
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 3
2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE
A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing
channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges
of mirrors in a single piece.
1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch
in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in
height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.
B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide
toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized
anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.
B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and
size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting
B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes
or primers with mirror mastic.
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 4
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where
applicable.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with
Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting
surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install
fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1. Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter
points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps
not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.
2. Install mastic as follows:
a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of

mirrors and backing material.
b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting
surface.
c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from
condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 5
D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by
mirror manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Mirrors
02/25/2020 Section 08 83 00 - 6
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise
indicated.
Non-structural Metal Framing

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 1
C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Heavy Gauge Studs: ASTM C653, Grade 50. Provide CEMCO “King” studs, or equal. Comply
with the following:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 12 gauge.

2. Depth: As required for partition width.
3. Location: Provide at jamb assembly between door and adjacent sidelight, and where
required for structural stability of partition system.
E. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide
lateral bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner
sized to friction fit inside runner.
F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.
b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
d. Or equal.
G. Flat Strap, Backing Plate, and Continuous Sheet Metal Backing: Steel sheet for blocking, bracing,
and backing in length and width indicated. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on
Drawings but not less than 0.033 inch.
H. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 2
I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.033 inch.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
K. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
L. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor or postinstalled,
expansion anchor.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent
testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 3
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide

flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.033
inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. Minimum Base-Metal
Thickness: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 0.033 inch.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed
of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Provide one of the following :
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
d. Or equal.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-
cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick,
in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 4
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices
indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and
construction.
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements
in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 5
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring: Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Z-Furring Members:
1. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 6
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to
support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 09 22 16 - 7
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Requirements: Section 09 22 16 "Non-structural Metal Framing" for non-structural

framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products: Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length
for each trim accessory indicated.
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Install mockups for each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed
locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
acceptance.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 1
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 2
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Provide products by one of the following:
1. USG Corporation.
2. National Gypsum Company
3. CertainTeed Corp.
4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
5. Temple-Inland.
6. Or equal.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Provide at all locations except as indicated
otherwise.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 2.
1. Core: As indicated on Drawings .

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: As indicated.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD
A. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed
of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core.
a. Quiet Solution, Quiet Rock.

b. National Gypsum Company; Sound Break.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 3
c. Or equal.
2. Core: As indicated.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp

b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
d. Or equal.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape: Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 4
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed
for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5
finish.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. Use screws complying with
ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced
by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or
rock wool. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
a. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

b. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
c. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
d. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
e. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
f. Or equal.
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 6
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings, and in Toilet Rooms,
Mechanical Spaces, and Plenums.
6. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 7
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with
vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over
furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to
them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, according to

ASTM C 840, and in specific locations approved by University’s Representative for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 8
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. Primer and its application to surfaces are
specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
Gypsum Board
02/25/2020 Section 09 29 00 - 9
SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass mosaic tile.

2. Porcelain tile.
3. Tile backing panels.
4. Metal trim.
B. Related Requirements: Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction,

control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C,
ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11,
ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17,
which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review requirements in

ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 1
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish
required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color
blend.
2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and
composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36
inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors
approved for completed Work.
3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory.
4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
F. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 2
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or
producer. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate
from single source or producer. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified
Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer:
1. Cementitious backer units.

2. Metal edge strips.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions,
and other characteristics indicated. Provide tile complying with Standard grade
requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet
areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in
writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of
successful in-service performance.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 3
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tile Type: Factory-mounted glass mosaic tile.
1. Product: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal.

2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
4. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
B. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain tile.
1. Product: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal

2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
3. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
4. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
5. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available
to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
a. C-Cure.
b. Custom Building Products.
c. FinPan, Inc.
d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
e. USG Corporation.
f. Or equal.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15.
1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-

rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 4
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.
1. Product: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal.

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to
temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for
intended use.
2.7 METAL TRIM
A. Product: Provide metal trim at locations indicated, Comply with the following:
1. Floor Transition Edge: Schluter Systems “RENO-U,” or equal.

2. Floor Cove and Corner Trim: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on
Drawings, or equal.
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
C. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances
required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. Verify that
protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with University’s Representative.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108
series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 6
b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are
flush.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the
use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.

2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
3. Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch.
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. Where joints occur in
concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
I. Metal Trim: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,
wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
J. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove
excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 7
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANEL
A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions
for type of application indicated.
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new
matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period
to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F115; thinset mortar; epoxy grout.
a. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-setmortar.

b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 8
1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious
backer units or fiber-cement backer board.
a. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar.

b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION
Ceramic Tiling
02/25/2020 Section 09 30 13 - 9
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of
each type, finish, and color.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings.
D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
Acoustical Panel Ceilings

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 1
E. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
F. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and
fastener type, from ICC-ES.
G. Field quality-control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2
percent of quantity installed.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

acceptance.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 2
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to 2016 CBC.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Indicate design designations
from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Recycled Content: Recycled Content: Post Consumer minimum 15 percent; Pre Consumer
minimum 65 percent.
D. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
E. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. Mounting Method for Measuring
NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from
test surface according to ASTM E 795.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 3
F. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by
referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by University’s Representative from each
manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light
reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.3 ACOUSTIC CEILING PANEL TYPE 1
A. Product: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal.
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
follows:
1. Type and Form: Type IV; Form 2; with factory applied latex paint.
2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).
C. Color: White.
D. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled tegular sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.
E. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
F. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels
treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or
bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than 25 percent.
B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 4
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
3. Non-ferrous Fasteners Integrated with Magnetic Shielding Systems Materials: Provide
non-ferrous fasteners, anchorage devices, and related components where work of this
Section penetrates or is otherwise integrated with aluminum plate shielding or other
elements of shielding system.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.135-inch-diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick,
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.
H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic

forces.
I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in place.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 5
2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR CEILING
B. Narrow-Face, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized; to produce
structural members with 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide faces.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. Face Finish: Painted white.
2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Product: Provide grid manufacturer’s standard molding and trim components as indicated, or
equal.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Provide one of the following: Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
1. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
3. Or equal.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel
ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this
and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 6
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 7
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Cut ends of non-standard length suspension runners flush to accurately fit at intersections with
other runners, at borders, and at interruptions. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
Screw attach runners to adjacent components with angle brackets secured through tee web.
G. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install
panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel
faces flush with bottom face of runners.
3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
A. Special Inspections: University will engage a special inspector to perform the following special
inspections: Compliance of seismic design.

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 8
B. Testing Agency: University will engage a testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
C. Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they
do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 09 51 13 - 9
CHS 14-215 EMPLOYEE HEALTH CENTER RENOVATIONS
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and
pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.
C. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated
on Drawings.
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Furnish not less than 10
linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of
resilient product installed.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Coordinate
mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
Resilient Base And Accessories

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 13 - 1
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore

certification.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing
and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
A. Manufacturers: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (valcanized, themoset).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location: Style A, Straight.
C. Thickness: As indicated.
D. Height: As indicated.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 13 - 2
G. Inside Corners: Job formed.
H. Colors: As indicated.
2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Product: Provide carpet edging (1/4- inch), or equal.
B. Locations: Provide carpet edging at transition between carpet and dissimilar floor finish.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes
of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and
that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation
of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 13 - 3
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at
bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 13 - 4
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 13 - 5
SECTION 09 65 16 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Vinyl sheet flooring with backing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient sheet flooring.
1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing
partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of resilient sheet flooring, in manufacturer's standard
size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color, texture, and pattern required. For
heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of
each color required.
D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient
sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center
of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
E. Product Schedule: For resilient sheet flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are
trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
Resilient Sheet Flooring

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 1
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. Size:
Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by University’s
Representative.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless University’s Representative specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following
periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.
E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. Critical
Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing
and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOORING WITH BACKING
A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Congoleum Corporation.
3. Forbo Industries, Inc.
4. Gerflor.
5. Mannington Mills, Inc.
6. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
7. Or equal.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F1303.
1. Type (Binder Content): Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent.

2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1.
3. Overall Thickness: As standard with manufacturer.
4. Backing Class: Class B (nonfoamed plastic).
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Sheet Width: 6.6 feet.
E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.
F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 3
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit

resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated. Adhesives shall have a VOC content
of 50 g/L or less.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for

heat welding seams. Colors: Match flooring.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient sheet
flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify that finishes
of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and
that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to

ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range
on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9
pH.

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 4
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after
substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq.
ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where
they are to be installed. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in
installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 5
installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut
covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Seamless Installation: Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and heat
weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation.
Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before applying liquid
floor polish. Apply two coat(s).
E. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 09 65 16 - 6
SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Vinyl wall covering.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade
resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern
placement, seams and termination points.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and
finish specified, full width by 36-inch- long in size. Wall-Covering Sample: From same production
run to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.
Mark top and face of fabric.
D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to
5 percent of amount installed.
Wall Coverings
02/25/2020 Section 09 72 00 - 1
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for installation.
1. Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with
requirements in ASTM F1141 for appearance shading characteristics.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity
conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for
occupants after Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied

with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Wall Coverings
02/25/2020 Section 09 72 00 - 2
2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING
B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering
and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering
manufacturer.
B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering

manufacturers for intended substrate.
C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,
grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete

masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by
primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
3. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
4. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
Wall Coverings
02/25/2020 Section 09 72 00 - 3
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine
sandpaper.
E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and
similar items.
F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated.
B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks
and corners.
C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall
coverings, reverse every other strip.
D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.
E. Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.
F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside
corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted.
G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without
overlaps or gaps between strips.
H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims,
and similar items.
END OF SECTION
Wall Coverings
02/25/2020 Section 09 72 00 - 4
SECTION 09 81 00-ACOUSTIC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Glass-fiber acoustic insulation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each product.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BATT INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Provide product manufactured by one of the following:
1. Johns Manville.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
4. Knauf Insulation.
Acoustic Insulation
02/25/2020 Section 09 81 00 - 1
5. Owens Corning.
6. Or equal.
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics. Density: 0.7 lb/cu. ft. Application: Cavity insulation for sound
rated partitions.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION
A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

B. Dark-Surfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; faced on one side with black
glass-fiber mat or black polymer finish; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Product: Knauf Insulation “Black Acoustical Board,”
or equal.
1. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75
deg F.
2. Manufacturer’s markings not permitted on visible surfaces.
2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in
place.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Gemco; Spindle Type.
c. Or equal.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Acoustic Insulation
02/25/2020 Section 09 81 00 - 2
B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized-

steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.

b. Gemco; R-150.
c. Or equal.
2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Crawl spaces.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Attic spaces.
d. Where indicated.
C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. Products:
1. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

2. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
3. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
or rain at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
Acoustic Insulation
02/25/2020 Section 09 81 00 - 3
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber boards are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install insulation
over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of
partitions.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION
Acoustic Insulation
02/25/2020 Section 09 81 00 - 4
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
02/25/2020 INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23 - 1
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
5. Samples shall match selected colors.
6. Samples shall match selected sheen, and be flat and smooth on submittal substrate.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. University’s Representative will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions
for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
b. Other Items: University’s Representative will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. If preliminary color
selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by
University’s Representative at no added cost to University.
acceptance.

09 91 23 - 2
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. Montvale, New Jersey 07653; www.benjaminmoore.com.
2. Dunn-Edwards Paint Co. (The), Los Angeles, California 90058; www.dunnedwards.com.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The), Cleveland, Ohio 44115; www.sherwin-williams.com.
4. Vista Paint Corporation (The), Fullerton, California 92831; www.vistapaint.com.
5. Or equal.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits for interior paints and coatings applied at
Project site, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.

09 91 23 - 3
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.

8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
and shall comply with requirements of 2016 CalGreen Building Code.
D. Colors: Match University’s Representative samples. Quantity of accent colors will not exceed
30.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: University reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. University will engage the services of a testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. University may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials
from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two
paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

09 91 23 - 4
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"

applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing
painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were
removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove incompatible primers and reprime
substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems
indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

09 91 23 - 5
I. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material
that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI

Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, framing and supports,
and Electronic Safety and Security Work: Paint the following work where exposed in occupied
spaces:
1. Equipment, including panelboards.
2. Uninsulated metal piping.
3. Uninsulated plastic piping.
4. Pipe hangers and supports.
5. Metal conduit.
6. Plastic conduit.

09 91 23 - 6
7. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other
paintable jacket material.
8. Other items as approved by University’s Representative.
9. Above ceiling spaces in Auditorium and Multi-purpose Room. Color: Midnight Gray, Flat.
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: University may engage the services of a testing and inspecting
agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other Sections against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
specified in other sections by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
University’s Representative, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE, SYSTEMS
A. Concrete Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 2

1. Prime Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: 023 Fresh Start Primer.

b. Dunn Edwards: UGPR00 Utra-Grip Premium.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A24W300 Loxon Primer.
d. Vista Paint: 4600 Uniprime II.
e. Or equal.
2. Intermediate Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310).

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA20 Suprema Velvet.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): NA.

09 91 23 - 7
d. Vista Paint: 8200 Carefree 100% Acrylic Velva Sheen.

e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310).

e. Or equal.
B. Ferrous Metal Substrate: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 5

1. Prime Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: M04 Acrylic Prime.

b. Dunn Edwards: UGPR00 Utra-Grip Premium.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): B66W1 DTM Acrylic Primer.
d. Vista Paint: 9600 Protec Primer.
e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W627 Ben Acrylic Semi Gloss.

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA40 Suprema Semi Gloss Interior.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A98 Duration Semi Gloss.
d. Vista Paint: 8400 Carefree Semi Gloss 100% Acrylic.
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:

e. Or equal.
C. Galvanized Metal Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 5

1. Prime Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: M04 Acrylic Prime.

b. Dunn Edwards: GAPR00 Galv-Alum Premium.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): B66A50 DTM Bonding Primer.
d. Vista Paint: 4800 Metal Pro Primer.
e. Or equal.


09 91 23 - 8
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:

e. Or equal.
D. Wood Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 2

1. Prime Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: 023 Fresh Start Primer

b. Dunn Edwards: EZPR00 E-Z Prime Premium
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): B51W20 PrepRite Pro Block
d. Vista Paint: 4200 Terminator II.
e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310)

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA20 Suprema Velvet
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): NA
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310)

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA20 Suprema Velvet
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): NA
e. Or equal.
E. Wood Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 3

1. Prime Coat:

d. Vista Paint: 4200 Terminator II.
e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W626 Ben Acrylic Eggshell

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA30 Suprema Eggshell Interior
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A97 Duration Satin
d. Vista Paint: 8300 Carefree Eggshell 100% Acrylic.
e. Or equal.

09 91 23 - 9
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W626 Ben Acrylic Eggshell

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA30 Suprema Eggshell Interior
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A97 Duration Satin
e. Or equal.

09 91 23 - 10
F. Wood Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 5

1. Prime Coat:

d. Vista Paint: 4200 Terminator II
e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: 551 Regal Select 100% Acrylic Semi Gloss
b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA50 Suprema Gloss Interior
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A98 Duration Semi Gloss
d. Vista Paint: 8400 Carefree Semi Gloss 100% Acrylic
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
e. Or equal.
G. Gypsum Wallboard Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 1

1. Prime Coat:

b. Dunn Edwards: VNPR00 PVA Sealer.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): B28W200 Prep Rite Primer.
d. Vista Paint: 100 Hi Build PVA Sealer.
e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W625 Ben Int. Acrylic Flat.

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA10 Suprema Int Flat.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A96 Duration Flat.
d. Vista Paint: 8100/6100 Carefree Acrylic Flat.
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W625 Ben Int. Acrylic Flat.

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA10 Suprema Int Flat.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A96 Duration Flat.
d. Vista Paint: 8100/6100 Carefree Acrylic Flat.
e. Or equal.

09 91 23 - 11
H. Gypsum Wallboard Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 2

1. Prime Coat:

e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310) .

e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: Regal Classic Pearl Finish (310) .

e. Or equal.
I. Gypsum Wallboard Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 3

1. Prime Coat:

e. Or equal.
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W626 Ben Acrylic Eggshell.

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA30 Suprema Eggshell Interior.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A97 Duration Satin.
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co: W626 Ben Acrylic Eggshell.

b. Dunn Edwards: SPMA30 Suprema Eggshell Interior.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): A97 Duration Satin.
e. Or equal.
J. Gypsum Wallboard Substrates: 100% Acrylic Gloss Level 5

09 91 23 - 12
1. Prime Coat:
b. Dunn Edwards: VNPR00 PVA Sealer
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): B28W08111 Premium Wall & Wood Primer
d. Vista Paint: 1100 Hi Build PVA Sealer
e. Or equal.
e. Or equal.
3. Finish Coat:
e. Or equal.
END OF SECTION

09 91 23 - 13
SECTION 10 14 00-SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes panel and dimensional signs as described herein and as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment.
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs.
3. Division 26 Sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.
4. Division 26 Sections for illuminated Exit signs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines" and 2016 CBC.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories.
2. Furnish message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille,
and layout for each sign.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for acrylic sheet.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,
texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.

2. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.
E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Signage
02/25/2020 Section 10 14 00 - 1
F. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility

Guidelines and in 2016 CBC.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Furnish to University a written guarantee for signs against all
defects in materials and workmanship for five years from date of acceptance. Refer to Division
1 Section ”Close-out Submittals,” for submittal form. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.

2. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Apply graphics by silkscreen method. Smooth all edges. Extend applied finish material
to fully cover panel edges.
B. Manufacturers: Provide signage products manufactured by one of the following:
1. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

2. Allen Markings International.
3. Best Sign Systems Inc.
Signage
02/25/2020 Section 10 14 00 - 2
4. Supersine Company (The).

5. Or equal.
C. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from
corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:
1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.125 inch thick.

2. Edge Condition: Bullnose.
3. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius.
4. Mounting: Unframed.
a. Wall mounted with two-face tape.

b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.
5. Color: As selected by University’s Representative from manufacturer's full range.

6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with
contrasting colors.
D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols
complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with 2016 CBC. Text shall be accompanied
by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs
and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.
1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.

2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application
intended. Color: Custom colors as selected by University’s Representative.
F. Interior Panel Sign Schedule:
1. Sign Type: Miscellaneous Identification and Direction Signage.
a. Sign Size: Varies.

b. Message Panel Material: Acrylic sheet.
c. Message Panel Finish/Color: As selected by University’s Representative.
d. Background Finish/Color: As selected by University’s Representative.
e. Character Size: Comply with 2016 CBC requirements.
f. Character Finish/Color: As selected by University’s Representative.
g. Text/Message: As indicated.
h. Mounting Method: As indicated.
i. Location: As indicated.
Signage
02/25/2020 Section 10 14 00 - 3
2.3 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide signage and graphics complying with CBC 1117B.5 and as follows:
1. Character Type: San serif uppercase characters raised 1/32 inch, accompanied by Grade 2
(Contracted) Braille.
a. Dots shall be 1/10 inch on centers in each cell, with 2/10 inch space between cells
measured from the second column of dots in the first cell to the first column of
dots in the second cell.
b. Dots shall be raised minimum of 1/40 inch above background.
2. Finish: Non-glare type with contrast between character, symbols and background not less
than 70%.
3. Character Ratio: Characters on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio of between 3:5
and 1:1, and a stroke width-to-height ratio of between 1:5 and 1:10. Characters and
numbers on signs 80 inches or higher above finish floor shall be a minimum of 3 inches in
height.
4. Pictorial Symbol Signs (pictogram): Comply with the following:
a. Verbal description shall be placed directly below pictogram.

b. Minimum outside dimension of pictogram shall be 6 inches.
5. Mounting Location and Height: Mounting height for permanent identification signs shall
be 60 inches from floor to centerline of sign.
2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.5 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES
A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings,
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application
intended.
Signage
02/25/2020 Section 10 14 00 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more
stringent requirements apply. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or
vinyl-covered surfaces.
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by University.
END OF SECTION
Signage
02/25/2020 Section 10 14 00 - 5
SECTION 10 21 23 - CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cubicle-curtain tracks and carriers.

2. Cubicle curtains.
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for supplementary wood framing and

blocking for mounting items requiring anchorage.
2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for supplementary metal framing and
blocking for mounting items requiring anchorage.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. For each type of curtain fabric indicated, include
durability, laundry temperature limits, fade resistance, applied curtain treatments, and fire-test-
response characteristics.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Shop Drawings: For curtains and tracks.
1. Show layout and types of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers, anchorage details,
and conditions requiring accessories. Indicate dimensions taken from field
measurements.
2. Include details of blocking for track support.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Curtain Fabric: Not less than 10 inches square and showing complete pattern repeat, from
dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of
material.
2. Mesh Top: Not less than 10 inches square.
3. Curtain Track: Not less than 10 inches long.
4. Curtain Carrier: Full-size unit.
E. Product Schedule: For curtains and tracks. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
Cubicle Curtains and Track

02/25/2020 Section 10 21 23 - 1
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For curtains, tracks, and hardware to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed
for each size indicated, but no fewer than 10 units.
2. Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size indicated,
but no fewer than two units.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL or NVLAP with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspection indicated, as documented in accordance with ASTM E329,
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
1. Build mockup of typical cubicle as shown on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Cubicle Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:
1. Laundering: Launderable to a water temperature of not less than 160 deg F.

2. Flame Resistance: Provide fabrics identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when
tested by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
fabrics with appropriate markings of a qualified testing agency.
2.2 CUBICLE-CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Product: Construction Specialties, Inc., aluminum Cubicle Track Surface Mounted Traditional
Track, or equal.

02/25/2020 Section 10 21 23 - 2
B. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-3/8 inches wide by 3/4 inch high.
1. Track Minimum Wall Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- radius bends.
3. Finish: Clear anodized.
C. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and
joining sleeves, wall flanges, brackets, ceiling clips, and other accessories from same material
and with same finish as track.
D. Curtain Roller Carriers: Two nylon rollers and nylon axle with chrome-plated steel hook.
E. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
F. Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.3 CURTAINS
A. Product: Carnegie “River” curtain fabric, or equal.
B. Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, 100 percent polyester; inherently and permanently
flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial. Color: 4684 32.
C. Curtain Grommets: Two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than
6 inches o.c.; machined into top hem.
D. Mesh Top: Not less than 18-inch- high mesh top. Mesh: No. 50 nylon mesh.
E. Snap Attachments: Provide manufacturer's standard nickel-plated brass snap attachments for
modular panels.
F. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.
2.4 CURTAIN FABRICATION
A. Continuous Curtain Panels:
1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent of added fullness,
but not less than 12 inches of added fullness.
2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, and minus
clearance above the finished floor of 4 inches.
3. Top Hem: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 1-1/2 inches wide, triple thickness,
reinforced with integral web, and double lockstitched.
4. Mesh Top: Top hem of mesh not less than 1 inch and not more than 1-1/2 inches wide,
triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double lockstitched. Double lockstitch
bottom of mesh directly to 1/2-inch triple thickness, top hem of curtain fabric.

02/25/2020 Section 10 21 23 - 3
5. Bottom Hem: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 1-1/2 inches wide, triple thickness,
reinforced, and double lockstitched.
6. Side Hems: Not less than 1/2 inch and not more than 1-1/4 inches wide, with double
turned edges, and single lockstitched.
7. Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch wide, double turned and double stitched.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. For tracks of up to 20 feet in length, provide track fabricated from single, continuous length.
Curtain-Track Mounting: Surface.
C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by manufacturer.

Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Center fasteners in
track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation. Attach track to suspended ceiling grid with
manufacturer's proprietary clip.
D. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves,
and other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation.
E. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch spacing along full length of curtain
plus an additional carrier.
F. Cubicle Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 10 21 23 - 4
SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Corner guards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include fire ratings of units recessed in fire-rated walls and listings for door-protection
items attached to fire-rated doors.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on
Samples of size indicated: Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal
with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Nystrom.
Wall and Door Protection

02/25/2020 Section 10 26 00 - 1
d. Pawling Corporation.
e. Or equal.
2. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch.

b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
3. Wing Size: Nominal 1- by 1- inches by full wall height.

4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
5. Mounting: Adhesive.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design,
performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges
rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other
imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline
joints.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

02/25/2020 Section 10 26 00 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and
other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of
support fasteners. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility
with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written
instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,
cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights
indicated on Drawings.
C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other
accessories required for a complete installation. Provide anchoring devices and suitable
locations to withstand imposed loads.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 10 26 00 - 3
SECTION 10 28 00 – TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Underlavatory guards.
B. Related Sections: Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
4. Features that will be included for Project.
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
Toilet Accessories
02/25/2020 10 2800 - 1
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch
minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Paper Towel Dispenser:
1. Product: Bobrick B-262, or equal.

2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Lockset: Tumbler type.
5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
Toilet Accessories
02/25/2020 10 2800 - 2
B. Robe Hook :
1. Product: Bobrick, B-76727, or equal.

2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
C. Grab Bar:
1. Product: Bobrick B-6806 Series, or equal.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
3. Or equal.
B. Underlavatory Guard :
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent
direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing
coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Supply universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Deliver minimum of six keys to University’s Representative.
Toilet Accessories
02/25/2020 10 2800 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Toilet Accessories
02/25/2020 10 2800 - 4
SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fire protection cabinets for the following: Portable fire extinguishers.
B. Related Sections: Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers."
A. General: Latching and locking hardware shall be operable with a single effort by lever-type
hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating bars, or other hardware designed so as not to require
the ability to grasp the opening hardware and not require a force greater than 5 lbs. to open.
1. Force required to activate controls shall not exceed 5 lbs.

2. Be recessed or semi-recessed in order not to protrude more than 4 inches from face of
wall.
3. Mounted between 15-48 inches above finished floor for forward approach.
4. Mounted between 9-54 inches above finished floor for side approach.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection
cabinets.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting

methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated: Size: 6 by 6 inches square.
D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule
with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 1
A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . Review methods and

procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but not limited to, schedules and
coordination requirements.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hose valves
indicated are accommodated.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher or extinguisher and hose valve as indicated.
Manufacturers: Provide product manufactured by one of the following:
1. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 2
2. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.

3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
4. Potter Roemer LLC.
5. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.
6. Or equal.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and rated. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls
fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick,
fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with
exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to
cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall
bead.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Stainless steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to

fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed
into face.
3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply
on door handle.
4. Identification: Lettering complying with Fire Marshal’s requirements for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as approved by Fire Marshal. Identify fire extinguisher in
fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
a. Location: Applied to cabinet door.

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 3
b. Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.

c. Lettering Color: Red.
d. Orientation: Vertical.
K. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder coat paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
b. Interior of cabinet.
2. Stainless Steel: No. 4. Provide for cabinet doors unless indicated otherwise.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 4
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." After cleaning, apply a conversion
coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Color and Gloss: Match University’s
Representative’s sample.
2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections
before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and
semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 5
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to Fire Marshal.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
4. Fire-Rated, Hose-Valve Cabinets:
a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and
knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.
b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 07 84 13
"Penetration Firestopping."
C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 10 44 13 - 6
SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire
extinguishers.
B. Related Requirements: Section 10 44 13 "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
A. General: Latching and locking hardware shall be operable with a single effort by lever-type
hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating bars, or other hardware designed so as not to require
the ability to grasp the opening hardware and not require a force greater than 5 lbs. to open.
1. Force required to activate controls shall not exceed 5 lbs.

2. Be recessed or semi-recessed in order not to protrude more than 4 inches from face of
wall.
3. Mounted between 15-48 inches above finished floor for forward approach.
4. Mounted between 9-54 inches above finished floor for side approach.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and

procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the following: Schedules
and coordination requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and
mounting brackets.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated
on Drawings.
C. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
Fire Extinguishers
02/25/2020 Section 10 44 16 - 1
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Assembly Warranty: Furnish to University a written guarantee in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace fire extinguisher that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within period specified. Refer to Division 1 Section “Close-out Submittals,” for
submittal form.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of the University’s acceptance of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Provide products manufactured by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger Fire Protection.
Fire Extinguishers
02/25/2020 Section 10 44 16 - 2
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.

e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
f. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
g. Potter Roemer LLC.
h. Or equal.
2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb nominal

capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated
or red baked-enamel finish.
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

b. Nystrom Building Products.
c. Potter Ansul Incorporated.
d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
e. Roemer LLC.
f. Or equal.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Fire Marshal. Identify bracket-mounted fire
extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting
surface. Orientation: Vertical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged,
defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Fire Extinguishers
02/25/2020 Section 10 44 16 - 3
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in
compliance with requirements of fire Marshal.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
END OF SECTION
Fire Extinguishers
02/25/2020 Section 10 44 16 - 4
SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Manually operated and motor-operated roller shades with single rollers.
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for
light-blocking shades with a sealant.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include styles, material descriptions, construction
details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating
instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if
applicable.
2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for
each type of roller shade indicated.
3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.
E. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a testing agency.
A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
Roller Window Shades

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 1
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Roller Shades: Full-size units
equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated,
but no fewer than two units.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn.
Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
B. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC
9644, ATCC9645.
C. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third
party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been
evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are known to
be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also
identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The
material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per
the above major criteria.
D. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a
closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise
thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the
same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process
is currently underway and will be utilized for this project.
E. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that the
material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of
perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving
into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band
can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
acceptance.

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 2
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in
spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify University’s Representative of installation
conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of roller shade from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
Provide manufacturer’s heavy duty clutch system.
1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.
2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight

and lifting heavy roller shades. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for
shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 3
B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall

thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end
assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting integral channel in tube.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
D. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. Type: Enclosed in sealed
pocket of shadeband material.
E. Installation Accessories:
1. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front fascia, top

and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure. Height: Manufacturer's
standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but
not less than height indicated on Drawings.
2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected by University’s Representative from
manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering and Black-out Shade Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.

2. Type: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or equal.
3. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
4. Openness Factor: As indicated.
5. Color: As indicated.
2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 4
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F: Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations
between openings.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible

except as follows: Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or
greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to
ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by University’s
Representative, before time of acceptance.

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 5
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 12 24 13 - 6
SECTION 12 36 61 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

2. One full-size quartz agglomerate countertop, with front edge, 8 by 10 inches, of
construction and in configuration specified.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base

cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
Simulated Stone Countertops

02/25/2020 Section 12 36 61 - 1
B. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick unless noted otherwise on Drawings, quartz agglomerate with front
fascia as indicated on Drawings.
C. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied front unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing. Finish: Polished.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Particleboard Subtops: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
B. Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
C. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix
of filled plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of
ANSI SS1. Product: Provide product indicated in “FINISH/MATERIAL LIST” on Drawings, or
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B. Fasten subtops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of subtop. Pre-
drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Apply sufficient quantity of mounting
adhesive to subtop in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to provide permanent
installation. Fully imbed countertop in adhesive, align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in
color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
2. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
END OF SECTION
Simulated Stone Countertops

02/25/2020 Section 12 36 61 - 2
SECTION 21 10 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Fire Protection as indicated, specified and required.
B. Related Documents:
1. Fire Extinguishers – Section 10 44 16.
2. Fire Detection and Alarm – See Electrical Drawings.
3. Painting – Section – Division 09.
4. Electrical – Division 26.
A. Installer shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in the design, fabrication and
installation of fire protection systems. All work shall be in conformance with NFPA 13
requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit proof of qualifications specified in Quality Assurance to the

B. Contractor shall submit written certification to the University’s Representative that installed
materials and workmanship conform to specifications.
C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
A. A complete hydraulically calculated automatic sprinkler system for the renovated areas. This is
intended to generally describe the scope of work but shall not be considered a complete list of
work to be performed under this contract. Provide all fixtures, equipment and work necessary
for a complete operating fire protection system.
B. Fire Sprinkler Riser and service is existing.
C. Conform to requirements of the 2016 CBC, CFC, and the University’s Fire Marshal.
D. Refer to and comply with the Deferred Submittal notes indicated on the architectural
drawings.
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
FIRE SUPPRESSION
02/25/2020 Section 21 10 00- 1
A. All storage and mechanical equipment spaces shall be designed for ordinary hazard, with a
density of 0.15 gallons per minute/square foot (gpm/sf) over 2,500 SF maximum.
B. All other spaces in the building shall be designed for light hazard criteria, with 0.10 gpm/SF
over the most remote 1,500 SF.
C. The maximum head spacing shall be limited to 200 SF per head for light hazard, and 130 SF per
head for ordinary hazard areas.
D. The hydraulic calculations shall be based upon pressure available at point-of-connection to on-
site water supply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following manufacturers. See Section 012513 for
substitution requirements.
ITEM MANUFACTURER
1. Valves: Grinnell, or equal.
2. Pipe Hangers: Tolco, or equal.
3. Fire Protection Equipment: Viking, or equal.
4. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic, or equal.
5. Pressure Gauges: Trerice, or equal.
6. Automatic Sprinkler Heads: Viking, or equal
7. Flow and Tamper Switches: Potter Electric, or equal.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. General: All materials and equipment to be used in this project shall be new and conform to
NFPA requirements and shall have Underwriters Laboratories (U.L) listing and the University’s
Fire Marshal approval.
B. Fire Department Connections: Polished bronze, free standing, labeled, and with caps and
chains.
C. Fire Sprinkler Heads: All sprinkler heads to be UL listed and FM approved and shall have
fusible links rated at 155F - 165F unless otherwise noted. In T-bar ceiling areas, fire sprinkler
heads shall be semi-recessed and the color white. In all gypboard ceiling areas, concealed type
and the color white. In areas where there are no finished ceilings, upright or pendent type
shall be provided as required to suit installation. Coordinate with the University’s
Representative before fabrication as to the type and location of sprinkler heads in finished
areas. All heads shall be centered in ceiling tiles in both directions where possible, centered in
one direction minimum.
D. Sprinkler head guards to be provided at areas subject to physical damage.
FIRE SUPPRESSION
02/25/2020 Section 21 10 00- 2
E. The sprinkler system drainage piping shall be specified as galvanized steel pipe with galvanized
threaded malleable iron fittings.
F. Furnish and install a hinged chrome plated escutcheon at any visible wall, floor, and ceiling
pipe penetrations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspections: All fire protection systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of the 2016 CFC and University’s Fire Marshal.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the University’s Representative.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
C. Shop Drawings: Coordinate all space requirements with the Contractor. Shop drawings are to
indicate desired location and arrangement of piping, equipment and other items, and are to be
followed as closely as possible.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to all requirements of the 2016 CBC, CFC, and the University’s Fire Marshal.
B. Attention is called when air conditioning, plumbing and electrical systems are installed in
locations adjacent to sprinkler system piping. Contractor shall coordinate all work on site to
avoid interference. Work specified shall be installed and arranged as approved in a
satisfactory manner. Check conditions at site and examine pertinent drawings before
preparing working drawings. Take measurements for this work, verify drawings of other
trades and be responsible for proper installation in available space.
C. Sleeves: All sleeves in concealed and exterior walls shall be 20 gauge galvanized iron 1 inch
O.D. larger than the pipe, caulked if below grade in a moisture- proof manner. All pipes
penetrating through fire walls and floors shall be properly safed with Dow-Corning 3-6548
silicone RTV Foam or equal. Install per Fire Marshal and manufacturer's directions.
D. Tests: Test systems in accordance with NFPA #13 and #14, State Fire Marshal requirements.
Attention is called to NFPA pamphlets 13 and 14 requiring flushing and testing in the presence
of a witness acceptable to the University’s Fire Marshal before admitting water to overhead
sprinkler piping.
E. Certification: Upon completion, contractor and University's Representative shall jointly inspect
work of this section. Contractor shall furnish a written certification to the University’s
Representative that installed materials and workmanship conform to specifications.
FIRE SUPPRESSION
02/25/2020 Section 21 10 00- 3
F. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of sprinkler head layout.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
5. Start and run air compressors.
6. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, “Systems Acceptance”
Chapter.
7. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to the University’s Representative.
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
END OF SECTION
FIRE SUPPRESSION
02/25/2020 Section 21 10 00- 4
SECTION 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Fire-department connections.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Manual control stations.
7. Control panels.
8. Pressure gages.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Relocating sprinkler heads and re-routing pipe work as necessary to meet the remodeled
space for CHS 14-215 Center for Employee Health Renovation.
A. Installer Qualifications
1. The work of this section shall be performed by a company which specializes in the type
of wet-pipes sprinkler systems work required for this Project, with a minimum of 10
years of documented successful experience and shall be performed by skilled
workmen thoroughly experienced in the necessary crafts.
B. Work shall be performed in compliance with the University’s insurance underwriters'

requirements, and UL approvals and testing for materials, assemblies and procedures.
C. Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing the type of wet-pipes sprinkler systems

specified in this section, with a minimum of 10 years of documented successful experience and
have the facilities capable of meeting all requirements of Contract Documents as a single-
source responsibility and warranty.
D. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing sprinkler systems and furnishing
professional engineering design (on a deferred approval basis) services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engineer
E. Proof of qualification for California registered Professional Engineer designing system.
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 1
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
H. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and
Including Four Stories in Height."
3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
I. Manufacturer’s identification tags or marks are not acceptable on surfaces which will remain
exposed to view after installation.
1. Evidence of “patching” after removal of tags or marks is not acceptable.
A. Submit the following according to Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and provided specialties and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping.
2. Compressed air piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.
4. Lab vacuum
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, manufacturer and professional engineer.
G. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have
been approved by the University’s Campus Fire Marshal, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 2
H. Welding certificates.
I. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
J. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
K. Field quality-control reports.
L. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
M. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial
Completion, Contractor shall certify in writing that products and materials installed, and
processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB).
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than 300 psig.
B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175 psig maximum.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
A. Comply with General Conditions and Division 1.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Comply with General Conditions and Division 1 “Close out submittals”.
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
B. High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 300-psig working pressure.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by the University’s Campus Fire Marshal.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 3
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
e. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
f. Restaurant Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
g. Lab Spaces : Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
d. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by the University’s Campus Fire
Marshal.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Office Spaces: unfinished space 120 sq. ft. (11.1 sq. m), finish space 225 sq. ft.
(20.9 sq. m).
b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise
indicated.
6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Refer to Division 1 section 011400 “Work

Restrictions”. Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by University before
arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with works specified in other sections that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNAUTHORIZED MATERIALS
A. Materials and product required for work of this section shall not contain asbestos,
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or other hazardous materials identified by the University.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 4
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the manufacturers specified in this section establish the minimum functional,
aesthetic and quality standards required for work of this section.
B. Substitutions: Comply with Division 1 Section 012513 “Product Substitution Procedures”.
2.3 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory
or field formed to match joining method.
B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless
steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
D. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Ductile Iron Joints: UL Listed, Rated at 250 PSI for 2-1/2” and smaller.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following manufacturers:
a. Victaulic Company.
b. Or Equal.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
3. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.
4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing
sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
K. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing,
rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 5
b. Or Equal.
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.6 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 300 psig.
B. Valves in first paragraph below are available in NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller.
C. Ball Valves:
b. Or Equal.
2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body
with grooved ends.
5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
D. Bronze Butterfly Valves:

a. Fivalco Inc.
b. Or Equal.
2. Standard: UL 1091.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.
4. Body Material: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Threaded.
E. Valves in first paragraph below are available in NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 6
F. Iron Butterfly Valves:

b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. Style: Lug or wafer.
6. End Connections: Grooved.
G. Valves in first paragraph below are available in NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger.
H. Check Valves:
a. Viking Corporation.
b. Or Equal.
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material: Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
I. Valves in first paragraph below are available in NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
J. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:

a. NIBCO INC.
b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Threaded.
K. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:

b. Or Equal.
4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 7
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch
indicating device.
2.7 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global, listing.
B. Angle Valves:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. Or Equal.
C. Ball Valves:
b. Or Equal.
D. Globe Valves:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. Or Equal.
E. Plug Valves:
a. Southern Manufacturing Group.
b. Or Equal.
2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.
b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2.9 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 8
b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required
to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:

b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test
valve.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C. Branch Line Testers:

a. Potter Roemer.
b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Brass.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:

b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 9

a. CECA, LLC.
b. Or Equal.
4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
6. Length: Adjustable.
F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:

a. Fivalco Inc.
b. Or Equal.
3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to
ceiling grid.
5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
a. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
b. Or Equal.
B. General Requirements:
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
3. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.
2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
3. Residential Applications: UL 1626.
4. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
D. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Characteristics:
a. Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Nominal 17/32-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
E. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 10
3. Painted.
F. Special Coatings:
1. Wax.
2. Lead.
3. Corrosion-resistant paint.
G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece; flat Chrome-plated steel, two
piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment or Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel or Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.
H. Sprinkler Guards:
b. Or Equal.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.11 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
a. ADT Security Services, Inc.
b. Or Equal.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-
adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends
signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
C. Pressure Switches:
b. Or Equal
3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 11
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
D. Valve Supervisory Switches:

a. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
b. Or Equal.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.12 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated,

including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries;
field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell;
lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A
detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc
rechargeable batteries.
2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL
CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable
strut to prevent accidental opening.
3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and
bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with
operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental
opening.
2.13 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Provide products by the following manufacturers:

1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.
2. Or Equal.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
2.14 CABINETS
A. Sprinkler Control Valve Cabinets

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 12

a. Potter Roemer Fire Pro
b. Or Equal
2. Trim: Recessed
3. Material: 20 Gauge Box
B. Fire Hose Valve Cabinet

a. Potter Roemer Fire Pro
b. Or Equal
2. Mounting: Recessed(inside building) or Trimless(outside building)
3. Door: ANSI#Z97.1-1984
4. FM Approval
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Contractor to perform fire hydrant flow tests, according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291, of the site
water main in the presence of the University’s Fire Marshal, that in order to determine the
design criteria for the sprinkler system. The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary
for the testing, including control of the discharged water. Use results for system design
calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from the
University’s Representative. File written approval with University’s Representative
before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device
materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 13
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when
sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to
drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and
spill over floor drain or to outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Branches 2-1/2” and smaller shall be sway
braced and ends of all branches less than 2-1/2” inches shall utilize a splayed seismic brace
wire.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
N. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.
O. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 14
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
G. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
H. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING
A. Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to
manufacturer's "Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R for supports.
3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,
and specialties according to NFPA 13 and the University’s Campus Fire Marshal.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Install double check valve in each fire protection water-supply connection. Install backflow
preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main
supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main
supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections,
ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 15
C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling
grid.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
7. Use Bristol recording device
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-maintenance pumps.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 and smaller:

1. Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, ductile-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 3 and larger:

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 16
1. Schedule 40, ASTM A53, black-steel pipe with grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel
piping; and grooved joints.
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry
sprinklers as indicated.
5. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers
where indicated.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
4. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where
exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 21 13 13- 17
SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Painting and finishing.
9. Concrete bases.
10. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 1
3. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 2
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div., or equal.
2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics, or equal.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent

dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 3
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc., or equal.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass
end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO Inc., or equal.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. or equal.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc., or equal.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg. F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thunderline Link Seal, or equal.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 4
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates
to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 6
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 7
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7
Section "Thermal and Moisture Protection" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 8
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 9
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic requirements at project per the 2016 CBC.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 00- 10
SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Bronze ball valves.
2. Bronze check valves.
3. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.
4. Cast-iron plug valves.
5. Resilient-seated, cast-iron, eccentric plug valves.

1. Division 21 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves.
2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags
and charts.
3. Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. NRS: Nonrising stem.
4. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories.
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.
B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 1
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
C. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the
"Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive Operator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish University with 1 wrench for every
10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 2
G. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following
features:
1. Gate Valves: Shall be rising-stem type.

2. Ball Valves: Shall have extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material,
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation, and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is
applied. Valves installed in reclaimed water systems shall have locking handle feature.
a. Product: NIBCO Nib-seal handle extension or product by one of the following:
1) Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div., or equal.
3. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
J. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg. F for angle, check, gate, and
globe valves; below 421 deg. F for ball valves.
K. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
L. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2 SPRING-LOADED, CENTER-GUIDED LIFT-DISC, IRON CHECK VALVES
A. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1 and MIL-V-18436F, with spring-loaded, center-guided
bronze disc and seat.
B. Class 125, Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron body with diameter made
to fit within bolt circle, and having 200 psig CWP rating.
1. Product: NIBCO Model W-910-B, or product by one of the following:
a. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.,
b. or equal.
C. Class 125, Globe, Flanged Lift-Disc Check Valves: Globe style with cast-iron body and flanged
ends, and having 200 psig CWP rating.
1. Product: NIBCO Model F-910-B, or product by one of the following:
a. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.,
b. or equal.
2.3 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with malleable-iron handwheel.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 3
B. Class 125, Bronze-Alloy Disc, Bronze Globe Valves: ASTM B-62 bronze body, bonnet, seat, and
disc, copper-silicone bronze stem, screw-in bonnet, soldered or threaded end connections;
and having 200 psig CWP rating.
1. Product: NIBCO Model S-211-B or T-211-B, or product by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves, or equal.
b. Class 150, Bronze-Alloy Disc, Bronze Globe Valves: ASTM B-62 bronze body,
bonnet, seat, and disc, copper-silicone bronze stem, union-ring bonnet, soldered
or threaded end connections; and having 300 psig CWP rating.
2. Product: NIBCO Model S-235-B or T-235-B, or product by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves,
b. or equal.
C. Class 125, TFE Disc, Bronze Globe Valves: ASTM B-62 bronze body, bonnet, and seat, TFE disc,
copper-silicone bronze stem, screw-in bonnet, soldered or threaded end connections; and
having 200 psig CWP rating.
1. Product: NIBCO Model S-211-Y or T-211-Y, or product by one of the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves,
b. or equal.
2.4 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:
a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.,
b. or equal.
2. Non-lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:
a. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls,
b. or equal.
B. Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.
C. Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.
D. Class 250 or 300, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.
E. Class 125 or 150, non-lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.
F. Class 250, non-lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.
2.5 RESILIENT-SEATED, CAST-IRON, ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.,

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 4
2. or equal.
B. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Design similar to
MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig minimum CWP rating.
1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: MSS SP-108, and rated for
175-psig minimum CWP rating.
1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully opened to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc or dual-plate check valves; lever and weight
swing check valves; or lever and spring swing check valves.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 5
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 150, with TFE disc, bronze.
2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125, cast iron.
3. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Three -piece, full port, stainless-steel trim, bronze.
4. Ball Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: Split body, flanged, carbon steel, stainless steel ball.
5. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 150, bronze with TFE disc.
6. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125, cast-iron, standard.
7. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted, cast iron.
8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 150, TFE disc, bronze.
9. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125, cast iron.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Butterfly valves may be
installed with stem horizontal to allow support for the disc and the cleaning action of the disc.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 84 inches above floor.
Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
H. Butterfly valves shall be installed with stems horizontal.
I. Shut-off valves installed in reclaimed water system shall have locking handle feature.
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 6
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 23- 7
SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Equipment supports.

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 21 Section "Fire Suppression" for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping.
3. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping" for vibration
isolation devices.
4. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts".
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
4. Pipe positioning systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 1
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
4. Grinnell Corp.
5. Tolco Inc.
6. Or equal.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 2
2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet

metal shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
2. Pipe Shields, Inc.
3. Or equal.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Or equal.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
d. Or equal
2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 3
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel

shapes.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
3. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non-
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS
20.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 4
1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
L. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
M. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
N. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 5
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
for plumbing fixtures.
H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-
1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 6
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 7
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 29- 8
SECTION 22 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
4. Housed spring mounts.
5. Elastomeric hangers.
6. Spring hangers.
7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
8. Thrust limits.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Seismic snubbers.
12. Restraining cables.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a California registered professional engineer. Include
the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loads.
4. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and
snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of
penetration of anchors.
5. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch
deflection in x, y, and z planes.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 1
D. ir-Mounting System Performance Certification: Include natural frequency, load, and damping
tests performed by an independent laboratory or acoustician.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified

equipment will withstand seismic forces and be capable of supporting combined operating
weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
A. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis
performed, and shall be UL listed and FM approved. Ratings based on independent testing are
preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and
tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified
professional engineer that is registered in California. Testing and calculations must include
both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
-Steel."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 2
2. M.W. Sausse.
3. Or equal.
B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene.
C. Elastomeric Mounts Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and
with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity
range.
D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts: All-directional elastomeric mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded,

bridge-bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment
bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for
bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100
psig.
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,
elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 3
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.
2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before contacting
a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene

isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-
code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-
reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
K. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to
equipment.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 4

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel and
neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design
support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all
directions.
M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of

1/2-inch- thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to allow
vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and re-
insertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet
location requirements.
2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. M.W. Sausse
4. TOLCO Incorporated.
5. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.
6. Or equal.
B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene

complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 60, plus or minus 5, with a flat
washer face.
C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 60, plus or minus 5.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 5
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Manufacturers:
2. M.W. Sausse.
3. Or equal.
B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
C. Powder coating on springs and housings.

1. All hardware shall be electro galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for
exterior use.
2. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
3. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate
capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 6
A. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
B. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to

vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to
hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle
piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to
rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to
assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Upon completion of the installation
and after the system is put into operation, furnish the services of the manufacturer, or his
representative, to make a final inspection. Submit vibration seismic control report to the
University’s Representative in writing, certifying the correctness of installation and compliance
with approved submittal data.
B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
2. Isolator deflection.
3. Snubber minimum clearances.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operation.
C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement
during start and stop.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 7
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to

resist seismic forces.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control

devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 48- 8
SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Pipe markers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system in addition to mounted copies that are included in
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating

service, and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 53- 1
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions;
or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe label locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in
finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and
plenums, and exterior exposed locations as follows;
1. At access doors, manhole, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
2. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
3. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals including pipes
where flow is allowed in both directions.
B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including
pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping
a. Background: Safety Green
b. Letter Colors: White
2. Sanitary Waste Piping:
a. Background: Safety Black
b. Letter Colors: White
D. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
work specified in other sections.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/25/2020 Section 22 05 53- 2
SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Sealants.
5. Factory-applied jackets.
6. Field-applied jackets.
7. Tapes.
8. Securements.
9. Protective
1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness,
and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to the University’s
Representative indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the University’s Representative. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers,
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 1
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports For Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area
of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of
less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534. Type I for tubular materials.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 2
1. Products: Provide products by one of the following:

a. Aeroflex
b. Armacell LLC
c. Or equal
G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
d. Or equal.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82, or equal.
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A
for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, subpart D (EPA Method 24)
2.4 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Provide one
of the following:
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 3

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8, or equal.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Jacket:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems, or equal.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-
14.
a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
b. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
2.7 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 4
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
e. Or Equal.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827, or equal.
2. Width: 3 inches.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800, or equal.
2. Width: 2 inches.
2.8 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
a. Childers Products; Bands, or equal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to
accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shield Pipe Covers:

a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc; PRO-EXTREME.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 5
b. Truebro
c. Or Equal
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain
2.10 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact
with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 6
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 7
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate

insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet
to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at
6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 8
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for
access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches
o.c. and at end joints.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by the University’s Representative. Vary first and second coats
to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.7 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 9
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Fire-suppression piping.
2. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
3.8 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field-applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water (where heat tracing is installed)

1. NPS 1 and smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Material: Mineral-fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I
b. Thickness: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot Water amd recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1 and smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Material: Mineral-fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I
C. Condensate Drain Piping:

1. NPS 3/4 and smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Material: Flexible Elastomeric, Closed-Cell Foam Pipe Insulation, Type I
D. Exposed sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Ho0t Water, and Stops for Plumbing
fixtures for People with Disabilities:
1. Provide Protective ADA Shielding Guards as specified herein.
3.10 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
1. Piping, Concealed:
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 10
a. None
2. Piping, Exposed:
a. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.020 inch thick
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 22 07 00- 11
SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.

1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic,
potable domestic water piping and components.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 1
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1) Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

a) Jomar Valve.
b) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
c) Wilkins.
d) Zurn Industries, LLC; Model DUXLM.
e) Or equal
2) Standard: ASSE 1079.
3) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1) Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

a) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
b) Wilkins.
c) Zurn Industries, LLC; Model DUXLC.
d) Or equal
2) Standard: ASSE 1079.
3) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
4) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
5) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2.4 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping".
B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties".

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D. Domestic Water Piping inside the Building: Use the following piping materials for each size
range:
E. Under-Building-Slab, (allowed only at areas as indicated on the drawings), Domestic Water,

Trap primer Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 1 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type
K.
F. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
G. Non-Potable-Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 3-1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron
butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-
iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated, Memory-stop balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Cast-iron, grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing
fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 3
D. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge
side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but
not stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Specialties".
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing".
B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing".
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing".
E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping", and drain valves and strainers
are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties".
F. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators

are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties".
G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing".
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing,

gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 4
3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and

tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration & Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping".
B. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment". Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
A. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
B. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment"
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
F. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
G. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 5
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures".
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by the University’s Representative.
2. During installation, notify the University’s Representative at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the University’s
Representative:
A. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
B. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for the University’s Representative to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Re-inspection: If the University’s Representative find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the University’s
Representative.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Static pressure
shall be documented using a Bristol pressure recording device with download capability.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that
must be repaired.

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 6
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
A. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping
to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
B. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Disinfection of Domestic and Hot/Cold Water Systems and Fire Lines.

1. General: All newly installed water systems and lines shall be disinfected by a Contractor-
furnished commercial water line chlorinator. The commercial chlorinator shall also take
water samples for bacteriological analysis. These samples shall be submitted to a
California state licensed testing laboratory by the Contractor.
2. Incurred Costs: All expenses that may result from the disinfection and testing of water
systems and lines, and the taking and analysis of water samples shall be borne by
Contractor.
3. Advance Notice: Contractor shall notify University’s Representative and the UCLA Office
of Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S), at least 72 hours in advance of all
disinfection and testing procedures. All disinfection and testing procedures shall occur
in the presence of an EH&S representative. Notification shall include location, number
of chlorinations and tests, day and time.
4. Labor and Materials: Contractor’s chlorinator shall furnish labor, equipment, materials
and transportation needed to correctly disinfect and test domestic and laboratory
hot/cold water systems and fire lines and to take water samples for bacteriological
analysis. This includes all items needed to facilitate the introduction of the disinfecting
agent into the water systems/lines such as service cooks and valves.
5. Disinfecting Agents: Chlorine is approved for water system disinfection and may be used
in gaseous or liquid form. Other types of disinfecting agents may be used only with the
prior approval of University’s Representative.
6. Disinfecting Procedure: The disinfection of water systems and lines shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Title 22, California Code of Regulations (CCR) and

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 7
the American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards. The disinfecting procedure
shall include the following:
A. Post signs on all water outlets of the system being disinfected reading “Water
System Being Chlorinated – Do Not Drink” or similar warning.
B. With system full of water and under “main” pressure, open all faucets to permit
simultaneous trickle flow.
C. Introduce the disinfectant into the system until a test of the water at each outlet
shows a free chlorine residual concentration of:
1) 50 parts per million (ppm). This chlorine concentration shall be held in the
pipes for a 24 hour period; or
2) 100 ppm. This chlorine concentration shall be held in the pipes for a 3-
hour period.
D. The test made of the water after the retention time shall indicate a chlorine
residual concentration of not less than half of the original concentration. Repeat
the disinfection procedure until this standard is attained.
E. After satisfactory completion of the above test, flush out system until diethyl-p-
phenylenediamine (DPD) tests at the water outlets reveal that the free chlorine
residual is less than 0.5 ppm or equal to the flushing water chlorine residual.
7. Water samples for Bacteriological Analysis:
A. Water samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected by Contractor’s
chlorinator in sample bottles prepared as required by Title 22, CCR and AWWA
standards. Samples shall be taken from a representative number of water outlets
so as to ensure an accurate sampling of the water system/line.
B. Water samples shall be taken in the presence of an EH&S representative
(University may also collect a sample).
C. The water samples shall be delivered by Contractor’s chlorinator in a timely
manner to a California state approved water analysis laboratory. The samples
must test negative for coliform organisms and less than 500 for a Standard Plate
Count (HPLC).
D. If the results are positive, the above steps 6(a) through 6(f) shall be repeated.
Two consecutive negative tests must be obtained prior to using the water system.
8. Final Results: Submit a copy of the laboratory bacteriological analysis results to the
University’s Representative and EH&S. If the analysis results do not meet the standards
specified, the disinfecting procedure shall be repeated until the specified standards are
met, at no additional cost to University. The complete procedure may take up to 4 days
if negative results are obtained. This procedure will be longer if the results are positive.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 11 16- 8
SECTION 22 11 19 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

1. Backflow preventers.
2. Drain valves.
3. Flashing materials.
4. Cleanouts.
5. Floor drains.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125 psig.
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate
materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;
and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.
3. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
4. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations.
5. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
6. Backwater valves, cleanouts, floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof
drains.
7. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
8. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.
2. Water filters.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 1
3. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated.
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the University’s Representative, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials
and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water
piping and "NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cla-Val Co.
2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
3. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
4. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
5. Or equal.
B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow
preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
3. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
4. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
C. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 2
inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting
located between two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
2.2 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 3/4
threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet and cap. Hose
bibbs are prohibited for this application.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or
MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side drain outlet and
cap.
2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 3
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. For cast-iron soil pipe, iron body with extra heavy bronze plugs screwed into caulking ferrules;
for steel pipe, extra heavy bronze plugs; and for vitrified clay pipe, vitrified clay plugs. Where
cleanouts occur in finished interior walls, provide access panels, plates, and frames for flush
mounting. Exposed parts of floor cleanouts shall have adjustable top. All cleanouts and
cleanout plugs shall be accessible. Cleanout shall be the following:
1. In finished floors: Cast-iron with polished nickel bronze round top, non-skid diamond
tread set flush with the floor. Provide with carpet marker when located in future
carpeted areas and flashing flange when used with waterproofing membrane.
a. Smith - 4023
b. Wade - W-6000
c. Zurn - ZN-1420-2
d. Mifab – C-1100-R.
e. Or equal.
2. In walls: Cleanout tee with squared polished nickel bronze access plate with
vandalproof screws and frames. Opening 8x8 in. minimum.
a. Smith - 4558-U
b. Wade - W-8460-S
c. Zurn - ZN-1447
d. Mifab – C-1460-S.
e. Or equal.
2.5 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Smith
2. Zurn
3. Josam.
4. Or equal.
B. Floor Drain (FD-1): Foot traffic. Cast-iron double drainage drain with clamping flange, bottom
outlet and 5 in. square polished nickel bronze adjustable strainer and trap primer tapping.
Smith 2005-B or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 4
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to
or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.
E. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
F. Install cleanouts in building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
G. Install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping
below floors.
H. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
I. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
J. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained as indicated on the
architectural drawings. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 5
L. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
M. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
N. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing

specialties.
O. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer
to Division 22 Section "General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty ball,
butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 26
Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 6
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings.
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems and interceptors.
END OF SECTION
02/25/2020 Section 22 11 19- 7
SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be
capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to the SMCNA
Guidelines.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-DWV" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.2 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 1
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1540 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant

fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated
shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
A. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Fernco, Inc.
3) Mission Rubber Co.
4) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
5) Husky Technologies.
6) Or equal.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-
steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
A. Manufacturers:
1) ANACO.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3) Mission Rubber Co.
4) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
5) Husky Technologies.
6) Or equal.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron
housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
A. Manufacturers:
1) MG Piping Products Co.,
2) or equal.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder-joint fittings.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (condensate only), water tube, drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,
metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 2
2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
1. General requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of
different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be
joined.
2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
3. Shielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Provide Products by one of the following:
1) Cascade Waterworks MFG. Co.
2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP industry
3) Or equal
b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.
c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer
shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
4. Dielectric Fittings:
a. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be
joined.
.5 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, cross laminated PE film of 0.004-inch
minimum thickness.
B. Form: Sheet.
C. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Above ground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy duty ASTM C1540, shielded, stainless-steel
couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
2. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for
joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 3
C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings;
and hubless-coupling joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
D. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Rigid, unshielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for
joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22

Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Plumbing Piping."
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
D. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-
turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by
side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.
Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers
and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in
direction of flow is prohibited.
F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull
past each joint as completed.
G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 4
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
H. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with requirements of the 2016 CPC.
I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
J. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
K. Install underground ABS soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by the
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing".
B. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Plumbing Piping".
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment". Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
A. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
B. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 5
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
H. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet.
I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
K. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by the 2016 CPC.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by the 2016 CPC.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by the 2016 CPC.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
and larger.

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 6
A. During installation, notify the University’s Representative at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the University’s Representative.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the University’s Representative to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If the University’s Representative finds that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the University’s Representative.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug
vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air
into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in
trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant
without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing
fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 7
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 22 13 16- 8
SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This section specified plumbing fixtures and trim. The types of fixtures specified include the
following:
1. Fittings, trim and accessories
2. Sinks and Lavatories
3. Water Closets
4. Faucets
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Electrical requirements for mechanical equipment, and other plumbing equipment are
specified in other sections of Division 26.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet, specialties,
accessories, and trim specified.
B. Submit rough-in shop drawings. Detail dimensions, rough in requirements, required

clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate
requirements of Architectural Woodwork shop drawings for fixtures installed in countertops
and cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop.
C. Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for power supply to units.
Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and field installed
portions.
D. Include data in maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
E. Quality control submittals:

1. Submit certification of compliance with specified ANSI, UL and ASHRAE standards.
2. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified
in this section.
A. Codes and standards:

1. ANSI Standard A117.1: "Specifications for making buildings and facilities accessible to
and usable by physically handicapped people".
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 1
2. Public Law 101-336: "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA-1992)"
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store fixtures where environmental conditions are uniformly maintained within the
manufacturer's recommended temperatures to prevent damage.
B. Store fixtures and trim in manufacturer's original shipping containers. Do not stack containers
or store in such a manner that may cause damage to the fixture or trim.
1.6 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule rough in installations with the installation of other building components. Contractor
shall coordinate work specified herein with work specified in other sections as approved by the
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim
to University with receipt in a quantity of one device for each 10 fixtures.
B. Furnish faucet repair kits, complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainer packings,
O-rings, sleeves, and seats in a quantity of 1 kit for each 40 faucets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR MOUNTED, BOTTOM OUTLET WATER CLOSETS
A. Water closets (WC-1): floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.

1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following
a. American Standard
b. Or equal
2. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5

b. Material: Vitreous China
c. Type: Syphon Jet
d. Style: Flushometer Valve
e. Height: handicapped/elderly, complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1
f. Rim Contour: Elongated
g. Water Consumption: 1.28 Gal per flush
h. Spud Size and location: NPS 1-1/2; top
i. Color: White
3. Bowl to drain connecting fitting: ASTM A 1045 or ASME A112.4.3
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 2
4. Flushometer Valve: see section 2.2

5. Toilet Seat: Se section 2.3.
2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES:
A. Hardwired, solenoid-actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves:
a. American standard
b. Sloan Valve
c. Or equal
2. Standard: ASSE 1037.

3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 PSIG
4. Features: include integral check stop and backflow prevention device
5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components
6. Exposed flushometer valve finish: chrome plated
7. Panel finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel
8. Style: Exposed
9. Actuator: solenoid complying with UL 1951, and lusted and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
10. Trip Mechanism: hard wired electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
11. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush
12. Minimum inlet: NPS 1
13. Minimum outlet: NPS 1-1/4
2.3 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
a. Olsonite
b. Or equal
2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5

3. Material: Plastic
4. Type: Commercial (Heavy Duty)
5. Shape: Elongated rom, open front
6. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check
7. Hinge material: Noncorroding metal.
8. Seat Cover: not required.
9. Color: White
2.4 NON-VITREOUS CHINA, WALL MOUNTED LAVATORIES
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 3
A. Lavatory (L-1): Ceramic, wall mounted with back.
a. WS Bath
b. Or equal
2. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1

b. Type: For wall Hanging
c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 23.4 inches x 17 inches
d. Faucet Hole Punching: one hole
e. Faucet hole location: Top
f. Color: White
g. Mounting material: for concealed arm carrier
3. Faucet see section 2.5

4. Support: type II, concealed arm lavatory carrier. Include rectangular, steel uprights.
5. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1
2.5 COMMERCIAL SINKS
A. Exam Room Sink (S-1): Acrylic Resin, single compartment, counter mount.
a. Wilson Art
b. Or equal
2. Fixture:

b. Type: Counter mount
c. Number of compartments: One
d. Overall Dimensions: 17 by 15 3/8 by 5 1/4 D inches
e. Faucet: See (S-1) under section 2.5 Sink Faucets
B. Med Sink (S-2): Stainless Steel, single compartment, counter mount.
a. Just Manufacturing
b. Or equal
2. Fixture:

PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 4

d. Overall Dimensions: 17 by 15 3/8 by 5 1/4 D inches
e. Thickness: .050 inch
f. Compartment
1) Dimensions:
2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper
3) Drain location: rear center in compartment
g. Faucet: See (S-2) under section 2.5 Sink Faucets
C. Kitchen Sink (KS-1): Acrylic Resin, single compartment, counter mount.
a. Wilson Art
b. Or equal
2. Fixture:

d. Overall Dimensions: 28 1/4 by 18 by 9 7/8 D inches
e. Faucet: See (KS-1) under section 2.5 Sink Faucet.
2.6 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, “Drinking water system components health
effects,” for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Lavatory Faucets (L-1): Automatic type, hard wired, electronic sensor operated, mixing, solid
brass valve.

a. Chicago Faucets
b. Sloan Valve
c. Or equal
2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.

3. Electrical Components, devices, and accessories: listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
4. General: Include hot and cold water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
5. Body type: Single hole
6. Body material: commercial, solid brass
7. Finish: Polished chrome plate
8. Maximum flow water: 0.5 GPM
9. Handle(s): not applicable
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 5
10. Mounting type: Deck, exposed

11. Spout: Rigid, gooseneck type.
12. Spout outlet: Laminar flow
13. Drain: not part of faucet
C. Exam and Med Sinks (S-1) and (S-2): Automatic type, hard wired, electronic sensor activated,
single control mixing valve.
1. Commercial Solid brass faucets

a. Chicago faucets
b. Sloan Valve
c. Or equal
3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1

4. General: include hot and cold water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings: coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.
5. Body type: Single Hole
6. Body Material: Commercial, Solid Brass
7. Finish: Chrome plated
8. Maximum flow rate: 1.5 GPM
9. Handle(s): not applicable
11. Spout type: Rigid, solid brass
12. Vacuum breaker: not required
13. Spout outlet: Laminar flow.
D. Kitchen Faucets (KS-1): Automatic type, hard wired, electronic sensor operated, mixing, solid
brass valve.
a. Chicago Faucets
b. Sloan Valve
c. Or equal
2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.

3. General: Include hot and cold water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
4. Body type: Three hole, 8 inch on centers
5. Body material: commercial, solid brass
6. Finish: Polished chrome plate
7. Maximum flow water: 1.5 GPM
8. Handle(s): 4 inch wristblades
10. Spout: Rigid, gooseneck type.
11. Spout outlet: Laminar flow
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 6
12. Drain: not part of faucet
2.7 FIXTURES
A. Plumbing fixture trim and exposed supplied and wastes are to be brass with polished
chromium plated finish unless otherwise specified. Provide individual loose key or screwdriver
stops for all fixture supplies. Separately trap all wastes. Furnish chrome plated wall
escutcheons for all exposed supplied and trap arms. Locate stops below fixtures or
countertops. All fixtures for use by the handicapped shall have exposed hot water pipe and
tailpiece and trap insulated with molded soft flexible anti-microbial PVC.
B. All plumbing fixture faucets submitted for review shall have identification label or certification
showing compliance with CCR. Title 24, Part 5, Article 1, "Energy Conservation Standards";
Article 1, T20-1406; Article 2, T20-1525 and Article 4, 1604, and 1606.
C. All lavatory and sink p-traps shall be chrome plates 17 gauge tubular brass treated with
Saniguard ionic silver anti microbial compound.
D. Fixtures shall be as scheduled in Part 2.1-2.6 of this section.
2.8 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Wall-Hung Fixtures: Fixtures specified with hangers or supporting arms shall have hangers or
arms securely mounted on a 1/4 in. thick by 6 in. wide steel wall plate which extends at least
one stud beyond first and last fixture mounting points, or a total of three studs minimum.
Attach wall plate to each structural stud it crosses by tack welding each side of stud flange at
top and bottom of plate. Fixture or supporting arms shall be securely and firmly attached to
steel wall plate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If structural studs are not
being installed behind wall-hung fixtures, notify the University’s Representative immediately.
2.9 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Select one of the two options below:

1. Chrome plated cast brass with set screw.
2. Chrome plated sheet metal steel with friction clips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed
in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced
standards.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 7
B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
C. Examine walls, floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written
instructions, rough in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and
the referenced standards.
B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 101-336 with respect
to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind of
within wall construction to provide rigid installation.
D. Set shower receptor and mop basins in a leveling bed of cement grout.
E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.
F. Install chrome plated brass escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed
finished locations and with cabinets and millwork.
G. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
H. Provide abrasive washers under all single drilling deck mounted trim.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS
A. Install trap primers with piping pitched toward drain trap, minimum of 1/8" per foot (1%).
Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units
are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow and
stream.
B. Replace washers or leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 8
C. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers and trim.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by the
3.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS SCHEDULE
A. Fixture Mounting Height:

1. See Architectural drawings:
a. Lavatory or Sink
3.9 ROUGH IN FOR FIXTURES
A. Rough in for all fixture and/or equipment shown on any drawings, including the architectural
drawings, which forms a part of the contract documents. This shall include all fixtures and
equipment shown and/or noted as consultant planned, University furnished, contractor
installed, architect planned, contractor furnished and installed. Stub out all piping to the exact
location of the fixtures and set symmetrical with the fixture. Stub out for fixture supply pipes
with drop ell fittings secured to stud or backing plate. Stub out two pipe diameter and
terminate with pipe cap, and/or make final connections, including supply stops and P-traps as
required per manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES
02/25/2020 Section 22 40 00- 9
SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 Sections.
B. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required for completion of

tasks as indicated on drawing or in specification or as inherently necessary to
prepare spaces and systems for new installations as follows:
a. Testing, adjusting and balancing
1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings accompanying these Specifications show intent of Work to be done.

Specifications shall identify quality and grade of installation and where equipment and
hardware is not particularly specified, Contractor shall furnish submittals for all products
and install them per manufacturers’ recommendations, and in a first class manner.
B. Examine Drawings and Specifications for elements in connection with this Work;
determine existing and new general construction conditions and be familiar with all
limitations caused by such conditions.
C. Plans are intended to show general arrangement and extent of Work contemplated.
Exact location and arrangement of parts shall be determined after the University’s
Representative has reviewed equipment, as Work progresses, to conform in best possible
manner with surroundings, and as approved by the University’s Representative.
D. Contract Documents are in part diagrammatic and intended to show the scope and
general arrangement of the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall follow these
drawings in laying out the equipment, piping and ductwork. Drawings are not intended to
be scaled for roughing in measurements or to serve as shop drawings. Where job
conditions require minor changes or adjustments in the indicated locations or
arrangement of the Work, such changes shall be made without change in the Contract
amount.
E. Follow dimensions without regard to scale. Where no figures or notations are given, the
Plans shall be followed.
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 1
1.3 UTILITIES
A. Location and sizes of electrical, mechanical and plumbing service facilities are shown in
accordance with data secured from existing record drawings and site observations. Data
shown are offered as an estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. Check and
verify all data given and verify exact location of all utility services pertaining to Work prior
to excavation or performing Work.
1.4 APPLICABLE REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS
Comply with all applicable code requirements, including the following:
A. State of California Code of Regulations:
1. Title 8, Industrial Relations

2. Title 19, State Fire Marshal Regulations
3. Current California Building Code (CBC), Title 24, Part 2
4. Current California Electrical Code, Title 24, Part 3
5. Current California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4
6. Current California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5
7. Current California Energy Code, Title 24, Part 6
8. Current California Fire Code, Title 24, Part 9
9. Current California Standards Code, Title 24, Part 12
B. Additional Referenced Standards:
1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council

2. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
3. ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
4. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers
5. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
6. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
7. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
8. NFPA National Fire Protection Association Standards
9. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
10. UL Underwriters Laboratories
1.5 PROJECT AND SITE CONDITIONS
A. The arrangement of and connection to equipment shown on the Drawings is based upon
information available and is not intended to show exact dimensions peculiar to a specific
manufacturer. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and some features of the
illustrated equipment installations may require revision to meet actual equipment
installation requirements. Structural supports, housekeeping pads, piping connections

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 2
and adjacent equipment may have to be altered to accommodate the equipment

provided. No additional payment will be made for such revisions or alterations.
B. Examine site related work and surfaces before starting work of any Section.
C. Install Work in locations shown on approved Drawings, unless prevented by Project

conditions.
D. Prepare shop drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project

conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission
from the University’s Representative before proceeding.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH WORK UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Coordinate with work specified in other sections to facilitate general progress of Work.
B. Set pipe sleeves and inserts and verify that openings for chases and pipes are provided.
C. Coordinate with work specified in other sections to determine exact location of outlets,
pipes, and pieces of equipment to avoid interference with lines required to maintain
proper installation of Work.
1.7 DISCREPANCIES
A. The Contractor shall check all Drawings furnished him immediately upon their receipt and
shall promptly notify the University’s Representative of any discrepancies. Figures
marked on Drawings shall in general be followed in preference to scale measurements.
Piping and instrumentation diagrams shall in general govern floor plans and sections.
Large-scale drawings shall in general govern small-scale drawings.
1.8 CHANGES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible to make and obtain approval from the University’s
Representative for all necessary adjustments in piping and equipment layouts as required
to accommodate the relocations of equipment and/or devices, which are affected by any
approved authorized changes or Product substitutions. All changes shall be clearly
indicated on the "Record" drawings.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. IEQc2, Low Emitting Materials: Option 1, Product Category Calculations:

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 3
a. Adhesives & Sealants: For adhesives and sealants applied on site, furnish the
following:
1) Product Data indicating the Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content

in grams/Liter (g/L)
2) Volume of product used in Liters (L).
3) Emissions Testing Certificate
a) As per the California Department of Public Health (CDPH)

Standard Method v1.1-2010.
b. Thermal Insulation: For all insulation installed on site, furnish the following:


C. Contractor shall submit a written statement from manufacturer that certifies that the
submitted equipment, hardware or accessory complies with the requirement of that
particular specification section.
D. Have the manufacturer resubmit the specification section showing compliance with each
respective paragraph and specified items and features in that particular specification
section.
E. All exceptions shall be clearly identified by referencing respective paragraph and other
requirements along with proposed alternative.
F. Note that prior to acceptance of submittals for review, a submittal schedule shall be
submitted to the University’s Representative.
G. Submit all Division 23 shop drawings and product data grouped and referenced by the
specification technical section number in one complete submittal package.
H. Shop Drawings:
1. Include installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and

arrangement, accessories, piping, and other items that must be shown to assure a
coordinated installation.

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 4
2. Indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of

operating equipment devices.
3. If equipment is disapproved, revise drawings to show acceptable equipment and
resubmit.
4. Manufacturer's Data: For each manufactured item, furnish current manufacturer's
descriptive literature of cataloged products, certified equipment drawings,
diagrams, performance and characteristic curves if applicable, and catalog cuts.
5. Standard Compliance: When materials or equipment provided by the Contractor
must conform to the standards of organizations such as American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) or American Water Works Association (AWWA), submit
proof of such conformance to the University’s Representative for approval. If an
organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular
standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence, unless otherwise
specified. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent
testing organization, which is competent to perform acceptance testing and is
approved by the University’s Representative. The certificate shall state that the
item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods
and that the item conforms to the specified organization's standard.
6. Certified Test Reports: Before delivery of materials and equipment, certified copies
of all test reports specified in individual sections shall be submitted for approval.
7. Certificates of Compliance or Conformance: Submit manufacturer's certifications
as required on products, materials, finish, and equipment indicated in the technical
sections. Certifications shall be documents prepared specifically for this Contract.
Pre-printed certifications and copies of previously submitted documents will not be
acceptable. The manufacturer's certifications shall name the appropriate products,
equipment, or materials and the publication specified as controlling the quality of
that item. Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does
not meet requirements specified, such as "as good as"; or "achieve the same end
use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced
publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and performance of the specified
material." Certifications shall simply state that the item conforms to the
requirements specified. Certificates shall be printed on the manufacturer's
letterhead and shall be signed by the manufacturer's official authorized to sign
certificates of compliance or conformance.
1.10 PRODUCT ALTERNATIVES OR SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to General Conditions and Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.11 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 5
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
A. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, furnish digital copy of the recommendations prior to
installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are
received. Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the
equipment or material.
1.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements.
B. Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and with the requirements of NFPA 70B P, Appendix I,
titled "Equipment Storage and Maintenance During Construction." Replace damaged or
defective items with new items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not Applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORK RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of piping,

equipment, etc., and are to be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be
exercised in executing the work to secure the best possible installation in the available
space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference with
structural conditions.
B. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of Work and the proper location and
connection of Work in relation to the work of other trades. Advise appropriate trade as
to locations of access panels.
C. In the event changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary, due to
developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or
equipment, such changes shall be made without extra cost, providing the change is
ordered before the ductwork, piping, etc. and work directly connected to same is installed
and no extra materials are required.
D. Where equipment is furnished by others, verify dimensions and the correct locations of
this equipment before proceeding with the roughing-in of connections.

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 6
E. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class
indicated. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions,
sizes, etc. with the drawings to see that the equipment will fit into the spaces provided.
F. Should any changes to the Work indicated on the Drawings or described in the
Specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the
University’s Representative immediately and cease work on all parts of the contract,
which are affected until approval for any required modifications to the construction has
been obtained from the University’s Representative.
G. Be responsible for any cooperative work, which must be altered due to lack of proper
supervision or failure to make proper provisions in time. Such changes shall be as
approved by the University’s Representative and shall be made to his satisfaction.
Perform all Work with competent and skilled personnel.
H. All work, including aesthetic as well as mechanical aspects of the Work, shall be of the
highest quality consistent with the best practices of the trade.
I. Replace or repair, without additional compensation, any Work, which, in the opinion of
the University’s Representative, does not comply with these requirements.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 00 00- 7
SECTION 23 05 23 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ball valves.
1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC" for valve tags and schedules.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. IEQc2, Low Emitting Materials: Option 1, Product Category Calculations:
a. Adhesives & Sealants: For adhesives and sealants applied on site, furnish the
following:

2) Volume of product used in Liters (L).
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 23 - 1

b. Thermal Insulation: For all insulation installed on site, provide the following:


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and
design criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
a. Mueller Industries CycleMaster IBV

b. Or equal.
2. Description:
a. Maximum Pressures Rating: 775 psig.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 23 - 2
b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Port: Full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats
made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with
hinge pin level.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 23 - 3
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking
occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2” and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint
valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 23 - 4
SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
5. Fastener systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports shop drawing for piping and equipment in
accordance with CBC.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
2. Pipe positioning systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified California registered professional

engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
B. Seismic Engineering: Seismic bracing and support design, mounting hardware and
equipment, support systems, restraint systems, anchorage systems, and installation shall
conform to the CBC. Submit calculations, plans, and documents stamped by a qualified
California registered engineer.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 2
C. Structural Review: Seismic engineering submittal documents, seismic loads, anchorage

and support loads, and vertical loads applied to building structures and structural
components shall be reviewed, analyzed, and approved by the project structural engineer
of record.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to

Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and
support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. Tolco Inc.
3. Superstrut.
4. Or equal.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dip galvanized.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for
support of bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made
from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 3
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel

channels and other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit.
2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
3. Flex-Strut Inc.
4. GS Metals Corp.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Unistrut Corporation; Atkore International, Ltd.
7. Wesanco, Inc.
8. Or equal.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet

metal shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. Clement Support Services.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 4
3. ERICO International Corporation.
4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5. PHS Industries, Inc.
6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
10. Or equal
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100 psig
minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100 psig
minimum compressive strength.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: are prohibited except when executed in accordance with

Division 01.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated, except exterior or

corrosive environments shall be stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 5
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company.
e. Or equal.
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-

steel shapes.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 6
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of
insulation.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
5. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to
retain pipe.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 7
8. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base
stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
9. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
10. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
11. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
12. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
13. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in
addition to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 8
3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. Provide with retaining
bracket.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 9
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of wooden beams only.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by

manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 10
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
N. Use mechanical-expansion anchor attachments if concrete insert is not available in

concrete construction.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 11
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action
of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 12
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at
top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9
(for building services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping
and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 13
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
N. Hangers shall not be in direct contact with the pipe.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 14
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Section “Interior
Painting.”
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 29- 15
SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Vibration isolation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. Refer to Division 01 Section " Regulatory Requirements " for the list of applicable
regulatory requirements.
2. Refer to Division 23 Section "General Mechanical Requirements" for codes and

standards, vibration and noise, and other general requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 23 Section " General Mechanical Requirements " and
Division 01 Section "Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples."
B. Product Data:
1. Furnish specific information for items described under the products section of this
Specification, including specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and
descriptive literature, including make, model, dimensions, weight and interface
description with other work, and indicating full compliance with specifications as
outlined.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 1
2. An itemized list showing items to be isolated, the isolator type, model number,
isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specific drawing showing frame
construction where applicable.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate inertia bases and vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load
on each.
2. Drawings showing intended locations.
3. Drawings showing equipment frame construction for each machine, including

dimensions, structural member sizes, and support point locations.
4. Drawings showing methods for suspension, of support, and guides.
5. Drawings showing methods for isolation of piping, at penetrations of walls, slabs,

etc.
D. Maintenance and Operations Data: Submit manufacturer's certificate that isolators are
installed and adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for equipment at full-load
condition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mason, M.W. Sausse or equal Isolation equipment shall be supplied by a single

manufacturer. Model numbers given below are Mason's. Vibration isolation components
(isolators, snubbers, rails, and inertia bases) to be hot-dip galvanized. Welded steel
channel perimeter frame with welded-in reinforcing bars, prelocated welded-in anchor

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 2
bolts or prelocated bolt holes suitable for the number and size required, and height saving
brackets where required.
B. Type "A" Support From Below with Spring Isolators: Model SSLFH captive spring mount
for seismic and restrained service with leveling bolts, corrosion resistant finish, and 1/4
inches (6 mm) ribbed neoprene base pad. Provide optional baseplate with bolt holes
where required. Furnish vibration isolation products from a single manufacturer.
C. All vibration isolation components (isolators, snubbers and rails) to be hot-dip galvanized.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. General:
1. Metal parts of vibration-isolation units shall be as follows:
a. Housing: Hot-dipped galvanized and painted indoors. Galvanizing shall meet

ASTM Salt Spray test Standards and Federal Test Standard no. 14.
b. Hardware (washers, nuts, bolts, etc.): Cadmium plated.
c. Springs: Neoprene coated.
2. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the

Subcontractor's option, accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to
provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevation
during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation
advantages. Accessories shall not degrade the vibration isolation system.
3. Static deflection of isolators are indicated in Vibration Isolation Schedule. Static

deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under
actual load.
4. The use of nested springs or of multiple parallel springs within a single mount is not
permitted.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 3
B. Unit HS (Hanger Spring):
1. Vibration-isolation hangers shall consist of a free-standing laterally stable steel

spring set into a neoprene cup, contained within a steel housing. The neoprene
cup shall be manufactured with a grommet (or another element) to prevent the
hanger rod from contacting the hanger housing. A steel washer shall be provided
in the neoprene cup to evenly distribute load onto the neoprene.
2. The plate or washer at the top of the spring shall be welded to the spring. The
hanger rod shall be securely fastened to this plate or washer using lock nuts. The
hanger rod shall have a diameter not less than 5/8 inch. This design represents a
modification to the unit types given below. The modification is intended to limit
the side-to-side motion of the hanger rod relative to the hanger casing.
3. Spring diameter and hanger housing lower hole sizes shall be large enough to
permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting the
housing. Spring elements shall have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50
percent of the actual deflection.
4. Upper hanger rod attachment shall be made through a neoprene rubber-in-shear

element designed to avoid direct contact between the hanger rod and the isolator
frame.
5. Springs shall be color coded for ease of identification and removable, for field
connection.
6. Unit HS isolators shall be one of the following products or equal:
a. Type 30N (modified): M.I.
b. Type SH (modified): K.N.C.
c. Type RSH (modified): V.M.C.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 4
2.3 SNUBBERS
A. Snubbers to limit the vertical and horizontal motion of the isolated equipment shall be
fabricated from steel. A neoprene pad, 1/4-inch minimum thickness, shall be affixed at
the point of contact. There will be no contact between snubbers and the inertia base or
equipment support frame during normal operation. Minimum of one snubber per side,
four totals, shall be required on each base. Seismic snubbers shall have a minimum of
1.0G ratings and anchorages.
B. Snubbers shall not be finally installed until vibration isolators are in place and adjusted
with actual operating loads.
C. Model Z-1225 for installations within the maximum seismic load requirements consistent
with the manufacturer's recommendations, and Model Z-1011 for greater seismic load
requirements, manufactured by M.I., Model HS-4 manufactured by K.N.C., or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor is to obtain inspection of installation to be covered or enclosed prior to

such closure.
B. The Contractor is to obtain written and/or oral instructions from the vibration isolation
manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration isolation devices.
C. The Contractor is to correct, at no additional cost, installations which are deemed

defective in workmanship or materials.
D. The Contractor is responsible for proper operation of systems, minor sub-systems, and
services provided under this Section. The Contractor is to coordinate startup procedures,
calibration, and system check-out with Subcontractors involved. Any system operational
problems shall be diagnosed. Initiate correctional procedures as required to bring the
system into compliance with the design, and the problem shall then be rechecked to
verify that the system operates normally. Any remaining difficulties shall be brought to
the attention of the University’s Representative.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 5
E. Do not install equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit which makes rigid contact with
the structure unless it is allowed by this specification.
F. Bring to the University Representative’s attention prior to installation conflicts which will
result in unavoidable contact between the building structure and the isolated equipment,
piping, etc., described herein, due to inadequate space, etc. Corrective work necessitated
by conflicts after installation is at the expense of the contractor.
G. Bring to the University Representative’s attention prior to installation discrepancies

between the requirements of this Specification and field conditions, changes required due
to specific equipment selection, etc. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after
installation shall be no additional cost to the University.
H. Resilient Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations: Provide resilient wall and ceiling
penetrations for piping, conduit, ductwork, etc. supported on Type HS of Type FSN
isolators. Refer to resilient penetration details on the Drawings.
I. Support vibration isolated ducts, pipes, and equipment directly from structural steel, not
the concrete deck.
3.2 ISOLATOR INSTALLATION
A. The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause change of position of
equipment, conduit, piping or ducting, which would result in stresses in connections or
misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, maintain equipment
and attached systems in a rigid position during installation, the load shall not be
transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational
load. Plumbing, piping, and ducting at mechanical equipment connections is to be fully
supported by specified hangers. Mechanical equipment and vibration mounts shall not
carry plumbing, piping, or ducting loads. Utilize flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit for
electrical connections.
B. Isolation/Absorption Products: The completed installation must be free of vibration and

noise. Systems, equipment, or parts which vibrate or generate vibration unduly, or which
generate or emit undue noise while in operation shall: 1) be adjusted, repaired or
replaced as appropriate to obtain acceptable levels of vibration or noise; or 2) be
supported on, or fitted with, suppression or absorption devices or other means, which
effectively prevent the transmission of vibration or noise beyond the offending item.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 6
C. Equipment Isolator Installation:
1. Use space saver brackets for equipment supported on Type FSN vibration isolators.
2. The minimum operating clearance between the underside of the frame or inertia
base and the pad or floor is 1 inch.
3. Place the frame in position and support temporarily by shims prior to the
installation of the machine or isolators.
4. After the entire system installation is completed and under full operational load,
adjust the isolators so that the load is transferred from the shims to the isolators,
and that the shims are barely free. Remove the shims.
5. Seismic snubbers shall not be finally installed until vibration isolators are in-place
and adjusted with actual operating loads.
D. Isolator Hangers:
1. The isolators shall be installed with the isolator hanger box as close as possible to
the structure.
2. The isolators shall be suspended from massive beams, never from slab diaphragms
between beams.
3. Orientation of isolator assembly including support and load rods shall be within five
degrees of vertical.
3.3 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A. Install isolators for fans, chillers, compressors, pumps and other such equipment as
shown on Vibration Isolation Schedule or as otherwise required.
B. Approve completed vibration isolation system for isolated equipment.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 7
3.4 Vibration Isolation Schedule
Base Type Minimum

Equipment and Isolator Static Deflector (inches)
Weight1 Type
Hung Fan Coils NA HS 1 (25 mm)
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 48- 8
SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Material.
2. Equipment identification tags
3. Duct identification devices.
4. Stencils.
5. Manufacturers
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) in maintenance
manuals.
D. Air-Side Equipment Schedule: Provide hard copy and electronic spreadsheet of air-side
equipment schedule covering damper, terminal boxes, instrumentation, etc. Coordinate
numbering scheme prior to submittal.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 1
E. System Drawings: For each piping system for each air system (exhaust included). Furnish
system one-line plan drawings indicating valves, dampers, instruments, control devices,
smoke detectors, and equipment addressed in this section. Furnish electronic spread
sheet for each system. Coordinate numbering scheme prior to submittal.
F. Equipment Location Plans: For each system. Furnish plans showing equipment,
equipment identification numbers/tags, and description.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NFPA-99 for piping and equipment
labeling and identification.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent

attachment on equipment.
1. Data:

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 2
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,

permanent epoxy adhesive or rivets.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches
for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate

engraving stock; Grade ES-2, white surface, black phenolic core, with black melamine
subcore. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 3
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
4. Provide signs on equipment that is automatically started to comply with CAL-OSHA

requirements.
5. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center
hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. Do not use pipe labels or plastic tapes for bare pipes conveying fluids at temperatures of
125 deg F (52 deg C) or higher.
B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-
rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger pipe sizes may have
maximum sheet size with separate fastener.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive

backing. Either marker shall show accepted color-coded background, proper color of
legend in relation to background color, accepted legend letter size, accepted marker
length.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 4
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to

accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate
flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.3 DUCT LABELS
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent epoxy adhesive. As an option, stencil may be used.
B. Automatic or Motorized Control Damper Tags: Same as valve tags.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils for Piping: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping;
minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of ¾ inch for
access panel and door labels, equipment labels and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Brass

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel, black unless otherwise indicated. Pain
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1
unless otherwise indicated
B. Stencils for Ducts:
1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for viewing distances up to 15
feet and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
2. Stencil Material: Brass.
3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel] Paint may be in pressurized spray-can
form.
4. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can
form.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 5
2.5 MANUFACTURERS
1. Brady Corporation.
2. Seton Identification Products.
3. R&R Identification Co.
4. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more
than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Contractor’s option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers
may be omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 6
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper
operations, and identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following
general categories of equipment:
a. Fan coils and balancing dampers.
C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color

codes:
a. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and
components.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper
operations, and identify units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Fan coils and balancing dampers.
D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 7
3.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive or stencil on air ducts in the following color
codes:
1. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be
provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Contractor’s option, if lettering larger
than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal
location of required identification.
C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 50 feet (maximum intervals of 25 feet for exhaust ductwork) in each space
where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
D. Duct markers shall include air system type, and air system number.
3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts and plenums
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured
pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with
ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes,

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 8
including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow.
b. Letter Color: Black.
3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 53- 9
SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following new and existing
systems affected by the Work of this project:
1. Balancing Air systems
2. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing HVAC equipment quantitative-performance

settings
3. Vibration tests
4. Sound tests
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 20 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB specialist meets the qualifications specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed or as approved by University’s Representative, submit the Contract Documents
review report as specified in Part 3.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 1
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports
G. Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit instrument calibration reports

for instruments proposed to be used which shall include the following:
1. Instrument type and make
2. Serial number
3. Application
4. Dates of calibration
A. TAB Specialist Qualifications: Engage a TAB specialist certified by either AABC or NEBB.
Submit proof of a minimum of five years of experience in work similar to that required by
the Project.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with University’s Representative on approval of TAB strategies

and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB specialties, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Furnish seven
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 2
a. Submittal distribution requirements

b. The Contract Documents examination report.
c. TAB plan
d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow
C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." If data
required by the specification is not on standard forms, modify those forms or use a non-
standard form or provide supplement form to provide the specified items.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National

Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems
and NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more

frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. Keep an updated record of
instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing
instrument calibration.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 3
B. Notice: Furnish seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Furnish a guarantee on AABC's "National

Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems"
forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents
if TAB specialist fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
following provisions:
1. The certified TAB specialist has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and

installation limits.
B. Special Guarantee: Furnish a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB specialist fails to comply with
the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB specialist has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and

installation limits.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

Contract.
2. Verify provision of balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume
dampers. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
D. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system

effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced
capacities in all or part of a system.
2. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment

when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for
air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 5
SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design." Compare results with the design data
and installed conditions.
E. Examine system and equipment installations verifying they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been
performed.
F. Examine system and equipment test reports.
G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
I. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens
with indicated perforations.
K. Examine existing strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling,
diverting or mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 6
O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points
if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Ensure that all gauges and test equipment are recently calibrated. Use pressure gauges
accurate to ±0.1% of full scale. Where measuring differential pressures, a direct-reading
differential gauge may be used.
C. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed
4. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided
6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met
3.3 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be

reused.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 7
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
3. Check the condition of filters.
4. Check the condition of cooling coils.
5. Check the condition of the control valve.
6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the
measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows
and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by
equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates by more than 5 percent, make
equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5
percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 8
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B. Use factory provided or field installed test ports. Cutting, drilling or otherwise
penetrating of equipment with previously installed test ports is prohibited and if test port
are not used may require complete new air handling unit doors or ductwork to be
installed as approved by University’s Representative. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and
equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to
allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe
holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor
barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. Provide stainless
steel test ports for stainless steel ductwork and plenums. Install test ports that comply
with requirements in Section 23 3300 "Air Duct Accessories."
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-
speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 9
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set respective air handling unit(s) outside-air, return-air, and relief-air

dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.
b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.
c. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, measure airflow at outlets and

calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 10
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable
and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the
fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from
duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
isolation dampers, and control dampers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design

static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from University’s Representative before any adjustment of fan

speed higher or lower than indicated speed. If it seems that a higher speed is
needed, evaluate system effects to determine and eliminate the cause of the
increased resistance. Increasing the fan speed shall not be the only solution. If the
University’s Representative approves, make required adjustments to sheave sizes,
motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult

equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in operating modes that may apply to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 11
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-
tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after volume dampers have been
adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal inlets without making adjustments.
D. Adjust inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and dampers at
air inlets.
1. Adjust each inlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/3 Hp and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer’s name, model number, and serial number
2. Frame Size
3. Horsepower
4. Service Factor
5. RPM: nominal and tested
6. Efficiency: nominal

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 12
7. Power Factor: nominal
8. Phase
9. Frequency (Hz)
10. Voltage: nominal and tested
11. Amperage: nominal and tested
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer
2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second
3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils
4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 13
5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies
B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are
at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
2. Clear the space of people.
D. Perform vibration measurements after air balancing and equipment testing is complete.
E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to

avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 1 hp.
H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration,
and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the
horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.
1. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side
d. Equipment Base: Top and side

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 14
e. Building: Floor
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections
I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration
isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and
report the differences.
J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
2. Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the
travel-to-solid distance.
5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or
concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the
bottom of the inertia base and the floor.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying

with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters.
Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the
sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where
air velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 15
D. Perform sound-level testing after air balancing and equipment testing are complete.
E. Close windows and doors to the space.
F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise
level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be
measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-
sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.
H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches above the floor and at
least 36 inches from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the
measurements.
I. Take sound measurements using the dB(A) filter and in each of the 8 unweighted octave
bands in the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound
levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating. Calculate the
difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on the
difference and adjust measurements.
K. Perform sound testing at two locations on Project for each of the following space types.
For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound
level. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is
near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant sound source.
1. Private office
2. Open office area
3. Conference room
4. Auditorium/large meeting room/lecture hall

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 16
5. Classroom/training room
6. Sound or vibration sensitive laboratory
7. Each space with a noise criterion of RC or NC 25 or lower
8. Each space with an indicated noise criterion of RC or NC 35 and lower that is

adjacent to a mechanical equipment room or roof mounted equipment
9. Inside each mechanical equipment room
10. Two additional areas as designated by the University’s Representative
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS
A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions,
perform indoor-air quality testing.
B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge,
cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination
2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters
3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain
4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal
5. Evidence of water damage
6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 17
C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make
measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the
following:
1. Most remote area
2. One location per floor
3. One location for every 5000 square feet
D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-
hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1. Temperature
2. Relative humidity
3. Air velocity
4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm)
5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm)
6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm)
7. Formaldehyde (ppm)
3.12 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 18
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system
operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following design rate tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: 0 to plus 10 percent
2. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates: minus 5 percent to plus 10
percent. Total room shall be 5 percent
3. Minimum Outside Air: 0 to plus 10 percent

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 19
B. Maintaining pressure relationships and coil capacities as designed shall have priority over
the tolerances specified above.
3.14 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance
measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for
each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.15 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond

paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
1. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves
2. Fan curves

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 20
3. Manufacturers' test data
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers
5. Simplified system diagrams
6. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop

Drawings and Product Data
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page
2. Name and address of TAB specialist
3. Project name
4. Project location
5. Architect's name and address
6. Engineer's name and address
7. Contractor's name and address
8. Report date
9. Signature of TAB specialist who certifies the report
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the
report. Number each page in the report

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 21
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance

b. Notable characteristics of systems
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers

b. Conditions of filters
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes
3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 22
4. Balancing stations
5. Position of balancing devices
E. Fan Coil Unit Test Reports: For units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification
b. Location
c. Make and type
d. Model number and unit size
e. Manufacturer's serial number
f. Unit arrangement and class
g. Discharge arrangement
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches
j. Number of belts, make, and size
k. Number of filters, type, and size
2. Motor Data:
a. Follow “Procedures for Motors” specified herein.
b. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore
c. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm

b. Total system static pressure in inches water gauge
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches water gauge
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches water gauge
f. Sound attenuator static-pressure differential in inches water gauge

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 23
g. Outside airflow in cfm.

h. Return airflow in cfm.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in square feet
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches water gauge
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in °F
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in °F
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in °F
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in °F
h. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
i. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig
j. Refrigerant suction temperature in °F
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification
b. Location
c. Make and type

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 24
d. Model number and size

e. Manufacturer's serial number
f. Arrangement and class
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches
2. Motor Data:
a. Follow “Procedures for Motors” specified herein.

b. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore
c. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches
d. Number of belts, make, and size
a. Total airflow rate in cfm

b. Total system static pressure in inches water gauge
c. Fan rpm
d. Discharge static pressure in inches water gauge
e. Suction static pressure in inches water gauge
H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit or exhaust fan number

b. Location and zone
c. Traverse air temperature in °F
d. Duct static pressure in inches water gauge
e. Duct size in inches
f. Duct area in square feet
g. Length of straight duct before traverse in feet and inches
h. Indicated airflow rate in cfm
i. Indicated velocity in fpm
j. Actual airflow rate in cfm
k. Actual average velocity in fpm
l. Barometric pressure in inches of mercury

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 25
m. Duct mounted sound attenuator static-pressure differential in inches water

gauge and velocity in fpm
I. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For air-cooled condensing units, include the
following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification
b. Location
c. Unit make and model number
d. Compressor make
e. Compressor model and serial numbers
f. Refrigerant weight in pounds
g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in °F
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches water gauge

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches water gauge
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in °F
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in °F
e. Suction pressure in psig
f. Suction temperature in °F
g. Voltage at each connection
h. Number of fans
i. Condenser fan rpm
j. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm
k. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower
l. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection
m. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
J. Vibration Measurement Reports:
1. Date and time of test
2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 26
3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor

horsepower
4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations
5. Measurement readings for each measurement location
6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken
7. Description of predominant vibration source
K. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dB(A)
test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each
frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record
each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:
2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number
3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number
4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location
5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow
6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal
7. Description of predominant sound source
L. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:
1. HVAC system designation

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 27
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of
test
4. Room number or similar description for each location
5. Measurements at each location
6. Observed deficiencies
M. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make

b. Serial number
c. Application
d. Dates of use
e. Dates of calibration
3.16 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
c. Measure sound levels at two locations.

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 28
d. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.

e. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
f. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report,
request that a final inspection be made by University’s Representative.
2. TAB specialist shall conduct the inspection in the presence of University’s

Representative.
3. University’s Representative shall randomly select measurements documented in

the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10
percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that
can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements

documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall
be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB specialist shall recheck measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final
report and balancing device settings to include changes and resubmit the final
report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,
University’s Representative shall contract the services of another TAB specialist to
complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents
and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 05 93- 29
SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Sealants.
5. Factory-applied jackets.
6. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
7. Field-applied jackets.
8. Tapes.
9. Securements.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 1
10. Corner angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). Clearly mark the materials
being provided and its intended use of each product or the submittal will be rejected.
B. Submittal:
1. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Qualifications:
a. Submit qualifications for the following within ten (10) days after receipt of
Notice To Proceed:
1) Installer.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
5. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
6. Detail field application for each equipment type.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 2
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by

testing identical products per ASTM E 84. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-

developed index of 150 or less.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
B. Insulation shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened manufacturer’s

containers.
C. Insulation shall be stored in a dry location and kept dry throughout construction.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment
insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 3
and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied

jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall
be applied.
B. Prohibited: Products containing asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Prohibited insulation materials: Calcium silicate, phenolic, or polyisocyanurate insulation.
D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content
of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Nominal density is 7.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity
(k-value) at 75 deg F is maximum 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F.
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 4
c. Or equal.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I, Grade 1.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ or ASJ-SSL: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K-Flex USA; Insul-sheet.
d. Or equal.
H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied
FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 5
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
f. Or equal.
I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications,
provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide
insulation without factory-applied jacket if needed for building up thicknesses of
insulation otherwise provide with factory-applied ASJ or with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC
b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
e. Or equal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 6
2.2 REMOVABLE SOUND BLANKETS:
A. Sound blankets: custom fit pre-engineered insulation system, flexible and removable after
installation to allow reinstallation and access to, equipment, and other hard to insulate
items.
1. Insulation Material: ASTM C 1086, encapsulated 11 lb/cu. ft. fiberglass needled

mat, Type E fiber
2. Inner and Outer Jacket: Minimum 16.5 oz./sq. yd. PTFE Teflon impregnated
fiberglass.
3. Blanket Construction: Double sewn lock stitch with a minimum of 7 stitches per
inch. Raw jacket edges shall have a PTFE Teflon fiberglass cloth binding with Teflon
coated fiberglass thread stitching.
4. Blanket Overalp: Blanket shall overlap flanges as well as existing insulation with a
minimum of 2”
5. Leak Accommodations: blankets shall have a low point stainless steel drain
grommet.
6. Fasteners: 12 or 14 gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel lacing pins shall be provided.
The lacing pins will be held in place with 1-inch diameter, 14 gauge, type 304
stainless steel speed washers.
7. I.D. Tags: Stainless steel with embossed lettering.
8. Products:
a. Enoise Control: RSB-20
b. Or equal.
9. Custom Manufacturers:
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 7
a. Sound Waves Insulations, Inc., Santa Ana
b. Or equal.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Insulating cements shall be suitable for temperature range equivalent to that of the
insulation.
B. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
c. Or equal.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449.
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
d. Or equal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 8
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
Adhesives shall contain no flammable solvents if that option is available.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range

of minus 75 to plus 200 deg F.
a. Design Polymerics
b. Foster Products Corporation
c. Or equal.
2. For indoor applications use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 BLV Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
e. Or equal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 9
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
a. Design Polymerics DP 2590-CA
b. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; SP80, T1080
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.
d. Or equal.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
a. Design Polymerics DD2590-CA.
b. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; SP80, T1080
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.
d. Or equal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 10
2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall water based and be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Or equal.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 11
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
d. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
e. Or equal.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film

thickness.
4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Provide one of the following:
c. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 12
d. Or equal.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Or equal.
5. Color: Aluminum.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 13
6. For indoor applications use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants:
b. Or equal.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications and use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered

by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 14
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. Product performance is based on products
manufactured by Venture Tape; there are slight variations among manufacturers listed.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
e. Or equal.
2. Width: 3 inches.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 15
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
e. Or equal.
2. Width: 3 inches.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 16
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
d. Or equal.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.
4. Springs: For larger than 84-inch diameter tank applications. Twin spring set
constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands.
Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-
steel washer.
a. Products: Provide one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 17
2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
5) Or equal.
2. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers for Equipment: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, and
securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Self-sticking-
base is prohibited for use with ductwork insulation. Comply with the following
requirements:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA.
2) GEMCO; Press and Peel.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
4) Or equal.
b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.015 inch thick by 2 inches

square.
c. Spindle: Low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105-inch-diameter (12 gage)

shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 18
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
5) Or equal.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel

insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or

Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel or 0.062-inch soft-annealed Monel.
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
c. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. Or equal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 20
G. Welding brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties is
prohibited.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. Do not use two or more scrap
pieces where a full-length section will fit.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate

and wet and dry film thicknesses. Their function is not to mask poor-fitting insulation.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
3.3 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified
for each piping system and pipe size range.
B. Requirements in this article generally apply to insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
C. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Couplings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, couplings, valves, strainers, flanges and unions.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams,
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 21
voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and
uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of

same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining
pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the
bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement.
4. Insulate couplings, flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
5. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
D. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated
pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to
and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement,
mastic, and flashing sealant.
E. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to

the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover
in place with aluminum bands unless not material in not compatible with insulation
and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 22
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or
union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with
insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel
second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is allowed, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.4 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Cutting of cellular-glass shall be outdoors or in a well ventilated space if indoors in a

sealed building.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps
with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing
sealant.
5. For insulation in utility trench, provide bands at 12 inches o.c. to the exterior of the
field instated jacketing.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 23
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass
block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Couplings, Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation

when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of
cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 24
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered or preformed sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation

when available.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 25
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and
to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps
with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not

staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended
by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing
sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 26

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure
insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for 90 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 27
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to surfaces of fittings and

transitions.
3. Install cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of

horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins and adhesive may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,

rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and
end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation
segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-
clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-
applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and
protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 28
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in
a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width
equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end

joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Do not compress insulation beyond 25% of its’ nominal thickness.
8. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for 90 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to surfaces of fittings and

transitions.
3. Install cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of

horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 29
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches
o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install
additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins and adhesive may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,

rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and
end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation
segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-
clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-
applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and
protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in
a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width
equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 30
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips
at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
A. Perform tests and inspections when requested and in the presence of the University’s
Representative.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by engineering of record, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to two location for each 2,000 cfm duct system.
2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by University’s

Representative, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 31
order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of

straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings,
for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.
3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: are listed in the Article “Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule.”
B. Ducts with duct liner within the duct shall still require exterior duct insulation.
C. Indoor-Exposed duct and plenum insulation schedule requirement for rigid board applies
to insulation below 7-foot from finished floor or service/maintenance walkway. The rigid
board protects the insulation from being damaged. Full pieces of insulation shall be used
to exceed the height requirement.
D. Provide professional appearance in exposed locations for blanket and board insulation.
Board shall continue to suitable point to change to blanket insulation, e.g. elbow, tee, etc.
Secure blanket insulation in exposed locations shall using tape. Exposed wire is
prohibited.
E. Items Not Insulated:
1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
2. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Vibration-control devices.
5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 32
3.11 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

NOMINAL THICKNESS & MINIMUM R-
VALUE DENSITY
DUCT OR PLENUM
TYPE (IN BTU/HR-FT2-F) @ 75°F (LBS/ CUBIC
LOCATION
OUTSIDE FOOT)
SUPPLY RETURN
AIR
Indoors – Concealed
Blanket 1½” / 5.3 None 1½” / 5.3 0.75
(conditioned space)
Indoors – Concealed
Blanket 3” / 10 3” / 10 1½” / 5.3 0.75
(non-conditioned space)
Indoors – Exposed
NA None None None NA
(conditioned space)
Indoors – Exposed
Board 2” / 8 2” / 8 1” / 4.2 1.5
(Non-conditioned space)
3.12 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.13 INDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping or flexible tubing.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 50 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3. Insulation Thickness: 1”.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
END OF SECTION
HVAC INSULATION
02/25/2020 Section 23 07 00- 33
SECTION 23 09 00 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. I/O: Input/output.
C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
D. PC: Personal computer.
E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 10 seconds.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 1
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command
of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or
workstation within six seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds

but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Space Temperature: Plus, or minus 1 deg F.
b. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus, or minus 1 deg F.
c. Outside Air Temperature: Plus, or minus 2 deg F.
d. Temperature Differential: Plus, or minus 0.25 deg F.
e. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus, or minus 3 percent of full scale.
f. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus, or minus 5 percent of full scale.
g. Airflow (Terminal): Plus, or minus 10 percent of full scale.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 2
h. Air Pressure (Space): Plus, or minus 0.01-inch wg.
i. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus, or minus 0.1-inch wg.
j. Electrical: Plus, or minus 5 percent of reading.
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation
equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors,
actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.
2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software,
operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.
2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 3
4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Written description of sequence of operation.
6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.
b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.
c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk
data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit
locations.
9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including

bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 4
A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Software Upgrade Kit: For University to use in modifying software to suit future systems
revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01
78 00 "Close-Out Submittals" include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and
compressed-air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 5
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative

who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to University’s Representative, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated
to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 6
B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alerton Inc.
2. Andover Controls Corporation.
3. Automated Logic Corporation.
4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
5. Or equal.
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed
to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network
via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control
device depicted by point-and-click graphics.
2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with industry standard hardware.
1. Application Software:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 7
a. I/O capability from operator station.
b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels.
c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.
d. Database creation and support.
e. Automatic and manual database save and restore.
f. Dynamic color graphic displays.
g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and

symbols.
h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions.
i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs.
j. Alarm and event processing.
k. Object and property status and control.
l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:
1) Current values of all objects.
2) Current alarm summary.
3) Disabled objects.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 8
4) Alarm lockout objects.
5) Logs.
n. Custom report development.
o. Utility and weather reports.
p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules.
q. Maintenance management.
2. Custom Application Software:
a. English language oriented.
b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment.
c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with

debugging/simulation capability.
d. Support conditional statements.
e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions.
f. Contains predefined time variables.
B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,

random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment;
and backup power source.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 9
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from
other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to
operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions

include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.
e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and
controlled environment.
3. Standard Application Programs:
a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with
differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with
fine tuning, and trend logging.
b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy
switchover.
c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-

water reset, and equipment sequencing.
d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and

messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-
time totalization; and security access.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 10
e. Remote communications.
f. Maintenance management.
g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation
or diagnostic terminal unit.
5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.
C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,
nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or
upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions

include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation
or diagnostic terminal unit.
4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and
communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 11
D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect
points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or
resistance signals.
4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally
open or normally closed operation.
5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current
(4 to 20 mA).
6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating-type electronic actuators.
7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection;

limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output
current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent
overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 12
1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.3 UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating
system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the
application.
1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication,
and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable;
memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.
2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share

real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform
scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system
and report failures.
3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write
(execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network
using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for
connection to diagnostic terminal unit.
4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.
5. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 13
2.4 ALARM PANELS
A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch-
thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors
and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. Provide common
keying for all panels.
B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch,
mounted on hinged cover.
1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.
2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady.
3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady.
4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished.
5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.
2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and
operated by electric motor.
B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning

action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70
deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for

remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional
band and authority.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control
readjustment potentiometer.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 14
D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of

motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan
speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor
up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.
E. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or

reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band
adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.
1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span,

input signal of 3 to 13 psig.
2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig.
3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent.
4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig, input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to
supply pressure.
5. Gages: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match
transmitter input or output pressure.
2.6 TIME CLOCKS
A. Manufacturers:
1. ATC-Diversified Electronics.
2. Grasslin Controls Corporation.
3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
4. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 15
5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA.
6. TCS/Basys Controls.
7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
8. Time Mark Corporation.
9. Or equal.
B. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial;

continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover;
multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two
normally open and two normally closed output contacts.
C. Solid-state, programmable time control with 8 separate programs each with up to 100 on-off
operations; 1-second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual
override; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20
programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; system fault alarm;
and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC.
2.7 ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:
a. BEC Controls Corporation.
b. Ebtron, Inc.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 16
c. Heat-Timer Corporation.
d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f. RDF Corporation.
g. Or equal.
2. Accuracy: Plus, or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft..
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion
length of 2-1/2 inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
C. RTDs and Transmitters:
1. Manufacturers:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 17
b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.
c. RDF Corporation.
d. Or equal.
2. Accuracy: Plus, or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.
6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2
inches.
7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
E. Room sensor accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 18
2. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base where

indicated in plans.
2.8 STATUS SENSORS
A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
range of 0- to 5-inch wg.
B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-
core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of
rated motor current.
D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered
transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and
current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with
maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,

stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
1. Manufacturers:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 19
b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
c. Or equal.
2.9 FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
A. Thermal Airflow Station, Air Ducted/Plenum:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ebtron, Inc.
b. Greenheck
c. Ruskin
d. Or equal.
2. Description:
a. Thermal airflow station with one or more sensor nodes mounted in a probe, and a
remotely mounted microprocessor-based transmitter at each measurement
location.
b. Sensor nodes with one self-heated and one zero power bead-in-glass thermistor
at each sensing node, using the principle of thermal dispersion.
3. Airflow Station Performance:
a. Independent processing of up to 16 separately wired sensor node assemblies.
b. Airflow rate and temperature of each sensor is equally weighted and averaged by
the transmitter prior to output.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 20
c. Accuracy: Within 3 percent of reading for ducted applications, within 5 percent of

reading for non-ducted applications, when installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended placement guidelines. Include the combined
uncertainty of the sensor nodes and transmitter. For devices whose overall
accuracy is based on individual accuracy specifications of the sensor probes and
transmitter, demonstrate compliance with the accuracy requirement over the
entire operating range.
4. Sensor Node and Probe Assemblies:
a. Sensor Node Construction: Two bead-in-glass, hermetically sealed thermistors

potted in a marine grade waterproof epoxy with sensor housings constructed of
glass-filled polypropylene. Construct with only the thermistor located within the
sensing node and all other electronic components outside the airstream. Epoxy
or glass encapsulated chip thermistors or devices with exposed leads are not
allowed.
b. Performance rated and tested with a 100 percent survival rate in a 30-day
saltwater and acid vapor test with written independent laboratory test results.
c. Store sensor node airflow and temperature calibration data in a serial memory
chip, in the cable connecting plug. Stored data does not require matching or
adjustments to the transmitter in the field.
d. Sensor Node Calibration: Individually calibrated at 16 measurement points to

airflow standards directly calibrated at NIST to the NIST Laser Doppler
Anemometer (LDA) primary velocity standard.
1) Accuracy: Within 2 percent of reading over the entire calibrated airflow

range of 0 to 5,000 fpm .
2) Individually calibrate thermistor at a minimum of 3 temperatures to NIST-

traceable temperature standards.
e. Sensing Node Temperature Accuracy: Within 0.15 deg F over an operating range
of minus 20 deg F to plus 160 deg F and humidity range of 0 to 100 percent RH.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 21
f. Provide the number of independent sensor nodes as follows:
1) For Duct/Plenum Area up to 0.5 sq. ft. : 1.
2) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater than 0.5 through 1.0 sq. ft. : 2.
8) For Duct/Plenum Area Greater than 14.0 sq. ft. : 16.
g. For an aspect ratio of 1.5 or less, and an area of 25 sq. ft. or greater, 4 probes are
required.
h. Sensor Probe Construction: Gold anodized, 6063 aluminum alloy tube, with each
sensor probe containing one or more independently wired sensing nodes.
i. Sensor Probe Mounting Bracket Construction: Type 304 stainless steel.
j. Internal Probe Wiring: Kynar coated copper between the connecting cable and
sensor nodes.
k. Internal Probe Wiring Connections: Solder joints and spot welds, sealed and
protected from the elements, so that direct exposure to water will not affect
instrument operation.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 22
l. Sensor Probe Jacket: Integral, FEP jacket, plenum rated CMP/CL2P, UL/cUL-Listed
cable, rated for exposures from minus 67 deg F to plus 392 deg F , and for
continuous and direct UV exposure.
m. Sensor Probe Cable Connector Plug: Gold plated pins for connection to the
transmitter.
5. Transmitter:
a. Transmitter determines the average airflow rate and temperature of connected

sensor nodes in an array for a single location.
b. User Interface: 16-character, alpha-numeric, LCD display, with two field selectable
analog output signals and network output capability.
1) Two field selectable 0-5/0-10 V dc, or 4-20 mA, scalable, isolated, over-
current protected analog output signals. The first output (AO1) provides
the total airflow rate. The second output (AO2) is field configurable for
temperature or low and/or high airflow set point (user defined) or system
status alarm. The RS-485 (BACnet MS/TP, or Modbus RTU) network
connection provides the average airflow rate, temperature, high and/or
low airflow set point alarm, system status alarm, individual sensor node
airflow rates and individual sensor node temperatures.
c. Printed Circuit Board Interconnects: Gold plated edge fingers, receptacle plug
pins, and printed circuit board test points.
d. Printed Circuit Boards: Electroless nickel immersion gold (ENIG) plated.
e. Integrated Circuitry: Temperature rated, industrial-grade.
f. Integration Buffers: Separate integration buffers for display of airflow output,

airflow signal output (analog and network), and individual sensor output (IR-
interface).
g. Transmitter Features and Functions:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 23
1) High and/or low airflow alarm with user-defined set point and percent of
set point tolerance.
2) Manual or automatic alarm reset, and low-limit cutoff value may be

selected to disable the alarm.
3) Alarm delay function, field defined.
4) Sensor node malfunction via the system status alarm and ignore the sensor
node that is in a fault condition.
5) Field configuration, diagnostics, and Field Output Adjustment Wizard that

allows for a one- or two-point field adjustment to factory calibration for
installations that require adjustment.
6) Automatic reset after power disruption, transients, and brown-outs

through a watchdog timer circuit.
7) Operating temperature range of minus 20 deg F to plus 120 deg F and

humidity range of 5 to 95 percent RH.
8) Electrical Power Requirement: 24-V ac (between 22.8- and 26.4-V ac under

load) at 20-VA maximum, using a switching power supply that is over-
current and over-voltage protected.
6. Listing and Certifications:
a. UL/cUL Listing: UL/cUL 873 Listed as an assembly.
b. BTL Listing: BTL Listed, network-capable, airflow stations supplied with RS-485
interface and BACnet protocol.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 24
2.10 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action.
1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed

and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x lbf.
4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at
rated torque.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
b. Or equal.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 25
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000

fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.
4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.
10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.
12. Run Time: 30 seconds.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 26
2.11 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2. Erie Controls.
3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation.
5. Neles-Jamesbury.
6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division.
7. Pneuline Controls.
8. Sauter Controls Corporation.
9. Or equal.
B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable
composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under
pressure.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 27
3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on
top and bottom.
b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding
surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a. Two Position: Line size.
b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure
drop, whichever is more.
c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value
specified above.
5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-
way valves shall have linear characteristics.
6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-
way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total
system (pump) head.
D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or
ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-
replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1. Body Style: Lug.
2. Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron.
3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 28
E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff
head.
3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-
way valves shall have linear characteristics.
2.12 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
4. United Enertech Corp.
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
6. Or equal.
B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or

0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper
blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8
inches and length of 48 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with
nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 29
against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every
blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.
4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable

rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less
than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when
damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
B. Verify duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings
and room details before installation.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 30
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
E. Install automatic dampers according to Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 23 05 53

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts".
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C. Signal and communication cable:
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping
are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 31
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.
7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration
of piping and equipment.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch
is in hand position.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig or 1.5 times the operating pressure for 24
hours, with maximum 5-psig loss.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 32
5. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig and low-pressure control air
piping at 30 psig for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig loss.
6. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator.
7. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating
control set points are as required.
8. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
9. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
10. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, and other applicable considerations.
4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.
6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet
side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-
contained pressure regulators.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 33
8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper
blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
11. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations

and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of
instrument being calibrated.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 34
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a
precision-resistant source.
5. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span

using a precision-resistance source.
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
6. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open
and closed.
7. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's
recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.
8. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
9. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of
instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup
procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 35
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train University’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.
END OF SECTION 230900

02/25/2020 Section 23 09 00- 36
SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Low-pressure ducts.
2. Plenums.
3. Duct cleaning.
1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
2. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for sleeves.
3. Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC".
4. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation".
5. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts".
6. Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles".
7. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC".
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 1
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
1. ASHRAE Handbook Series Fundamentals: Ch. 2. Duct Design
2. ASHRAE Handbook Series Equipment: Ch 6. Duct Construction
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
2. NFPA 90B Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Subcontractors National Association (SMACNA):
1. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
2. SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
3. SMACNA Rectangular Duct Construction Standards
4. IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low pressure ductwork includes:
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 2
1. All galvanized ductwork downstream of air terminals and reheat coils, horizontal toilet
exhaust duct, and ducts not included under medium pressure ductwork above.
B. Duct pressure classification shall be as specified herein and not as recommended in SMACNA
publications.
C. Do not use black steel ductwork, sheet metal, duct reinforcing, devices, supports, or fasteners in
the Clean Room interstitial space. Such items shall be galvanized, plated, coated, or painted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 23 Section " General Mechanical Requirements” and Division
01 Section "General Requirements."
B. Ductwork.
C. Single wall plenums.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Duct reinforcement and construction schedules.
2. Duct support details.
3. Detailed duct shop drawings at 1/4" - 1'-0" scale in accordance with Division 23 Section "
General Mechanical Requirements ", of mechanical rooms, riser elevations, and floor plans.
4. Single wall plenums.
E. Written program outlining protection of ductwork from contamination with dirt and procedures
for cleaning contaminated ductwork.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 3
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES
A. Minimize the use of virgin material and waste during construction. Use low-VOC mastics.
A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
A. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Ductwork:
A. Sheet Metal for Ducts: G90 galvanized steel sheets with 1.25oz./sq. ft. coating on each side,
conforming to ASTM A-525 and A-527, lock-forming grade, of gauges as specified hereinafter,
except where another material is specifically indicated. See PART 3 - EXECUTION, and drawings for
duct construction requirements.
1. Recycled content: 28 percent minimum total recycled content containing a minimum of 16

percent post-consumer steel.
B. Flexible Ducts: See Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories".
2.2 Single Wall Plenums:
A. Machine formed panels, 18 gauge steel with 3" standing seams 16" on center.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 4
B. General Duty: Galvanized steel.
2.3 Duct Sealant
A. For non-fume exhaust duty and galvanized fume exhaust duty: United Duct Sealer, 3M #800, or
equal, non-flammable, U.L. labeled.
B. For coated steel fume exhaust duty: Epoxy sealant specified hereinafter.
C. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
2. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.
E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
2.4 Internal Duct Coatings
A. The coatings shall be a cross-linked epoxy-phenolic material cured with an alkaline curing agent.
B. The coating shall have a chemical, abrasive and temperature resistance no less than that of Plasite
7122L or Equal.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 5
C. The coating shall be specifically approved by the manufacturer for internal lining of steel exhaust
ducts.
1. Follow manufacturer’s specific direction to Plasite 7122L or Equal, Zone A usage requiring
sand blasting of the galvanized steel duct surface and multiple layers for a total film
thickness of 12-13 mils.
2. The coating manufacturer shall provide specific instruction for minor and major coating
repair procedures including repair of holidays, scratches, and cutting ductwork and
connecting new ductwork.
D. Seams and joints shall be sealed with Plasite 7122 Joint Adhesive Sealant (JAS) or Tnemec 63-1500
or Equal, unless removable gasketed joints are specified.
E. Manufacturer – Internal Duct Coatings:
1. Plasite 7122L or TNEMEC 282.
2. 3M Skotchkote 134 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy.
3. Or Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Ductwork
A. Where not otherwise specified herein, shown, noted, work shall conform to "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," latest edition, as published by the Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., (SMACNA).
1. 2 inches (50 mm) w.g. class for herein specified low pressure ductwork.
2. At the Contractor’s option, round ducts may be substituted for rectangular ducts or
rectangular ducts may be substituted for round ducts, only if the substituted duct has a
cross-sectional area of the original duct. As with other substitutions, the Subcontractor
bears the responsibility for equivalency, fit, clearances, coordination, etc.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 6
B. Construction Indoor Air Quality:
1. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
2. After fabrication in the shop, wipe down interior of each piece of supply air and return air
ductwork with a lint-free rag, using a solution of 30 percent isopropyl alcohol and 70
percent water. Cap/seal supply, return, and exhaust air duct openings immediately after
fabrication or cleaning. Schedule deliveries to the job site to match installation to avoid
excessive storage at the job site. Store ductwork at the job site in closed trailers or in the
immediate area in which is will be installed. Ducts at the site that have opening seals
perforated are to be re-cleaned per shop cleaning requirements and re-sealed until needed
for installation. Maintain caps/seals on openings of installed ducts. If openings of installed
ducts have their seals perforated, re-clean contaminated duct sections per shop cleaning
requirements. Demonstrate the cleanliness quality control to the University’s Personnel.
3. Prior to operating air handling systems, verify internal cleanliness of air handlers, plenums,
and ducts, and that filters are in place. Contamination requires re-cleaning per shop
cleaning requirements. Demonstrate to the University’s Representative the cleanliness of
the systems before operation. Provide security protocol to limit access to systems to avoid
contamination.
4. Provide filtration at return and exhaust air inlets of systems that are operated prior to
completion of construction. Filtration shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value
(MERV) of 13, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999.
5. After construction ends and prior to occupancy, conduct a minimum two-week building
flush-out with new specified filtration media at 100 percent outside air.
C. Duct Placement and Fittings:
1. Fabricate ducts to net inside clear dimensions using specified sizes. Where internal duct
liner is used, enlarge duct sizes so that specified sizes result in net clearance dimensions
inside lining.
2. Form transitions with uniform taper not exceeding 15 degree included angle, unless shown
otherwise on Drawings.
3. Offsets over 15 degrees shall have two radius turns or square turning vanes.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 7
4. Where it is not possible to insulate ducts after installation, ducts shall be insulated before
final installation. Tightness of work will not be accepted as a valid reason for omitting
insulation. Where insulation is omitted, ducts will be removed, insulated and reinstalled.
5. Exposed Ducts: Exercise extreme care to produce neat and pleasing-in-appearance joints,
connections, supports and other modifications. Ducts shall have no offsets, dents or dings.
They shall be clean and grease-free. Remove excess sealant. Appearance must be
acceptable to the University’s Representative.
6. Install ducts true to line and grade.
7. Make changes of direction by curved sections with inside radius equal to duct width or
square elbows with turning vanes as shown. Where square elbows are definitely shown,
radius turns may not be used.
8. Closely fit and accurately place ducts and coordinate with work specified in other sections.
Ducts must be so placed that piping, ceiling support grid, ceilings, and light fixtures may be
installed without warping, springing or deforming ducts.
9. Angles and standing seams on ducts exposed in occupied areas shall have the corners
chamfered 45 degrees with 1/4" rounded edges and ground smooth.
10. Seal duct penetrations through walls and floors.
11. Provide inlet and outlet duct transitions at reheat coils, constant, variable, and air flow
control terminal whether or not such transition is shown on the drawings.
12. Provide openings in ductwork wherer required to accommodate sensors.
13. Closely coordinate roof penetrations with architectural details.
D. Low Pressure Rectangular Ductwork:
1. Longitudinal seams: Flat crimped Pittsburgh lock with specified sealant, applied over seam.
2. Transverse Joints: Ductmate 35, TDC, or equal with specified gasket.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 8
3. Cross break or bead sides.
4. Construction and Reinforcement:
US STD. Intermediate
Largest Dimension Gauge Max. Joint Angle
of Duct GSM Spacing Transverse Joint Size Stiffener1
Thru 12 inches 26 96 inches As specified None
(Thru 355 mm) (0.7 mm) (2438 mm)
13 to 30 inches 24 60 inches As specified None
(330 to 762 mm) (0.7 mm) (1524 mm)
(787 to 914 mm) (0.85 (1524 mm)
mm)
(940 to 1220 mm) (1 mm) (1524 mm)
(1245 to 1524) (1.31 (1524 mm)
mm)
61 to 84 inches2 18 60 inches As specified 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
(1550 to 2134 mm) (1.31 (1524 mm) inches
mm) (38 by 38 by 3 mm)
1 Required on four sides. Weld or bolt angles where they join. Mild steel.
2 Provide 3/8 inches (10 mm) diameter tie rods maximum 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. at each joint.
E. Round Ductwork - HVAC:
1. Provide spiral round ductwork where shown on the Drawings.
2. Duct Gauges:
Size Low Pressure Medium Pressure

Thru 8 inches (Thru 200 mm) 26 26
9 to 14 inches (230 to 355 26 26
mm)
14 to 26 inches (355 to 660 26 24
mm)
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 9
3. Fittings: United McGill, Western Engineering Co., Lindab, or equal.
a. Low Pressure:
1) Elbows: 26 gauge smooth. Pleated not allowed.
2) Other: 26 gauge Uniweld. Spot welded and sealed joints.
b. High Pressure:
1) Elbows: 20 gauge die-stamped. All-welded joints.
2) Other: 20 gauge Uniform. All-welded joints.
c. Elbows: Radius to center of duct shall not be less than 1 times the diameter of the
duct.
d. Reducers: Machine formed to ASME short flow nozzle shape.
e. Tees: Conical tap machine formed to short flow nozzle shape.
f. Laterals: Machine formed to ASME short flow nozzle, conical tap at 45 degrees F.
g. Round tap fittings: Saddle type for round duct or conical for rectangular ducts as
shown on the Drawings.
4. Round Duct Joints: Join by means of couplings with swaged bead in center and secured with
sheet metal screws at each end of coupling. Make duct-to-fittings joints by either a tight slip
fit of the fitting lapped inside the duct or by means of couplings with swaged bead in center,
secured with sheet metal screws. Screw spacing: 6 inches (150 mm) unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings. Seal joints and seams with specified internal sealant applied
continuously around the coupling.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 10
3.2 Sealing:
A. Where firestopping is not required, seal duct, pipe, and conduit penetrations through partitions
with G.E. silicone sanitary sealant, Dow Corning 8650 Interior Sealant, or equal.
1. Provide 0.125- to 0.25-inch (3 mm to 6 mm) gap to be filled with specified sealant for noise
control.
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B.
4. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
5. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C.
6. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
3.3 Galvanizing Repairs
A. Repair galvanizing damaged by welding, scratches, etc., using Z.R.C., or equal, cold galvanizing
compound.
3.4 Duct and Plenum Leak Testing
A. Leak test 100% of ducts, coated ducts and plenums: Use extreme care in the fabrication and
installation of the ductwork and plenums to ensure that it will be airtight. Test ductwork and
plenums for leaks in sections as the work progresses before insulating. Seal off open ends and then
test by the following.
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 11
1. Duct Leak Test for Low Pressure ductwork: The equipment required for this testing
comprises a blower, orifice test pipe assembly and manometer with necessary valves and
tubing. The ductwork section shall be placed under an air pressure of 2 inches (150 mm) of
water with the blower, while leakage flow through the orifice is measured on the
manometer. The manometer readings shall be converted to CFM from a calibrated test
curve. The leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM/100 s.f. for rectangular seal class "A" ductwork
and 3 CFM/100 sf for round seal class "A" ductwork. No less than 50 square feet of duct
shall be tested at one time. The Subcontractor shall provide test conditions, including the
total square feet of ductwork under test. Leaks found must be repaired, or joints remade,
and the section retested until tight. Leaks that cause objectionable noise must be repaired,
regardless of the amount of the leakage. Perform tests in the presence of the University’s
Representative. Maintain a set of Drawings for recording and sign off each tested section.
After completion of testing, turn drawings over to the University’s Representative for
review.
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Collect off cuts and scrap and place in designated areas for recycling.
B. Separate other materials, including packaging and banding, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan and place in designated areas for recycling.
A. University shall engage independent testing agency.
END OF SECTION
METAL DUCTS
02/25/2020 Section 23 31 13- 12
SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Manual volume dampers.
2. Turning vanes
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Drawband connectors.
5. Flexible ducts.
6. Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the duct accessories to be used on this project.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Manual-volume damper installations.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 1
C. Submittal shall include published leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data for
a full range of damper sizes based on AMCA Standard 500 testing. Data from one size
sample test is prohibited.
D. Submittal:
1. Product data: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1.
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.
C. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; exposed ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
paint adhesion.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods are prohibited.

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 2
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Rectangular Manual Volume Balancing Dampers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. Pottorff
d. Or equal.
2. Leakage Rating: tested per AMCA Standard 500
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Frame: Hat-shaped galvanized sheet steel.
b. Flanged frames for installing in ducts
5. Blades:
a. Single
b. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
6. Bearings:

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 3
a. Non-metallic nylon
b. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
7. Damper Hardware:
a. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
b. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
B. Standard, Steel, Round Manual Volume Balancing Dampers
1. Manufacturers
a. American Warming and Ventilating
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. Pottorff
d. Or equal.
2. Leakage Rating: tested per AMCA Standard 500
3. Suitable for installation at any angle
4. Blades
a. Single blade
b. Galvanized.

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 4
c. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
5. Bearings:
a. Non-metallic nylon
b. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
6. Damper Hardware:
a. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
b. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
c. Provide locking quadrant or remote actuator by Young Regulator or equal
2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Quietflex Manufacturing Co.
3. Or equal.
B. Insulated, Non-Metallic Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film or coated
fiberglass cloth fabric supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass
insulation; polyethylene fire retardant vapor-barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4 inches water gauge positive and 0.5 inch water gauge negative.

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 5
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Minimum Installed R-Value: R8
4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 °F
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band clamps with stainless hex screw to tighten band with
a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2. Sheet Metal Screws: For flexible duct connectors with metal collars, use
minimum three sheet metal screws and duct sealer.
2.4 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Ports or Holes: Cast aluminum, cast zinc, or zinc-plated cast iron to suit
duct material, including screw cap and rubber gasket. Size to allow insertion of Pitot tube
and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. Provide
VentLok 699, or VentLok 699 suitable for 2 inches of insulation or equal.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, waterproof, antimicrobial agent, and resistant to
gasoline and grease, complying with UL 181 and approved for use inside of ducts.
C. Remote Damper Actuators: Manually operated Bowden Cable Design Model 270 series
by Young Regulator or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards-- Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 6
B. Provide duct accessories and components of materials suited to duct materials; use
galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel ducts
C. Provide manual volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Provide balancing volume
dampers at duct takeoff serving ceiling diffusers and registers. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff. Provide 12” long neon color flags hanging from
damper handle for locating dampers. Flags shall remain after balancing unless ductwork
is exposed, where exposed ductwork flags shall be removed.
D. Provide instrument test holes in ductwork at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as
required by TAB specialist for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Connect diffusers, registers and grilles with lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in
place without kinks. Do not use flexible ductwork above hard lid gypsum or similar
inaccessible ceilings. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions more than 45 degrees
in any direction.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive and band clamps. Flexible ducts with
galvanized sheet metal collars shall be connected with duct sealant and sheet metal
screws.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator

and damper.
B. Adjusting:
1. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 7
2. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section

"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 33 00- 8
SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles some of which
may not be applicable to this project.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room

location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following.
a. Price Industries.
b. Titus
Or equal.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

02/25/2020 Section 23 37 13- 1
2.2 SUPPLY AIR OUTLETS
A. Contractor shall submit registers, diffusers, and grilles as shown on Schedule and Floor
Plans within Mechanical Drawings.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in

02/25/2020 Section 23 37 13- 2
ay-in ceiling panels, units shall be furnished with metal panel. Where architectural
features or other items conflict with installation, notify the University’s Representative for
a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
D. Provide outlets with gaskets and install so that there will be no streaking of the walls or
ceilings due to leakage.
E. Furnish diffusers, registers, and grilles with an electrostatically applied finish including
heads of screw or concealed screws.
F. Grilles and diffusers shall match qualities, including appearance, throw, noise level,
adjustability, etc.
G. Locations of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be coordinated as not to interfere with
light fixtures and sprinkler heads.
H. Dampers in ceiling diffusers are a source of noise and shall not be provided. Provide
volume damper upstream to balance airflow. Provide remote damper actuators where
diffusers are installed in hard-lids or other areas where accessing damper may be difficult.
I. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be selected to perform without distracting noise.
Throw, drop, and NC values shall be analyzed during design layout.
J. Painting inside of ducts behind grilles is prohibited to avoid any IAQ issues.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION

02/25/2020 Section 23 37 13- 3
SECTION 26 00 10 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section supplements all Sections of this Division and shall apply to all Work specified,
indicated in the Drawings, and as required to provide a complete installation of electrical
systems for the Project. Review all Sections of the Specifications for related work and
coordinate the work of this Section with all other Sections.
B. Provide all labor and services, and furnish all materials, tools, equipment, appliances, facilities,
and transportation necessary for and incidental to performing the Work complete, as shown
on the drawings and specified herein. All electrical systems and equipment shall be in proper
operating order upon completion of the work. Work includes the following:
1. Include incidental details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper
installation and operation.
2. Provide the following:

a. Electric power conduits, conductors and cables, signal and fire alarm conduits and
cables, and telephone, television, cameras, and wireless systems conduits only, from
their respective terminal locations within the building.
b. A complete system of panelboards, conduits, outlet boxes, switches, receptacles, plates
and wiring for power and light.
c. Outlet, junction and pull boxes, plaster rings, plates, conduit only and pull lines for the
card readers, telephone, and data, television, cameras, access control, security and
wireless connection systems.
d. A complete fire alarm (design-build) systems including fire alarm control panels, fire
alarm annunciators (graphic and touch screen types), remote operators control panels,
paging cabinets, smoke and heat detectors, manual pull stations, magnetic door hold-
open devices, other alarm and trouble devices as indicated, outlet, junction and pull
boxes, plaster rings, conduits and wire, including all field devices, programming, testing,
complete.
e. All lighting fixtures, and lamps, complete with controls (switching, dimmers, occupancy
sensors, day-light sensors, photocells, time switches, and low voltage relays), including
switch packs, and building lighting control system.
f. Outlet, junction and pull boxes, conduits, wiring and connections of all motors and
equipment for all heating, ventilating and cooling, plumbing, fire protection, food
service, and all other equipment.
g. Complete grounding systems for power system neutrals and equipment for normal
power and emergency power systems. The system shall interconnect two earth-
covered ground rods or other ground electrodes as indicated in the Section 260526,
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, the conduit system, and the
equipment grounding bus system.
02/25/2020 Electrical General Provisions

Section 26 00 10- 1
h. Testing, adjusting and cleaning of the completed work.

i. Motor starters, disconnect switches, relays, push button stations and control switches
(except where such equipment is furnished as part of a completely wired "package
unit,"), conduits, wire and connections to motors and other equipment for the
plumbing, steam heating, ventilating and air conditioning, domestic refrigeration and
automatic fire sprinkler systems.
j. All line-voltage (120V) control system conduit and wiring, and all low-voltage control
conduit only with pull lines, required for the automatic temperature control systems.
k. Demolition and removal of existing electrical systems, including conduits, wiring,
equipment, wiring devices, disconnects and connections, as indicated on Drawings.
l. Access panels, fire rated as required, in the ceilings and walls where necessary for
access to electrical equipment, junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit stubs, etc., located in
the walls or furred ceiling spaces. Coordinate requirements for access panels with work
specified in other sections.
m. Cutting, core-drilling patching, and painting of the building structure, and finishes as
required by Contractor in the performance of the work.
n. All sleeves, hangers, supports, inserts, anchors, bolts, etc., required for the installation
of this work, including design of supports and seismic restraints.
o. All concrete required for this Division of the work including patching and repair at core-
drill locations, concrete pads for floor mounted electrical equipment.
p. Certified report including seismic calculations for anchorage or support of all electrical
system equipment (as indicated in appropriate Specification Section), signed by a
Structural Engineer registered in California. Report shall carry the approval of State Fire
Marshal.
q. Shop drawings and technical data; operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals as
Optical Character Recognition PDF files.
r. "As-built" drawings:
1) At the completion of the project furnish the as-built drawings, in accordance with
Division 01, and furnish the drawings on digital CD (compact disc) in the version of
AutoCAD and PDF files approved by the University’s Representative.
2) Include University’s final room numbers on these Drawings and panelboard
directories, and accurately indicate and dimension all conduit runs (including those
discovered during construction), and conduit stub-outs and all pullboxes from
building walls on all As-built Drawings.
s. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with University’s Representative regarding
the protection of University’s installed telecommunications and security cabling/wiring,
including replacement of these items damaged by Contractor, but not limited to
submittals, lead times, procurement, delivery and installation.
t. Furnish training to University’s personnel, as scheduled by University’s Representative,
for the operation of the following:
1) Lighting controls, and occupancy sensors – eight (8) hours.
2) Fire Alarm system as indicated in Section 28 31 11, DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-
ALARM SYSTEM.
3) Other training as required by other Sections of these Specifications.
4) Coordinate all training with University’s Representative.
u. Furnish temporary equipment, and wiring, as needed during the construction phase.
Remove temporary items after use.

Section 26 00 10- 2
v. Perform demolition and removal of electrical equipment and materials, as indicated on

Drawings, complete.
w. Guarantee: Refer to General Conditions, for information regarding the 1-year Guarantee
to Repair Period. For items requiring longer guarantee periods, refer to individual
Sections of the Specifications.
x. On completion of the installation, furnish operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals in
digital Optical Character Recognition PDF file format. O&M manuals shall include
complete instructions from manufacturer for operation and maintenance of equipment
and devices, and shall be furnished for lighting sensors, lighting fixtures, lighting
controls, power distribution equipment, fire alarm system, emergency generator
system, and other items in this Division. Each manual shall include installation and
operations instructions, all reports, calculations, settings, as-built shop drawings, and
product data, wiring diagrams, guarantees, calculations, settings for each device, all
tabulated with device designations, locations and settings available, and selected for
each device.
y. Operation and Maintenance manual shall include instructions, all respective reports,
and all its contents in digital Optical Character Recognition PDF file format. Include
names, addresses, telephone number of Contractors. Submit organized manuals on
each system in separate PDF files. Contents of O&M manual shall be as approved by
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The Following Abbreviations Apply to All Sections of Division 26:
1. AC: Alternating Current.
2. AIC: Ampere Interrupting Capacity.
3. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act.
4. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute.
5. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
6. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
7. AWG: American Wire Gauge.
8. CCR: California Code of Regulations.
9. CBC: California Building Code.
10. CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturers.
11. CEC: California Electrical Code.
12. DC: Direct Current.

Section 26 00 10- 3
13. ETL: Electrical Testing Laboratory.
14. FS: Federal Specification.
15. HID: High Intensity Discharge.
16. HP: Horsepower.
17. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
18. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
19. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
20. NETA: National Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
21. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
22. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act.
23. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
24. UBC: Uniform Building Code.
25. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
26. CSFM: California State Fire Marshal.
1. Contractor shall ensure work is performed in accordance with the certification and other
requirements of California Labor Code Section 108. See Section 01 41 00.
2. Work performed under this Division shall be installed by craftsmen skilled in the trade
involved, and apprentices as indicated in the General Conditions.
3. Furnish all control equipment for electrically operated equipment except when equipment is
furnished with control equipment.
4. Furnish all electrical Work required for the service and connection of electrically operated
and controlled equipment specified in other Divisions of the Specification.
5. All electrical power, signal, alarm and communication systems shall be complete, tested,
and ready for use.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

Section 26 00 10- 4
1. Codes and Ordinances: In addition to the requirements of Division 01, all materials shall
bear the UL label.
C. Electrical Acceptance Tests:
1. General Scope:
a. Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing laboratory for the purpose of
performing inspections and tests of installed Work as herein specified and specified in
other Sections of Division 26 of these Specifications.
b. The testing laboratory shall furnish all material, equipment, labor and technical
supervision to perform such tests and inspections.
c. All tests shall be performed in compliance with the recommendations and requirements
of the NETA, per Applicable Code Requirements.
d. Upon completion of the tests and inspections noted in these specifications, a label shall
be attached to all serviced devices. These labels shall indicate date serviced and the
service company responsible.
e. The tests and inspections shall determine suitability for continued reliable operation.
f. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of University's Representative and
University's Electrical Inspector.
2. Qualifications of Testing Laboratory:

a. The testing laboratory shall meet the Federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing
laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907.
b. Contractor shall submit proof of the above qualifications.
c. All instruments used to evaluate electrical performance shall meet NETA's Specifications
for Test Instruments.
3. Test Reports Shall Include the Following:

a. Description of equipment tested.
b. Description of test, and applicable test standards used.
c. Test results.
d. Conclusions and recommendations, including corrective measures performed.
e. Appendix, including appropriate test forms, and related NETA Specifications.
f. List of test equipment used and calibration date.
4. A copy of all test reports shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance PDF submittal.
5. All tests to be performed and test reports submitted for review by University’s
Representative, minimum of ten (10) working days prior to energization of equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. These requirements below shall apply to each submittal for Division 26 products and
materials.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Refer to Division 01 for procedures.

Section 26 00 10- 5
2. In addition, forward all submittals in related groups. Schedule submittal package

submissions so that review time for each package does not overlap the review time for
another package. Individual or incomplete submittals are not acceptable.
3. Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade name, number, size, rating, or whatever
other data is necessary to properly identify and check materials and equipment.
4. Identify each submittal item by reference to Specification Section paragraph in which item is
specified, or Drawing and Detail number, identify deviations, if any.
5. Organize submittals in same sequence as they appear in Specification Sections, articles or

paragraphs.
6. Shop Drawings shall show physical arrangement, construction details and finishes:
a. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned where applicable.
b. Catalog cuts and published material shall be included to supplement scale drawings.
7. Internal wiring diagrams of equipment shall show wiring as actually furnished for this
project, with all optional items clearly identified as included or excluded. Clearly identify
external wiring connections. Identify and obliterate superfluous material.
8. Submittal literature, drawings and wiring diagrams shall be specifically applicable to this
Project and shall not contain extraneous material or optional choices. Clearly mark
literature to indicate the proposed item. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to
those items listed in individual Sections:
a. Include all physical and performance data, including materials, manufacturer's names,
model numbers, weights, sizes, capacities, performance curves, finishes, colors,
accessories, installation instructions, and all other data required to completely describe
equipment and to indicate complete compliance with Specifications and Drawings.
b. Include with complete submittals above, complete, large scale, dimensioned Shop
Drawings, certified by manufacturer, of all major equipment and other equipment as
directed by University’s Representative.
c. In addition to the requirements of Division 01, the following are required:
a) Time Schedules for Submission and Ordering: The Contractor shall prepare,
review and coordinate his schedule of submissions carefully, determining the
necessary lead time for preparing, submitting, checking, ordering and delivery of
all materials and equipment for timely arrival. The Contractor shall be
responsible for conformance with the overall construction schedule.
b) Submittals shall be reviewed for general compliance with Specifications only.
The Contractor shall be responsible for deviations from the Drawings or
Specifications and for errors or omissions of any sort in submittals.
c) Submit for review to University’s Representative, a complete list of material and
equipment proposed for the project, including manufacturers' names and
catalog numbers. Submission on all materials and equipment shall be made,
even if they are as specified or shown on the Drawings.
d) The Contractor shall add and sign the following paragraph on all equipment and
materials submitted for review. "It is hereby certified that the equipment,
material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be

Section 26 00 10- 6
incorporated into the project; is in compliance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications and can be installed in the allocated spaces." Failure to add the
above written statement for compliance shall result in return of submittals to be
reviewed.
e) Failure to include the properly labeled flash drive in each Submittal binder shall
result in Submittal being returned without review.
f) The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied per
Applicable Code Requirements for fit prior to submitting Shop Drawings for
approval.
g) Where current limiting devices are specified, submit technical data to
substantiate adequate protection of equipment cascaded downstream.
Submittals shall not be reviewed unless supporting calculations and data are
submitted therewith.
h) For any material specified to meet Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or trade
standards, furnish the manufacturer's or vendor's certification that the material
furnished for the work does in fact equal or exceed such Specifications.
i) Submit on all materials and equipment even if they are as specified or shown on
the Drawings.
j) Resubmittals shall include written response to each item in review of previous
submittal.
9. The Contractor shall furnish (1) digital copy (PDF or other standard file type approved by
University’s Representative) of O&M manuals. Binders will not be accepted.
a. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit to the University’s Representative, complete
and at one time, prior to acceptance of the installation, manufacturer's instructions for
operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists,
shop drawings, product data, all test reports, and installation instructions. Each set is
indexed and identified. Segregate sections pertaining to power, lighting, fire alarm, etc.
Each package shall include a CD Rom disk containing electronic PDF files, of all the
contents in the manual.
1) Service and operating manuals for all equipment.
2) Three phase voltage tests at each panelboard and each motor location.
3) Grounding system tests.
4) Polarity test each receptacle connection.
5) Test reports.
10. Special Submissions:

a. Test reports for the following:
1) Ground fault devices, including ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles.
2) Megger Readings: Ground system and motors.
3) Voltage Readings: Distribution, service and motors.
4) Emergency power and lighting systems.
5) Fire Alarm system.
6) Field inspection reports by manufacturer’s engineer confirming that the respective
equipment is installed correctly, and it meets the manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Qualifications of electrical testing laboratory. Refer to Section 1.3C.2 above.

Section 26 00 10- 7
1.5 SUBSTITUITIONS
A. In addition to the requirements of Division 01, should the Contractor submit a manufacturer
under the “or equal” provisions of these specifications, the following information shall be
included in the submittal:
1. A complete statement addressing the systems compliance with each requirement noted in
each paragraph of this section, and each paragraph of specification section for respective
equipment.
B. For equipment other than that specified, the Contractor shall supply proof that such substitute
equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance and quality of the specified
equipment; include the technical data of the specified equipment and that of the substitute
equipment, as well as a tabular comparison between the two equipment’s. The submittal
acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of obligation to furnish the specified equipment or
equal.
C. Should the substituted equipment be determined not to be in compliance with this

specification at any time during the course of the project, it will be the Contractor’s
responsibility to remove non-compliant substitute products and furnish the specified products
at Contractor’s expense, with no additional compensation by University.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Submit, in AutoCAD (version as approved by University’s Representative), a set of the

coordination drawings, showing electrical, mechanical, plumbing, structural and architectural
for the Project, indicating coordination of electrical equipment and installation, with all work
specified in other sections. Refer to Division 01. Schedule the submittal of the Coordination
Drawings, to allow adequate review time, and not impact project construction schedule.
B. Furnish the following information on, but not limited to scale drawings in plan, sections with
minimum ½” scale or ¼” scale as appropriate:
1. Vertical and horizontal conduit type, route and size (for interior and exterior installation).
2. Cabinet type, locations and size.
3. Junction box type, location and size.
4. Electrical equipment type, location and size.
5. Pullbox type, locations and size (both internal and external).
6. Lighting fixture type, location and size, and connection details.
7. All sound and communication systems electrical boxes and equipment.
8. Access panels.

Section 26 00 10- 8
9. Fire alarm system, including conduit layouts.
10. Telecommunication, telephone, data, and access control systems conduit layouts.
11. Submit in time so as not to impact project schedule.
1.7 LOCATION AND ROUTING
A. The Drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired location or arrangement of conduit runs,
outlets, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as possible. Execute the Work so as
to secure the best possible installation in the available space and overcome local difficulties
due to space limitations or interference with structural conditions.
B. Locations shown on architectural ceiling Drawings or on wall elevations shall take precedence
over electrical drawing locations.
C. Verify dimensions and the correct location of equipment before proceeding with the roughing-
in of connections.
D. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated.
Before proceeding with any Work, check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc., with the
Drawings to see that the equipment being installed shall fit into the spaces furnished.
E. Locations of Openings: Locate all chases, shafts and openings required for the installation of
the electrical Work during framing of the structure. Do any cutting and patching required due
to incorrectly located or omitted openings as approved and at no additional cost to University.
Cutting or drilling in any structural member is prohibited without prior written approval of
F. Access to Equipment. Locate starters, switches, receptacles, and pull boxes to provide easy
access for operation, repair, and maintenance and, if concealed, furnish access doors.
G. Rough-in locations for all electrical equipment shall be determined from approved shop
drawings or from the equipment itself and shall be coordinated with work specified in other
sections.
1.8 MATERIAL STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment shall be new. All power distribution equipment shall be approved
for seismic zone and requirements.
B. All Work shall comply with Applicable Codes Requirements. Division 01, including:
1. NEMA.
2. ANSI.

Section 26 00 10- 9
3. IEEE.
4. ICEA.
5. CEC
6. UL.
C. Items for similar application shall be of the same manufacturer.
D. The label of listing by UL shall appear on all materials and equipment for which standards have
been established by the agency.
E. Where Codes listed in Division 01, establish label or approval requirements, furnish all
materials and equipment with either the required labels affixed or the necessary written
approval.
F. Provide the type and quantity of electrical materials and equipment necessary to complete
Work and all systems in operation, tested and ready for use.
G. Provide all incidental items that belong to the Work described and which are required for
complete systems.
1.9 TESTING
A. Upon completion of the Work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test for
each system approval. Conduct the test in the presence of University's Representative and
University's Electrical Inspector. Demonstrate all systems and equipment to operate in
accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from all electrical
and mechanical defects. Furnish all systems free from short circuits and incorrect grounds and
show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than 250,000
ohms. Test all circuits and terminations for correct neutral connection, as well as phase
connections.
B. Conduct resistance to ground tests by journeymen electricians and the required number of
apprentices to measure resistance to ground at all grounding electrodes. If the resistances
exceed values specified in Section 26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS, perform all corrective measures as approved and at no additional cost to University.
C. Prior to energizing any motors, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report
immediately to University's Representative if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean.
D. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions.
E. Complete all tests prior to final field observation of Project, including corrective Work based
on the results of the tests.

Section 26 00 10- 10
1.10 TRAINING
A. Furnish a period of eight (8) hours for the necessary training programs and instructions to
University's personnel, unless indicated otherwise in individual specification sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Whenever possible, all materials and equipment used in the installation of the work shall be of
the same brand or manufacturer for each class of material or equipment and be U.L. Listed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Be responsible for and install electrical equipment as specified in individual specification

sections, and in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, and per Applicable Code
Requirements, for safe installation.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. General:
1. The work involves demolition of existing conduit, conductors and equipment.
2. Electrical drawings show demolition, relocation, removal or rerouting of existing equipment.
3. Coordinate with University’s Representative regarding specific items that are to be

demolished or removed and retained, otherwise, all demolished or Contractor removed
materials become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated. Contractor
shall be responsible for removing such materials from the job site. Refer to Division 01.
4. Contractor shall restore or maintain continuity of circuits to outlets or devices that are to
remain.
5. Where existing panelboards are to be replaced, the Contractor shall reconnect existing
branch circuit homeruns (that are to remain) to the new replacement panelboard.
6. Where existing panelboards are to be relocated, the Contractor shall extend all existing
circuits that are to remain to the new panelboard location.
7. Contractor to dispose of hazardous waste, including ballasts and lamps, per Applicable Code
Requirements.

Section 26 00 10- 11
8. Furnish temporary equipment and wiring as required.
9. Existing materials and construction that are not to be demolished shall be protected. Any
such materials that are damaged shall be replaced with new to match existing.
B. Equipment: All the existing equipment to be removed shall be disassembled or cut into pieces
to allow removal through available existing openings.
C. Conduits (Feeder and Branch): Conduit shall be capped for all abandoned installations and
indicated on As-Built drawings.
3.3 SERVICE CONTINUITY
A. Refer to Division 01 for "shut-down" information.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protection: Fully protect all finished parts of the materials and equipment against physical
damage from whatever cause during the progress of this work and until completion.
B. During construction, cap all conduits so as to prevent the entrance of sand and dirt.
C. Cleaning: After installation has been completed, the Contractor shall clean all systems as
follows:
1. Equipment with factory finish: Clean exterior thoroughly to remove grease, oil, plaster,
cement and dirt, and leave surfaces clean and polished.
2. Equipment to be painted: Clean exterior of piping and equipment exposed in completed

structure, removing rust, plaster, cement and dirt by wire brushing. Remove grease, oil and
similar materials by wiping with clean rags and solvents.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Coordinate painting with University's Representative.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Include all cutting, patching, painting, removal of existing construction, and reconstruction of
same, for completing the electrical installation. Coordinate with architectural and electrical
drawings for scope of demolition. Adjust conduits within these areas so they are concealed.
B. Sleeves and Inserts: Provide all sleeves, inserts, and openings necessary for the installation of
the electrical work. Sleeves shall be as approved by University’s Representative.
C. Openings for All Electrical Equipment Shall be Field Verified:

Section 26 00 10- 12
1. Special forming, recesses, chases, and curbs, as necessary for the correct reception and
installation of the electrical equipment, as shown on the Drawings, are specified in other
Divisions.
2. The Contractor shall examine all Drawings to ascertain that correct provisions have been
made for the work. If such provisions are not made in time, the Contractor shall bear all
extra costs incurred in later cutting and patching to accommodate this work.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 00 10- 13
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
A. Refer to Division 01 for procedures and Section 26 00 10, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
for additional requirements.
B. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing: Contractor shall pay for the services of a qualified testing laboratory to perform
tests. Refer to Division 01, and Section 26 00 10, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS, for
detailed requirements, in addition to requirements of this Section.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled per CEC.
C. Comply with CEC.
02/25/2020 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

Section 26 05 19- 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Insulated wire conductors for circuit voltage, 600 volts or less, shall be copper, minimum size
#12 AWG. Control wiring may be #14 AWG minimum except where otherwise shown.
B. Conductors shall have UL approved 600 volt insulation of type specified below or elsewhere in
the Specifications.
1. Branch Circuits - Lighting and Power:
a. #10 AWG and smaller, solid wire Type THW or THHN/THWN, THHN.
b. #8 AWG and larger, stranded Type THW or THHN/THWN.
C. Connectors for #10 conductor and smaller UL listed for 600 volts, UL approved for use with
copper, cone shaped, expandable coil spring insert, insulated with a nylon shell and two wings
placed opposite each other to serve as a "built-in" wrench. Shell shall be molded one-piece as
manufactured by Ideal Industries, Wing Nut, or equal.
D. Connectors for #8 AWG and larger shall be screw pressure lugs made of high strength
structural aluminum alloy and UL approved for use with copper wire as manufactured by
Burndy “Versitaps”, or equal.
E. All conductor insulation shall be color coded to indicate phase leg, voltage and use. If color
coded wire is unavailable, color banding (minimum 2 inches wide) shall be required where
conductors are visible. This color coding is acceptable only in size AWG #8 and larger.
F. Conductor insulation type, size and UL approval shall be printed with permanent white paint
on all conductor insulation continually repeating.
G. All conductors shall be new and shall have been manufactured within 12 months of the date
of delivery to the Project site and continuously stored where protected from the heat or
weather.
H. Vertical cable supports shall be O.Z. Gedney Type M, or equal.
I. Insulating Tape - Plastic Self-Adhering: 3M, Scotch No. 3, or equal.
J. Conductor tags shall be premarked, self-adhesive wrap-around cloth type. Manufacturer T&B
Easy Code, or equal.
K. Conductor ties shall be plastic with cinching holders. Manufacturers T&B Ty-Rap, or equal.
L. Conductor sealant shall be silicone type Dow-Corning No. 795, or equal.

Section 26 05 19- 2
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC, by a
B. Comply with CEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Following Color Code Prevails for All Branch Circuits and Feeders:
1. Neutral: White for 208/120, white for 480/277.

2. Ground: Green.
3. Phase A: Black for 208/120, brown for 480/277.
4. Phase B: Red for 208/120, yellow for 480/277.
5. Phase C: Blue for 208/120, purple for 480/277.
6. Three-way travelers - orange.
7. Switch legs same color as phase leg.
B. For conductors installed in areas subjected to temperatures exceeding 140ºF, including

terminating in incandescent lighting fixtures and installed through or into housing containing
ballasts, provide type THHN.
C. Not more than three lighting or convenience outlet circuits in one conduit unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Unless specifically indicated, separate raceways for conductors of 120/208 and 277/480 volt
systems, except where 480 volt motor branch circuit wiring and related 120V control wiring.
Separate raceways for emergency system conductors.
E. For conductors installed in exposed conduit outside of buildings and conduit within or just
under roofing material, provide type THHN.
F. Control Circuits for Mechanical Equipment: Use 600 volt UL Type THWN conductors except
where subject to abnormally high temperatures such as on or near boilers. Under these
conditions, use UL Type THHN.
G. For control wiring, conform to the wiring diagrams shown on the mechanical Drawings and
the manufacturer’s wiring diagrams to control the equipment in the manner specified in
Division 22 and Division 23. Color code all control wiring.
H. Tape all connections made with non-insulated type connectors with insulating tape to 150
percent of the insulating value of conductor insulation.

Section 26 05 19- 3
I. Each circuit shall correspond to the branch circuit number indicated on the panel schedule
shown on the Drawings unless otherwise approved by University's Representative.
J. Where conductors in conduit pass through exterior walls, a sealing compound of

moisture-resistant material shall be applied in the ends of the conduits to seal around the
conductors. Sealant shall be Dow-Corning No. 795, or equal.
K. Tag all conductors of power circuits and the various signal and sound systems. Conductors
shall be tagged in each junction box, pull box, wireways or auxiliary gutter and at each device,
motor outlet, panelboard, switchboard or other conductor termination. Tag shall show feeder
number, size, phase and origin.
L. Megger tests shall be taken on all feeder conductors and on all conductors for motors over 15
HP. Tests shall be made prior to connection of equipment. Conductors testing below
manufacturer's standard shall be replaced at Contractor's expense.
M. Wiring within all equipment enclosures shall be neatly grouped and tied together.
N. Pigtails shall be extended from branch wiring in outlet boxes for attachment to devices.
Loops in through wiring shall not be acceptable.
O. Conductors in outlet boxes shall have a minimum of 8 inches of extra conductors.
P. Tag all conductors in pull boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, and wireways, indicating panel
board and circuit number.
Q. Tag all feeder conductors with designation (power source and circuit number) in each
equipment enclosure.
R. Provide acoustic pliable approved sealant on conductors entering switchboards, to prevent

noise transmission.
S. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
T. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
U. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
V. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceway.

Section 26 05 19- 4
3.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. Coordinate the application of firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly with University's
Representative.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare reports.
1. Visual and mechanical inspection.
a. Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection.

b. Torque test cable connection. Tighten connections in accordance with industry
standards.
2. Electrical tests.
a. Perform insulation resistance test of each cable with respect to ground and
adjacent cables.
B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 05 19- 5
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Data:
1. Wire and cable.
2. Splice details.
3. Connectors.
C. Field quality-control reports.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following:
a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding

connections for separately derived systems.
1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective
action if values do not.
2) Include recommended testing intervals.
02/25/2020 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 26- 1
A. Testing: Contractor shall pay for the services of a qualified testing laboratory to perform the
specified tests. Refer to Division 01 and Section 26 0010, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS,
for detailed requirements, in addition to requirements of this Section.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC, by a
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be soft-drawn stranded copper conductors.
B. Buried or concealed joints shall be made by exothermic welding. All such joints shall be
inspected and approved by University's Representative.
C. System grounding conductors shall be a minimum of #4/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated
and shall be continuous without joints or splices.
D. Bonding conductors shall be in accordance with the CEC.
E. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, ¼ by 2 inches in cross section, drilled
and tapped with 3/8” coarse thread (2 rows at 2” centers), with insulators.
F. Ground connection plates shall be 4-hole, Burndy Type YGF29-4N, O.Z. or equal.
G. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.
H. Bolted Connectors for Conductors to Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure type, with
at least two bolts.
I. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the codes as listed in Division 01, provide grounding and
bonding in accordance with all requirements of CEC, Drawings and following descriptions.

Section 26 05 26- 2
B. Metallic conduits, wireways, metal enclosures of busways, electrical equipment housing and
all non-current metallic parts shall be grounded. The metallic conduit system shall be used for
equipment and enclosure grounding but not as a system ground conductor.
1. Low resistance contacts, with high mechanical strength, shall be made between
conduits and boxes and at all panels, panelboards, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes,
junction and pull boxes and wherever the conduit run is broken. Permanently and
effectively ground all conduits, fixtures, motors, and other apparatus and equipment.
C. All conduit stub-ups shall be grounded and where multiple stub-ups are made within an
equipment enclosure, such as a switchboard, they shall be equipped with grounding bushings
and bonded together and to the enclosure and the enclosure ground bus and connect to cold
water ground.
D. All feeder runs and branch circuit wiring in non-metallic conduit shall carry a green TW
insulated CEC sized ground conductor per circuit correctly connected for electrical ground
continuity.
E. An equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each raceway with branch circuit wiring,
adjust conduit size as required per CEC Requirements.
F. Each feeder conduit shall be provided with an equipment ground conductor with 600 volt
insulation, adjust conduit size as required per CEC Requirements.
G. Where ungrounded conductors are increased in size from sizes shown on drawings, the
ground conductor shall also be increased in size proportionately.
H. Flexible conduit shall not be used as a ground path. Include CEC sized green conductor in all
flex conduit.
I. Provide CEC-approved bonding devices, fittings or jumpers at expansion fitting, isolation

sections or wherever continuity of ground is broken.
J. Provide bonding devices, fittings, jumpers, at expansion fittings, isolation sections or wherever
continuity of ground is broken.
K. Install grounding and bonding conductors with sufficient slack to prevent breaking due to
settlement and movement of conductors at attached points.
L. The electrical ground electrodes and its connections shall be tested.
M. Resistance to ground for electrical systems shall not exceed 5 ohms measurement and
additional grounding shall be provided to attain this value or less.
N. The resistance to ground for all systems shall be measured by the "direct" method or
“fall-of-potential” method.
1. Perform fall of potential test per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 9.04 on the main
grounding electrode or system.

Section 26 05 26- 3
2. Perform the two (2) point method test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to determine the
ground resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical
equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutral points.
3. The earth electrode under test must be far enough away from the water pipe system to
be outside its sphere of influence. Rule of thumb: Distance from the earth-electrode
system to the water pipe system shall be 10 times the radius of the electrode or grid to
obtain a measurement within an accuracy of (±) 10%.
A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
1. Conduct resistance-to-ground tests to measure resistance-to-ground at all grounding

electrodes. Perform tests before the slabs of affected areas are poured in order that
corrective measures, if needed, may be taken.
2. If the resistances exceed values specified, perform all corrective measures approved by
University Representative.
3. Perform “fall of potential” tests on the main grounding electrode system per IEEE
Standard No. 81, Section 9.04.
4. Perform the two (2) point method test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to determine the
ground resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical
equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutral points.
5. Visual and mechanical inspection of all system connections.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 05 26- 4
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a California Registered Professional Engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times
the applied force.
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a California Registered Professional Engineer. Show
fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include product data for components.
3. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
02/25/2020 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 29- 1
A. Comply with CEC.
B. All seismic restraining devices shall comply with the current seismic requirements of the State
of California.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches on center, in at
least 1 surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for
use with those items.
2. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles.
3. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in CEC Chapter 3.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping
pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable
iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:

Section 26 05 29- 2
1. Verify suitability of fasteners in subparagraph below for use in lightweight concrete or

concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
3. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
4. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
5. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
6. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
7. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
8. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit

dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Coordinate requirements for steel shapes and plates with University's
Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with CEC Chapter 3 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by CEC. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for
1-1/2-inchand smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

Section 26 05 29- 3
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CEC Chapter 3 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in CEC, EMT may be supported
by openings through structure members, as permitted in CEC.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and

fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following
methods unless otherwise indicated by CEC:
1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with
lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick
or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts.
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by
means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Coordinate installation requirements of site-fabricated metal supports with University's

Representative.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

Section 26 05 29- 4
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
B. Touchup: Coordinate requirements for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal with University's
Representative.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 05 29- 5
SECTION 26 05 33- RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Boxes and enclosures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
B. Product Data: Wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
A. Refer to Division 01 for procedures and Section 26 0010, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
B. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
3. Coordinate access to boxes and enclosures with accessible ceiling panel locations, as
required. Submit locations to University’s Representative for approval.
02/25/2020 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 33- 1
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Sleeves shall be zinc coated galvanized steel pipe or 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal.
Manufacturer: RK Industries, or equal.
B. Anchors not cast into concrete shall be expansion shield type, Thomas & Betts Corp., or equal.
C. Conduit seals shall be 3M, or equal, with sealing compound.
D. Sealant: Fire rated equal to wall or ceiling penetrated as manufactured by 3M-Fire Barrier
2001 Silicone STV Foam, or equal.
E. Expansion couplings shall be Thomas & Betts Corp., or equal, complete with bonding jumper.
F. Conduit unions shall be Thomas & Betts Corp., or equal.
G. All conduit fittings shall be insulated throat type.
H. Fittings shall be compatible with raceways and suitable for us and location.
I. Anchors not cast into concrete shall be expansion shield type, Phillips “Red Head” or equal.
2.2 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Metallic Conduits and Fittings: Standard weight steel that is hot-dipped galvanized, or
sherardized both inside and out, with threaded connectors and couplings. Electrogalvanizing is
not permitted. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) is not permitted.

Section 26 05 33- 2
B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings: Tubing of high-grade steel with exterior protective
coating of zinc, applied by the electrogalvanized process. Interior of surface coated with
aluminum lacquer or enamel. EMT shall be dipped in a chromic acid bath to chemically form a
corrosion-resistant protective coating of zinc over galvanized surface. Fittings shall be
watertight compression type, wrench tightened connectors and couplings.
C. Flexible Steel Conduits: Conduit manufactured from single strip, standard weight steel
galvanized on all four sides prior to conduit fabrication. Flexible aluminum conduit shall not be
allowed.
D. Flexible Conduit Connectors and Couplings: Die cast fittings of the type that screw into the
inside of the conduit with threaded edges at 90º to the fitting body to insure a force fit.
E. Flexible Liquidtight Steel Conduits and Fittings: Manufactured from single strip standard
weight steel, galvanized on all four sides prior to conduit fabrication, and furnished with an
extruded PVC cover. Use liquidtight fittings to achieve positive ground continuity including
ground conductor. Flexible conduit shall be cut at right angles for installation.
F. Aluminum conduit shall not be used.
2.3 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized pressed steel and plugged holes and shall be hot
dipped galvanized or sherardized. All boxes shall be of CEC size for the number of wires or
conduits passing through or terminating therein, but in no case shall any box be less than
4-inch square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless specifically noted as smaller on the Drawings. For
boxes concealed in walls or ceiling, provide the solid gang, galvanized or sherardized pressed
steel knockout type. Sectional boxes shall not be used.
B. Lighting fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture-supporting device, as required by
the unit to be installed.
C. Lighting fixture outlet boxes installed on the T-grid shall be provided with (4) T-bar slots.
D. Exposed boxes in mechanical areas or exposed to weather shall be cast iron weatherproof
boxes with grounding terminal, threaded hubs and gaskets, Type "FS" or "FD" Series with 3/4
inch and 1” hubs, manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Pot metal boxes are not
acceptable.
E. Telephone and wireless connection outlets shall be a minimum of 4-11/16 inches square by
2-1/8 deep.
F. Outlet boxes in hazardous areas, and outdoor locations, shall be cast metal with threaded
hubs, approved for class of hazardous area where installed.
G. J-boxes for LCD panel shall be Legrand/ P&S TV2MW, Hubbell Advantage NSAV62M or equal.

Section 26 05 33- 3
H. Switch Outlets: Use solid gang boxes for three or more switches for mounting behind a
common single plate, with barriers to separate voltages where required.
I. Fire alarm boxes shall be 4-inch square with plaster rings to suit type of device, painted red,
inside and outside.
J. Condulets shall be cast iron with threaded hubs for 3/4 inch and 1-inch conduits. Type "FS" or
"FD" Series, manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, or equal.
K. Floor boxes shall be cast metal with adjustable height boxes and shall comply with U.L. 514A.
Manufacturer: Legrand Wiremold PN: 887B and 885B and Hubbell No. B-2537 and B-2529;
for flush duplex outlets Legrand Wiremold PN: 895 and Hubbell No. S3925 brass duplex flap
cover, or equal.
L. Acoustic pads shall be pliable, putty-like pads, 1/4 inch thick. Manufacturer: Harry A. Lowry
Associates, or equal.
M. Fire rated putty pads for boxes, U.L. Listed, located in fire-rated walls, ceilings, and partitions,
Hilti #CP617, or equal.
N. Sheet steel pullboxes shall be fabricated of the gauge of sheet metal required by the CEC,
galvanized after fabrication, furnished with required knockouts and removable screw cover.
Finish with prime coat ready for painting, where exposed to public view; ANSI 61 light gray in
other locations. Covers for pullboxes larger than 30" shall be two sections with handles.
O. Provide cast iron pullboxes with gasketed screw cover and drilled and tapped holes as
required. Provide boxes as manufactured by O.Z. Gedney, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. General
1. The size of the conduits for the various circuits shall be as indicated on the Drawings and
as required by CEC for the size and number of conductors to be pulled therein. CEC
requirements shall prevail where fill is not shown on Drawings.
2. Open ends of conduits shall be capped or plugged until ready to pull in conductors.
3. Deliver conduits to site in standard length and store where protected from moisture and
weather.
4. No conduit shall be smaller than ¾ inch for power and 1 inch for telecommunications
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
5. Complete raceway installation before stating conductor installation.
6. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
7. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree beds in any conduit run. For
communication conduit, fewer bends are allowed.

Section 26 05 33- 4
8. Install pull wires in all empty raceways, Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200 lb. tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end
or pull wire.
9. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved and accessible locations as required
by CEC and fill with listed sealing compound.
10. Raceway terminations at locations subject to moisture or vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
11. Use insulated bushings and locknuts on all conduits where entering pullboxes, junction
boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets and similar enclosures, and for all signal and telephone
conduits terminated in cabinet or backboards.
12. Tag all empty conduits at each accessible end with a permanent tag identifying the
purpose of the conduit and the location of the other end. In wet, corrosive outdoor or
underground locations, use brass, bronze, or copper 16 gauge tags or lead tags secured
to conduit ends with #16 or larger galvanized wire. Inscribe on the tags, with steel punch
dies, clear and complete identifying information.
13. Provide expansion and deflection fittings where two rigidly supported conduits may
move in relation to each other at expansion or seismic joint crossings.
14. Ream the ends of all conduits.
15. Paint fire alarm conduits with a 1-inch wide rend band every 5 feet of run.
16. Seal all conduits from exterior outlets at first interior junction to prevent moisture from
entering the building through the conduits.
17. In order to prevent water from coming in, all conduits entering buildings, substations,
and other structures shall have seals between the conduits and the structure walls. The
space between the cables and conduit inside walls shall be sealed as well as using
separable conduit sealing bushings manufactured by 3M or equal. Empty conduits shall
be securely plugged or capped to prevent water seeping.
18. A separate conduit shall be installed for each homerun indicated on the Drawings.
19. Sleeves: Where conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs or metal deck
floors, provide sleeves of ample size to permit installation of conduits. Sleeves extend 2
inches above floor surfaces. Verify location with University’s Representative.
20. Finish Around Sleeves: Rough edges shall be finished smooth. Space between conduits
and sleeves where conduit passes through exterior walls shall be sealed to permit
movement of conduit but prevent entrance of water. Space between conduit and
sleeves where conduits pass through fire rated interior walls and slabs shall be sealed
with approved materials to provide a fire barrier conforming to the requirement of the
codes as listed in Division 01.
21. Install all exposed conduits parallel to and perpendicular to the building structure.
22. Exposed conduits larger than 1” shall be suspended with pipe hangers. Pipe hangers for
individual conduits shall be Super Strut No. M-718-SR, or equal, malleable iron split pipe
rings, suspended from hanger rods. Rods shall be 3/8” for 2” and smaller conduits, and
½” for 2-1/2” and larger conduits. Hangers and racks shall be attached to concrete with
insets, set at the time the concrete is poured, and to steel members with beam clamps
or machine bolts.

Section 26 05 33- 5
23. Conduits 1” and smaller, in metal and stud partitions, shall be tied to the furring
channels with No. 12 gauge galvanized tie wire spaced not more than 5’ apart.
Conduits 1” and smaller for service to lighting fixtures (other than home runs) may be
supported in the same way. Conduits above metal channel lath and plaster ceilings for
other services and lighting home runs shall be supported.
24. Conduit clamps and hanger rods attached to concrete structures shall be secured by
machine bolts or rods screwed into anchors. Anchors not cast into the concrete shall be
of the expansion shield type, Phillips “Red Head”, or equal.
25. Wherever conduits extend through roof, provide approved galvanized sheet metal
flashing. Flashing shall extend 6” above roof.
26. Install conduit seals in all conduits entering or leaving hazardous areas, refrigerated
rooms and clean rooms. Use seals as appropriate at each specific opening.
27. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bends in conduits 2” or larger shall have
a radius of curvature of the inner edge, equal to not less than ten (10) times the internal
diameter of the conduit. Any deviations from this radius shall be approved by
University's Representative. Wire or cable bends in junction or pull boxes shall be made
with a "U" shape against the inside surface of the manholes, junction or pull boxes to
provide extra length for future redevelopment. Bends for 600-volt cable shall have a
radius of not less than five (5) times the diameter of the cable. Nesting of conduits shall
be made when two or more conduits are run in parallel. Telephone, data, wireless
systems, and television conduit runs shall not have more than two 90º radius bends.
All other conduit runs (below 600 volts) shall not have more than three 90º radius bends
between pull boxes, junction boxes or terminal cabinets. Provide boxes as required to
maintain limitation of bends.
28. Conduit shall not be run closer than 6” to any hot water pipe, and 12” from steam pipe,
and heater flue or vent.
29. Provide condulets for exposed runs of conduits where junctions, 90º bends or offsets
are required, whether such condulets are indicated on the Drawings or not. Conduit
bends shall not be permitted around the corners of beams, walls or equipment. All
condulet covers shall be accessible. Condulets 2” or larger shall be Crouse-Hinds Type
“LBD”, Appleton “LBD”, or equal.
30. All control apparatus, outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes, and other similar
equipment shall be installed and maintained in accessible positions and locations.
31. Conduits in furred spaces shall be routed to clear access openings.
32. Where steel conduits enter a concrete floor below a surface mounted panelboard, they
shall be encased in a concrete curb of sufficient height to match the height of the
finished base tile, and a minimum of 4 inches.
33. Holes for conduits through existing concrete walls or floors shall be made by the
"core-drill" method. Perform x-ray at slab/wall to locate existing steel in slab, to
minimize cutting of steel bars. Submit details to University’s Representative for review.
34. For Telecom, data, access system, cameras, card readers, building entry units, dimmer
devices or equipment, provide pull box for every 180 degrees of bending in conduit
route.
35. Provide independent support for all conduits rising from floor for motor connections if
over 18” above floor. Do not support to motor, to ductwork or mechanical equipment.
36. Conduits which are installed above dry type suspended ceilings shall not be secured to
ceiling support wires. Support such conduit independent of ceiling suspension systems.

Section 26 05 33- 6
37. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. Replace all deformed,
flattened or kinked conduits at Contractor's expense.
38. Support conduits 1” and larger with pipe clamps either suspended from structural slabs
with a rod at least 3/8” diameter with adjustable pipe ring or mounted on wall from
channel supports. Attach to concrete with Phillips “Red Head”, “Hilti”, or equal drilled
anchors. Where two or more conduits 1-1/2” and larger are suspended from ceiling, use
trapeze type hanger suspended from rods.
39. Where rigid metal conduits and electrical metallic tubing are supported from building
members, supports shall be installed as follows:
a. Conduit Sizes:
1) 3/4" to 1-1/4" Inclusive: Within 18" of each outlet and on either side of
couplings and fittings and at a spacing not to exceed 8’.
2) 1-1/2" and Larger: Within 3’ of each junction or pullbox and terminal
cabinet and at a spacing not to exceed 8’.
b. When rigid conduits are supported from trapezes, the supports shall be spaced
not more than 8’ apart.
c. Conduit trapezes shall consist of “Unistrut” or “Kindorf” channels and fittings, or
equal, in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendation.
40. Secure exposed conduit runs on concrete, plaster or other construction in place with
cast conduit clamps affixed with metallic expansion anchors, and cadmium plated
machine or lag screws.
41. Do not strap or fasten rigid conduits to mechanical equipment, or to equipment subject
to vibration or mounted on shock absorbing bases.
B. Rigid Steel Conduits
1. Use for all sizes where directly exposed to weather; where subject to abnormal
conditions of heat, cold, moisture, humidity, fumes and hazardous elements; where
installed exposed below 7-1/2’, in areas where subject to mechanical injury. Use for all
conduit in all electrical and mechanical equipment rooms; for low voltage (up to 600
volts) feeders inside of building and in concrete slabs on grade.
2. For all bends in conduits 1-1/4” and larger, use large radius factory made bends or field
fabricate with a power bender.
3. Cut threads on conduits to standard taper and to a length such that all bare metal
exposed by the threading operation shall be completely covered by the couplings or
fittings used. Securely tighten all threaded connections. The ends of all conduit shall be
cut square and reamed to full size with a tapered burring reamer. Treat any exposed
threads at box hubs with protective coating to prevent corrosion but maintain ground
continuity.
4. Use conduit unions to connect two rigidly held conduits. Running thread shall not be
accepted.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Section 26 05 33- 7
1. Use for all sizes up to and including 1-1/2 maximum trade size in dry locations as in
stud partitions and furred ceiling spaces.
2. Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet to panel except where rigid steel
conduits are required or indicated.
3. EMT shall not be run exposed. EMT shall not be installed in concrete.
4. EMT conduits shall not be used for, feeders to panelboards, motor control centers and
switchboards.
5. EMT shall not be used in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.
D. Flexible Steel Conduits:
1. Install for all attachments to transformers and motorized equipment or vibrating

equipment connections, minimum 36” long, or for connections to recessed fixtures from
junction or pullboxes. Maximum length for any application shall be 6’. Flexible conduits
shall be installed so they are slack-to-the-touch, so they are easily moveable.
2. Provide liquid tight flexible steel conduits with separate insulated, stranded copper
equipment ground conductors for connections in areas exposed to the weather, damp
or wet locations and connections to motors, variable frequency or speed drives,
transformer enclosures, and other vibrating equipment regardless of location.
3. Cut flexible conduits at right angles for installation.
4. Do not use flexible conduits for telephone, data, television, cameras, card readers,
building entry units, dimmer devices or equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Provide all boxes necessary for installation of the electrical Work in compliance with CEC
requirements. Coordinate access with accessible ceiling panels locations, as necessary.
B. Secure recessed boxes for ceiling outlets with galvanized steel bar hangers, specifically
manufactured for the purpose, to ceiling channels to permit the installation of the box.
C. Single gang wall outlet boxes located at metal studs shall be screwed to the stud with sheet
metal screws.
D. Single or multiple wall outlet boxes located between studs shall be secured in place to bar
hangers between studs.
E. Locate Hubbell Advantage NSAV62M, or equal, adjacent to each lab entrance door on the
interior of the laboratory for future OFOI Ambient and Occupancy sensor.
F. Nails shall not be used to support outlet boxes.
G. Secure recessed, pressed steel boxes in place with steel hangers specifically manufactured for
the purpose. Fully or partially hammer driven screws are not permitted.
H. Use extension rings with blank covers for making exposed conduit connections to flush wall or
ceiling boxes.

Section 26 05 33- 8
I. For boxes not specified or indicated, use boxes and mounting height as required by equipment
and recommended by equipment manufacturer.
J. For outlets flush in exterior walls, use weatherproof joints and connections all around.
Outlets shall have cast covers and be fitted with gaskets.
K. Do not locate outlet boxes not containing a circuit device in any public space. Place these
boxes in storage rooms, electrical closets, or above accessible ceilings.
L. Place boxes which must be exposed to public view in a location approved by University's
Representative. Provide covers or plates to match adjacent surfaces as approved by
M. Covers for flush outlets shall finish flush with plaster or other finished surface.
N. Where both emergency and normal circuits feed a single light fixture, provide an outlet box
for each system.
O. For boxes installed in concrete, provide the type specifically designed for the purpose to
prevent entrance of concrete and to permit placement of box and conduit without displacing
reinforcing steel.
P. Use boxes sized to legally accommodate all devices and conductors contained therein. Use no
box smaller than 4-inch square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Securely fasten all outlet boxes to the structural members. In concrete or drywall
construction, set recessed boxes so that the front of the plaster ring or front of the box for
those without plaster rings is not more than 1/4 inch behind the final finished surface. Set all
recessed boxes in other types of construction so that the fronts are flush with the finished
surface. Where these settings are not achieved, provide a 24-gauge or heavier galvanized steel
liner flush with finished surface.
R. Provide UL approved factory-made knockout seals in the boxes where unused knockouts are
not intact. Provide recessed threaded plugs in all unused hubs of cast boxes.
S. Label the cover of each accessible junction box with panel and circuit designation and
function, per specification Section 26 0553, IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
T. Multiple gang boxes containing switches on different circuits shall have barrier between such
switches.
U. Paint the outside and inside of all boxes containing fire alarm devices with red paint.
V. Where boxes are mounted back-to-back in any wall, the minimum offset shall be 24”,
edge-to-edge in fire rated walls, and minimum 16” with a stud in-between, in non-rated walls.
W. Provide acoustic pads around all outlet boxes and switches located in walls, and furring’s, and
fire rated pads in new fire rated construction.

Section 26 05 33- 9
X. Provide and maintain sufficient access and working space to permit access and safe
maintenance to all boxes.
Y. Paint panel and circuit number of all branch circuit wiring contained within box on the back
inside surface of box.
Z. Each box shall have a device plate or blank coverplate, as applicable.
AA. Pullboxes shall be installed in all conduit runs wherever indicated, and where necessary to
facilitate the pulling of wires and cables. Coordinate access with accessible ceiling panel
locations, as necessary.
BB. Securely fasten to structural members or channel supports, per Applicable Code
Requirements.
CC. Do not install pullboxes in public areas unless specifically indicated on Drawings.
DD. Install sheet metal pullboxes in dry protected locations.
EE. Provide access panels for pull boxes located above ceilings.
FF. Install cast iron pullboxes in wet and damp locations. Boxes shall be flush with grade or above
roof slab.
GG. Provide tight fitting bore or punch holes, through which rigid conduit shall be secured to boxes
with a double lock nut and bushing.
HH. Provide nameplates on covers of interior wireways and pullboxes, describing system and
function. Tag all conductors to identify circuits and origin, per specification Section 26 05 53,
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 05 33- 10
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification for conductors.
3. Warning labels and signs.
4. Instruction signs.
5. Equipment identification labels.
6. Miscellaneous identification products.
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with CEC.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements
in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those
required by 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
02/25/2020 Identification for Electrical Systems

Section 26 05 53- 1
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Printed Legend:
1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound
clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of
raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit
diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use
with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with CEC and 29 CFR 1910.145.

Section 26 05 53- 2
B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inchgrommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20
sq. inches and 1/8-inch-thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. Normal power
shall be white letters engraved in a black background. Emergency power shall be white letters
engraved in a red background. Dimensions shall be 3” wide by 1.5” tall. Line 1: Minimum letter
height shall be 1/4 inch. Lines 2 thru 4 minimum letter height shall be 3/16 inch.
B. Fabricated Nameplates Shall Clearly State the Following:
1. Manufacturer's name and equipment design ratings including current, voltage, KVA, HP,
bus bracing rating or as applicable.
2. System usage and purpose, system nominal voltage, equipment rating KVA, amperes,
HP and RPM as applicable. Designation data per Drawings or supplied with shop
drawings.
3. Panel designation, voltage, 3 or 4 wire, single of three phase, panel source name and
location of panel source. Example:

Section 26 05 53- 3
C. Manufacturer's Device Nameplates: Device usage, purpose, or circuit number; manufacturer

and electrical characteristic ratings including the following:
1. Circuit Breakers: Voltage, continuous current, maximum interrupting current and trip
current.
2. Switches: Voltage, continuous current, horsepower or maximum current switching. If
fused, include nameplate stating, "Fuses must be replaced with current limiting type of
identical characteristics."
3. Contactors: Voltage, continuous current, horsepower or interrupting current, and
whether "mechanically held" or "electrically held."
4. Motors: Rated voltage, full load amperes, frequency, phases, speed, horsepower, code
letter rating, time rating, type of winding, class and temperature.
5. Controllers: Voltage, current, horsepower and trip setting of motor running overcurrent
protection.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength: 50lb, minimum
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color coding.
B. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

Section 26 05 53- 4
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with screws and auxiliary
hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-footmaximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-footmaximum intervals in congested
areas.
G. Color Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600V and Less:
1. Colors for 208/120V Circuits;
a. Phase A: Black
b. Phase B: Red
c. Phase C: Blue
d. Neutral: White
e. Ground: Green
2. Colors for 480/277V Circuits;
a. Phase A: Brown
b. Phase B: Yellow
c. Phase C: Purple
d. Neutral: White
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with
color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands:
1. Fire Alarm System: Red.

2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.
3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.
4. Security System: Blue and yellow.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
7. Control Wiring: Green and red.

Section 26 05 53- 5
B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source
and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in
addition to the above.
C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three
branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each
ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.
D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source
and circuit number.
E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Baked-enamel warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment.
5. For equipment requiring workspace clearance according to CEC, apply to door or cover
of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
H. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch high letters for emergency instructions at equipment
used for power transfer.
I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master
units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems
include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless
equipment is provided with its own identification.

Section 26 05 53- 6
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Screwed-on engraved white laminated plastic sheet with

minimum 3/8 inch to ¾ inch black lettering for normal systems and red laminated
plastic sheet with lettering for emergency systems.
b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Identification labeling of some items listed below may be required by individual

Sections or by CEC.
b. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Enclosed switches.
e. Enclosed circuit breakers.
f. Enclosed controllers.
g. Contactors.
h. Monitoring and control equipment.
i. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.
J. Devices: Engrave on each device plate with 3/16” high block letters filled with black enamel
where noted and as follows:
1. Lock switch and switch with pilot light – device controlled.

2. Switch for fan, motor, unit heater – equipment controlled.
3. Switch where lights or equipment are out of sight – equipment controlled.
4. Switches in gangs of three or more – description of lights or equipment switched.
5. All receptacles and switches – panel and circuit number reflecting installed condition.
6. All equipment on the normal and emergency systems – panel and circuit number
reflecting installed condition.
7. Receptacles over 150V to ground and/or 30A and higher rating – voltage and ampere
rating.
8. Where wording is not indicated, allow for ten letters per device and use wording as
directed.
9. For switch cabinets engrave each device or furnish engraved nameplate.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 05 53- 7
SECTION 26 09 43 - DIGITAL NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Distributed Digital Lighting Control System: System includes:

1. Wired Digital Lighting Controls.
1.2 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Digital Lighting Management System shall accommodate the square-footage coverage

requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy
sensors, switches, and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system
parameters.
B. System shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
C. System shall be listed under UL sections 916 and/or 508.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FCC emission standards
B. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association.
D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Listings
E. UL 20 – General Use Switches, Plug Load Controls
F. UL 924 – Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
G. UL 2043 - Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products
Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.
1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Distributed Digital Lighting Control System shall accommodate the square-footage

coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital
occupancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required
lighting and electrical system parameters.
B. System shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
02/25/2020 Digital Network Lighting Controls

Section 26 09 43- 1
C. System shall comply with FCC emission standards specified in part 15, sub-part J for
commercial and residential application.
D. System shall be listed under UL sections 916 and/or 508.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Wiring diagrams a for the various components of the System specified
including:
1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to
be installed.
2. Show location of all devices, including at minimum sensors, load controllers, and
switches/dimmers for each area on reflected ceiling plans.
3. Provide room/area details including products and sequence of operation for each
room or area. Illustrate typical acceptable room/area connection topologies.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Title 24 Acceptance Testing Documentation: Submit Certification of Acceptance and

associated documentation for lighting control acceptance testing performed in
accordance with California Title 24 P6.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC
(NFPA 70), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to the University Representative,
and marked for intended use.
B. Occupancy sensors shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility

and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1 percent.
C. UL Approvals: Relay panels and accessory devices are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy
Management Equipment. Emergency relay panels shall be co-listed under UL 924
Emergency Lighting Equipment. All panels shall be UL 508, Industrial Control Panels.
D. Comply with NEC, NEMA, and FCC requirements for Class A applications.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction

Section 26 09 43- 2
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive
equipment:
1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. System General: Provide a WattStopper Digital Lighting Management System (DLM), or

equal, complete with all necessary enclosures, wiring, and system components to ensure
a complete and properly functioning system as indicated on the Drawings and specified
herein.
1. Space Control Requirements: Provide switches to control lighting in renovated
spaces. No occupancy sensing will be required due to safe issues inside the labs.
B. Equipment Required: Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this
section covers the following equipment.
1. Digital Lighting Management local network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system
(Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.
2. Digital Room Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three
relay plenum-rated controllers for on/off control. Selected models include 0-10 volt
or line voltage forward phase control dimming outputs and integral current
monitoring capabilities.
3. Digital Fixture Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one relay fixture-
integrated controllers for on/off/0-10V dimming control.
4. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton on/off,
dimming, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
5. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration and relay panel
programming provides two-way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and
allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to
30 feet away.
6. Programming and Configuration Software: Optional PC-native application capable
of accessing DLM, or equal control parameters within a room, for the local
network, via a USB adapter, or globally, for many segment networks
simultaneously, via BACnet/IP communication.

Section 26 09 43- 3
C. Local Network LMRJ-Series or equal: DLM local network is a free topology lighting control
physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a
building.
1. Features of the DLM local network include:
a. Plug n' Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors,
switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of
operation based upon the device attached.
b. Simple replacement of any device in the local DLM network with a standard
off the shelf unit without requiring significant commissioning, configuration
or setup.
c. Push n' Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including
binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the
digital devices in the local network.
d. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and
configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor
configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a
sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.
2. Digital room devices connect to the local network using pre-terminated Cat 5e
cables with RJ-45 connectors, which provide both data and power to room devices.
Systems that utilize RJ-45 patch cords but do not provide serial communication
data from individual end devices are not acceptable.
3. If manufacturer's pre-terminated Cat5e cables are not used for the installation each
cable must be individually tested and observed by authorized service
representative following installation.
2.2 DIGITAL LOAD CONTROLLERS (ROOM, FIXTURE CONTROLLERS)
A. Digital Load Controllers: Digital controllers for lighting zones, fixtures automatically bind
room loads to the connected control devices in the space without commissioning or the
use of any tools. Provide controllers to match the room lighting and plug load control
requirements. Controllers are simple to install, and do not have dip
switches/potentiometers, or require special configuration for standard Plug n' Go
applications. Control units include the following features
1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation
based upon the devices in the room.
2. Simple replacement using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room
controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf device.
3. Multiple room controllers connected in a local network must automatically
arbitrate with each other, without requiring any configuration or setup, so that
individual load numbers are assigned starting with load 1 to a maximum of 64,
assigned based on each controller's device ID's from highest to lowest.

Section 26 09 43- 4
4. Device Status LEDs to indicate:

a. Data transmission.
b. Device has power.
c. Status for each load.
d. Configuration status.
5. Quick installation features including:
a. Standard junction box mounting.
b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable.
6. Based on individual configuration, each load shall be capable of the following
behavior on power up following the loss of normal power:
a. Turn on to 100 percent.
b. Turn off.
c. Turn on to last level.
7. Each load be configurable to operate in the following sequences based on
occupancy:
a. Auto-on/Auto-off (Follow on and off).
b. Manual-on/Auto-off (Follow off only).
8. Polarity of each load output shall be reversible, via digital configuration, so that on
is off and off is on.
9. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:
a. Load status.
b. Schedule state, normal or after-hours.
c. Demand Response enable and disable.
d. Room occupancy status.
e. Total room lighting and plug loads watts.
f. Electrical current.
g. Total watts per controller.
h. Total room watts/sq ft.
i. Force on/off all loads.
10. UL 2043 plenum rated.
11. Manual override and LED indication for each load.
12. Zero cross circuitry for each load.
13. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual room controller or plug

Section 26 09 43- 5
load controller shall be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the

controller itself. Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
14. Dimming Room Controllers shall share the following features:
a. Each load shall have an independently configurable preset on level for
Normal Hours and After-Hours events to allow different dimmed levels to be
established at the start of both Normal Hours and After-Hours events.
b. Fade rates for dimming loads shall be specific to bound switch buttons, and
the load shall maintain a default value for any bound buttons that do not
specify a unique value.
c. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a
wireless configuration tool:
1) Establish preset level for each load from 0-100 percent.
2) Set high and low trim for each load.
3) Initiate lamp burns in for each load of either 0, 12 or 100 hours.
d. Override button for each load provides the following functions:
1) Press and release for on/off control.
2) Press and hold for dimming control.
e. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable
minimum and maximum calibration trim level to set the dimming range to
match the true dynamic range of the connected ballast or driver. LED level
indicators on bound dimming switches shall utilize this new maximum and
minimum trim.
f. Each dimming output channel shall have an independently configurable
minimum and maximum trim level to set the dynamic range of the output
within the new 0-100 percent dimming range defined by the minimum and
maximum calibration trim.
g. Calibration and trim levels must be set per output channel. Devices that set
calibration or trim levels per controller (as opposed to per load) are not
acceptable.
h. All configuration shall be digital. Devices that set calibration or trim levels
per output channel via trim pots or dip-switches are not acceptable.
B. On/Off/0-10V Dimming KO Mount Room Controllers shall include:

1. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) capable rated for 10A total load.
2. Optional real time current and voltage monitoring (with - M Monitoring option).
3. One or two relays configurations.
4. Smart 150 mA switching power supply.
5. Two RJ-45 DLM local network ports. Provide molded strain relief ring.

Section 26 09 43- 6
6. One dimming output per relay.

a. 0-10V Dimming - Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for
control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall
automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full
light output from the controlled lighting.
7. Units capable of providing both Class 1 or Class 2 wiring for the 0-10V output.
8. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-111, LMRC-111-M, LMRC-112, or LMRC-112-
M, or equal.
2.3 WIRED DIGITAL WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide scrolling LCD display for digital calibration and
electronic documentation. Features include the following:
1. Digital calibration and pushbutton configuration for the following variables:
a. Sensitivity: 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments
b. Time delay: 1-30 minutes in 1-minute increments
c. Test mode: Five second time delay
d. Detection technology: PIR, Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.
e. Walk-through mode
f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight
enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.
2. Programmable control functionality including:
a. Each sensor may be programmed to control specific loads within a local
network.
b. Sensor shall be capable of activating one of 16 user-definable lighting scenes.
c. Adjustable retrigger time period for manual-on loads. Load will retrigger
(turn on) automatically during the configurable period of time (default 10
seconds) after turning off.
d. On dual technology sensors, independently configurable trigger modes are
available for both Normal (NH) and After Hours (AH) time periods. The
retrigger mode can be programmed to use the following technologies:
1) Ultrasonic and Passive Infrared
2) Ultrasonic or Passive Infrared
3) Ultrasonic only
4) Passive Infrared only
3. Independently configurable sensitivity settings for passive infrared and ultrasonic

Section 26 09 43- 7
technologies (on dual technology sensors) for both Normal (NH) and After Hour
(AH) time periods.
4. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
5. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld
configuration tool and control by remote personal controls.
6. Device Status LEDs including
a. PIR detection
b. Ultrasonic detection
c. Configuration mode
d. Load binding
7. Assignment of any occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without
wiring or special tools.
8. Assignment of local buttons to specific loads within the room without wiring or
special tools
9. Manual override of controlled loads
10. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch sensor shall
be retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch sensor itself.
Memory shall have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Detection state
2. Occupancy sensor time delay
3. Occupancy sensor sensitivity, PIR and Ultrasonic
4. Button state
5. Switch lock control
6. Switch lock status
C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.
D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the
free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.
E. Two-button wall switch occupancy sensors, when connected to a single relay dimming
room or fixture controller, shall operate in the following sequence as a factory default:
1. Left button
a. Press and release - Turn load on
b. Press and hold - Raise dimming load

Section 26 09 43- 8
2. Right button
a. Press and release - Turn load off
b. Press and hold - Lower dimming load
F. Low voltage momentary pushbuttons shall include the following features:

1. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active
2. The following button attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless
configuration tool:
a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons
(from Load to Scene, and vice versa).
b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.
c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.
d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0
seconds to 18 hours.
e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on any load controller or relay
panel and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to
multiple loads.
g. Wattstopper part numbers: LMPW, LMDW, or equal.
2.4 WIRED DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configurations.

Wall switches shall include the following features:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote
controls.
2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate
color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch
from the wall.
3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.
4. Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED.
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch.

Section 26 09 43- 9
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active.

d. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels
using 14 steps.
5. Programmable control functionality including:
a. Button priority may be configured to any BACnet priority level, from 1-16,
corresponding to networked operation allowing local actions to utilize life
safety priority
b. Scene patterns may be saved to any button other than dimming rockers.
Once set, buttons may be digitally locked to prevent overwriting of the
preset levels.
6. All digital parameter data programmed into an individual wall switch shall be
retained in non-volatile FLASH memory within the wall switch itself. Memory shall
have an expected life of no less than 10 years.
B. BACnet object information shall be available for the following objects:

1. Button state.
2. Switch lock control.
3. Switch lock status.
C. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
D. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the
free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration shall be required to achieve
multi-way switching.
E. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons from Load to
Scene, and vice versa.
1. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.
2. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.
3. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0
seconds to 18 hours.
4. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
5. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on any load controller or relay panel and
are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
6. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104,
LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101, or equal.
2.5 WIRED DIGITAL DAYLIGHTING SENSOR
A. Digital daylighting sensors shall work with load controllers and relay panels to provide

Section 26 09 43- 10
automatic switching, bi-level, or tri-level or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for

any load type connected to the controller or panel. Daylighting sensors shall be
interchangeable without the need for rewiring.
1. Closed loop sensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single
lighting zone.
2. Open loop sensors measure incoming daylight in the space and are capable of
controlling up to three lighting zones.
3. Dual loop sensors measure both ambient and incoming daylight in the space to
ensure that proper light levels are maintained as changes to reflective materials are
made in a single zone
B. Digital daylighting sensors shall include the following features:

1. Sensor’s internal photodiode shall only measure lightwaves within the visible
spectrum. The photodiode’s spectral response curve shall closely match the entire
photopic curve. Photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or
infrared spectrums. Photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5 percent for any
wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.
2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6,553 foot-candles (fc).
3. Capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each controlled
zone, depending on the selection of load controller(s) and load binding to
controller(s).
4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable
deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that
will prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.
5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when
the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a
field-selectable minimum level.
6. Photosensors shall have a digital, independently configurable fade rate for both
increasing and decreasing light level in units of percent per second.
7. Photosensors shall provide adjustable cut-off time. Cut-off time is defined by the
number of selected minutes the load is at the minimum output before the load
turns off. Selectable range between 0-240 minutes including option to never cut-
off.
8. Optional wall switch override shall allow occupants to reduce lighting level to
increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting
levels for a selectable period of time or cycle of occupancy.
9. Integral infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a
handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless
configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.
10. Configuration LED status light on device that blinks to indicate data transmission.

Section 26 09 43- 11
11. Status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.
12. Recessed switch on device to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.
13. BACnet object information shall be available for the following daylighting sensor
objects, based on the specific photocell’s settings:
a. Light level
b. Day and night setpoints
c. Off time delay
d. On and off setpoints
e. Up to three zone setpoints
f. Operating mode – on/off, bi-level, tri-level or dimming
14. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.
15. A choice of accessories to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building
materials. Photosensors may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well,
suspended lighting fixture or backbox. Standard tube photosensors accommodate
mounting materials from 0-0.62 inch thick (LMLS-400, LMLS-500, or equal).
Extended tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0.62 to 1.25
inches thick (LMLS-400-L, LMLS-500-L, or equal). Mounting brackets are compatible
with J boxes (LMLS-MB1, or equal) and wall mounting (LMLS-MB2, or equal). LMLS-
600, or equal photosensor to be mounted on included bracket below skylight well.
16. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone
17. Each load within a daylighting zone can be individually enabled or disabled for
discrete control (load independence).
18. All digital parameter data programmed into a photosensor shall be retained in non-
volatile FLASH memory within the photosensor itself. Memory shall have an
expected life of no less than 10 years.
C. Closed loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100-degree angle, cutting off the
unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.
2. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration
tool or a PC with appropriate software.
3. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following self-calibration.
For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints
shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint
control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt
ramping of loads.
4. Wattstopper Product Number: LMLS-400, LMLS-400-L, or equal.
D. Open loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:

Section 26 09 43- 12
1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60-degree angle (cutting off the
unwanted light from the interior of the room).
2. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual
calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.
for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a
proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each zone.
3. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non-overlapping group of
loads in the room.
4. Wattstopper Product Number: LMLS-500, LMLS-500-L, or equal.
E. Dual loop digital photosensors shall include the following additional features:
1. Close loop portion of dual loop device must have an internal photodiode that
measures light in a 100-degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from sources
outside of this con
2. Open loop portion of dual loop device must have an internal photodiode that can
measure light in a 60-degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from the interior
of the room.
3. Automatically establishes application-specific set-points following self-calibration.
shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation a sliding setpoint
control algorithm with separate Day and Night setpoints shall prevent abrupt
ramping of load.
4. Device must reference closed loop photosensor information as a base line
reference. The device must be able to analyze the open loop photosensor
information to determine if an adjustment in light levels is required.
5. Device must be able to automatically commission setpoints each night to provide
adjustments to electrical lighting based on changes in overall lighting in the space
due to changes in reflectance within the space or changes to daylight contribution
based on seasonal changes.
6. Device must include extendable mounting arm to properly position sensor within a
skylight well.
7. Wattstopper product number LMLS-600, or equal.
2.6 WIRED DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL MODULES
A. Wired input and output low voltage modules allow for control of the DLM lighting control
system by other devices and systems or allow the DLM system to send signals to other
devices and system for simple integration. The method of interfacing between the
systems can either be a dry (unpowered) contract closure, or via RS-232.
B. Modules shall be plastic with a clamshell hinged lid, two Cat 5e wiring terminals for

Section 26 09 43- 13
connection to a DLM wired local Cat 5e network and be provided with an accessory DIN
mounting bracket. LEDs on the unit shall provide information about the status of the
inputs or outputs, and a configuration button shall be provided to allow easy entry into
PnL programming sequence. Devices shall include a removable terminal block, and label
identifying use of each terminal contact.
C. Wired Low Voltage Input Module features shall include:
1. Ability to switch the module between three operating modes, allowing it to be used
as a load control device (Normal use), a partition interface device, or an input for
interior or exterior photocells.
2. When set in normal usage, the DLM Input Module shall accept up to 4 separate
inputs, either 2-wire maintained or momentary inputs or 24VDC inputs.
Additionally, two inputs pairs can be used as a 3-wire input to emulate a dimmer
rocker.
3. In normal usage, the 4 inputs can be used to control loads, trigger a scene, send a
network group command, or emulate an occupancy action so an
occupied/unoccupied message is sent to loads.
4. Input modules can trigger special load scenarios, taking advantage of DLM system’s
priority-based functions such as Force On, Force Off, Shed, Cleaning, Normal/After
Hours, and Key Switch functions.
5. Inputs can trigger different load and scene modes for controlled outputs, so loads
can toggle status, go on, go off, or toggle dim. Scenes can be set to Recall,
Recall/Off, or Scene Off.
6. All listed functionality to be accessible from IR handheld remote or from front end
system software. Products that require functions to be set at the device, or that
incorporate dip switches to select functions, shall not be allowed.
7. Wattstopper product number LMIN-104, or equal.
D. Wired Low Voltage Output Module features shall include:

1. Two individual Form C contact relays rated from 0-24VAC or DC.
2. Module relays shall act like standard line voltage relays in that they can be assigned
(bound) to turn on and off based on any DLM system input including switch
buttons, occupancy sensors, photocells, timeclocks, and/or low voltage input
modules.
3. In addition to acting as maintained devices, relays can be set to a “pulse” mode so
that when they turn on they do so for only a short duration and then they
automatically return to their normal state, allowing the module to interact with
other devices that require momentary inputs from 1-60 seconds.
4. Two small override buttons shall be included so each relay can be triggered On and

Section 26 09 43- 14
Off for testing.

5. Wattstopper product number LMOR-104, or equal.
E. Wired RS-232 Interface Module features shall include:

1. Ability to communicate with other devices and systems via standard RS-232 wiring.
2. Via a standardized set of host commands, other systems can send messages to the
RS-232 Interface and in the connected room they can control loads on and off
(taking advantage of optional message parameters to dim over time), set scene,
execute button lockout, changing room profiles, Forcing Loads On or Off, or
sending out a Normal Hours/After Hours command.
3. By using a “status” command the RS-232 interface module can be instructed to
share information with connected systems whenever changes occur in the room.
Examples of message alerts include relay status chance, occupancy status change
(by room or by sensor), scene status change, buttons are pressed, room profiles
chance based on partitions, or daylight levels monitored by an interior photocell
change.
4. Wattstopper product number LMDI-100, or equal.
2.7 HANDHELD CONFIGURATION TOOLS
A. Provide a wireless configuration tool to facilitate customization of DLM local networks

using two-way infrared communications, and/or PC software that connects to each local
network via a USB interface.
B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include but not be
limited to:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range
of approximately 30 feet.
2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-
driven operation.
3. Must be able to read and modify parameters for load controllers and relay panels,
occupancy sensors, wall switches, daylighting sensors, network bridges, and
identify DLM devices by type and serial number.
4. Save up to eight occupancy sensors setting profiles and apply profiles to selected
sensors.
5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network and incorporate
those levels in scene setting. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and
After Hours (AH) parameter settings.
6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-configuration, and
input light level data to complete configuration of open loop daylighting controls.

Section 26 09 43- 15
7. Set room mode for testing of Normal Hours (NH) and After Hours (AH) parameter
settings.
8. Verify status of building level network devices.
C. WattStopper Product Numbers: Handheld LMCT-100, or equal.
2.8 PROGRAMMING, CONFIGURATION AND DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE
A. PC-native application for optional programming of detailed technician-level parameter

information for all DLM products, including all parameters not accessible via BACnet and
the handled IR configuration tool. Software must be capable of accessing room-level
parameter information locally within the room when connected via the optional
Wattstopper LMCI-100 USB programming adapter, or equal, or globally for many segment
networks simultaneously utilizing standard BACnet/IP communication.
B. Additional parameters exposed through this method include but are not limited to:
C. Separate fade time adjustments per load for both normal and after hours from 0 - 4
hours.
D. Configurable occupancy sensor re-trigger grace period from 0 - 4 minutes separate for
both normal hours and after hours.
E. Separate normal hours and after hours per-load button mode with modes including: Do
nothing, on only, off only, on and off.
F. Load control polarity reversal so that on events turn loads off and vice versa.
G. Load output pulse mode in increments of 1second.
H. Fade trip point for each load for normal hours and after hours that establishes the
dimmer command level at which a switched load closes its relay to allow for staggered On
of switched loads in response to a dimmer.
I. Generation of reports at the whole file, partial file, or room level. Reports include but are
not limited to:
J. Device list report: All devices in a project listed by type.
K. Load binding report: All load controller bindings showing interaction with switches.
L. BACnet points report: Per room Device ID report of the valid BACnet points for a given
site's BOM.
M. Room summary report: Device manifest for each room, aggregated by common BOM,
showing basic sequence of operations.

Section 26 09 43- 16
N. Device parameter report: Per-room lists of all configured parameters accessible via hand
held IR programmer for use with O&M documentation.
O. Scene report: All project scene pattern values not left at defaults (i.e. 1 = all loads 100
percent, 2 = all loads 75 percent, 3 = all loads 50 percent, 4 = all loads 25 percent, 5-16 =
same as scene 1).
P. Occupancy sensor report: Basic settings including time delay and sensitivities for all
occupancy sensors.
Q. Network-wide programming of parameter data in a spreadsheet-like programming

environment including but not limited to the following operations:
1. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor time delays.
2. Set, copy/paste an entire project site of sensor sensitivity settings.
3. Search based on room name and text labels.
4. Filter by parameter value to search for product with specific configurations.
5. Network-wide firmware upgrading remotely via the BACnet/IP network.
6. Mass firmware update of entire rooms.
7. Mass firmware update of specifically selected rooms or areas.
8. Mass firmware upgrade of specific products.
9. WattStopper Product Number: LMCS-100, LMCI-100, or equal.
2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit - A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit
providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of
emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the
emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal
power is restored. Features include:
1. 120 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20 amp ballast rating.
2. Push to test button.
3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface.
4. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200, or equal.

Section 26 09 43- 17
2.10 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG, complying with Division 26 Section 26 0519 "Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables".
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded copper conductors
not smaller than No. 18AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded copper conductors not
smaller than No. 14AWG, complying with Division 26 Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
D. Furnish and install unshielded, twisted-pair cable for control and signal transmission
conductors except that Category 5E cabling may be utilized solely to interconnect system
elements of digital and network digital lighting control system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with the approved system shop drawings and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Install all room/area devices using manufacturer's factory-tested Cat 5e cable with pre-
terminated RJ-45 connectors.
1. If pre-terminated cable is not used for room/area wiring, each field-terminated

cable shall be tested following installation and testing results submitted to the
University Representative that shall engage the Manufacturer's Representative for
approval prior to proceeding with the Work.
2. If fixtures have internal Wattstopper DLM Control Modules, or equal, ensure that
they are also connected with Cat 5e cable.
3. Install all room to room network devices using Wattstopper LM-MSTP network
wire, or equal. Network wire substitution is not permitted and may result in loss of
product warranty.
C. Test all devices to ensure proper communication.
D. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of
occupants and energy savings. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted
while occupied.

Section 26 09 43- 18
E. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the

system including room by room description including:
1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.
2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.).
3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.).
F. Post start-up tuning - Adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the University’s
requirements 30 days from beneficial occupancy. Submit a detailed report to the
University Representative of post start-up activity.
G. Verify all non-panel-based lighting loads to be free from short circuits prior to connection
to room controllers.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate
power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's
C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A.
E. Low voltage wiring topology must comply with manufacturer's specifications.
F. Route network wiring as indicated on the Drawings as closely as possible. Document final
wiring location, routing and topology on as built drawings.
G. All line voltage connections shall be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs.
H. Tighten all panel Class I conductors from both circuit breaker and to loads to torque
ratings as marked on enclosure UL label.
I. All Class II cabling shall enter enclosures from within low-voltage wiring areas and shall
remain within those areas. No Class I conductors shall enter a low-voltage area.
J. Run separate neutrals for any phase dimmed branch load circuit. Different types of
dimming loads shall have separate neutral.

Section 26 09 43- 19
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label Digital Wall Switches and Network Lighting Control Panels with a unique
designation, coordinated with the University’s Representative.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing all system components and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has
been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
B. Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 09 43- 20
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. This section includes receptacles, switches, wall box occupancy sensors and other wiring
devices.
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: The following list includes the required shop drawings that
shall be submitted.
1. Each device indicating FS number, amperage and voltage rating, materials, color and
manufacturer's catalog sheet.
2. Each device plate indicating materials and thickness or gauge of materials, color and
manufacturer's catalog sheet.
3. All switches and receptacles shall be of same manufacturer.
4. Occupancy and daylight sensors layout drawings and sensor certification by California
Energy Commission.
A. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be furnished including all product submittal data,
installation instructions, wiring diagrams, for each type of sensor, warrantee, in electronic files
in PDF format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All devices shall conform to NEMA standards, shall be UL listed and labeled, and shall be
"Specification Grade," meeting the requirements of FS WC-596-F and switches meeting the
requirements of FS WS-896-E.
02/25/2025 Wiring Devices

Section 26 27 26- 1
2.2 SWITCHES
A. Switches shall be heavy duty design 20-Amp, 120-277 Volt AC, corrosion resistant steel nickel
plated bridge, one-piece integral grounding terminal with #8 brass screw, stainless steel
automatic grounding clip, one piece rivetless copper alloy spring contact arm and terminal
plate, large silver cadmium oxide contacts. Back wire shall be terminated at receptacle
external bundling terminals, voiding pigtail. Switches shall be Legrand/ P&S PS20AC series,
Hubbell HBL1221 series or equal.
B. Pilot-Light Switches, 20A Legrand/ P&S, Eaton/Cooper (120 V and 277 V) or equal.
C. Wall switch and pilot lights shall be flush mounted combination wall type with switch and pilot
light.
D. Control switches for lighting shall be 3-way, normally open, momentary contact, tumbler
switches, Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or equal. The switch shall be wired so that the lights shall be
"ON" when the switch is moved to the "UP" position.
E. Remote control motor switches shall be standard duty, momentary contact, push button, or
selector switches, with pilot lights and jewels. Manufacturer shall be Square D, Eaton, or
equal.
F. Switches in outdoor locations shall have weatherproof plates: Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or
equal.
G. Manual motor control switches for single-phase motors shall be flush or surface mounted, as
required, full-voltage type with thermal overload protection and with pilot light and jewel
where specified. Manufacturer shall be Cutler-Hammer, Crouse-Hinds, or equal.
H. Contactors for the control of lighting circuits shall be mechanically held, NEMA Size 2 or larger,
with the number of poles as required by the schedules or diagrams. Contactors shall have coil
clearing contacts. Manufacturers shall be Cutler-Hammer, or equal.
2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Hospital-Grade Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD and Federal Specification W-C-596.
Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed Spec receptacles are approved. Must be
crimped and welded terminal right-angle application connector, Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or
equal.
B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD1,
NEMA WD6 configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD, Federal Specification W-C-596 and
UL943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. Conducts an
automatic test every three seconds, ensuring ground fault protection. If protection is lost,
power to the unit is disconnected and indicator light flashes indicating that the unit should be
replaced, Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or equal.

Section 26 27 26- 2
C. Convenience Receptacles: Single and duplex convenience receptacles shall be U-grounded

type, 125 volts, side and back wired with binding screws only. 20 amperes rated, Legrand/
P&S, Hubbell, or equal.
D. The grounding contact shall be internally connected to the frame with ground terminal for
external ground.
E. Special receptacles shall be as indicated on Drawings by NEMA configuration.
F. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Receptacles (GFCI) shall meet UL943 requirements. GFCI
receptacles shall be NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd,
and FS WC-596, 20-Amp, 125-volt and shall be self-test design, with whole system test
functionality, surge immunity and noise filtering. GFCI receptacles shall be Legrand/ P&S,
Eaton/Cooper, or equal. Hospital grade GFCI receptacles shall be Legrand/P&S, Eaton/Cooper,
Hubbell, or equal. Color to be as selected by University's Representative from manufacturer's
standard colors.
G. Corridor Cleaning Receptacles shall be 20 ampere, Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell 5362, or equal.
H. Wiring devices in exposed weatherproof boxes shall be the devices specified in this section
and shall be installed in "FS" or "FD" series condulets with weatherproof cast metal covers,
and gaskets as required, or while-in-use covers as directed per the drawings.
I. All receptacles shall have matching plates.
J. Heavy duty receptacles shall be Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or equal.
2.4 PLATES
A. Provide engraved plates for all switches, occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, photocells,
receptacles, junction boxes, telephone and other outlets.
B. Provide engraved or etched plates for all lock switches, pilot switches, switches from which
equipment or circuit controlled cannot be readily seen, three or more switches under a
common plate and for switches as indicated, and for each receptacle and switch, indicating
panel and circuit number.
C. Stainless steel plates shall be AISI Type 302, with beveled edges, 0.040" thick with satin finish.
Legrand/ P&S, Hubbell, or equal.
D. Where outlets are indicated to be weatherproof, furnish an AISI Type 302 stainless with
double hinged covers.
E. Galvanized steel plates shall be square or rectangular and hot dipped galvanized or
sherardized, beveled edges and 0.040" thick.
F. Provide plates equipped with close fitting openings for the exact device to be used. Provide
plates for telephone outlets equipped with bushed openings.

Section 26 27 26- 3
2.5 Finish of Plates and Devices Shall be as Follows

Location Plate Device Color*
General Interior, Finished Areas In non-laboratory In non-
finished areas, the laboratory
cover plates for flush finished areas,
mounted devices shall the cover
be impact resistant plates for
white plastic type, and flush mounted
in laboratories these devices shall
shall be Type 302/304 be impact
stainless steel. Device resistant
plate manufacturer white plastic
shall be the same as type, and in
other flush mounted laboratories
device plates. these shall be
Type 302/304
stainless steel.
Device plate
manufacturer
shall be the
same as other
flush mounted
device plates.
Conference Rooms (where noted Stainless Steel, Satin White
in Architectural Interior Brushed
Elevations)
Labs and Lab Support Spaces Stainless Steel, Satin Stainless Steel
Brushed
Exam rooms White White
In Equipment Rooms of Other Stainless Steel Stainless Steel

Generally Unfinished Areas
Janitor and Utility Rooms Stainless Steel White
Toilet (Public) Stainless Steel White
Emergency Circuits Stainless Steel Red
Isolated Ground Receptacle Stainless Steel Orange
* Device colors except for emergency (red) may be changed at University
Representative's request if desirable to match building color scheme.

Section 26 27 26- 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount switches 4’ above finished floor and vertically in all locations unless indicated
otherwise. Refer to Architectural elevations.
B. All convenience and telephone/data/CATV outlets mounted 18" above the floor shall be
installed vertically. Install receptacle with the grounding terminal up. Outlets required to be
located above casework counters or back splashes shall be mounted horizontally at 4” above
top of counter or backsplash. Receptacles with the ground slot to the left.
C. CEC sized (#12 minimum) bonding jumper shall connect grounded outlet box to receptacle
grounding terminal on all flush mounted units.
D. Align and plumb all devices and plates. Plates shall fit flat against wall and tight against device
surface without strain on plate.
E. Each class of device shall be furnished by one manufacturer for total Project. Mixing devices
of different suppliers shall not be permitted.
F. Coordinate exact placement of occupancy sensors with other trades, and per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
G. Locate all ceiling mounted devices on reflected ceiling plan for coordination with work
specified in other sections for University’s Representative review.
H. Contractor shall furnish the services of the manufacturer’s trained employee in adjusting the
final settings of the sensors.
I. Test straight blade hospital-grade outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade
according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 27 26- 5
SECTION 26 28 16 - SWITCHES, DISCONNECT AND SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Provide switches, disconnect and safety, as shown on the Drawings and as specified, complete.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: The following list includes the required shop drawings that
shall be submitted.
1. Complete equipment shop drawings for each type of enclosed switch, accessory and
component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights and
manufacturer’s technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings
accessories and finishes.
2. Seismic calculations shall be by Structural Engineer, registered in State of California, for the
support of disconnect switches, and drawings, indicating intended installation.
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
1. Square D by Schneider Electrical.
02/25/2020 Switches, Disconnect and Safety

Section 26 28 16- 1
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
3. Or Equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All disconnect switches shall be the "Heavy Duty" type and shall meet the latest edition of FS
W-S-865.
B. Type HD heavy duty single throw 600V AC 30A unless otherwise noted on drawings,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks and interlocked
with cover in closed position.
C. Provide all disconnect switches with devices enabling the switch to be locked in the open and
closed positions.
D. Manual motor starters shall be motor rated tumbler switches rated 3 HP 208 or 480 volts,
three-phase with overload heaters as specified or shown to protect equipment served.
E. Externally operable safety switches shall have quick-make, quick-break mechanism, capable of
switching 10 times the switch rating, and with cover interlocks with defeat mechanism for
maintenance.
F. Provide switches with number of poles, ampere, voltage and HP rating, types of enclosures
and fusible or nonfusible as indicated and as required for the particular application.
Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures for interior locations and NEMA 3R enclosures for exterior or wet
locations unless otherwise indicated. Switches having a dual rating when used with dual
element fuses shall have rating so indicated on the metal plate. Fuses, where required, shall
be UL listed current limiting type RK5.
H. For disconnect between variable speed starters and the motor served, provide auxiliary
contact in switch, wired to disconnect the starter coil in OFF position. Auxiliary contact to
open before disconnect.
I. Fuses, where indicated to be used, shall be current-limiting type, with rejection type fuse
holders. And fuse adaptors as needed.
J. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted, insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded, labeled
for copper neutral conductors.
3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two normally open/normally closed Form C auxiliary contacts
arranged to activate before switch blades open.

Section 26 28 16- 2
4. Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for number and size of copper conductors indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switches, disconnects and safety, where indicated on the Drawings, or as required by
the CEC.
B. Securely fasten to structural members or channel support. In outdoors, mount on epoxy

coated unistrut support, or equal, at plus 42 inches AFF. Comply with restrictions on
penetrating of roofing material.
C. Install manual motor starters flush mounted for switching motors 3 HP and smaller in finished
areas.
D. Install manual motor starters, surface mounted, in equipment rooms and nonfinished areas.
E. Where installed above ceilings, provide access panels.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53, IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare reports.
1. Visual and mechanical

a. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
b. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 28 16- 3
SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, LED.
2. Exit signs.
3. Lighting fixture supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. LED: Light emitting diode.
D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
E. Lumen: Measured output of LED and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including driver.
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Driver.
3. Energy-efficiency data.
4. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA
Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The
adjustment factors shall be for LED drivers, and accessories identical to those indicated for
the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
02/25/2020 Interior Lighting

Section 26 51 00- 1
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified
by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall
be certified by manufacturer.
b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each
Sample shall include the following:
1. LEDs and driver, installed.
2. Cords and plugs.
3. Pendant support system.
D. Installation instructions.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Lighting fixtures.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane
of the luminaires.
4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.
5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.
6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.
b. Speakers.
c. Sprinklers.
d. Smoke and fire detectors.

Section 26 51 00- 2
e. Occupancy sensors.
f. Access panels.
7. Perimeter moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Warranty: Furnish to University a written guarantee for lighting against all defects in materials
and workmanship for 2 years from date of acceptance. Refer to Section 01 78 00, CLOSE-OUT
SUBMITTALS, for submittal form.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing &
Calculation Guides.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in CEC, by a
C. Comply with CEC.
D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
E. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with
power and control connections.
1. Obtain University’s Representative approval of fixtures for mockups before starting

installations.
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

the completed Work.
3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.

Section 26 51 00- 3
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Products: Provide products as indicated on the drawings, or equal.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit maintenance without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during maintenance and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and
other changes due to aging and exposure to heat.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance,
and lettering size per CBC.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

Section 26 51 00- 4
2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and
angle-iron supports, and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
2.5 SOLID STATE LIGHTING / LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LAMPS AND LUMINAIRES
A. General:
1. Luminaire manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in the manufacture
and design of LED products and systems and no less than 100 North American installations.
2. Unless otherwise specified, all LED luminaires and power/data supplies shall be provided by
a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
3. All components, peripheral devices and control software are to be provided by and shall be
the responsibility of a single entity. All components shall perform successfully as a complete
system.
4. Dimmable LED fixtures shall have a 0-10-volt, 3 wire dimming driver.
5. All LED lighting shall be compatible with associated dimming technology.
6. Furnish submittals as described in Paragraphs 1.3 above and 1.4 above.
7. Include all components necessary for a complete installation. Provide all power supplies,
synchronizers, data cables, and data terminators for a complete working system.
8. All LED sources used in the LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established and
reputable LED manufacturers and shall have been fabricated after 2007. LED lamp
manufacturers unless otherwise noted shall be:
a. Philips Lighting.
b. Nichia.
c. Osram.
d. Samsung.
e. Cree.
f. LG Innotek.
g. Or equal.
B. Replacement and Spares:
1. Submit manufacturer’s written statement of the following:

Section 26 51 00- 5
a. Manufacturer will keep record of original bin for each LED module and have
replacement modules from the same bin available for three years after date of
installation.
b. Manufacturer will keep an inventory of replacement parts (source assembly, power and
control components).
c. Manufacturer’s LED system will not become obsolete for 3 years: Manufacturer will
provide exact replacement parts or provide upgraded parts that are designed to fit into
the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen output to the
original, without any negative consequences.
C. Products and Components – Performance
1. LED luminaires and components shall be UL listed or UL classified
2. LED luminaires and components shall be CE certified.
3. LED luminaires and components shall be PSE marked.
4. All LED luminaires shall be subjected to the following JEDEC Reliability Tests for Lead-free
Semiconductors: HTOL, RTOL, LTOL, PTMCL, TMSK, Mechanical Shock, Variable Vibration
Frequency, SHR, and Autoclave.
5. To ensure luminaire quality, luminaire shall have been tested under accelerated life test
conditions including an operating temperature span of 360 degrees F, and cyclic loading up
to 60G.
6. All products included in system shall use Mil-Std 810F, Random Vibration 7.698g as a
minimum standard. In installations subject to vibration, luminaire shall be installed with
vibration isolation hardware to sufficiently dampen vibrations.
7. All LED components shall be mercury and lead-free.
8. All manufacturing processes and materials shall conform to the requirements of the
European Union's Restriction on the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronics Equipment (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.
9. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 - Specifications for the

Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable throughout the life
of the lamp. Color shall match approved sample.
10. LEDs shall comply with IESNA LM-80 – Standards for Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting
Products.
11. White LEDs shall have a rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operating
conditions. RGB LEDs shall have a rated source life of 100,000 hours. LED “rated source life”
is defined as the time when a minimum of 70% of initial lumen output remains.
12. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat so as to not degrade life of
source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaire housing shall be designed to transfer

Section 26 51 00- 6
heat from the LED board to the outside environment. Luminaire housing shall have no
negative impact on life of components.
13. Manufacturer shall supply in writing a range of permissible operating temperatures in which
system will perform optimally.
14. LEDs shall be adequately protected from moisture or dust in interior applications.
15. For wet and damp use, LED-based luminaires itself shall be sealed, rated and tested for
appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or
enclosure. Such protection shall have no negative impact on rated life of source or
components, or if so, such reductions shall be explicitly brought to the attention of the
16. All hardwired connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide
high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the
installation process.
17. The LED luminaire shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels. LEDs
shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current.
18. RGB LED luminaires shall utilize an equal combination of high brightness red, blue and green
LEDs, unless otherwise noted, to provide up to 16.7 million additive RGB colors and shall be
capable of at least 8-bit control.
19. Manufacturer shall be able to furnish supporting documentation of the product meeting
third party regulatory compliance.
20. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate design
and manufacturability testing including Design FMEA, Process FMEA, Environmental
Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and UL/CE testing.
21. All LED luminaires (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum 24-hour burn-in during
manufacturing, prior to shipping.
22. Manufacturer shall furnish Luminaire Efficacy (lm/W), total luminous flux (lumens),
luminous intensity (candelas) chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI optical performance,
polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data. Submit data in
IES file format in accordance with IES LM-79-2008, based on test results from an
independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.
23. Power / data supply shall have the following:

a. Supply outputs shall have current limiting protection.
b. Supply shall provide miswiring protection.
c. Supply shall have power factor correction.
d. Supply shall provide connections that are conduit-ready or clamp-style connections in
the case of low-voltage wiring.
e. Supply shall come with a housing that meets a minimum IP20 rating for dry location
installation unless located in a damp or wet location.

Section 26 51 00- 7
f. Supply shall be UL listed for Class 1 or Class 2 wiring
D. LED Control and Communication – Performance
1. LED luminaires shall be able to be switched with fluorescent luminaires on the same circuit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures:
1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by University's Representative, to use

permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of
luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary
luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C. Remote Mounting of Driver: Distance between the driver and fixture shall not exceed that
recommended by driver manufacturer. Verify, with driver manufacturers, maximum distance
between driver and luminaire.
D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.
1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices,
for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or
center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch
metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to
building structure.

Section 26 51 00- 8
F. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553, IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation during
back-up generator operation.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for
this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.
1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of University’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

Section 26 51 00- 9
CCHS 14-215 EMPLOYEE HEALTH CENTER RENOVATION
SECTION 27 51 23 – Medical Clinic Room Status and Emergency Call System
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Design (on a deferred approval basis), furnish and install a fully operable Medical Clinic Room
Status and Emergency Call System.
B. The system shall have the ability to integrate with a Pocket Paging and or Computer Integrated
Management and Reporting System.
C. Provide all required Data Network Interfaces, Computers, Software, and Associated
Accessories required for a complete and operable system as herein described.
1. One complete and operable system shall be provided and defined as all conduit, raceways,
cables, back boxes, contacts, software, etc. to achieve a complete and functional system.
Also included are all power supplies, hardware, and interfaces to equipment supplied by
others. Documents do not show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown
or listed is clearly necessary for proper installation and operation of the equipment and
systems, furnish, install, and test/certify, the item at no increase in contract price.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
C. HLI: High Level Interface.
D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
E. PC: Personal computer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES for procedures
and Section 26 00 10, ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS for additional requirements.
1. Contract Schedule: Refer to Section 013200, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.
2. Qualifications:
a. Submit qualifications for the following within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice To
Proceed:
1) Installer.
02/25/2020 Medical Clinic Room Status and Emergency Call System

Section 27 51 23 - 1
B. Within thirty (30) days after University's Representative's approval of Medical Clinic Room
Status and Emergency Call System, submit a copy of the purchase order and delivery schedule
as proof of system shall be received in time to maintain approved contract schedule.
C. Operating and Maintenance manual in digital format. Submit simultaneously with product
data submittal.
D. Record Drawings (Plans, Details, Wiring Diagrams): In addition to requirements of Section 01

78 39, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, include compliance with the following:
1. All Record Drawings shall be prepared utilizing a computer-generated system compatible

with University's AutoCAD drawing system. Contractor shall verify with University's
Representative the appropriate version of AutoCAD.
2. University shall furnish Contractor with a disk with the renovated space architectural
backgrounds.
3. Final Record Drawings: Format to be agreed with the University; shall be equal in size to the
Contract Drawings.
4. Submit record drawings in compact disc (CD) in ACAD (versions as approved by the
University’s Representative) to the University’s Representative.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer must have installed at least five complete Medical Clinic
Room Status and Emergency Call Systems manufactured by the approved manufacturer.
1. Each of the projects submitted must have been successfully completed within five years of
the bid date of the project currently being bid. These projects must have been in successful
operation at least one year prior to bid date of the current project.
2. Each project must have been performed within the State of California.
3. Each project shall have provided 10 nurse call devices including the following:
a. 10 or more room status stations.
b. Complete programming of the system.
c. A clinic call annunciator graphic annunciator.
d. Complete testing of the entire system.
e. Installation of a shielded cable system, with all shields properly terminated and
grounded according to the manufacturer's instructions.
4. Installer must be in possession of a valid C-10 license.
5. Submit the above information for review by University’s Representative.

Section 27 51 23 - 2
B. Tests: Contractor shall furnish all personnel, meters and test equipment, and must test the
system in the presence of University's Representative. The tests shall be as described in
Paragraph 3.2D below.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Tech Works, Henderson, Nevada, 800-813-1080, www.tech4people.com.
2. HCI Local partner.
3. Or equal.
2.2 CLINIC ROOM STATUS SYSTEM
A. System Description:
1. The Medical Clinic Room Status and Emergency Call System shall allow doctors to know
what patient is next and stay in touch with staff without tying them down to a nurse station.
By combining corridor lights, system status panels and other patient call and monitoring
devices, as herein listed, staff can be mobile while delivering quality service.
2. The Room Status System shall be a distributed processing intelligent network consisting of a
combination of Intelligent Substations having four push buttons and four lights, Intelligent
Corridor Lights having four lights, and Master Stations capable of displaying up to eight
Substations. The buttons/lights shall be provided with custom printed color labeling per the
Architect's instruction and clear adhesive Lexan faceplates to easily identify functions or
staff. Annunciator panels with surface mounted or exposed labeling will be totally
unacceptable under these specifications. The system shall be expandable up to 512
Substations on a single system.
3. A Doctor Follow/next patient feature shall be included to provide flashing light indication of
the next room or patient in sequence of their reporting. The first light reporting in a row
shall slow flash to indicate that it is the next patient or room ready of that color. When any
subsequent light in that row reports in, it shall be indicated by a steady light until the
current slow flashing light status is changed. The current slow flashing light shall change to
fast flash when the same Substation's button is pushed a second time. The third button
push from that Substation shall turn the light off. Any time a light that is in slow flash mode
is changed to fast flash the next Substation in sequence shall change from steady to slow
flash. If a room needs to be inserted in the next order, the associated color button on the
Substation can be pressed twice within one second and it shall automatically be placed in
the next (or slow flash) position.

Section 27 51 23 - 3
4. The system shall use RS485 digital communication between intelligent devices. All
Substations shall have two sets of dipswitches which allow addressing of each unit. One set
of dipswitches will assign a Substation to a Master and the second set selects the column of
lights on the Master to represent the Substation. Any Substation status change shall be
reflected in the Master lights and annunciated by a tone. Any Masters, Substations, or
Corridor Lights with the same address setting shall be totally interactive. This interaction
shall allow multi-point control for tailoring a system to meet special needs.
5. Each restroom shall have and Emergency Pull Station next to the toilet and a corresponding
corridor light outside above each door. The corridor light shall be red in color and indicate a
call by a flashing light and indicate at the main annunciator location.
6. Each patient station shall have an associated corridor light. The corridor light shall be red in
color and indicate a call by a flashing light and indicate at the main annunciator location.
7. Integrated Management and Reporting System (IMR) shall be included to provide facility
users with a Patient or Room Status tracking system and priority call indication. The IMR
shall be a single hardware and software solution with a Linux computer, or equal, built into
the hardware. Each IMR includes 2 USB 2.0 ports for serial interface, 1 TCP/IP network
interface, and VGA and Line Level Audio outputs so that the unit can connect directly to a
Video Monitor with Speakers. No additional Servers shall be required. The IMR must be
Windows 10 Compatible. The IMR system acts as a web based server to display the system
activity on any product able to display a web browser. Through password protection users
can access and print management reports to monitor productivity and patient activity.
Other types of messaging such as Pocket Paging, or SMS Text Messaging shall also be
available through this system on a point by point basis. Colors can have an associated WAV
file to produce a sound associated with each color.
8. All user interface shall employ moisture and electrostatic resistance to provide reliable yet
friendly operation.
9. Easy to install - The Medical Clinic Room Status and Emergency Call System shall utilize
simple twisted-pair cable making this system simple to install and easy to modify or expand.
Wiring for the Light Signaling System shall consist of two twisted pair network wiring from
one device to the next. Size and type of wire shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
of the system. Systems, which require a home run to a central equipment location will be
totally unacceptable under this specification. The system shall be capable of spanning
multiple floors and or remote buildings using the simple twisted-pair or fiber optic cable.
10. All wall mounted devices shall mount to industry standard electric boxes. Systems using
custom back boxes will not be considered under these specifications.
11. The Out Patient Medical Clinic Room Status System shall be Tech Works CLINIC-CALL
sometimes known as CC-Series, or equal.
B. Components:

Section 27 51 23 - 4
1. Master / Annunciator Panels - The Clinic Call System Annunciator shall be a standard four
gang electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS plastic with a water-resistant Lexan
face plate. A minimum of eight columns of four lights shall be provided to allow output from
the system. An electronic tone shall sound whenever an emergency call is actives and can be
permanently disable by the installer if desired. The Annunciator shall be an addressable
intelligent electronic device requiring no more than 264 mA at 12 Volts DC for full operation.
The system shall operate on two twisted pair parallel wiring. Any system that requires more
than two twisted pair wire and is not installer programmable will not be considered under
this specification.
2. The Clinic Call Annunciator panel shall be Tech Works Model CC-AN-84-T, or equal.
3. Room Status Station - The Clinic-Call System Intelligent Room Status Station shall be a
standard one gang electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS. A minimum of four
lighted buttons shall indicate up to eight statuses of each room. The four lights/buttons
shall be color-coded as Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue to easily identify functions and location
of staff. The Corridor Light shall be an intelligent electronic device, addressable by the
installer, requiring no more than 100 mA at 12 Volts DC for full operation. The system shall
operate on two twisted pair parallel wiring. Any system that requires more than two
twisted pair wire and is not installer programmable will not be considered under this
specification
4. The Clinic Call System Room Status Station shall be Tech Works Model CC-RS-4-B, or equal.
5. Corridor Dome Light - The Clinic-Call System Intelligent Corridor Light shall be a standard
two gang electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS. A minimum of four LED lights
shall indicate up to eight statuses of each room. The four lights/buttons shall be color-
coded as Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue to easily identify functions and location of staff. The
Corridor Light shall be an intelligent electronic device, addressable by the installer, requiring
no more than 100 mA at 12 Volts DC for full operation. The system shall operate on two
twisted pair parallel wiring. Any system that requires more than two twisted pair wire and
is not installer programmable will not be considered under this specification.
6. The Clinic Call System Dome Lights shall be Tech Works Model CC-DL-44-B, or equal.
7. Zone Lights - The Clinic-Call System Intelligent Zone Light shall be a standard two gang
electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS. A minimum of four LED lights shall
indicate up to eight statuses of each group of rooms. The four lights/buttons shall be color-
coded as Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue to easily identify functions and location of staff. The
Zone Light shall be an intelligent electronic device, addressable by the installer, requiring no
more than 100 mA at 12 Volts DC for full operation. The system shall operate on two
twisted pair parallel wiring. Any system that requires more than two twisted pair wire and
is not installer programmable will not be considered under this specification.
8. Help Station - The Clinic-Call System Push for Help Station shall be a standard one gang
electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS plastic. A large Help button shall be
included to place a Staff Needs Assistance Call to the System. A distinctive Cancel button
shall be provided to reset the station. A call confirmation light shall be included to indicate

Section 27 51 23 - 5
that a call has been placed. The staff station shall be a passive electronic device requiring no
more than 3 mA at 15 Volts DC for full operation. This section of the specification includes
the furnishing, installation, and connection of an intelligent reporting microprocessor
controlled, addressable, fire detection system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm
initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, termination cabinets, auxiliary control
devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
C. Emergency Pull Cord Call Stations - The Clinic-Call System Emergency Pull Station shall be a
standard one gang electrical box mounting device constructed of ABS plastic. A large push for
Help button shall be included with a durable nylon cord to provide both push and pull for help
operation. A distinctive Cancel button shall be provided to reset the station. A call
confirmation light shall be included to indicate that a call has been placed. The pull station
shall be a passive electronic device requiring no more than 3 mA at 15 Volts DC for full
operation.
D. The Clinic-Call System Emergency Pull Station shall be Tech Works Model EPS, or equal.
E. The Integrated Management and Reporting System (IMR) shall be a Linux, or equal, based
Status-Server that logs and displays Patient or Room Status. Any device with access to the IMR
network, shall have password-controlled access to view the graphics and system status from
anywhere at any time. The IMR shall include the ability to send messaging such as Pocket
Paging, or SMS Text Messaging to other devices on a point by point basis. Each point in the
associated system shall be labeled according to the function or use of the associated point on
the system.
F. The Integrated Management and Reporting System shall be Tech Works IMR, or equal.
G. Power Supply - The Light Signaling System shall be supplied with a 12-Volt Direct Current
power supply capable of powering all devices, as shown on plans, simultaneously with a
minimum of 25% reserve power. The power supply shall be UL/CSA Listed for use with alarm
and signaling systems. A surface mounting case shall be included to house the power supply.
This unit shall operate from an input of 100 to 240 Volts AC and supply a minimum of 7.0
Amps at 12-Volts DC.
H. The Light Signaling System Power Supply shall be Tech Works Model PSD1270A, or equal.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire and Cable
1. System Network Wire shall be 18 AWG stranded twisted two pair cable with overall jacket.
Wire twist shall be industry standard audio twist per foot or greater. Jacket material shall be
compliant with NFPA and NEC codes for the type of location in which the cable is installed.
2. All patch Cords shall be CAT6 type standard network patch cords.
3. All Adapters, Plugs, and connectors shall be included as required

Section 27 51 23 - 6
B. Cable Management
1. Cable management shall be as shown on the plans.
2. Where not shown on the plans wire shall be open run through concealed spaces and
dressed using tie-wraps and screw mount tie-wrap holders on all exposed open runs.
3. In all cases wire routing and cable management shall be compliant with CEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall provide all interconnected cable, equipment, miscellaneous parts and
accessories to make a complete and fully operational system as described herein and as
shown on the drawings.
B. All cables shall be sized in accordance with manufactures recommended cabling requirements.
All cable and wire shall be air plenum rated even if installed in conduit.
C. All cables shall be run continuously, and no splicing may be made in any cable run.
D. Cable and wiring routed through inaccessible spaces or spaces where there is risk of damage
to conductors shall be installed in conduit or raceways.
E. All cable and wiring shall be securely fastened to the permanent building structure. Cable and
wire not installed in raceway shall be supported at regular intervals appropriate to the cable
and wire size. Cable and wiring shall not lay loose on ceiling tiles or grids and shall not be
suspended from or attached to existing conduit.
F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer have published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torque per NEC specification.
G. The following circuit types shall be installed in their own conduits:
1. Microphone and control lines
2. Control lines
3. AC power lines
H. Provide a #6 AWG insulated copper ground wire from the main equipment to the electrical
rooms ground bus.

Section 27 51 23 - 7
A. In addition to tests required in this Section, perform all electrical and mechanical tests
required by the equipment manufacturer.
B. Labelling
1. All wiring and connections must be clearly labeled using industry standard permanent
marking devices. Contractor shall identify and tag all cables with permanent type markers to
denote locations served.
C. All user interfaces must be clearly and permanently labeled for their intended use. All front
panel controls used in the normal operation of the system shall be clearly labeled using plastic
laminate engraved labels or equal. Labels shall be firmly affixed to the panel or device. Each
major system component shall be labeled as to function and area served.
D. Site Tests/Inspection
1. Post Occupancy testing: Test inputs and outputs of all devices to verify compliance with
functionality of designed system.
2. Verify installed cable is free of opens grounds and shorts.
3. Verify ventilation for equipment is adequate for installed units.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide instruction to the University’s Representative related to operation, maintenance and

programming of all systems Training sessions shall be on-site, limited to 15 people maximum
in any one session. Sessions shall last approximately one (1) hours each. In addition,
Contractor shall provide a minimum of four (4) hours training for system administrator.
B. Follow-up training must be provided on all systems, one (1) week after cutover.
C. Provide demonstration and training by a staff member/trainer who is certified by the system
manufacturer to provide training.
3.4 FINAL CHECKOUT AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall verify that the system is complete and fully operational before requesting
final approval and before scheduling system demonstration.
B. The Contractor shall be available to demonstrate the operation and use of the system to the
University’s personnel.
C. At the time of the demonstration, this Contractor shall furnish to the University’s personnel
one (1) complete record manuals.

Section 27 51 23 - 8
END OF SECTION

Section 27 51 23 - 9
SECTION 28 31 11- DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Design (on a deferred approval basis) furnish and install a fully detectable fire alarm system
with speaker(s)/strobe(s).
B. The system shall be Notifier to match existing.
C. A certified Notifier installer will be required to perform the fire alarm design, shop drawings,
programming, installation and acceptance testing.
D. Coordination with University’s Representative will be required in order to program the existing
Notifier system to allow for the new designed areas. Prior to preparing the shop drawings,
Contractor shall contact the University’s Representative to get access to the site and to hold
meeting with University’s Representative to determine address/zone number assignments for
programming and to put on the fire alarm shop drawings.
E. Existing fire alarm panel have enough spare addresses to accommodate this project.
F. The basic system shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed for No. 864 Control Units for
Fire Protective Signaling Systems (Ancillary listing). The system and associated equipment as
specified herein shall be manufactured 100% by a single manufacturer (or division thereof):
1. The manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and quality.
2. An ISO 9001 certified company shall manufacture the system.
3. The equipment shall be fully compatible with the existing Notifier Fire Alarm system.
G. Design (on a deferred approval basis) furnish and install a code compliant intelligent reporting
fire alarm addressable and notification system and devices connected to the existing manual
and automatic fire detection system, audio/visual alarm system and fire alarm control panel
and annunciator. The new fire alarm devices shall provide coverage of all rooms and areas that
form part of the scope of this work and shall integrate with the existing system on the floor.
The smoke detectors in hallways and corridors shall be installed in accordance with the
California Fire Code and NFPA 72, with spacing no greater than 30 feet center to center. The
fire alarm system shall be inspected by the University’s Representative, and the UCLA Campus
Fire Marshal, for final acceptance.
H. All parts of the system described herein shall be furnished unless specifically noted to be
omitted in the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall also provide all labor and materials
related to the system, not necessarily stipulated in this section. Refer to all Division 26
Specification Sections for requirements related to the fire alarm system work.
02/25/2020 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System

Section 28 31 11- 1
I. Include all work required for installation of new equipment, including relocating existing items
to install new equipment, in addition to provision of conduits, raceways, boxes, equipment,
wiring/terminations, interconnection with HVAC equipment, and controls for new devices. All
fire alarm equipment and related devices and transducers must be new. Remove, replace and
refinish architectural materials and finishes as required for a complete fire alarm installation.
Include all materials and labor, and interfaces. Contractor shall be responsible for any fire
watch service as required by the Campus Fire Marshal. Contractor’s Fire Watch Security
Company shall be licensed, bonded and furnish documented proof that a nation-watch
background check of security staff deployed to the University was done.
J. In addition to the fire alarm system, this includes the following elements related to the
installation of the fire alarm system, fully functioning and complete. This Specification is
intended as a Design Criteria Document, and Contractor shall include:
1. Connection to, and testing of, existing fire alarm system panel.
2. Smoke detectors, photo-electric type.
3. Manual pull stations.
4. Audio and visual alarms.
5. Connections to new fire sprinkler water flow and tamper devices per Division 21.
6. Commissioning and programming of software to allow new devices on system to facilitate

the following operations of existing equipment:
a. Fan shut down for air-handling systems and fans of 2000 cfm or greater.
b. Fire smoke damper control.
7. Caulking and sealants around raceways and outlet boxes.
8. Acoustical treatment of outlet boxes in partitions where required.
9. Painting.
10. Controls and instrumentation (interface with mechanical systems).
11. Conduits and raceways.
12. Conductors.
13. Outlet and junction boxes.
14. Interior pullboxes and wireways.
15. Cabinets.
16. Nameplates and warning signs.

Section 28 31 11- 2
17. Grounding.
18. Duct Detector (sample tube type), photo electric.
Sections covering the work above are included in other parts of the Specification. These shall be
followed for work in the aforementioned areas.
K. Activation of a detection device or alarm imitating device shall cause the alarm to sound and
cause the visual signals to flash to furnish general alarm throughout the building.
L. Include all conduits, boxes and wiring, complete.
M. System Description and Function:
1. The system shall consist of automatic, addressable detection devices, manual reporting
stations, speakers with visual alarms and all wiring. The entire system shall be equipped
with an emergency battery back-up system. The system shall be fully field-programmable.
Test batteries and replace as required.
2. The system shall be capable of being expanded at any time up to the pre-determined
maximum capacity of the system.
3. The system shall be capable of operating both addressable and non-addressable devices.
4. The control panel shall furnish power, annunciation, supervision and control for the fire
detection and alarm system. The system shall be designed so that alarm indications override
trouble conditions. The panel shall be capable of measuring and adjusting the sensitivity of
the addressable ionization and photoelectric detectors connected to it.
5. The Contractor shall furnish the services of the approved fire alarm manufacturer to
program the Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) for the new devices.
6. Fire alarm system wiring shall be Class B (NFPA Style 4). The main riser wiring, in rigid steel
conduits, shall be Class A (NFPA Style 6 or 7). Each branch shall have isolator modules for
Signal Loop Circuit (SLC). Alarm in signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a
primary power failure until the alarm has been processed and recorded.
7. The system shall function as follows under an alarm condition:

a. Sound the audio alarm and cause visual signals to flash on all floors of the building.
b. Automatically notify the Campus Police Station. (Include all conduits and cables to make
connection)
c. Print individual detector number with University's Representative defined message,
date, and time on printer terminal. The system shall be equipped with history recording
equipment, to accommodate an external printer where the latter is not furnished with
the project. The printer shall be furnished by the Contractor for use in testing of the
system.
d. Activate digital dialer.
e. Shut down the HVAC system as required in NFPA 90.
f. Display device/floor on the remote annunciator.

Section 28 31 11- 3
g. Close all magnetically held fire rated doors in the building.

h. Unlock security doors and activate the digital dialer.
i. Perform all functions in the Sequence of Operations shown on the drawings. In the
event of any conflict between the Sequence of Operations and requirements in the
Specification, Contractor shall obtain clarification from the University's Representative
prior to performing the work in question.
N. Activation of any fire sprinkler valve tamper switch shall cause a supervisory signal at the fire
alarm control panel, the remote annunciator, and a common trouble at the Campus Police
Station. Water-flow switch alarm operation and automatic sprinkler system supervisory
switches shall be wired and annunciated in conformance with NFPA-72.
O. A trouble signal shall be initiated for each addressable device for which the automatic
sensitivity measurement is out of range. Each addressable device shall be repetitively secured
with signal to FACP showing its correct function.
P. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable
devices which may be in alarm simultaneously. Each SLC shall not be loaded more than 75% of
its total capacity.
Q. System shall be tested, accepted and in use without malfunction for ten (10) days prior to
completion of Contract. Final connection to Campus Central Reporting System shall be by
University. University reserves the right to connect to Campus Central Fire Alarm Reporting
System at any time during this period. Contractor to furnish all conduit and cabling to existing
Telecom manhole as defined by University’s Representative for connection to Campus XA-
loop.
R. Contractor shall maintain one set of redlined as-built drawings and program printout at the
FACP during the 10-day test period through receipt of final as-builts.
1. Contractor shall furnish the programming on compact disc to University’s Representative
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
C. HLI: High Level Interface.
D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
E. PC: Personal computer.

Section 28 31 11- 4
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 23, shop drawings, product data and samples for procedures, and
section 26 00 10, electrical general provisions for additional requirements.
1. Contract Schedule: Refer to Section 013200, construction progress documentation.
2. Qualifications:
a. Submit qualifications for the following within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice To
Proceed:
1) Installer’s Project Manager.
2) Installer’s Superintendent.
3) Installer’s Technician.
b. Submit qualifications for Installer’s Technical Supervisor as specified in Paragraph 1.4C
below within thirty-five (35) days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
3. ISO 9001 certified Fire Alarm Manufacturer/Supplier (defined as an authorized distributor of

the fire alarm manufacturer's products).
B. Installer for the fire alarm system shall include stamp and signature of the professional,
licensed by the state of California, in charge of the design of the system. Submittal shall
include a statement by the Contractor that the submittal complies with each paragraph and
each requirement of this specification.
C. Furnish a certified letter from the manufacturer indicating compliance with the following:
1. There is a factory warehouse located within 75 miles of the Project Site, at which spare parts
are stocked.
2. Submit with shop drawings, a coordinated sequence of work for the installation of the Fire
Alarm system within the renovated space; include a detailed work sequence plan for the
installation of the system and Detection and Alarm systems.
D. Within thirty (30) days, submit a copy of the purchase order and delivery schedule as proof fire
alarm system parts shall be received in time to maintain approved contract schedule.
E. Operating and Maintenance manual in digital format. Submit simultaneously with product
data submittal.
F. Test Results and Test and Maintenance Program Schedules as described in Part 3 herein.
G. Record Drawings (Plans, Details, Wiring Diagrams): In addition to requirements of Section 01

78 39, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, include compliance with the following:
1. All Record Drawings shall be prepared utilizing a computer-generated system compatible

with University's AutoCAD drawing system. Contractor shall verify with University's
Representative the appropriate version of AutoCAD.

Section 28 31 11- 5
2. University shall furnish Contractor with a disk with the renovated space architectural
backgrounds.
3. Fire Alarm Drawings shall utilize standard NFPA symbols as shown in NFPA 170, Chapter 5.
4. Final Record Drawings: Format to be agreed with the University; shall be equal in size to the
Contract Drawings.
5. Submit record drawings in compact disc (CD) in ACAD (versions as approved by the
University’s Representative) to the University’s Representative.
H. Guarantee: Refer to General Conditions, Paragraph 12.2.
I. Post Contract Maintenance:
1. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a
factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a
period of five (5) years after expiration of the Repair Period. Contractor to submit document
substantiating the above requirement when making the fire alarm system submittals.
A. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements of Section 01 41 00, REGULATORY

REQUIREMENTS, comply with the following codes and standards.
1. Title 19, California Code of Regulations (CCR)
2. Title 24, CCR:

a. California Building Code
b. California Electrical Code
c. California Mechanical Code
d. California Fire Code
3. NFPA Codes
a. NFPA 72, as amended by the California Code of Regulations. All other applicable Health
and Safety requirements, codes and regulations.
b. No. 70 National Electric Code (NEC)
c. No. 90A Air Conditioning Systems
d. No. 92A Smoke Control Systems
e. No. 92B Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas
f. No. 101 Life Safety Code
4. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are
referenced in text by the basic designation only:
a. No. 50 Cabinets and Boxes
b. No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
c. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
d. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications

Section 28 31 11- 6
e. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective

f. No. 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
g. No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
h. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
i. No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
j. No. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
k. No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems
l. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer must have installed at least five complete fire alarm systems
manufactured by Notifier.
1. Each of the projects submitted must have been successfully completed within five years of
the bid date of the project currently being bid. These projects must have been in successful
operation at least one year prior to bid date of the current project.
2. Each project must have been performed within the State of California.
3. Each project shall have renovated/added Fire Alarm devices including the following:
a. 50 or more addressable devices. "Devices" are smoke, heat or other type of fire
detectors, manual stations, waterflow or tamper switches, alarm speakers, strobe lights.
b. Audio/visual system.
c. Complete programming of the system.
d. A master graphic annunciator panel showing the location of each device or group of
devices in the system, as well as the FACP.
e. Complete testing of the entire system.
f. Installation of a shielded cable system, with all shields properly terminated and
grounded according to the manufacturer's instructions.
4. Installer must be in possession of a valid C-10 license.
5. Three (3) of the required five (5) fire alarm systems must have been fully addressable
systems.
6. A technician, who is a full-time employee of the fire alarm equipment manufacturer, resides
within fifty (50) miles of the Project site. He/she shall be factory trained and his/her primary
function shall be technician. In the event of a trouble call from University, the
manufacturer's Technician shall respond to the call and arrive in the building where the
problem exists within 2 to 4 hours of the time the call was made. In no case shall the
response time exceed 4 hours. This requirement shall remain in effect throughout the
construction and guarantee phases of the project.
7. Submit the above information for review by University’s Representative.
C. Prior to the commencement of Work, Contractor shall furnish in writing the following
information for University's Representative's approval:

Section 28 31 11- 7
1. The name of the factory-trained and certified Installer’s Supervisor who shall be called upon
in the course of the work to perform duties specified below. This individual shall furnish on-
site technical supervision for the Project.
2. Qualifications and certification dates for the Installer’s Supervisor and Installer’s Technician
as specified below.
a. Installer’s technician shall be certified at a minimum National Institute for Certification
in Engineering Technologies (NICET) II level; submit appropriate documentation.
b. Installer’s Supervisor and Technician shall have direct construction experience of similar
scope of at least three (3) projects, within the last six (6) years.
Note: Contractor shall not replace approved Installer’s Supervisor and Installer’s
Technician without written approval from University's Representative. Furnish ten (10)
days written notice to University's Representative prior to all requested changes.
D. Tests: Contractor shall furnish all personnel, meters and test equipment, and must test the
system in the presence of University's Representative. The tests shall be as described in
Paragraph 3.2 below.
E. Contractor shall schedule its work so that University Inspector and Fire Marshal witness
testing of the fire alarm system in the building shall be called for at intervals not less than two
weeks apart. The testing schedule shall not affect the scheduled completion date for the
project.
F. The Contractor shall rectify all problems detected during the test conducted by the University
Inspector, prior to conducting the test by the Campus Fire Marshal. Contractor shall comply
with the requirements noted in paragraph 3.2 below.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide products from Notifier to match the existing system.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials, equipment, accessories, devices and other facilities and appurtenances covered
by these Specifications or noted on the Drawings shall be listed by the CSFM and by UL, and
shall be new, best suited for the intended use, and shall conform to applicable and recognized
standards for their use.
B. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of an
intelligent reporting microprocessor controlled, addressable, fire detection system. It shall
include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances,
termination cabinets, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.

Section 28 31 11- 8
C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Protected
Premises Signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.
D. The system shall be an active/interrogative type system where each addressable device is
repetitively scanned, causing a signal to be transmitted to the main fire alarm control panel
(FACP) indicating that the device and its associated circuit wiring is functional. Loss of this
signal at the main FACP shall result in a trouble indication as specified hereinafter for the
particular input.
E. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) listed under the
appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation
shall be in compliance with the UL Listing.
F. The installing company shall employ National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology) technicians on site to guide
the final check-out and to ensure the systems integrity.
2.3 GENERAL
A. The system shall be designated such that each signaling line circuit (SLC) is limited to only
eighty (80%) percent of its total capacity at initial installation.
B. Basic Performance:
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the systems initiating
devices, the following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The system alarm LED shall flash.
b. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.
c. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition,
including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new
fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to be
activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system
outputs (notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
C. Software Modifications:
1. Furnish the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system
software modifications, upgrades, or changes to the existing fire alarm system. Response
time of the technician to the site shall comply with Paragraph 1.4B.6 above.
2. Furnish all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify
the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices,
circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or
zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type of extent of
software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of

Section 28 31 11- 9
the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. Return to
the factory for system upgrades are not acceptable.
D. Equipment and Material, General:
1. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer’s current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling
(fire alarm) system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment, such as control panels, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of
the complete system.
2. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each
manufacturer’s recommendations. Consult the manufacturer’s installation manuals for all
wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system
installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagrams in manuals for all specific system
installation/termination/wiring data.
3. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly
in place (e.g. detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and
supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
E. Conduit:
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with the California Electrical Code (CEC), including All
Applicable Code Requirements, as well as Section 26 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
2. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed forty (40)
percent of interior cross-sectional area where three (3) or more cables are contained within
a single conduit.
3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall
not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per
CEC Article 760-29.
4. Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-
limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line
circuits. All circuits shall be furnished with transient suppression devices and the system
shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or
loss of signals.
5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control
panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP
manufacturer.
6. Conduit shall be ¾ inch minimum.
F. Wire:

Section 28 31 11- 10
1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new and installed in metallic conduit.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g. CEC Article 760) and
as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of
conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less
than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG for
notification appliance circuits.
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use
with a protective signaling system.
4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the
installation as indicated in CEC (e.g. FPLR).
5. The system shall permit the use of Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) and Notification Appliance
Circuit (NAC) wiring in the same conduit with the multiplex communication loop.
6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure,
disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the
field wiring; a trouble signal shall be activated until the system and its associated field wiring
are restored to normal condition.
7. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow).
Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to
intelligent reporting devices.
8. Loop (Signaling Loop Circuit) (SLC) Control Module:

a. The Loop Control Module shall monitor and control a minimum of 318 intelligent
addressable devices. This includes 159 intelligent detectors (Ionization, Photoelectric, or
Thermal) and 159 monitor or control modules.
b. The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of
operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable of
activating any or all addressable device outputs) in the unlikely event of a failure in the
main CPU.
c. The Loop Control Module shall provide power and communicate with all intelligent
addressable detectors and modules on a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be
capable of operating as a NFPA Style 6 (Class B) circuit.
d. The SLC interface board shall be able to drive an NFPA Style 6 twisted unshielded circuit
up to 12,500 feet in length. The SLC Interface shall also be capable of driving an NFPA
Style 6, no twist, no shield circuit for limited distances determined by the manufacturer.
In addition, SLC wiring shall meet the listing requirements for it to exit the building or
structure. “T”-tapping shall be allowed in either case.
e. The SLC interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all intelligent
detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or
trouble conditions exist for that particular device. Each SLC Loop shall be isolated and
equipped to annunciate an Earth Fault condition. The SLC interface board software shall
include software to automatically maintain the detector’s desires sensitivity level by
adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in

Section 28 31 11- 11
each detector. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing
and the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.
9. Enclosures:
a. The control panel shall be housed in a UL Listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-
flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-
resistant prime coat, and manufacturer’s standard finish.
b. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top.
c. The door shall provide a key lock and include a transparent opening for viewing all
indicators. For convenience, the door shall have the ability to be hinged on either the
right or left-hand side.
d. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and
future expansion.
10. Field Charging Power Supply (FCPS): The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a
remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances:
a. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It
shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to
support 60 hour standby. The FCPS shall not be loaded more than 80% of its rating.
b. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be
a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four
outputs (two Style Y or Z and two Style Y) shall be available for connection to the
Notification devices.
c. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox.
d. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per
NFPA requirements.
e. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL Standards.
f. Each FCPS, each battery charger and each battery shall be monitored by the FACP for
any malfunction.
11. System Circuit Supervision:

a. The FACP shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, transponders, annunciators
and peripheral equipment and annunciate loss of communication with these devices.
The CPU shall continuously scan above devices for proper system operation and upon
loss of response from a device shall sound an audible trouble, indicate which device or
devices are not responding and print the information in the history buffer and on the
printer.
b. Transponders that lose communication with the CPU shall sound an audible trouble and
light an LED indicating loss of communications.
c. Sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, PIV, and main gate valves shall be
supervised for off-normal position.
d. All speaker and emergency phone circuits shall be supervised for opens and shorts. Each
transponder speaker and emergency phone circuit shall have an individual ON/OFF
indication (green LED).

Section 28 31 11- 12
12. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: All wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type
and shall be capable of terminating up to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are
permanently fixed to the PC board are not acceptable.
13. Controls with Associated LED Indicators:

a. Speaker Switches/Indicators: The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall
include visual indication of active and trouble status for each speaker circuit in the
system. The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or
deactivate each speaker circuit in the system.
14. Remote Transmissions:

a. Furnish local energy or polarity reversal or trip circuits as required.
b. The system shall be capable of operating a polarity reversal or local energy or fire alarm
transmitter for automatically transmitting fire information to the fire department.
c. Furnish capability and equipment for transmission of zone alarm and trouble signals to
remote operator’s terminals, system printers and annunciators.
d. Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected
to such as timing, operation and other required features.
15. System Expansion: Design the main FACP and required components so that the system can
be expanded in the future (to include the addition of twenty (20) percent more circuits or
zones) without disruption or replacement of the existing control panel. This shall include
hardware capacity, software capacity and cabinet space.
16. Field Programming:

a. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without
the need for special tools, laptop computers, or other electronic interface equipment.
There shall be no firmware changes required to field modify the system time, point
information, equations, or annunciator programming/information.
b. It shall be possible to program through the standard FACP keyboard all system
functions.
c. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
d. Two levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet.
One level shall be used for status level changes such as point/zone disable or manual
on/off commands (Building Manager). A second (higher-level) shall be used for actual
change of the life safety program (installer). These passwords shall be five (5) digits at a
minimum. Upon entry of an invalid password for the third time within a one-minute
time period an encrypted number shall be displayed. This number can be used as a
reference for determining a forgotten password.
e. The system programming shall be “backed” up via an upload/download program and
stored on compatible removable media. A system back-up disk shall be completed and
given in duplicate to the University's Representative upon completion of the final
inspection. The program that performs this function shall be “non-proprietary”.
f. The installer’s field programming and hardware shall be functionally tested on a
computer against known parameters/norms which are established by the FACP
manufacturer. A software program shall test Input-to-Output correlations, device Type
ID associations, point associations, time equations, etc. This test shall be performed on

Section 28 31 11- 13
an IBM-compatible PC with a verification software package. A report shall be generated

of the test results and digital copy turned in to the University’s Representative.
17. Specific System Operations:

a. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity
of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the system keypad or
from the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL
window.
b. Alarm Verification: Each of the Intelligent Addressable Smoke Detectors in the system
may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm
verification function shall be programmable from 5 to 50 seconds and each detector
shall be able to be selected for verification during the field programming of the system,
or anytime after system turn-on. Alarm verification shall not require any additional
hardware to be added to the control panel. The FACP shall keep a count of the number
of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be
displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.
18. System Point Operations:

a. Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be enabled or disabled
through the system keypad or video terminal.
b. System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the system keypad
or the video terminal.
c. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic
functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated
for the parameters listed:
1) Device Status
2) Device Type
3) Custom Device Label
4) Software Zone Label
5) Device Zone Assignments
6) Analog Detector Sensitivity
7) All Program Parameters
d. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system a status report
shall be generated and printed, listing all system statuses.
e. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a
history buffer that shall be capable of storing up to 4000 system events. Each of these
events shall be stored, with time and date stamp, until an operator requests that the
contents be either displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may be
manually reviewed; one event at a time, and the actual number of activations may also
be displayed and or printed. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator
actions, and programming entries.
f. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems which use volatile memory
for history storage are not acceptable.
g. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically
interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses
over a period of time.
h. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above
normal limits, then the system shall enter the trouble mode, and the particular

Section 28 31 11- 14
Intelligent Detector shall be annunciated on the system display and printed on the
optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm
conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or
computer expertise to perform.
i. The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a “pre-alarm” condition.
This shall be used to alert maintenance personal when a detector is at 80% of its alarm
threshold in a 60 second period.
G. System Components:
1. Speakers:
a. All speakers shall operate on 25 VRMS or with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to
2.0 Watts.
b. Speakers in corridors and public spaces shall produce a nominal sound output of 84 dBA
at 10 feet (3m).
c. Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.
d. The back of each speaker shall be sealed to protect the speaker cone from damage and
dust.
2. Audible/Visual Combination Devices:

a. Shall meet the applicable requirements listed above for audibility.
b. Shall meet the requirements listed above for visibility.
3. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully
synchronized, and shall meet the following criteria:
a. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second.
b. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
c. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
4. Waterflow Indicator:
a. Waterflow switches shall be an integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative
retard type.
b. Waterflow switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time which is conveniently
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds.
c. All waterflow switches shall come from a single manufacturer and series.
d. Waterflow switches shall be furnished and connected under this section but installed by
the mechanical Contractor.
e. Where possible, locate waterflow switches a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting
which changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.
5. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator:

a. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back-lit
LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in
clear English text.
b. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system.
c. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display.
d. The display shall be UL Listed for fire alarm application.

Section 28 31 11- 15
e. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances

up to 6,000 feet from the control panel.
f. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated “terminal mode” E1A-485
interface. This is a two-wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000
feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel.
g. The system shall allow a minimum of 32 terminal mode LCD annunciators. Up to 10 LCD
annunciators shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal
Silence and Reset, which shall be protected from unauthorized use by a keyswitch or
password.
h. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide
each of the features listed above.
H. System Components – Addressable Devices
1. Addressable Devices – General:

a. Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal
switches.
b. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 0 to 9)
type address switches. Devices which use a binary address or special tools for setting
the device address, such as a dip switch are not an allowable substitute.
c. Detectors shall be analog and addressable and shall connect to the fire alarm control
panel’s Signaling Line Circuits.
d. Addressable smoke (photo-electric type) and thermal detectors shall provide dual (2)
status LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector
is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall
be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm
condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector
LEDs can be programmed off via the fire control panel program.
e. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field
programming of the system. Sensitivity can be automatically adjusted by the panel on a
time-of-day basis.
f. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.
The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test
requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
g. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base which
includes a tamper proof feature.
h. The following bases and auxiliary functions shall be available and furnished:
1) Sounder base rated at 85 dBA minimum
2) Form-C Relay base rated 30 VDC, 2.0A
3) Isolator base
i. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they shall simulate an alarm condition
and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the
detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from
the control panel.
j. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall
use to identify the type of device (example: PHOTO, THERMAL).

Section 28 31 11- 16
2. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (Manual Station):

a. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send
data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable
communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock and shall be
designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal
use except by the use of a key.
b. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key
type reset.
c. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of die-cast construction with clearly visible
operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of
the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.
3. Intelligent Thermal Detectors:

a. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees
Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F
(9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel
signaling line circuit.
4. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector:

a. The smoke detector housing, with sampling tubes, shall accommodate an intelligent
photoelectric detector, that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm
verification from the panel.
b. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and
appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid
distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct
system.
5. Addressable Control Module:

a. Addressable control modules shall be furnished to supervise and control the operation
of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual
notification appliances.
b. The control module NAC may be wires for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp
of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation.
c. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the
main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL Listed remote power supply.
d. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum
of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
6. Addressable Relay Module:

a. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other building
functions. The relay shall be form C and rated for a minimum of 2.0 Amps resistive or 1.0
Amps inductive. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to ensure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized
at the same time on the same pair of wires.
I. Initiating Circuits:

Section 28 31 11- 17
1. Analog addressable/programmable initiating circuits shall be provided by an Addressable

Input Module. The module shall be operable by the control unit.
2. Upon activation of any addressable/programmable device installed in the circuit, the system
shall automatically report the status of the device and initiate the sequence of operations
specified for that device, e.g., alarm, local, general, reporting, trouble reporting only, etc.
Alarm shall have priority over trouble. Trouble conditions shall be reported to include the
device number, location and type of trouble.
3. All initiating devices on all circuits may be in alarm at the same time and perform the
sequences of operation prescribed by the system configuration.
4. The initiating circuits shall maintain complete reporting of device status while in trouble,
due to any addressable device having its active transmitting component fail, open or
shorted. The initiating circuits shall detect a line break and supply information to the
control panel allowing the user to determine between which two devices the break has
occurred.
J. Output Circuit:
1. Provide a 24VDC 100MA supervised battery backed-up power source from the building Fire
Alarm Control Panel (FACP) for use in the central system interface connected to the Campus
XY band-wired loop. Extend the power source to the central interface enclosure using 16
AWG THHN wire within 3/4" conduit. Furnish a minimum of 2’ of excess wire within
interface enclosure and safety off end using wire nuts and electrical tape (per Section 26 05
19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES). Note: Wire colors to
be red and black + 24 V= red wire, DCC= black wire.
2. The requirements for the central system interface are as follows:

a. Connection to the Campus XA loop shall be made via the existing FACP central system
interface.
3. Building Alarm and Trouble Signaling Relays:

a. Provide 5 relays in the building FACP to be used as the interface means to the central
system. These relays shall be CSFM listed for fire alarm system signaling service and
function in the following manner:
1) Relay No. 1: Manual Alarm
a) Energize the relay coil and close its respective contacts upon activation of any
manual fire alarm within the building.
2) Relay No. 2: Automatic Alarm
a) Energize the relay coil and close its respective contacts upon activation of any
automatic fire alarm device within the building (i.e. smoke detectors, duct
smoke detectors, heat detectors, etc.).
b) De-energize the relay coil and open its respective contacts after panel reset.
c) Relay No. 3: Waterflow Alarm
d) Energize the relay coil and close its respective contacts upon activation of any
waterflow alarm within the building.
e) De-energize the relay coil and open its respective contacts after panel reset.

Section 28 31 11- 18
3) Relay No. 4: Common Trouble

a) Change the state of relay and close its respective contacts upon activation of
any trouble or supervisory alarm within the building.
b) Restore relay state to open its respective contacts upon either condition 1) or
2), or both:
c) Panel reset.
d) Restoration of trouble or supervisory alarm, "Auto Restore".
4) Relay No. 5: Subsequent Trouble
a) De-energize the relay coil and close its respective contacts upon activation of
any "unacknowledged" trouble or supervisory alarm within the building.
b) Energize the relay coil and open its respective contacts upon condition 1) or 2)
or both:
c) Acknowledgement of trouble activation.
d) Restoration of trouble or supervisory alarm, "Auto restore".
K. Relay Module
1. Programmable supplementary relay module(s) as required shall be furnished for control of

door holders, elevator recall and remote reporting as required.
2. Each relay module shall be independently operable by the control unit or manually.
3. The module shall contain four independent relays, fitted with form "C" contacts, rated at
120 VAC 5 amps inductive, or as required. The module shall be UL and CSFM listed.
L. General – Door Holders & Devices:
1. Remote alarm indicators shall be furnished with all duct detectors, and any other detectors
installed where not visible.
2. Manual pull stations, non-coded and single action, rugged die-cast construction designed for
semi-flush mounting.
3. Flow Switch: UL listed vane type waterflow detector with adjustable retard and automatic
recycle, on each new floor zone. CSFM listed.
4. Alarm: Provide necessary flow switches at locations shown on the Drawings, or as

otherwise required, and furnish contacts at all shut-off valves for supervision.
5. Valve Monitor Switches (Tamper Switch): Each indicating valve shall be furnished with two
(2) UL listed, single pole, double throw microswitches designed to monitor position of the
zone valve. CSFM listed
M. HVAC System Control
1. Contractor shall provide all duct detectors as required per applicable codes for smoke
detection, alarm, and HVAC equipment control. Furnish all necessary wire, conduit, and
relays necessary for interconnection of detectors, Fire Alarm Control Panel, and HVAC
equipment and controls.

Section 28 31 11- 19
2. The duct smoke detector shall shut down its corresponding HVAC equipment and shall not
restart until the smoke is cleared and the detector is reset at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Refer to the approved shop drawings for complete Sequence of Operations of the duct
smoke detectors.
3. Contractor shall furnish the services of an Air Balance Agency who is a member of either the
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(NEBB) and is familiar with fire alarm technology.
a. Air Balance Agency shall measure the air velocity and static pressure at each duct
detector location shown on the drawings. If the air velocity and static pressure at the
locations shown do not meet the criteria for proper functioning of any of the duct air
detectors, the Air Balance Agency shall test alternate locations at no extra cost to
University until appropriate locations are identified.
b. Upon conclusion of the air measurements, the Air Balance Agency shall furnish a written
report clearly indicating the results of its measurements, and recommendations for
relocation of duct detectors if necessary. Upon approval of the air balance report by
University's Representative, Contractor shall install the duct detectors in the exact
locations specified by the Air Balance Agency.
c. Selection of the Air Balance Agency shall be subject to the approval of University's
Representative. Services of the Air Balance Agency shall be included in the Contractor's
base bid. No extra compensation shall be paid by the University for its services.
N. Audio-Visual Alarm System
1. Audio-Visual Alarm shall have a high intensity flashing light and an alarm speaker as an
integral unit and shall function as a unit and shall meet ADA, and the 2001 CBC (California
Building Code). The Audio/Visual Alarm speaker shall be UL1971 listed for indoor fire
protection service. Components shall operate from 24VDC polarized indicating circuits. Each
indicating circuit shall be equipped with a synchronizing control module which shall
synchronize all of the speakers in the NFPA/ANSI specified temporal pattern. Additionally,
all strobes shall flash in synchronization. The strobes shall flash at the rate of not less than
one flash per second over the UL rated voltage range. Upon activation of the audible silence
function at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, the speakers shall be silenced while maintaining
strobe operation. Devices located on roof, loading dock, and outdoors shall be
weatherproof vandal resistant type.
2. The strobe shall incorporate a xenon flashtube enclosed in a Lexan lens. The word FIRE shall
appear on 2 sides of the housing. The lamp intensity and spacing of devices shall be
determined by the size of the protected space as specified in NFPA 72.
3. Sound output at ten (10) feet shall be selectable for 90, 95, or 99dBA. The devices shall be
polarized for DC supervision and shall incorporate lugs for in/out field wiring of #18 to #12
AWG wire. The audio/visual alarm device shall incorporate a universal mounting plate
which shall allow mounting to single gang, double gang, 4" square, or 2 gang Wiremold
backboxes. The entire backbox depth shall be available for the installation wiring. There
shall be no electronics protruding into the backbox. No additional trim plate shall be
required for semi flush mounting.

Section 28 31 11- 20
4. Visual alarm signals (strobe lights) shall be furnished in all common-use areas, including, but
not limited to, toilet facilities, occupied rooms where ambient noise impairs hearing of the
fire alarm, corridors, hallways and lobbies, enclosed stairways, and accessible sleeping
rooms. Contractor’s design-build documents shall indicate the candela intensity of each
strobe light on the floor plans. Strobe light unit shall be multi-candela type.
2.4 GENERAL
A. Ground fault detection shall be furnished for all initiating device, notification appliance and
signaling line circuits. Each battery, power supply, amplifier shall be supervised.
B. The system trouble lamp shall flash, and an integral trouble buzzer shall sound upon the
occurrence of any trouble condition. Acknowledgement of the trouble condition by operation
of the silence switch shall silence the audible alarm and cause the trouble lamp to light
steadily. Receipt of subsequent troubles shall cause the trouble buzzer to resound and the
trouble lamp to flash.
C. Individual input and output device addressability as well as remote sensitivity measurement,
where available, shall all be performed on the same set of wires.
D. The service mode shall permit the arming and disarming of individual detection or output
devices as well as manually operating output devices.
E. Individual device or zone groups shall be programmed via function switches to disable
selected output functions when activated. Output disable functions shall include but not be
limited to:
1. Fan control/shutdown, including gas fired units
2. Audible/visual alarms
F. New unacknowledged alarms and troubles shall be distinctively displayed on both the visual
display and the printer (when connected) and differentiated from previous alarms and
troubles.
G. Software Modifications: Furnish the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to
perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Field technicians shall be
NICET Level 1 (minimum) certified. The factory trained technician shall install initial data and
artwork at each interactive firefighters’ display. The factory trained technician shall design the
graphic layout based on area diagrams and floor plans.
H. System shall provide suppression against shorts, opens, and grounds in all wiring and
components at the main fire alarm control panel.
I. The control panel, data gathering panel, or equivalent, shall be capable of providing the
following information to an external printer (when connected):
1. Alarm with time, date, and location.

Section 28 31 11- 21
2. Trouble with time, date, and location.
3. Status of output functions, "on" or "off."
4. Sensitivity of addressable smoke detectors.
5. Detection device number, type, and location.
6. Status of remote relays, "on" or "off."
7. Acknowledgement time and date.
8. Signal silence time and date.
9. Reset time and date.
J. The system shall be capable of:
1. Differentiating among types of addressable detectors such as smoke detectors, manual

stations, water-flow switches and thermal detectors.
2. Assigning priorities to types of detectors, zones or groups of detectors.
3. Cross-zoning.
K. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of system initiation patterns of detection
devices.
L. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of time of day, day of week, and with a holiday
schedule of up to thirty (30) holidays per year. Each addressable detection device shall report
its condition to the system control unit every four seconds in a manner such that failure of the
connections to or internal electronics of the device shall result in a trouble signal which
identifies the specific device involved.
M. It shall be possible to change the detector sensitivity from the control panel, data gathering
panel, or equivalent, within maximum and minimum values as defined by the UL listing of the
detectors.
N. The system shall be capable of listing detector chamber voltage or sensitivity settings on an
external printer for permanent record.
O. Water flow switches, tamper switches, OS & Y valves, manual stations, and the thermal
detectors shall be equipped with an electronic address device which shall be supervised
identically as addressable detectors.
P. The supervised and powered parallel output circuits shall be listed for use as audible/visual
signal circuits, fire extinguishing release circuits, or general alarm release service. They shall
provide 24 VDC, with amperage adequate for the service required.

Section 28 31 11- 22
Q. Control relays having dry contacts rated and listed for their intended use shall be included in
the fire alarm control unit.
R. Remote relays located on detector bases or double gang outlets throughout the building shall
be controlled in the same manner as panel mounted relays.
S. The control panel enclosure shall be manufacturer's standard color, manufactured for surface
or semiflush mounting. A locked door shall be furnished to limit access to individuals
authorized access to the panel.
T. All modules shall be plug-in, dynamically supervised and easily replaceable. Field wiring shall
be connected to the panel with removable multi-conductor connectors to facilitate rapid
removal and replacement of both the module and wiring for ease of servicing the panel.
U. Visual indicators shall be long life LEDs. Modules capable of initiating a system trouble shall
display individual trouble indications on the alpha-numeric annunciator.
2.5 CONDUITS & WIRING
A. Rigid steel conduits shall be furnished for all main runs, risers, exposed locations and locations
otherwise subject to damage.
B. EMT may be installed for branch circuit runs where concealed and not subject to damage.
Coordinate routing of branch circuit conduit to be within new furring on walls and ceilings.
C. Liquidtight flexible steel conduits shall be furnished for connection to sprinkler waterflow and
tamper switches.
D. All conduits shall be concealed, except when located in rooms for mechanical, plumbing,
electrical, and elevator machine rooms. Exposed conduit shall be rigid steel.
E. Paint each conduit with 2” wide band of red paint at ten feet spacing.
F. All circuits shall be furnished with transient suppression devices and the system shall be
designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of
signals.
G. Conduit shall not enter the control equipment, or any other remotely mounted control panel
equipment or back-boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
H. All system wiring shall be new.
I. Wiring and fiber optics shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g. CEC
Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and
size of conductors and fiber optics shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system
manufacturer.

Section 28 31 11- 23
J. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a
protective signaling system except as specified herein.
K. All communication wire to nodes or to computers shall consist of minimum manufacturer’s

recommendations and approved wire specification supporting 312,500bps communications.
2.6 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be solid or stranded, based on applicable codes, manufacturer's

recommendations, and standard good wiring practice. Conductors for Signaling Line Circuits
and Initiating Device Circuits shall be shielded, minimum size AWG #18. Conductors for
Notification Appliance Circuits shall be non-shielded sized as required to meet all design
criteria. All conductors shall be insulated for 300 volts minimum. All fire alarm circuits wiring
shall be sized so that voltage drop is less than 10%.
B. The following procedures shall be observed in installation:
1. Avoid all unnecessary splices.
2. Avoid terminating solid wire on circuit boards where flexing of such terminations could lead
to breakage or damaging of the circuit board.
3. Wiring in boxes, cabinets and fire alarm devices of all types shall be arranged so that closure
of covers shall not unnecessarily compress the wiring and terminations contained therein.
2.7 BUILDING MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials and furnish labor to patch new work as specified in their respective
Specification Sections.
2.8 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A. Furnish new materials and furnish labor as specified in their respective Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers’
recommendations, shop drawings, and product data. Consult the manufacturer’s installation
manuals for all wiring and fiber optic diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc.
before beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturer’s riser/connection diagram
for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.

Section 28 31 11- 24
B. Provide all wiring in conduits. All wire shall be identified with Cloth Type "E-Z Marker".
Terminate all wiring including cable drain wires as indicated in Operation, Installation and
Maintenance Manuals (latest edition) for Fire Alarm Company whose equipment is being
installed. Provide the following for Shielded Cables:
1. Shielded cables shall have clear Teflon sleeving installed on the shield drain wire
wherever the jacket has been removed. At the junction of sleeving and cable jacket,
electrical tape (per Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES) shall be applied to ensure the shield is bare only at the point of
termination.
2. End of string shield drain wires shall be removed and electrical tape applied to prevent
them from being grounded.
3. Spare initiating device and signaling line system conductors shall be connected and
terminated in the same manner as their respective shield drain wires, with the
exception that they shall not be connected to any system device other than the point of
origin as shall the main shield drain.
4. Cable shield drains shall be connected at their point of origin and at devices as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
C. Separate initiating circuits from all other wiring in enclosures and in the terminal cabinets.
D. Wire and cable identification shall be consistent and maintained throughout the entire system
for the following types of circuits:
1. Initiating device/signaling line circuits.
2. Notification appliance circuits (speakers, strobes, etc.).
3. Control wiring and miscellaneous circuits.
4. System interface circuits (data gathering panels, printers, annunciators, etc.).
1. Associated Loop and/or Circuit Numbers Shall be Identified for the Following Type of
Circuits:
2. Initiating device/signaling line circuits.
3. Notification appliance circuits.
4. System interface circuits.
In addition, the Contractor shall identify all wires as indicated by the following
identification schedule. The identification shall be by NEMA colored "E-Z" wire markers
applied to the cable jacket or separate NEMA colored wires as indicated.
Circuit Cable Loop
Types Jacket Separate Conductors ID
Initiating Red N/A Yes
Visuals Yellow Yellow(+) Violet(DDC) Yes
Speaker Orange Orange(+) Dark Blue(DDC) Yes
Voice Tan Tan(+) Light Blue(COM) Yes
Fireman's Phone Brown N/A No
Control, Misc. Sys. Gray Gray, Red, Black, White No
Interface Pink N/A See Note 1
Note 1: Network type circuits shall be tagged using a vinyl tag attached to the cable or
group of wires indicating the circuit type and number when applicable.

Section 28 31 11- 25
E. Provide permanent identification labels on each detector and detector base, such that each
detector shall have an identification number matched to that of its base. In the event any
detector is removed from its base after initial installation, it shall be reinstalled on its
identically labeled base.
F. Labels shall contain 3/8" lettering, black letters on white background and shall be of high
quality. Their placement on individual detectors and bases shall be done with care so they are
mounted parallel to the ceiling (not skewed), all in the same orientation, and are clearly
legible from the floor. Labels for detectors, detector buses, and other equipment where
required shall be produced by the Kroy 1000 System, Dymo 6000 System, or equal. All labels
shall have a laminated finish.
G. Submit proposed labeling and mounting scheme to University's Representative for approval
prior to producing or attaching labels.
H. Field paint all fire alarm boxes red on exterior. Paint and label conduits and raceways as
indicated in Section 26 05 33, raceways and boxes for electrical systems.
I. Access: All fire alarm and electrical equipment shall be accessible as defined in CEC. Access
panels shall be furnished as necessary for equipment which would otherwise be considered
inaccessible.
J. Contractor shall ensure that mechanical equipment, piping, etc. are not installed in a manner
so as to render fire alarm or electrical equipment inaccessible. Such installations, if made,
shall be corrected as approved by University's Representative.
K. Fire alarm devices and boxes installed on walls or columns, etc., in parking structures, and
outdoors, shall be weatherproof installation, rated to withstand hosing down without water
entry. This requirement applies to manual stations, audio visual devices, annunciator panels,
and all other fire alarm boxes or equipment.
L. Flow and tamper switches in external stairwells, and outdoors, shall be installed
weatherproof. All conduit used for their installation shall be weatherproof plastic-coated flex.
M. Contractor shall review the fire alarm installation plans prior to installing any of the above
devices or equipment. Any installation required to be weatherproof which is made without
conforming to the above shall be corrected at Contractor's expense.
3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS
A. Audible and certain other tests shall be performed outside normal working hours, as defined
in Section 01 14 00, WORK RESTRICTIONS, at the discretion of University's Representative. No
extra compensation shall be paid for this work.
B. In addition to tests required in this Section, perform all electrical and mechanical tests
required by the equipment manufacturer. In addition, via the printer terminal, furnish a
printout of the analog chamber voltage readings of each addressable ionization or
photoelectric detector connected to the control panel. The analog chamber voltage readings
shall be for each detector at its operational location under environmental conditions. Where

Section 28 31 11- 26
no permanently installed printer exists, a printer shall be furnished by the Contractor for the
testing of the printout described above.
C. Testing Prior to Final Witness Testing:

1. Contractor shall perform an initial pretest with the certified technician of the system
manufacturer to confirm the correct annunciation of each device, correct programming
of the fire alarm control panel, and the correct operation of the fire alarm control panel,
and the correct operation of the audio-visual system, and correct operation of all other
functions. All problems shall be corrected and cleared. Contractor to submit certificate
to University’s Representative that system is fully operational and 100% of all devices
have been tested with all defects corrected, and ready for pretest with University’s
Campus Inspector.
2. Contractor shall pre-test the fire alarm system in the presence of University's
Representative and University's Campus Inspector. All problems on the system shall be
cleared prior to calling for witness testing by University's Representative and UCLA
Campus Fire Marshal.
3. Contractor shall furnish all personnel, meters and other necessary test equipment. All
testing shall be done under the supervision of a factory-trained fire alarm engineer or
technician authorized by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer to supervise the
testing and to direct the Contractor in any equipment adjustments necessary.
4. The Tests Shall Include, But Not be Limited to, the Following:
a. Before energizing the fire alarm wiring, check for correct connections and test for
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and integrity of insulation.
b. Close each sprinkler system control valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at
the FACP.
c. Verify activation of all flow switches.
d. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
e. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
f. Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal
actuates.
g. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
h. Check presence and audibility of all alarm notification devices.
i. If non-addressable detectors are used in the system, they shall be measured and
adjusted to the maximum stable setting. This shall be performed with the
detector at its operational location and under normal environmental conditions in
the area. Bench settings are not acceptable.
j. Introduce each alarm condition that the system is supposed to detect. Verify
proper receipt and processing of the signal at the FACP, and correct activation of
the control points.
k. Perform testing procedures for all optional features on the system including
verification, and operation of controls which are to be actuated by individual
addressable or grouped devices, etc.
D. Final Witness Testing:

1. Contractor shall furnish the University's Representative 72 hour written notice prior to
requesting testing specified in this Section.

Section 28 31 11- 27
2. Contractor shall bring the following to the final test (Items a. and b. shall have been
corrected to show the latest information):
a. Two (2) complete sets of fire alarm drawings, corrected to show accurate
locations of all fire alarm equipment.
b. Three (3) complete printouts of the fire alarm system, showing all devices
identified as per University’s Representative's requirements.
c. Four (4) fully charged two-way battery-powered radios ("walkie-talkies").
d. All testing shall be done under the supervision of a factory trained Fire Alarm
Engineer or Technician authorized by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer to
supervise the testing and to direct the Contractor in any equipment adjustments
necessary and demonstrate that the system functions correctly in every respect.
3. All information and test results shall be turned over to the University's Representative:
a. Test each initiating device (manual stations, area smoke detectors, elevator
smoke detectors, duct detectors, flow and tamper switches).
b. Test the audio system for acceptable sound level, and the visual system for
adequate intensity, correct pulse rate, and duration.
c. Verify correct style operation of all circuits.
d. Verify supervisory device reporting.
e. Verify operation of system in standby condition.
f. Test each duct detector under correct air pressure condition (verify that
differential pressure is adequate to actuate detector). All duct detectors shall be
tested by an approved air balancing agency, according to the requirements in
NFPA 72E, Section 8-3.4. A certified report signed by the testing technician on
company stationery shall be submitted for approval to the University's
Representative upon completion of duct detector tests. Tests shall indicate
required and tested values for differential pressure, air velocity, as well as any
other manufacturers' requirements. for all duct detectors installed in the system.
g. Test mechanical system control.
h. Test for correct output for connection to Campus Central Reporting System.
4. Upon completion of testing, furnish written report to the UCLA Campus Fire Marshal
showing results of all tests. Additional tests shall be performed as required by the UCLA
Campus Fire Marshal. Upon authorization by UCLA Campus Fire Marshal, system may
be energized.
E. Prepare a checkout report. Submit digital copy to University's Representative and digital copy
to the equipment manufacturer. The report shall include as a minimum:
1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired.
2. Certify that all equipment is correctly installed and functions and conforms with these
Specifications.
3. A print-out via the printer terminal of all devices connected to the system.
4. Chamber voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as
measured in place with the HVAC system operating.
5. Technician's name, certificate number and date.
6. Furnish a type written sequence of operation for each function, and also for the
audio/paging systems.

Section 28 31 11- 28
F. After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, and review and approval by
University's Representative of data and test report, submit the following information to
University's Representative:
1. “As-built” conduit layout diagrams including wire color code terminal number.
2. Complete “as-built” wiring diagrams.
3. System Line Diagrams for:
a. Air handlers with duct detectors showing areas served, detector locations, and
system addresses.
4. Fire sprinkler system with flow and tamper switch locations and system addresses
5. Detailed catalog data on all installed systems components, digital copy.
6. A final copy of the test and checkout reports described in Paragraphs 3.2.C and
3.2.D above, digital copy.
G. The fire alarm system shall be complete and operational, having undergone University's
preliminary inspection, prior to completion and acceptance of the Project. The fire alarm
system shall be required to perform trouble-free for a period of thirty-five (35) days prior to
acceptance by University's Representative. The 35-day test period shall be re-started as many
times as necessary as requested by the UCLA Campus Fire Marshal and approved by
University's Representative. No extra compensation shall be given to Contractor due to the
need to fulfill this requirement. Contractor shall be held liable for payment of liquidated
damages for the period beyond the scheduled completion date that may be necessary for
trouble-free functioning of the fire alarm system as described above.
H. If the system does not perform to the above criteria it shall not be accepted and Contractor
shall correct all deficiencies and shall re-test the system at Contractor's expense in the
presence of University's Representative using the same test criteria.
I. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Before final acceptance of the work, deliver to
University's Representative digital copy of a composite "Operating and Shop Maintenance
Manual". The manual shall include the following:
1. A statement of guarantee including date of termination.
2. Name and 24-hour telephone number of the repair facility to call in the event of
equipment failure.
3. Individual factory issued manuals containing all technical information on each specific
piece of equipment installed ("typical" data sheets on manuals covering various items
are not acceptable).
4. Copy of the system program and sequence of operations. System program shall identify
device locations according to University's assigned room numbers. Copy of system
program shall be furnished on computer disk.
5. Record drawings of the system installation, including electronic drawings (version as
approved by the University’s Representative).
J. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to obtain the above items from factory, or
elsewhere. Advertising brochures or operational instructions shall not be used in lieu of the
required technical manuals. All information shall be for the specific installation for the current
project.

Section 28 31 11- 29
3.3 BUILDING MATERIALS INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform to approved shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation details.
B. Installation shall conform to approved submittals and as specified in this Section.
3.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform to approved shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation details.
B. Installation shall be per approved submittals and as specified in this Section.
C. All conduits shall be concealed, except in electrical and mechanical rooms, and in unfinished
spaces with exposed construction.
3.5 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish one-year testing and maintenance, which shall include the following:
1. Examine and test all fire alarm system devices and equipment in accordance with the
methods and schedules shown in NFPA 72.
2. Furnish written reports on NFPA forms (Table 7-5.1) or some other form acceptable to
University's Representative certifying that devices have been tested and indicating the
results of all tests and inspections.
3. Contractor shall furnish a schedule for the test and inspection program 2 weeks prior to
job close-out and shall furnish seven (7) days’ notice to UCLA Facilities Management Fire
Alarm Maintenance group prior to coming out to do the work.
B. Contractor shall offer a test and maintenance agreement to commence after expiration of test
and maintenance included in this Contract. Test and maintenance agreement shall be in
conformance with applicable sections of NFPA-72.
END OF SECTION

Section 28 31 11- 30

LIST OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NO. TITLE SHEET DATE

G0.01 COVER SHEET 12/3/2019
G1.10 BUILDING PERMIT 12/3/2019
G1.20 CAL GREEN 12/3/2019
G1.30 ARCHITECTURAL ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS 12/3/2019
LS1.11 ACCESSIBILITY DIAGRAM - PUBLIC TRANSIT 12/3/2019
LS1.12 ACCESSIBILITY DIAGRAM - PARKING LOT 12/3/2019
LS2.11 FIRE / LIFE SAFETY DIAGRAM - ADMIN 12/3/2019
LS2.12 FIRE / LIFE SAFETY DIAGRAM - CLINIC 12/3/2019
AD2.11 DEMOLITION PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
AD2.12 DEMOLITION PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
AD3.11 DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -ADMIN 12/3/2019
AD3.12 DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
A2.11 FLOOR & FURNITURE PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
A2.12 FLOOR PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
A2.13 FURNITURE PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
A3.11 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
A3.12 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
A4.00 DOOR SCHEDULE / TYPES & FINISH LIST 12/3/2019
A5.01 INTERIOR SECTIONS 12/3/2019
A7.01 TYP. MOUNTING HEIGHTS & ALIGNMENTS, SIGNAGE 12/3/2019
A7.20 ENLARGED PLANS / INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12/3/2019
A7.21 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12/3/2019
A9.00 WALL TYPES & GENERAL WALL DETAILS 12/3/2019
A9.10 INTERIOR DETAILS - WINDOWS, DOORS & MISC. 12/3/2019
A9.40 GENERAL CEILING DETAILS 12/3/2019
A9.41 ACOUSTIC PANEL & GYPSUM BOARD CEILING DETAILS 12/3/2019
A9.50 CASEWORK DETAILS 12/3/2019
M1.00 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS 12/3/2019
M1.01 CALIFORNIA GREEN CODE & SPECIFICATIONS 12/3/2019
M2.00 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 12/3/2019
MD2.11 MECHANICAL DEMO FLOOR PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
M2.11 MECHANICAL REMODEL FLOOR PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
MD2.12 MECHANICAL DEMO FLOOR PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
M2.12 MECHANICAL REMODEL FLOOR PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
M5.00 MECHANICAL DETAILS 12/3/2019
M6.00 MECHANICAL TITLE-24 FORMS 12/3/2019
M6.01 MECHANICAL TITLE-24 FORMS 12/3/2019
P1.00 PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND SCHEDULES 12/3/2019
P1.10 PLUMBING SCHEDULES 12/3/2019
P1.20 PLUMBING GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 12/3/2019
P2.11 PLUMBING PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
P2.12 PLUMBING PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
P6.01 PLUMBING DETAILS 12/3/2019
E1.00 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS AND LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 12/3/2019
E1.11 EXISTING SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 12/3/2019
E1.12 PANEL SCHEDULES 12/3/2019
E1.13 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 12/3/2019
ED2.11 DEMOLITION POWER PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
ED2.12 DEMOLITION POWER PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
ED3.11 DEMOLITION LIGHTING PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
ED3.12 DEMOLITION LIGHTING PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
E2.11 NEW POWER PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
E2.12 NEW POWER PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
E3.11 NEW LIGHTING PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
E3.12 NEW LIGHTING PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
E4.11 NORMAL AND EMERGENCY PHOTOMETRIC PLAN - ADMIN 12/3/2019
E4.12 NORMAL PHOTOMETRIC PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
E4.13 EMERGENCY PHOTOMETRIC PLAN - CLINIC 12/3/2019
E5.01 TITLE 24 FORMS 12/3/2019
E5.02 TITLE 24 FORMS 12/3/2019
E5.03 TITLE 24 FORMS 12/3/2019
E5.04 TITLE 24 FORMS 12/3/2019
LF/SF REV 1:09/15/03 List of Drawings - 1


SHEET NO. TITLE SHEET DATE
E5.05 LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS 12/3/2019
E5.06 LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS 12/3/2019
E6.01 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 12/3/2019
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
LF/SF REV 1:09/15/03 List of Drawings - 2

SpecBook 944129-01 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SpecBook 944129-01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION

University of California, Los Angeles Project No. 944129.01

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION

ARCHITECTURAL BIDDING DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY:

MOORE, RUBLE, YUDELL ARCHITECTS

June 05, 2020

LF CERT REV 3.1:01/02/96 Certification Page - 1

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING BIDDING DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY:

MEP CALIFORNIA ENGINEERING CORP.

LF CERT REV 3.1:01/02/96 Certification Page - 1

LF TOC 06/04/13 Table of Contents - 1

CHS 14-215 CENTER FOR EMPLOYEE HEALTH RENOVATION

The estimated construction cost is $1,383,000.00.

BID DEADLINE: Bids will be received only at the following location:

and must be received at or before:

2:00 p.m. September 29, 2020

NOTE: PLEASE BE ADVISED THAT THE UCLA CONTRACTS ADMINISTRATION OFFICE IS

Joint by telephone by dialing on of the numbers below:

B License (General Building)

3:00 p.m. September 8, 2020

THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

LF: AFB 160404 Advertisement for Bids - 3

LF CM 09/02/11 Campus Map - 1

Project Number 944129.01

Location University of California, Los Angeles

University The Regents of the University of California

University Representative Michael McGinnis

All bidding inquiries shall be directed Michael McGinnis

Design Professional (Architectural): Moore, Ruble, Yudell Architects

Design Professional MEP California Engineering Corp

Mail to: UCLA Capital Programs Project Accounting

Address for Demand for Arbitration: Western Case Management Center

A copy of the Demand for Arbitration University of California

LF PD 160401 Project Directory - 1

ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

ARTICLE 4 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE

ARTICLE 5 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

ARTICLE 6 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

ARTICLE 7 - BID PROTEST

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 1

2.1 Bidder, by making a Bid, represents that:

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 2

3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

3.3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 3

3.6 BUILDER'S RISK PROPERTY INSURANCE

5.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS

5.2 BID SECURITY

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 4

5.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

5.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID

6.1 OPENING OF BIDS

6.2 REJECTION OF BIDS

6.2.1 University will have the right to reject all Bids.

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 5

See Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

7.1 FILING A BID PROTEST

LF ITB 170322 Instructions to Bidders - 6

7.2 RESOLUTION OF BID CONTROVERSY

Chair, Construction Review Board

Principal: _ Surety: ___

By: By:

Title: _ Title: _

THIS COMPLETED FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED IN ADVANCE OF THE BID